chore(release): v3.0.0-beta.77 [skip ci]

Removes unused drizzle snapshot

.eslintignore

@@ -1,13 +0,0 @@
-.tmp
-**/.git
-**/.hg
-**/.pnp.*
-**/.svn
-**/.yarn/**
-**/build
-**/dist/**
-**/node_modules
-**/temp
-playwright.config.ts
-jest.config.js
-test/live-preview/next-app

.eslintrc.cjs

@@ -1,64 +0,0 @@
-/** @type {import('eslint').Linter.Config} */
-module.exports = {
-  extends: ['@payloadcms'],
-  ignorePatterns: ['README.md', 'packages/**/*.spec.ts'],
-  overrides: [
-    {
-      files: ['packages/**'],
-      plugins: ['payload'],
-      rules: {
-        'payload/no-jsx-import-statements': 'warn',
-      },
-    },
-    {
-      files: ['scripts/**'],
-      rules: {
-        '@typescript-eslint/no-unused-vars': 'off',
-        'no-console': 'off',
-        'perfectionist/sort-object-types': 'off',
-        'perfectionist/sort-objects': 'off',
-      },
-    },
-    {
-      extends: ['plugin:@typescript-eslint/disable-type-checked'],
-      files: ['*.js', '*.cjs', '*.json', '*.md', '*.yml', '*.yaml'],
-    },
-    {
-      files: ['packages/eslint-config-payload/**'],
-      rules: {
-        'perfectionist/sort-objects': 'off',
-      },
-    },
-    {
-      files: ['package.json', 'tsconfig.json'],
-      rules: {
-        'perfectionist/sort-array-includes': 'off',
-        'perfectionist/sort-astro-attributes': 'off',
-        'perfectionist/sort-classes': 'off',
-        'perfectionist/sort-enums': 'off',
-        'perfectionist/sort-exports': 'off',
-        'perfectionist/sort-imports': 'off',
-        'perfectionist/sort-interfaces': 'off',
-        'perfectionist/sort-jsx-props': 'off',
-        'perfectionist/sort-keys': 'off',
-        'perfectionist/sort-maps': 'off',
-        'perfectionist/sort-named-exports': 'off',
-        'perfectionist/sort-named-imports': 'off',
-        'perfectionist/sort-object-types': 'off',
-        'perfectionist/sort-objects': 'off',
-        'perfectionist/sort-svelte-attributes': 'off',
-        'perfectionist/sort-union-types': 'off',
-        'perfectionist/sort-vue-attributes': 'off',
-      },
-    },
-  ],
-  parserOptions: {
-    project: ['./tsconfig.json'],
-    tsconfigRootDir: __dirname,
-    EXPERIMENTAL_useSourceOfProjectReferenceRedirect: true,
-    EXPERIMENTAL_useProjectService: true,
-    sourceType: 'module',
-    ecmaVersion: 'latest',
-  },
-  root: true,
-}

.git-blame-ignore-revs

@@ -19,3 +19,6 @@ fb7d1be2f3325d076b7c967b1730afcef37922c2
 
 # 3.0 prettier & lint everywhere
 6789e61488a1d3de56f472ac3214faf344030005
+
+# 3.0 prettier & lint everywhere again
+83fd4c66222d7846eeb5cc332dfa99bf1e830831

.github/CODEOWNERS

@@ -1,41 +1,30 @@
 # Order matters. The last matching pattern takes precedence.
 
-### Core ###
-/packages/payload/src/uploads/ @denolfe
-/packages/payload/src/admin/ @jmikrut @jacobsfletch @JarrodMFlesch
+### Package Exports ###
+/**/exports/ @denolfe @jmikrut
 
-### Adapters ###
-/packages/db-*/ @denolfe @jmikrut @DanRibbens
-/packages/richtext-*/ @denolfe @jmikrut @DanRibbens @AlessioGr
-
-### Plugins ###
-/packages/plugin-*/ @denolfe @jmikrut @DanRibbens
+### Packages ###
+/packages/richtext-*/ @AlessioGr
 /packages/plugin-cloud*/ @denolfe
-/packages/plugin-form-builder/ @jacobsfletch
-/packages/plugin-live-preview*/ @jacobsfletch
-/packages/plugin-nested-docs/ @jacobsfletch
-/packages/plugin-redirects/ @jacobsfletch
-/packages/plugin-search/ @jacobsfletch
-/packages/plugin-sentry/ @JessChowdhury
-/packages/plugin-seo/ @jacobsfletch
-/packages/plugin-stripe/ @jacobsfletch
-
-### Examples ###
-/examples/ @jacobsfletch
-/examples/testing/ @JarrodMFlesch
-/examples/email/ @JessChowdhury
-/examples/whitelabel/ @JessChowdhury
+/packages/email-*/ @denolfe
+/packages/storage-*/ @denolfe
+/packages/create-payload-app/ @denolfe
+/packages/eslint-*/ @denolfe
 
 ### Templates ###
 /templates/ @jacobsfletch @denolfe
 
-### Misc ###
-/packages/create-payload-app/ @denolfe
-/packages/eslint-config-payload/ @denolfe
-/packages/payload-admin-bar/ @jacobsfletch
+### Build Files ###
+/**/package.json @denolfe
+/tsconfig.json @denolfe
+/**/tsconfig*.json @denolfe
+
+/jest.config.js @denolfe
+/**/jest.config.js @denolfe
 
 ### Root ###
 /package.json @denolfe
 /scripts/ @denolfe
+/.husky/ @denolfe
+/.vscode/ @denolfe
 /.github/ @denolfe
-/.github/CODEOWNERS @denolfe

.github/actions/setup/action.yml

@@ -0,0 +1,48 @@
+name: Setup node and pnpm
+description: Configure the Node.js and pnpm versions
+
+inputs:
+  node-version:
+    description: 'The Node.js version to use'
+    required: true
+    default: 18.20.2
+  pnpm-version:
+    description: 'The pnpm version to use'
+    required: true
+    default: 8.15.7
+
+runs:
+  using: composite
+  steps:
+    # https://github.com/actions/virtual-environments/issues/1187
+    - name: tune linux network
+      shell: bash
+      run: sudo ethtool -K eth0 tx off rx off
+
+    - name: Setup Node@${{ inputs.node-version }}
+      uses: actions/setup-node@v4
+      with:
+        node-version: ${{ inputs.node-version }}
+
+    - name: Install pnpm
+      uses: pnpm/action-setup@v3
+      with:
+        version: ${{ inputs.pnpm-version }}
+        run_install: false
+
+    - name: Get pnpm store directory
+      shell: bash
+      run: |
+        echo "STORE_PATH=$(pnpm store path --silent)" >> $GITHUB_ENV
+
+    - name: Setup pnpm cache
+      uses: actions/cache@v4
+      with:
+        path: ${{ env.STORE_PATH }}
+        key: pnpm-store-${{ hashFiles('**/pnpm-lock.yaml') }}
+        restore-keys: |
+          pnpm-store-
+          pnpm-store-${{ hashFiles('**/pnpm-lock.yaml') }}
+
+    - shell: bash
+      run: pnpm install

.github/workflows/label-author.yml

@@ -0,0 +1,50 @@
+name: label-author
+
+on:
+  pull_request:
+    types: [opened]
+  issues:
+    types: [opened]
+
+permissions:
+  contents: read
+  pull-requests: write
+  issues: write
+
+jobs:
+  debug-context:
+    runs-on: ubuntu-latest
+    steps:
+      - name: View context attributes
+        uses: actions/github-script@v7
+        with:
+          script: console.log(context)
+
+  label-created-by:
+    name: Label pr/issue on opening
+    runs-on: ubuntu-latest
+    steps:
+      - name: Tag with 'created-by'
+        uses: actions/github-script@v7
+        if: github.event.action == 'opened'
+        with:
+          github-token: ${{ secrets.GITHUB_TOKEN }}
+          script: |
+            const type = context.payload.pull_request ? 'pull_request' : 'issue';
+            const association = context.payload[type].author_association;
+            let label = ''
+            if (association === 'MEMBER' || association === 'OWNER') {
+              label = 'created-by: Payload team';
+            } else if (association === 'CONTRIBUTOR') {
+              label = 'created-by: Contributor';
+            }
+
+            if (!label) return;
+
+            github.rest.issues.addLabels({
+              issue_number: context.issue.number,
+              owner: context.repo.owner,
+              repo: context.repo.repo,
+              labels: [label],
+            });
+            console.log('Added created-by: Payload team label');

.github/workflows/main.yml

@@ -2,14 +2,26 @@ name: build
 
 on:
   pull_request:
-    types: [opened, reopened, synchronize]
+    types:
+      - opened
+      - reopened
+      - synchronize
   push:
-    branches: ['main', 'beta']
+    branches:
+      - main
+      - beta
 
 concurrency:
-  group: ${{ github.workflow }}-${{ github.ref }}
+  # <workflow_name>-<branch_name>-<true || commit_sha if branch is protected>
+  group: ${{ github.workflow }}-${{ github.ref }}-${{ github.ref_protected && github.sha || ''}}
   cancel-in-progress: true
 
+env:
+  NODE_VERSION: 18.20.2
+  PNPM_VERSION: 8.15.7
+  DO_NOT_TRACK: 1 # Disable Turbopack telemetry
+  NEXT_TELEMETRY_DISABLED: 1 # Disable Next telemetry
+
 jobs:
   changes:
     runs-on: ubuntu-latest
@@ -19,6 +31,10 @@ jobs:
       needs_build: ${{ steps.filter.outputs.needs_build }}
       templates: ${{ steps.filter.outputs.templates }}
     steps:
+      # https://github.com/actions/virtual-environments/issues/1187
+      - name: tune linux network
+        run: sudo ethtool -K eth0 tx off rx off
+
       - uses: actions/checkout@v4
         with:
           fetch-depth: 25
@@ -39,6 +55,51 @@ jobs:
           echo "needs_build: ${{ steps.filter.outputs.needs_build }}"
           echo "templates: ${{ steps.filter.outputs.templates }}"
 
+  lint:
+    if: >
+      github.event_name == 'pull_request' && !contains(github.event.pull_request.title, 'no-lint') && !contains(github.event.pull_request.title, 'skip-lint')
+    runs-on: ubuntu-latest
+    steps:
+      - uses: actions/checkout@v4
+        with:
+          fetch-depth: 0
+
+      # https://github.com/actions/virtual-environments/issues/1187
+      - name: tune linux network
+        run: sudo ethtool -K eth0 tx off rx off
+
+      - name: Setup Node@${{ env.NODE_VERSION }}
+        uses: actions/setup-node@v4
+        with:
+          node-version: ${{ env.NODE_VERSION }}
+
+      - name: Install pnpm
+        uses: pnpm/action-setup@v3
+        with:
+          version: ${{ env.PNPM_VERSION }}
+          run_install: false
+
+      - name: Get pnpm store directory
+        shell: bash
+        run: |
+          echo "STORE_PATH=$(pnpm store path --silent)" >> $GITHUB_ENV
+
+      - name: Setup pnpm cache
+        uses: actions/cache@v4
+        timeout-minutes: 720
+        with:
+          path: ${{ env.STORE_PATH }}
+          key: pnpm-store-${{ hashFiles('**/pnpm-lock.yaml') }}
+          restore-keys: |
+            pnpm-store-
+            pnpm-store-${{ hashFiles('**/pnpm-lock.yaml') }}
+
+      - run: pnpm install
+      - name: Lint staged
+        run: |
+          git diff --name-only --diff-filter=d origin/${GITHUB_BASE_REF}...${GITHUB_SHA}
+          npx lint-staged --diff="origin/${GITHUB_BASE_REF}...${GITHUB_SHA}"
+
   build:
     needs: changes
     if: ${{ needs.changes.outputs.needs_build == 'true' }}
@@ -49,15 +110,19 @@ jobs:
         with:
           fetch-depth: 25
 
-      - name: Use Node.js 18
+      # https://github.com/actions/virtual-environments/issues/1187
+      - name: tune linux network
+        run: sudo ethtool -K eth0 tx off rx off
+
+      - name: Setup Node@${{ env.NODE_VERSION }}
         uses: actions/setup-node@v4
         with:
-          node-version: 18
+          node-version: ${{ env.NODE_VERSION }}
 
       - name: Install pnpm
         uses: pnpm/action-setup@v3
         with:
-          version: 8
+          version: ${{ env.PNPM_VERSION }}
           run_install: false
 
       - name: Get pnpm store directory
@@ -77,6 +142,8 @@ jobs:
 
       - run: pnpm install
       - run: pnpm run build:all
+        env:
+          DO_NOT_TRACK: 1 # Disable Turbopack telemetry
 
       - name: Cache build
         uses: actions/cache@v4
@@ -90,15 +157,19 @@ jobs:
     needs: build
 
     steps:
-      - name: Use Node.js 18
+      # https://github.com/actions/virtual-environments/issues/1187
+      - name: tune linux network
+        run: sudo ethtool -K eth0 tx off rx off
+
+      - name: Setup Node@${{ env.NODE_VERSION }}
         uses: actions/setup-node@v4
         with:
-          node-version: 18
+          node-version: ${{ env.NODE_VERSION }}
 
       - name: Install pnpm
         uses: pnpm/action-setup@v3
         with:
-          version: 8
+          version: ${{ env.PNPM_VERSION }}
           run_install: false
 
       - name: Restore build
@@ -122,9 +193,10 @@ jobs:
         database:
           - mongodb
           - postgres
-        #  - postgres-custom-schema
-        #  - postgres-uuid
-        #  - supabase
+          - postgres-custom-schema
+          - postgres-uuid
+          - supabase
+          - sqlite
     env:
       POSTGRES_USER: postgres
       POSTGRES_PASSWORD: postgres
@@ -135,15 +207,19 @@ jobs:
       AWS_REGION: us-east-1
 
     steps:
-      - name: Use Node.js 18
+      # https://github.com/actions/virtual-environments/issues/1187
+      - name: tune linux network
+        run: sudo ethtool -K eth0 tx off rx off
+
+      - name: Setup Node@${{ env.NODE_VERSION }}
         uses: actions/setup-node@v4
         with:
-          node-version: 18
+          node-version: ${{ env.NODE_VERSION }}
 
       - name: Install pnpm
         uses: pnpm/action-setup@v3
         with:
-          version: 8
+          version: ${{ env.PNPM_VERSION }}
           run_install: false
 
       - name: Restore build
@@ -215,34 +291,50 @@ jobs:
         suite:
           - _community
           - access-control
-          - admin
+          - admin__e2e__1
+          - admin__e2e__2
+          - admin-root
           - auth
-          - email
           - field-error-states
           - fields-relationship
           - fields
           - fields__collections__Blocks
           - fields__collections__Array
           - fields__collections__Relationship
-          - fields__collections__Lexical
+          - fields__collections__RichText
+          - fields__collections__Lexical__e2e__main
+          - fields__collections__Lexical__e2e__blocks
+          - fields__collections__Date
+          - fields__collections__Number
+          - fields__collections__Point
+          - fields__collections__Tabs
+          - fields__collections__Text
+          - fields__collections__Upload
           - live-preview
           - localization
+          - i18n
+          - plugin-cloud-storage
           - plugin-form-builder
           - plugin-nested-docs
           - plugin-seo
           - versions
           - uploads
-
+    env:
+      SUITE_NAME: ${{ matrix.suite }}
     steps:
-      - name: Use Node.js 18
+      # https://github.com/actions/virtual-environments/issues/1187
+      - name: tune linux network
+        run: sudo ethtool -K eth0 tx off rx off
+
+      - name: Setup Node@${{ env.NODE_VERSION }}
         uses: actions/setup-node@v4
         with:
-          node-version: 18
+          node-version: ${{ env.NODE_VERSION }}
 
       - name: Install pnpm
         uses: pnpm/action-setup@v3
         with:
-          version: 8
+          version: ${{ env.PNPM_VERSION }}
           run_install: false
 
       - name: Restore build
@@ -252,34 +344,116 @@ jobs:
           path: ./*
           key: ${{ github.sha }}-${{ github.run_number }}
 
-      - name: Install Playwright
-        run: pnpm exec playwright install --with-deps
+      - name: Start LocalStack
+        run: pnpm docker:start
+        if: ${{ matrix.suite == 'plugin-cloud-storage' }}
+
+      - name: Store Playwright's Version
+        run: |
+          # Extract the version number using a more targeted regex pattern with awk
+          PLAYWRIGHT_VERSION=$(pnpm ls @playwright/test --depth=0 | awk '/@playwright\/test/ {print $2}')
+          echo "Playwright's Version: $PLAYWRIGHT_VERSION"
+          echo "PLAYWRIGHT_VERSION=$PLAYWRIGHT_VERSION" >> $GITHUB_ENV
+
+      - name: Cache Playwright Browsers for Playwright's Version
+        id: cache-playwright-browsers
+        uses: actions/cache@v4
+        with:
+          path: ~/.cache/ms-playwright
+          key: playwright-browsers-${{ env.PLAYWRIGHT_VERSION }}
+
+      - name: Setup Playwright - Browsers and Dependencies
+        if: steps.cache-playwright-browsers.outputs.cache-hit != 'true'
+        run: pnpm exec playwright install --with-deps chromium
+
+      - name: Setup Playwright - Dependencies-only
+        if: steps.cache-playwright-browsers.outputs.cache-hit == 'true'
+        run: pnpm exec playwright install-deps chromium
 
       - name: E2E Tests
-        run: pnpm test:e2e ${{ matrix.suite }}
+        run: PLAYWRIGHT_JSON_OUTPUT_NAME=results_${{ matrix.suite }}.json pnpm test:e2e ${{ matrix.suite }}
+        env:
+          PLAYWRIGHT_JSON_OUTPUT_NAME: results_${{ matrix.suite }}.json
+          NEXT_TELEMETRY_DISABLED: 1
 
       - uses: actions/upload-artifact@v4
         if: always()
         with:
           name: test-results-${{ matrix.suite }}
           path: test/test-results/
+          if-no-files-found: ignore
           retention-days: 1
 
-  tests-type-generation:
-    if: false # This should be replaced with gen on a real Payload project
+      # Disabled until this is fixed: https://github.com/daun/playwright-report-summary/issues/156
+      # - uses: daun/playwright-report-summary@v3
+      #   with:
+      #     report-file: results_${{ matrix.suite }}.json
+      #     report-tag: ${{ matrix.suite }}
+      #     job-summary: true
+
+  app-build-with-packed:
+    if: false # Disable until package resolution in tgzs can be figured out
     runs-on: ubuntu-latest
     needs: build
 
     steps:
-      - name: Use Node.js 18
+      # https://github.com/actions/virtual-environments/issues/1187
+      - name: tune linux network
+        run: sudo ethtool -K eth0 tx off rx off
+
+      - name: Setup Node@${{ env.NODE_VERSION }}
         uses: actions/setup-node@v4
         with:
-          node-version: 18
+          node-version: ${{ env.NODE_VERSION }}
 
       - name: Install pnpm
         uses: pnpm/action-setup@v3
         with:
-          version: 8
+          version: ${{ env.PNPM_VERSION }}
+          run_install: false
+
+      - name: Restore build
+        uses: actions/cache@v4
+        timeout-minutes: 10
+        with:
+          path: ./*
+          key: ${{ github.sha }}-${{ github.run_number }}
+
+      - name: Start MongoDB
+        uses: supercharge/mongodb-github-action@1.10.0
+        with:
+          mongodb-version: 6.0
+
+      - name: Pack and build app
+        run: |
+          set -ex
+          pnpm run script:pack --dest templates/blank-3.0
+          cd templates/blank-3.0
+          cp .env.example .env
+          ls -la
+          pnpm add ./*.tgz --ignore-workspace
+          pnpm install --ignore-workspace --no-frozen-lockfile
+          cat package.json
+          pnpm run build
+
+  tests-type-generation:
+    runs-on: ubuntu-latest
+    needs: build
+
+    steps:
+      # https://github.com/actions/virtual-environments/issues/1187
+      - name: tune linux network
+        run: sudo ethtool -K eth0 tx off rx off
+
+      - name: Setup Node@${{ env.NODE_VERSION }}
+        uses: actions/setup-node@v4
+        with:
+          node-version: ${{ env.NODE_VERSION }}
+
+      - name: Install pnpm
+        uses: pnpm/action-setup@v3
+        with:
+          version: ${{ env.PNPM_VERSION }}
           run_install: false
 
       - name: Restore build
@@ -308,11 +482,14 @@ jobs:
       - uses: actions/checkout@v4
         with:
           fetch-depth: 25
+      # https://github.com/actions/virtual-environments/issues/1187
+      - name: tune linux network
+        run: sudo ethtool -K eth0 tx off rx off
 
-      - name: Use Node.js 18
+      - name: Setup Node@${{ env.NODE_VERSION }}
         uses: actions/setup-node@v4
         with:
-          node-version: 18
+          node-version: ${{ env.NODE_VERSION }}
 
       - name: Start MongoDB
         uses: supercharge/mongodb-github-action@1.10.0
@@ -326,3 +503,91 @@ jobs:
           yarn install
           yarn build
           yarn generate:types
+
+  generated-templates:
+    needs: build
+    if: false # Needs to pull in tgz files from build
+    runs-on: ubuntu-latest
+
+    steps:
+      # https://github.com/actions/virtual-environments/issues/1187
+      - name: tune linux network
+        run: sudo ethtool -K eth0 tx off rx off
+
+      - name: Setup Node@${{ env.NODE_VERSION }}
+        uses: actions/setup-node@v4
+        with:
+          node-version: ${{ env.NODE_VERSION }}
+
+      - name: Install pnpm
+        uses: pnpm/action-setup@v3
+        with:
+          version: ${{ env.PNPM_VERSION }}
+          run_install: false
+
+      - name: Restore build
+        uses: actions/cache@v4
+        timeout-minutes: 10
+        with:
+          path: ./*
+          key: ${{ github.sha }}-${{ github.run_number }}
+
+      - name: Build all generated templates
+        run: pnpm tsx ./scripts/build-generated-templates.ts
+
+  all-green:
+    name: All Green
+    if: always()
+    runs-on: ubuntu-latest
+    needs:
+      - lint
+      - build
+      - tests-unit
+      - tests-int
+      - tests-e2e
+
+    steps:
+      - if: ${{ always() && (contains(needs.*.result, 'failure') || contains(needs.*.result, 'cancelled')) }}
+        run: exit 1
+
+  publish-canary:
+    name: Publish Canary
+    if: github.ref == 'refs/heads/beta'
+    runs-on: ubuntu-latest
+    needs:
+      - all-green
+
+    steps:
+      # https://github.com/actions/virtual-environments/issues/1187
+      - name: tune linux network
+        run: sudo ethtool -K eth0 tx off rx off
+
+      - name: Setup Node@${{ env.NODE_VERSION }}
+        uses: actions/setup-node@v4
+        with:
+          node-version: ${{ env.NODE_VERSION }}
+
+      - name: Install pnpm
+        uses: pnpm/action-setup@v3
+        with:
+          version: ${{ env.PNPM_VERSION }}
+          run_install: false
+
+      - name: Restore build
+        uses: actions/cache@v4
+        timeout-minutes: 10
+        with:
+          path: ./*
+          key: ${{ github.sha }}-${{ github.run_number }}
+
+      - name: Load npm token
+        run: echo "//registry.npmjs.org/:_authToken=$NPM_TOKEN" >> ~/.npmrc
+        env:
+          NPM_TOKEN: ${{ secrets.NPM_TOKEN }}
+
+      - name: Canary release script
+        # dry run hard-coded to true for testing and no npm token provided
+        run: pnpm tsx ./scripts/publish-canary.ts
+        env:
+          NPM_TOKEN: ${{ secrets.NPM_TOKEN }}
+          NPM_CONFIG_PROVENANCE: true

.github/workflows/pr-title.yml

@@ -0,0 +1,119 @@
+name: pr-title
+
+on:
+  pull_request:
+    types:
+      - opened
+      - edited
+      - synchronize
+
+permissions:
+  pull-requests: write
+
+jobs:
+  main:
+    name: lint-pr-title
+    runs-on: ubuntu-latest
+    steps:
+      - uses: amannn/action-semantic-pull-request@v5
+        id: lint_pr_title
+        env:
+          GITHUB_TOKEN: ${{ secrets.GITHUB_TOKEN }}
+        with:
+          types: |
+            build
+            chore
+            ci
+            docs
+            feat
+            fix
+            perf
+            refactor
+            revert
+            style
+            test
+            types
+          scopes: |
+            cpa
+            db-\*
+            db-mongodb
+            db-postgres
+            db-sqlite
+            email-nodemailer
+            eslint
+            graphql
+            live-preview
+            live-preview-react
+            next
+            payload
+            plugin-cloud
+            plugin-cloud-storage
+            plugin-form-builder
+            plugin-nested-docs
+            plugin-redirects
+            plugin-relationship-object-ids
+            plugin-search
+            plugin-sentry
+            plugin-seo
+            plugin-stripe
+            richtext-\*
+            richtext-lexical
+            richtext-slate
+            storage-\*
+            storage-azure
+            storage-gcs
+            storage-vercel-blob
+            storage-s3
+            translations
+            ui
+            templates
+            examples(\/(\w|-)+)?
+            deps
+
+          # Disallow uppercase letters at the beginning of the subject
+          subjectPattern: ^(?![A-Z]).+$
+          subjectPatternError: |
+            The subject "{subject}" found in the pull request title "{title}"
+            didn't match the configured pattern. Please ensure that the subject
+            doesn't start with an uppercase character.
+
+      - uses: marocchino/sticky-pull-request-comment@v2
+        # When the previous steps fails, the workflow would stop. By adding this
+        # condition you can continue the execution with the populated error message.
+        if: always() && (steps.lint_pr_title.outputs.error_message != null)
+        with:
+          header: pr-title-lint-error
+          message: |
+            Pull Request titles must follow the [Conventional Commits specification](https://www.conventionalcommits.org/en/v1.0.0/) and have valid scopes.
+
+            ${{ steps.lint_pr_title.outputs.error_message }}
+
+            ```
+            feat(ui): add Button component
+            ^    ^    ^
+            |    |    |__ Subject
+            |    |_______ Scope
+            |____________ Type
+            ```
+
+      # Delete a previous comment when the issue has been resolved
+      - if: ${{ steps.lint_pr_title.outputs.error_message == null }}
+        uses: marocchino/sticky-pull-request-comment@v2
+        with:
+          header: pr-title-lint-error
+          delete: true
+
+  label-pr-on-open:
+    name: label-pr-on-open
+    runs-on: ubuntu-latest
+    steps:
+      - name: Tag with main branch with v2
+        if: github.event.action == 'opened' && github.event.pull_request.base.ref == 'main'
+        uses: actions-ecosystem/action-add-labels@v1
+        with:
+          labels: v2
+      - name: Tag with beta branch with v3
+        if: github.event.action == 'opened' && github.event.pull_request.base.ref == 'beta'
+        uses: actions-ecosystem/action-add-labels@v1
+        with:
+          labels: v3

.github/workflows/release-canary.yml

@@ -0,0 +1,36 @@
+name: release-canary
+
+on:
+  workflow_dispatch:
+    branches:
+      - beta
+
+env:
+  NODE_VERSION: 18.20.2
+  PNPM_VERSION: 8.15.7
+  DO_NOT_TRACK: 1 # Disable Turbopack telemetry
+  NEXT_TELEMETRY_DISABLED: 1 # Disable Next telemetry
+
+jobs:
+  release:
+    permissions:
+      id-token: write
+    runs-on: ubuntu-latest
+    steps:
+      - name: Checkout
+        uses: actions/checkout@v4
+      - name: Setup
+        uses: ./.github/actions/setup
+        with:
+          node-version: ${{ env.NODE_VERSION }}
+          pnpm-version: ${{ env.PNPM_VERSION }}
+      - name: Load npm token
+        run: echo "//registry.npmjs.org/:_authToken=$NPM_TOKEN" >> ~/.npmrc
+        env:
+          NPM_TOKEN: ${{ secrets.NPM_TOKEN }}
+      - name: Canary release script
+        # dry run hard-coded to true for testing and no npm token provided
+        run: pnpm tsx ./scripts/publish-canary.ts
+        env:
+          NPM_TOKEN: ${{ secrets.NPM_TOKEN }}
+          NPM_CONFIG_PROVENANCE: true

.gitignore

@@ -12,11 +12,20 @@ test-results
 .localstack
 .turbo
 
+meta_client.json
+meta_server.json
+meta_index.json
+meta_shared.json
+
 .turbo
 
 # Ignore test directory media folder/files
 /media
 test/media
+*payloadtests.db
+*payloadtests.db-journal
+*payloadtests.db-shm
+*payloadtests.db-wal
 /versions
 
 # Created by https://www.toptal.com/developers/gitignore/api/node,macos,windows,webstorm,sublimetext,visualstudiocode

.husky/pre-commit

@@ -1,4 +1 @@
-#!/usr/bin/env sh
-. "$(dirname -- "$0")/_/husky.sh"
-
 pnpm run lint-staged --quiet

.idea/payload.iml

@@ -47,8 +47,40 @@
       <excludeFolder url="file://$MODULE_DIR$/templates" />
       <excludeFolder url="file://$MODULE_DIR$/test/.swc" />
       <excludeFolder url="file://$MODULE_DIR$/versions" />
+      <excludeFolder url="file://$MODULE_DIR$/packages/richtext-slate/dist" />
+      <excludeFolder url="file://$MODULE_DIR$/packages/richtext-slate/.turbo" />
+      <excludeFolder url="file://$MODULE_DIR$/packages/email-nodemailer/.turbo" />
+      <excludeFolder url="file://$MODULE_DIR$/packages/email-nodemailer/dist" />
+      <excludeFolder url="file://$MODULE_DIR$/packages/email-resend/.turbo" />
+      <excludeFolder url="file://$MODULE_DIR$/packages/email-resend/dist" />
+      <excludeFolder url="file://$MODULE_DIR$/packages/live-preview-vue/.turbo" />
+      <excludeFolder url="file://$MODULE_DIR$/packages/live-preview-vue/dist" />
+      <excludeFolder url="file://$MODULE_DIR$/packages/payload/.swc" />
+      <excludeFolder url="file://$MODULE_DIR$/packages/plugin-form-builder/dist" />
+      <excludeFolder url="file://$MODULE_DIR$/packages/plugin-relationship-object-ids/.turbo" />
+      <excludeFolder url="file://$MODULE_DIR$/packages/plugin-relationship-object-ids/dist" />
+      <excludeFolder url="file://$MODULE_DIR$/packages/plugin-stripe/dist" />
+      <excludeFolder url="file://$MODULE_DIR$/packages/storage-azure/.turbo" />
+      <excludeFolder url="file://$MODULE_DIR$/packages/storage-azure/dist" />
+      <excludeFolder url="file://$MODULE_DIR$/packages/storage-gcs/.turbo" />
+      <excludeFolder url="file://$MODULE_DIR$/packages/storage-gcs/dist" />
+      <excludeFolder url="file://$MODULE_DIR$/packages/storage-s3/.turbo" />
+      <excludeFolder url="file://$MODULE_DIR$/packages/storage-s3/dist" />
+      <excludeFolder url="file://$MODULE_DIR$/packages/storage-uploadthing/.turbo" />
+      <excludeFolder url="file://$MODULE_DIR$/packages/storage-uploadthing/dist" />
+      <excludeFolder url="file://$MODULE_DIR$/packages/storage-vercel-blob/.turbo" />
+      <excludeFolder url="file://$MODULE_DIR$/packages/storage-vercel-blob/dist" />
+      <excludeFolder url="file://$MODULE_DIR$/packages/translations/.turbo" />
+      <excludeFolder url="file://$MODULE_DIR$/packages/translations/dist" />
+      <excludeFolder url="file://$MODULE_DIR$/packages/ui/.swc" />
+      <excludeFolder url="file://$MODULE_DIR$/packages/ui/.turbo" />
+      <excludeFolder url="file://$MODULE_DIR$/packages/ui/dist" />
+      <excludeFolder url="file://$MODULE_DIR$/packages/drizzle/.turbo" />
+      <excludeFolder url="file://$MODULE_DIR$/packages/drizzle/dist" />
+      <excludeFolder url="file://$MODULE_DIR$/packages/db-sqlite/.turbo" />
+      <excludeFolder url="file://$MODULE_DIR$/packages/db-sqlite/dist" />
     </content>
     <orderEntry type="inheritedJdk" />
     <orderEntry type="sourceFolder" forTests="false" />
   </component>
-</module>
+</module>

.idea/runConfigurations/_template__of_JavaScriptTestRunnerJest.xml

@@ -0,0 +1,9 @@
+<component name="ProjectRunConfigurationManager">
+  <configuration default="true" type="JavaScriptTestRunnerJest">
+    <node-interpreter value="project" />
+    <node-options value="--experimental-vm-modules --no-deprecation" />
+    <envs />
+    <scope-kind value="ALL" />
+    <method v="2" />
+  </configuration>
+</component>

.node-version

@@ -1 +1 @@
-v18.19.1
+v18.20.2

.nvmrc

@@ -1 +1 @@
-v18.19.1
+v18.20.2

.prettierignore

@@ -12,3 +12,5 @@
 tsconfig.json
 packages/payload/*.js
 packages/payload/*.d.ts
+payload-types.ts
+tsconfig.tsbuildinfo

.swcrc

@@ -7,6 +7,15 @@
       "syntax": "typescript",
       "tsx": true,
       "dts": true
+    },
+    "transform": {
+      "react": {
+        "runtime": "automatic",
+        "pragmaFrag": "React.Fragment",
+        "throwIfNamespace": true,
+        "development": false,
+        "useBuiltins": true
+      }
     }
   },
   "module": {

.vscode/launch.json

@@ -16,6 +16,14 @@
       "request": "launch",
       "type": "node-terminal"
     },
+    {
+      "command": "node --no-deprecation test/dev.js storage-uploadthing",
+      "cwd": "${workspaceFolder}",
+      "name": "Uploadthing",
+      "request": "launch",
+      "type": "node-terminal",
+      "envFile": "${workspaceFolder}/test/storage-uploadthing/.env"
+    },
     {
       "command": "node --no-deprecation test/dev.js live-preview",
       "cwd": "${workspaceFolder}",
@@ -41,6 +49,27 @@
       "request": "launch",
       "type": "node-terminal"
     },
+    {
+      "command": "node --no-deprecation test/dev.js auth",
+      "cwd": "${workspaceFolder}",
+      "name": "Run Dev Auth",
+      "request": "launch",
+      "type": "node-terminal"
+    },
+    {
+      "command": "node --no-deprecation test/dev.js fields-relationship",
+      "cwd": "${workspaceFolder}",
+      "name": "Run Dev Fields-Relationship",
+      "request": "launch",
+      "type": "node-terminal"
+    },
+    {
+      "command": "node --no-deprecation test/dev.js login-with-username",
+      "cwd": "${workspaceFolder}",
+      "name": "Run Dev Login-With-Username",
+      "request": "launch",
+      "type": "node-terminal"
+    },
     {
       "command": "pnpm run dev plugin-cloud-storage",
       "cwd": "${workspaceFolder}",
@@ -51,6 +80,13 @@
         "PAYLOAD_PUBLIC_CLOUD_STORAGE_ADAPTER": "s3"
       }
     },
+    {
+      "command": "node --no-deprecation test/dev.js collections-graphql",
+      "cwd": "${workspaceFolder}",
+      "name": "Run Dev GraphQL",
+      "request": "launch",
+      "type": "node-terminal"
+    },
     {
       "command": "node --no-deprecation test/dev.js fields",
       "cwd": "${workspaceFolder}",
@@ -69,35 +105,32 @@
       }
     },
     {
-      "command": "pnpm run dev versions",
+      "command": "node --no-deprecation test/dev.js versions",
       "cwd": "${workspaceFolder}",
       "name": "Run Dev Versions",
       "request": "launch",
       "type": "node-terminal"
     },
     {
-      "command": "pnpm run dev localization",
+      "command": "node --no-deprecation test/dev.js localization",
       "cwd": "${workspaceFolder}",
       "name": "Run Dev Localization",
       "request": "launch",
       "type": "node-terminal"
     },
     {
-      "command": "pnpm run dev uploads",
+      "command": "node --no-deprecation test/dev.js uploads",
       "cwd": "${workspaceFolder}",
       "name": "Run Dev Uploads",
       "request": "launch",
       "type": "node-terminal"
     },
     {
-      "command": "PAYLOAD_BUNDLER=vite pnpm run dev fields",
+      "command": "node --no-deprecation test/dev.js field-error-states",
       "cwd": "${workspaceFolder}",
-      "name": "Run Dev Fields (Vite)",
+      "name": "Run Dev Field Error States",
       "request": "launch",
-      "type": "node-terminal",
-      "env": {
-        "NODE_ENV": "production"
-      }
+      "type": "node-terminal"
     },
     {
       "command": "pnpm run test:int live-preview",

.vscode/settings.json

@@ -40,5 +40,10 @@
     "editor.codeActionsOnSave": {
       "source.fixAll.eslint": "explicit"
     }
+  },
+  "files.insertFinalNewline": true,
+  "jestrunner.jestCommand": "pnpm exec cross-env NODE_OPTIONS=\"--experimental-vm-modules --no-deprecation\" node 'node_modules/jest/bin/jest.js'",
+  "jestrunner.debugOptions": {
+    "runtimeArgs": ["--experimental-vm-modules", "--no-deprecation"]
   }
 }

CONTRIBUTING.md

@@ -63,7 +63,7 @@ Each test directory is split up in this way specifically to reduce friction when
 
 The following command will start Payload with your config: `pnpm dev my-test-dir`. Example: `pnpm dev fields` for the test/`fields` test suite. This command will start up Payload using your config and refresh a test database on every restart. If you're using VS Code, the most common run configs are automatically added to your editor - you should be able to find them in your VS Code launch tab.
 
-By default, payload will [automatically log you in](https://payloadcms.com/docs/authentication/config#admin-autologin) with the default credentials. To disable that, you can either pass in the --no-auto-login flag (example: `pnpm dev my-test-dir --no-auto-login`) or set the `PAYLOAD_PUBLIC_DISABLE_AUTO_LOGIN` environment variable to `false`.
+By default, payload will [automatically log you in](https://payloadcms.com/docs/authentication/overview#admin-autologin) with the default credentials. To disable that, you can either pass in the --no-auto-login flag (example: `pnpm dev my-test-dir --no-auto-login`) or set the `PAYLOAD_PUBLIC_DISABLE_AUTO_LOGIN` environment variable to `false`.
 
 The default credentials are `dev@payloadcms.com` as E-Mail and `test` as password. These are used in the auto-login.
 
@@ -120,5 +120,5 @@ This is how you can preview changes you made locally to the docs:
 2. Run `yarn install`
 3. Duplicate the `.env.example` file and rename it to `.env`
 4. Add a `DOCS_DIR` environment variable to the `.env` file which points to the absolute path of your modified docs folder. For example `DOCS_DIR=/Users/yourname/Documents/GitHub/payload/docs`
-5. Run `yarn run fetchDocs:local`. If this was successful, you should see no error messages and the following output: *Docs successfully written to /.../website/src/app/docs.json*. There could be error messages if you have incorrect markdown in your local docs folder. In this case, it will tell you how you can fix it
+5. Run `yarn run fetchDocs:local`. If this was successful, you should see no error messages and the following output: _Docs successfully written to /.../website/src/app/docs.json_. There could be error messages if you have incorrect markdown in your local docs folder. In this case, it will tell you how you can fix it
 6. You're done! Now you can start the website locally using `yarn run dev` and preview the docs under [http://localhost:3000/docs/](http://localhost:3000/docs/)

app/(payload)/api/[...slug]/route.ts

@@ -1,9 +1,10 @@
 /* THIS FILE WAS GENERATED AUTOMATICALLY BY PAYLOAD. */
 /* DO NOT MODIFY it because it could be re-written at any time. */
 import config from '@payload-config'
-import { REST_DELETE, REST_GET, REST_PATCH, REST_POST } from '@payloadcms/next/routes'
+import { REST_DELETE, REST_GET, REST_OPTIONS, REST_PATCH, REST_POST } from '@payloadcms/next/routes'
 
 export const GET = REST_GET(config)
 export const POST = REST_POST(config)
 export const DELETE = REST_DELETE(config)
 export const PATCH = REST_PATCH(config)
+export const OPTIONS = REST_OPTIONS(config)

app/(payload)/layout.tsx

@@ -1,6 +1,7 @@
 /* THIS FILE WAS GENERATED AUTOMATICALLY BY PAYLOAD. */
 import configPromise from '@payload-config'
 import { RootLayout } from '@payloadcms/next/layouts'
+// import '@payloadcms/ui/styles.css' // Uncomment this line if `@payloadcms/ui` in `tsconfig.json` points to `/ui/dist` instead of `/ui/src`
 /* DO NOT MODIFY IT BECAUSE IT COULD BE REWRITTEN AT ANY TIME. */
 import React from 'react'
 

changelog.config.js

@@ -1,39 +0,0 @@
-module.exports = {
-  // gitRawCommitsOpts: {
-  //   from: 'v2.0.9',
-  //   path: 'packages/payload',
-  // },
-  // infile: 'CHANGELOG.md',
-  options: {
-    preset: {
-      name: 'conventionalcommits',
-      types: [
-        { section: 'Features', type: 'feat' },
-        { section: 'Features', type: 'feature' },
-        { section: 'Bug Fixes', type: 'fix' },
-        { section: 'Documentation', type: 'docs' },
-      ],
-    },
-  },
-  // outfile: 'NEW.md',
-  writerOpts: {
-    commitGroupsSort: (a, b) => {
-      const groupOrder = ['Features', 'Bug Fixes', 'Documentation']
-      return groupOrder.indexOf(a.title) - groupOrder.indexOf(b.title)
-    },
-
-    // Scoped commits at the end, alphabetical sort
-    commitsSort: (a, b) => {
-      if (a.scope || b.scope) {
-        if (!a.scope) return -1
-        if (!b.scope) return 1
-        return a.scope === b.scope
-          ? a.subject.localeCompare(b.subject)
-          : a.scope.localeCompare(b.scope)
-      }
-
-      // Alphabetical sort
-      return a.subject.localeCompare(b.subject)
-    },
-  },
-}

docs/access-control/collections.mdx

@@ -3,99 +3,143 @@ title: Collection Access Control
 label: Collections
 order: 20
 desc: With Collection-level Access Control you can define which users can create, read, update or delete Collections.
-keywords: collections, access control, permissions, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, express
+keywords: collections, access control, permissions, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
 ---
 
-You can define Collection-level Access Control within each Collection's `access` property. All Access Control functions accept one `args` argument.
+Collection Access Control is [Access Control](../access-control) used to restrict access to Documents within a [Collection](../collections/overview), as well as what they can and cannot see within the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview) as it relates to that Collection.
 
-## Available Controls
+To add Access Control to a Collection, use the `access` property in your [Collection Config](../configuration/collections):
+
+```ts
+import type { CollectionConfig } from 'payload';
+
+export const CollectionWithAccessControl: CollectionConfig = {
+  // ...
+  access: { // highlight-line
+    // ...
+  },
+}
+```
+
+## Config Options
+
+Access Control is specific to the operation of the request.
+
+To add Access Control to a Collection, use the `access` property in your [Collection Config](../configuration/collections):
+
+```ts
+import type { CollectionConfig } from 'payload';
+
+export const CollectionWithAccessControl: CollectionConfig = {
+  // ...
+  // highlight-start
+  access: {
+    create: () => {...},
+    read: () => {...},
+    update: () => {...},
+    delete: () => {...},
+
+    // Auth-enabled Collections only
+    admin: () => {...},
+    unlock: () => {...},
+
+    // Version-enabled Collections only
+    readVersions: () => {...},
+  },
+  // highlight-end
+}
+```
+
+The following options are available:
 
 | Function                | Allows/Denies Access                         |
 | ----------------------- | -------------------------------------------- |
-| **[`create`](#create)** | Used in the `create` operation               |
-| **[`read`](#read)**     | Used in the `find` and `findByID` operations |
-| **[`update`](#update)** | Used in the `update` operation               |
-| **[`delete`](#delete)** | Used in the `delete` operation               |
+| **`create`** | Used in the `create` operation. [More details](#create). |
+| **`read`**     | Used in the `find` and `findByID` operations. [More details](#read). |
+| **`update`** | Used in the `update` operation. [More details](#update). |
+| **`delete`** | Used in the `delete` operation. [More details](#delete). |
 
-#### Auth-enabled Controls
-
-If a Collection supports [`Authentication`](/docs/authentication/overview), the following Access Controls become available:
+If a Collection supports [`Authentication`](../authentication/overview), the following additional options are available:
 
 | Function                | Allows/Denies Access                                           |
 | ----------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **[`admin`](#admin)**   | Used to restrict access to the Payload Admin panel             |
-| **[`unlock`](#unlock)** | Used to restrict which users can access the `unlock` operation |
+| **`admin`**   | Used to restrict access to the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview). [More details](#admin). |
+| **`unlock`** | Used to restrict which users can access the `unlock` operation. [More details](#unlock). |
 
-**Example Collection config:**
+If a Collection supports [Versions](../versions/overview), the following additional options are available:
 
-```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types';
-
-export const Posts: CollectionConfig = {
-  slug: "posts",
-  // highlight-start
-  access: {
-    create: ({ req: { user } }) => { ... },
-    read: ({ req: { user } }) => { ... },
-    update: ({ req: { user } }) => { ... },
-    delete: ({ req: { user } }) => { ... },
-    admin: ({ req: { user } }) => { ... },
-  },
-  // highlight-end
-};
-```
+| Function           | Allows/Denies Access                                                                                                   |
+| ------------------ | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`readVersions`** | Used to control who can read versions, and who can't. Will automatically restrict the Admin UI version viewing access. [More details](#read-versions). |
 
 ### Create
 
 Returns a boolean which allows/denies access to the `create` request.
 
-**Available argument properties:**
-
-| Option     | Description                                                                |
-| ---------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`req`**  | The Express `request` object containing the currently authenticated `user` |
-| **`data`** | The data passed to create the document with.                               |
-
-**Example:**
+To add create Access Control to a Collection, use the `create` property in the [Collection Config](../collections/overview):
 
 ```ts
-const PublicUsers = {
-  slug: 'public-users',
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
+
+export const CollectionWithCreateAccess: CollectionConfig = {
+  // ...
   access: {
     // highlight-start
-    // allow guest users to self-registration
-    create: () => true,
+    create: ({ req: { user }, data }) => {
+      return Boolean(user)
+    },
     // highlight-end
-    ...
   },
-  fields: [ ... ],
 }
 ```
 
+The following arguments are provided to the `create` function:
+
+| Option     | Description                                                                                                                  |
+| ---------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`req`**  | The [Request](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Request) object containing the currently authenticated `user`. |
+| **`data`** | The data passed to create the document with.                                                                                 |
+
 ### Read
 
-Read access functions can return a boolean result or optionally return a [query constraint](/docs/queries/overview) which limits the documents that are returned to only those that match the constraint you provide. This can be helpful to restrict users' access to only certain documents however you specify.
+Returns a boolean which allows/denies access to the `read` request.
 
-**Available argument properties:**
-
-| Option    | Description                                                                |
-| --------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`req`** | The Express `request` object containing the currently authenticated `user` |
-| **`id`**  | `id` of document requested, if within `findByID`                           |
-
-**Example:**
+To add read Access Control to a Collection, use the `read` property in the [Collection Config](../collections/overview):
 
 ```ts
-import { Access } from 'payload/config'
+import type { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
 
-const canReadPage: Access = ({ req: { user } }) => {
-  // allow authenticated users
+export const CollectionWithReadAccess: CollectionConfig = {
+  // ...
+  access: {
+    // highlight-start
+    read: ({ req: { user } }) => {
+      return Boolean(user)
+    },
+    // highlight-end
+  },
+}
+```
+
+<Banner type="success">
+  <strong>Tip:</strong>
+  Return a [Query](../queries/overview) to limit the Documents to only those that match the constraint. This can be helpful to restrict users' access to specific Documents. [More details](../queries/overview).
+</Banner>
+
+As your application becomes more complex, you may want to define your function in a separate file and import them into your Collection Config:
+
+```ts
+import type { Access } from 'payload'
+
+export const canReadPage: Access = ({ req: { user } }) => {
+  // Allow authenticated users
   if (user) {
     return true
   }
-  // using a query constraint, guest users can access when a field named 'isPublic' is set to true
+
+  // By returning a Query, guest users can read public Documents
+  // Note: this assumes you have a `isPublic` checkbox field on your Collection
   return {
-    // assumes we have a checkbox field named 'isPublic'
     isPublic: {
       equals: true,
     },
@@ -103,55 +147,96 @@ const canReadPage: Access = ({ req: { user } }) => {
 }
 ```
 
+The following arguments are provided to the `read` function:
+
+| Option    | Description                                                                |
+| --------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`req`** | The [Request](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Request) object containing the currently authenticated `user`. |
+| **`id`**  | `id` of document requested, if within `findByID`.                           |
+
 ### Update
 
-Update access functions can return a boolean result or optionally return a [query constraint](/docs/queries/overview) to limit the document(s) that can be updated by the currently authenticated user. For example, returning a `query` from the `update` Access Control is helpful in cases where you would like to restrict a user to only being able to update the documents containing a `createdBy` relationship field equal to the user's ID.
+Returns a boolean which allows/denies access to the `update` request.
 
-**Available argument properties:**
-
-| Option     | Description                                                                |
-| ---------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`req`**  | The Express `request` object containing the currently authenticated `user` |
-| **`id`**   | `id` of document requested to update                                       |
-| **`data`** | The data passed to update the document with                                |
-
-**Example:**
+To add update Access Control to a Collection, use the `update` property in the [Collection Config](../collections/overview):
 
 ```ts
-import { Access } from 'payload/config'
+import type { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
 
-const canUpdateUser: Access = ({ req: { user }, id }) => {
-  // allow users with a role of 'admin'
+export const CollectionWithUpdateAccess: CollectionConfig = {
+  // ...
+  access: {
+    // highlight-start
+    update: ({ req: { user }}) => {
+      return Boolean(user)
+    },
+    // highlight-end
+  },
+}
+```
+
+<Banner type="success">
+  <strong>Tip:</strong>
+  Return a [Query](../queries/overview) to limit the Documents to only those that match the constraint. This can be helpful to restrict users' access to specific Documents. [More details](../queries/overview).
+</Banner>
+
+As your application becomes more complex, you may want to define your function in a separate file and import them into your Collection Config:
+
+```ts
+import type { Access } from 'payload'
+
+export const canUpdateUser: Access = ({ req: { user }, id }) => {
+  // Allow users with a role of 'admin'
   if (user.roles && user.roles.some((role) => role === 'admin')) {
     return true
   }
+
   // allow any other users to update only oneself
   return user.id === id
 }
 ```
 
+The following arguments are provided to the `update` function:
+
+| Option     | Description                                                                |
+| ---------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`req`**  | The [Request](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Request) object containing the currently authenticated `user`. |
+| **`id`**   | `id` of document requested to update.                                       |
+| **`data`** | The data passed to update the document with.                                |
+
 ### Delete
 
 Similarly to the Update function, returns a boolean or a [query constraint](/docs/queries/overview) to limit which documents can be deleted by which users.
 
-**Available argument properties:**
-
-| Option    | Description                                                                                         |
-| --------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`req`** | The Express `request` object with additional `user` property, which is the currently logged in user |
-| **`id`**  | `id` of document requested to delete                                                                |
-
-**Example:**
+To add delete Access Control to a Collection, use the `delete` property in the [Collection Config](../collections/overview):
 
 ```ts
-import { Access } from 'payload/config'
+import type { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
 
-const canDeleteCustomer: Access = async ({ req, id }) => {
+export const CollectionWithDeleteAccess: CollectionConfig = {
+  // ...
+  access: {
+    // highlight-start
+    delete: ({ req: { user }}) => {
+      return Boolean(user)
+    },
+    // highlight-end
+  },
+}
+```
+
+As your application becomes more complex, you may want to define your function in a separate file and import them into your Collection Config:
+
+```ts
+import type { Access } from 'payload'
+
+export const canDeleteCustomer: Access = async ({ req, id }) => {
   if (!id) {
-    // allow the admin UI to show controls to delete since it is indeterminate without the id
+    // allow the admin UI to show controls to delete since it is indeterminate without the `id`
     return true
   }
-  // query another collection using the id
+
+  // Query another Collection using the `id`
   const result = await req.payload.find({
     collection: 'contracts',
     limit: 0,
@@ -165,22 +250,90 @@ const canDeleteCustomer: Access = async ({ req, id }) => {
 }
 ```
 
+The following arguments are provided to the `delete` function:
+
+| Option    | Description                                                                                         |
+| --------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`req`** | The [Request](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Request) object with additional `user` property, which is the currently logged in user. |
+| **`id`**  | `id` of document requested to delete.
+
 ### Admin
 
-If the Collection is [used to access the Payload Admin panel](/docs/admin/overview#the-admin-user-collection), the `Admin` Access Control function determines whether or not the currently logged in user can access the admin UI.
+If the Collection is use to access the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview#the-admin-user-collection), the `Admin` Access Control function determines whether or not the currently logged in user can access the admin UI.
 
-**Available argument properties:**
+To add Admin Access Control to a Collection, use the `admin` property in the [Collection Config](../collections/overview):
+
+```ts
+import type { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
+
+export const CollectionWithAdminAccess: CollectionConfig = {
+  // ...
+  access: {
+    // highlight-start
+    admin: ({ req: { user }}) => {
+      return Boolean(user)
+    },
+    // highlight-end
+  },
+}
+```
+
+The following arguments are provided to the `admin` function:
 
 | Option    | Description                                                                |
 | --------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`req`** | The Express `request` object containing the currently authenticated `user` |
+| **`req`** | The [Request](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Request) object containing the currently authenticated `user`. |
 
 ### Unlock
 
-Determines which users can [unlock](/docs/authentication/operations#unlock) other users who may be blocked from authenticating successfully due to [failing too many login attempts](/docs/authentication/config#options).
+Determines which users can [unlock](/docs/authentication/operations#unlock) other users who may be blocked from authenticating successfully due to [failing too many login attempts](/docs/authentication/overview#options).
 
-**Available argument properties:**
+To add Unlock Access Control to a Collection, use the `unlock` property in the [Collection Config](../collections/overview):
+
+```ts
+import type { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
+
+export const CollectionWithUnlockAccess: CollectionConfig = {
+  // ...
+  access: {
+    // highlight-start
+    unlock: ({ req: { user }}) => {
+      return Boolean(user)
+    },
+    // highlight-end
+  },
+}
+```
+
+The following arguments are provided to the `unlock` function:
 
 | Option    | Description                                                                |
 | --------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`req`** | The Express `request` object containing the currently authenticated `user` |
+| **`req`** | The [Request](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Request) object containing the currently authenticated `user`. |
+
+### Read Versions
+
+If the Collection has [Versions](../versions/overview) enabled, the `readVersions` Access Control function determines whether or not the currently logged in user can access the version history of a Document.
+
+To add Read Versions Access Control to a Collection, use the `readVersions` property in the [Collection Config](../collections/overview):
+
+```ts
+import type { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
+
+export const CollectionWithVersionsAccess: CollectionConfig = {
+  // ...
+  access: {
+    // highlight-start
+    readVersions: ({ req: { user }}) => {
+      return Boolean(user)
+    },
+    // highlight-end
+  },
+}
+```
+
+The following arguments are provided to the `readVersions` function:
+
+| Option    | Description                                                                |
+| --------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`req`** | The [Request](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Request) object containing the currently authenticated `user`. |

docs/access-control/fields.mdx

@@ -1,25 +1,39 @@
 ---
 title: Field-level Access Control
 label: Fields
-order: 30
+order: 40
 desc: Field-level Access Control is specified within a field's config, and allows you to define which users can create, read or update Fields.
-keywords: fields, access control, permissions, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, express
+keywords: fields, access control, permissions, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
 ---
 
-Field Access Control is specified with functions inside a field's config. All field-level Controls return a boolean value to allow or deny access for the specified operation. No field-level Access Controls support returning query constraints. All Access Control functions accept one `args` argument.
+Field Access Control is [Access Control](../access-control) used to restrict access to specific [Fields](../fields/overview) within a Document.
 
-## Available Controls
-
-| Function                | Purpose                                                                          |
-| ----------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **[`create`](#create)** | Allows or denies the ability to set a field's value when creating a new document |
-| **[`read`](#read)**     | Allows or denies the ability to read a field's value                             |
-| **[`update`](#update)** | Allows or denies the ability to update a field's value                           |
-
-**Example Collection config:**
+To add Access Control to a Field, use the `access` property in your [Field Config](../fields/overview):
 
 ```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types';
+import type { Field } from 'payload';
+
+export const FieldWithAccessControl: Field = {
+  // ...
+  access: { // highlight-line
+    // ...
+  },
+}
+```
+
+<Banner type="warning">
+  <strong>Note:</strong>
+  Field Access Controls does not support returning [Query](../queries/overview) constraints like [Collection Access Control](./collections) does.
+</Banner>
+
+## Config Options
+
+Access Control is specific to the operation of the request.
+
+To add Access Control to a Field, use the `access` property in the [Field Config](../fields/overview):
+
+```ts
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload';
 
 export const Posts: CollectionConfig = {
   slug: 'posts',
@@ -39,6 +53,14 @@ export const Posts: CollectionConfig = {
 };
 ```
 
+The following options are available:
+
+| Function                | Purpose                                                                          |
+| ----------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`create`** | Allows or denies the ability to set a field's value when creating a new document. [More details](#create). |
+| **`read`**     | Allows or denies the ability to read a field's value. [More details](#read).       |
+| **`update`** | Allows or denies the ability to update a field's value [More details](#update).    |
+
 ### Create
 
 Returns a boolean which allows or denies the ability to set a field's value when creating a new document. If `false` is returned, any passed values will be discarded.
@@ -47,7 +69,7 @@ Returns a boolean which allows or denies the ability to set a field's value when
 
 | Option            | Description                                                                |
 | ----------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`req`**         | The Express `request` object containing the currently authenticated `user` |
+| **`req`**         | The [Request](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Request) object containing the currently authenticated `user` |
 | **`data`**        | The full data passed to create the document.                               |
 | **`siblingData`** | Immediately adjacent field data passed to create the document.             |
 
@@ -59,7 +81,7 @@ Returns a boolean which allows or denies the ability to read a field's value. If
 
 | Option            | Description                                                                |
 | ----------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`req`**         | The Express `request` object containing the currently authenticated `user` |
+| **`req`**         | The [Request](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Request) object containing the currently authenticated `user` |
 | **`id`**          | `id` of the document being read                                            |
 | **`doc`**         | The full document data.                                                    |
 | **`siblingData`** | Immediately adjacent field data of the document being read.                |
@@ -74,7 +96,7 @@ If `false` is returned and you attempt to update the field's value, the operatio
 
 | Option            | Description                                                                |
 | ----------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`req`**         | The Express `request` object containing the currently authenticated `user` |
+| **`req`**         | The [Request](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Request) object containing the currently authenticated `user` |
 | **`id`**          | `id` of the document being updated                                         |
 | **`data`**        | The full data passed to update the document.                               |
 | **`siblingData`** | Immediately adjacent field data passed to update the document with.        |

docs/access-control/globals.mdx

@@ -1,37 +1,44 @@
 ---
 title: Globals Access Control
 label: Globals
-order: 40
+order: 30
 desc: Global-level Access Control is specified within each Global's `access` property and allows you to define which users can read or update Globals.
-keywords: globals, access control, permissions, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, express
+keywords: globals, access control, permissions, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
 ---
 
-You can define Global-level Access Control within each Global's `access` property. All Access Control functions accept one `args` argument.
+Global Access Control is [Access Control](../access-control) used to restrict access to [Global](../globals/overview) Documents, as well as what they can and cannot see within the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview) as it relates to that Global.
 
-\*\*Available argument properties:
-
-## Available Controls
-
-| Function                | Allows/Denies Access                   |
-| ----------------------- | -------------------------------------- |
-| **[`read`](#read)**     | Used in the `findOne` Global operation |
-| **[`update`](#update)** | Used in the `update` Global operation  |
-
-**Example Global config:**
+To add Access Control to a Global, use the `access` property in your [Global Config](../configuration/globals):
 
 ```ts
-import { GlobalConfig } from 'payload/types'
+import type { GlobalConfig } from 'payload';
 
-const Header: GlobalConfig = {
-  slug: 'header',
+export const GlobalWithAccessControl: GlobalConfig = {
+  // ...
+  access: { // highlight-line
+    // ...
+  },
+}
+```
+
+## Config Options
+
+Access Control is specific to the operation of the request.
+
+To add Access Control to a [Global](../configuration/globals), use the `access` property in the [Global Config](../globals/overview):
+
+```ts
+import { GlobalConfig } from 'payload'
+
+const GlobalWithAccessControl: GlobalConfig = {
+  // ...
   // highlight-start
   access: {
-    read: ({ req: { user } }) => {
-      /* */
-    },
-    update: ({ req: { user } }) => {
-      /* */
-    },
+    read: ({ req: { user } }) => {...},
+    update: ({ req: { user } }) => {...},
+
+    // Version-enabled Globals only
+    readVersion: () => {...},
   },
   // highlight-end
 }
@@ -39,23 +46,97 @@ const Header: GlobalConfig = {
 export default Header
 ```
 
+The following options are available:
+
+| Function                | Allows/Denies Access                   |
+| ----------------------- | -------------------------------------- |
+| **`read`**     | Used in the `findOne` Global operation. [More details](#read). |
+| **`update`** | Used in the `update` Global operation. [More details](#update). |
+
+If a Global supports [Versions](../versions/overview), the following additional options are available:
+
+| Function           | Allows/Denies Access                                                                                                   |
+| ------------------ | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`readVersions`** | Used to control who can read versions, and who can't. Will automatically restrict the Admin UI version viewing access. [More details](#read-versions). |
+
 ### Read
 
-Returns a boolean result or optionally a [query constraint](/docs/queries/overview) which limits who can read this global based on its current properties.
+Returns a boolean result or optionally a [query constraint](../queries/overview) which limits who can read this global based on its current properties.
 
-**Available argument properties:**
+To add read Access Control to a [Global](../configuration/globals), use the `read` property in the [Global Config](../globals/overview):
+
+```ts
+import { GlobalConfig } from 'payload'
+
+const Header: GlobalConfig = {
+  // ...
+  // highlight-start
+  read: {
+    read: ({ req: { user } }) => {
+      return Boolean(user)
+    },
+  }
+  // highlight-end
+}
+```
+
+The following arguments are provided to the `read` function:
 
 | Option    | Description                                                                |
 | --------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`req`** | The Express `request` object containing the currently authenticated `user` |
+| **`req`** | The [Request](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Request) object containing the currently authenticated `user`. |
 
 ### Update
 
-Returns a boolean result or optionally a [query constraint](/docs/queries/overview) which limits who can update this global based on its current properties.
+Returns a boolean result or optionally a [query constraint](../queries/overview) which limits who can update this global based on its current properties.
 
-**Available argument properties:**
+To add update Access Control to a [Global](../configuration/globals), use the `access` property in the [Global Config](../globals/overview):
+
+```ts
+import { GlobalConfig } from 'payload'
+
+const Header: GlobalConfig = {
+  // ...
+  // highlight-start
+  access: {
+    update: ({ req: { user }, data }) => {
+      return Boolean(user)
+    },
+  }
+  // highlight-end
+}
+```
+
+The following arguments are provided to the `update` function:
 
 | Option     | Description                                                                |
 | ---------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`req`**  | The Express `request` object containing the currently authenticated `user` |
+| **`req`**  | The [Request](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Request) object containing the currently authenticated `user`. |
 | **`data`** | The data passed to update the global with.                                 |
+
+### Read Versions
+
+If the Global has [Versions](../versions/overview) enabled, the `readVersions` Access Control function determines whether or not the currently logged in user can access the version history of a Document.
+
+To add Read Versions Access Control to a Collection, use the `readVersions` property in the [Global Config](../globals/overview):
+
+```ts
+import type { GlobalConfig } from 'payload'
+
+export const GlobalWithVersionsAccess: GlobalConfig = {
+  // ...
+  access: {
+    // highlight-start
+    readVersions: ({ req: { user }}) => {
+      return Boolean(user)
+    },
+    // highlight-end
+  },
+}
+```
+
+The following arguments are provided to the `readVersions` function:
+
+| Option    | Description                                                                |
+| --------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`req`** | The [Request](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Request) object containing the currently authenticated `user`. |

docs/access-control/overview.mdx

@@ -2,82 +2,59 @@
 title: Access Control
 label: Overview
 order: 10
-desc: Payload makes it simple to define and manage access control. By declaring roles, you can set permissions and restrict what your users can interact with.
-keywords: overview, access control, permissions, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, express
+desc: Payload makes it simple to define and manage Access Control. By declaring roles, you can set permissions and restrict what your users can interact with.
+keywords: overview, access control, permissions, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
 ---
 
-Access control within Payload is extremely powerful while remaining easy and intuitive to manage. Declaring who should have access to what documents is no more complex than writing a simple JavaScript function that either returns a `boolean` or a [`query`](/docs/queries/overview) constraint to restrict which documents users can interact with.
-
 <YouTube id="DoPLyXG26Dg" title="Overview of Payload Access Control" />
 
-**Example use cases:**
+Access Control determines what a user can and cannot do with any given Document, as well as what they can and cannot see within the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview). By implementing Access Control, you can define granular restrictions based on the user, their roles (RBAC), Document data, or any other criteria your application requires.
 
-- Allowing anyone `read` access to all `Post`s
-- Only allowing public access to `Post`s where a `status` field is equal to `published`
-- Giving only `User`s with a `role` field equal to `admin` the ability to delete `Page`(s)
-- Allowing anyone to create `ContactSubmission`s, but only logged in users to `read`, `update` or `delete` them
-- Restricting a `User` to only be able to see their own `Order`(s), but no others
-- Allowing `User`s that belong to a certain `Organization` to access only that `Organization`'s `Resource`s
+Access Control functions are scoped to the _operation_, meaning you can have different rules for `create`, `read`, `update`, `delete`, etc. Access Control functions are executed _before_ any changes are made and _before_ any operations are completed. This allows you to determine if the user has the necessary permissions before fulfilling the request.
 
-### Default Settings
+There are many use cases for Access Control, including:
 
-**By default, all Collections and Globals require that a user is logged in to be able to interact in any way.** The default Access Control function evaluates the `user` from the Express `req` and returns `true` if a user is logged in, and `false` if not.
+- Allowing anyone `read` access to all posts
+- Only allowing public access to posts where a `status` field is equal to `published`
+- Giving only users with a `role` field equal to `admin` the ability to delete posts
+- Allowing anyone to submit contact forms, but only logged in users to `read`, `update` or `delete` them
+- Restricting a user to only be able to see their own orders, but noone else's
+- Allowing users that belong to a certain organization to access only that organization's resources
 
-**Default Access function:**
+There are three main types of Access Control in Payload:
+
+- [Collection Access Control](./collections)
+- [Global Access Control](./globals)
+- [Field Access Control](./fields)
+
+## Default Access Control
+
+Payload provides default Access Control so that your data is secured behind [Authentication](../authentication) without additional configuration. To do this, Payload sets a default function that simply checks if a user is present on the request. You can override this default behavior by defining your own Access Control functions as needed.
+
+Here is the default Access Control that Payload provides:
 
 ```ts
 const defaultPayloadAccess = ({ req: { user } }) => {
   // Return `true` if a user is found
   // and `false` if it is undefined or null
-  return Boolean(user)
+  return Boolean(user) // highlight-line
 }
 ```
 
-<Banner type="success">
-  <strong>Note:</strong>
-  <br />
-  In the Local API, all Access Control functions are skipped by default, allowing your server to do
-  whatever it needs. But, you can opt back in by setting the option <strong>
-    overrideAccess
-  </strong>{' '}
-  to <strong>false</strong>.
+<Banner type="warning">
+  <strong>Important:</strong>
+  In the [Local API](../local-api/overview), all Access Control is _skipped_ by default. This allows your server to have full control over your application. To opt back in, you can set the `overrideAccess` option to `false` in your requests.
 </Banner>
 
-### Access Control Types
+## The Access Operation
 
-You can manage access within Payload on three different levels:
+The Admin Panel responds dynamically to your changes to Access Control. For example, if you restrict editing `ExampleCollection` to only users that feature an "admin" role, Payload will **hide** that Collection from the Admin Panel entirely. This is super powerful and allows you to control who can do what within your Admin Panel using the same functions that secure your APIs.
 
-- [Collections](/docs/access-control/collections)
-- [Fields](/docs/access-control/fields)
-- [Globals](/docs/access-control/globals)
-
-### When Access Control is Executed
-
-<Banner type="success">
-  <strong>Note:</strong>
-  <br />
-  Access control functions are utilized in two places. It's important to understand how and when
-  your access control is executed.
-</Banner>
-
-#### As you execute operations
-
-When you perform Payload operations like `create`, `read`, `update`, and `delete`, your access control functions will be executed before any changes or operations are completed.
-
-#### Within the Admin UI
-
-The Payload Admin UI responds dynamically to the access control that you define. For example, if you restrict editing a `ExampleCollection` to only users that feature a `role` of `admin`, the Payload Admin UI will **hide** the `ExampleCollection` from the Admin UI entirely. This is super powerful and allows you to control who can do what with your Admin UI.
-
-To accomplish this, Payload ships with an `Access` operation, which is executed when a user logs into the Admin UI. Payload will execute each one of your access control functions, across all collections, globals, and fields, at the top level and return a response that contains a reflection of what the currently authenticated user can do with your application.
-
-### Argument Availability
+To accomplish this, Payload exposes the [Access Operation](../authentication/operations#access). Upon login, Payload executes each Access Control function at the top level, across all Collections, Globals, and Fields, and returns a response that contains a reflection of what the currently authenticated user can do within your application.
 
 <Banner type="warning">
   <strong>Important:</strong>
-  <br />
-  When your access control functions are executed via the <strong>access</strong> operation, the{' '}
-  <strong>id</strong> and <strong>data</strong> arguments will be <strong>undefined</strong>,
-  because Payload is executing your functions without referencing a specific document.
+  When your access control functions are executed via the [Access Operation](../authentication/operations#access),  the `id` and `data` arguments will be `undefined`. This is because Payload is executing your functions without referencing a specific Document.
 </Banner>
 
-If you use `id` or `data` within your access control functions, make sure to check that they are defined first. If they are not, then you can assume that your access control is being executed via the `access` operation, to determine solely what the user can do within the Admin UI.
+If you use `id` or `data` within your access control functions, make sure to check that they are defined first. If they are not, then you can assume that your Access Control is being executed via the Access Operation to determine solely what the user can do within the Admin Panel.

docs/admin/bundlers.mdx

@@ -1,54 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Bundlers
-label: Bundlers
-order: 60
-desc: Bundlers are used to bundle the code that serves Payload's Admin Panel.
----
-
-Payload has two official bundlers, the [Webpack Bundler](/docs/admin/webpack) and the [Vite Bundler](/docs/admin/vite). You must install a bundler to use the admin panel.
-
-##### Install a bundler
-
-Webpack (recommended):
-
-```text
-yarn add @payloadcms/bundler-webpack
-```
-
-Vite (beta):
-
-```text
-yarn add @payloadcms/bundler-vite
-```
-
-##### Configure the bundler
-
-```ts
-// payload.config.ts
-
-import { buildConfig } from 'payload/config'
-import { webpackBundler } from '@payloadcms/bundler-webpack'
-// import { viteBundler } from '@payloadcms/bundler-vite'
-
-export default buildConfig({
-  // highlight-start
-  admin: {
-    bundler: webpackBundler(), // or viteBundler()
-  },
-  // highlight-end
-})
-```
-
-### What are bundlers?
-
-At their core, a bundler's main goal is to take a bunch of files and turn them into a few optimized files that you ship to the browser. The admin UI has a root `index.html` entry point, and from there the bundler traverses the dependency tree, bundling all of the files that are required from that point on.
-
-Since the bundled file is sent to the browser, it can't include any server-only code. You will need to remove any server-only code from your admin UI before bundling it. You can learn more about [excluding server code](/docs/admin/excluding-server-code) section.
-
-<Banner type="warning">
-  <strong>Using environment variables in the admin UI</strong>
-  <br />
-  Bundles should not contain sensitive information. By default, Payload excludes env variables from
-  the bundle. If you need to use env variables in your payload config, you need to prefix them with
-  `PAYLOAD_PUBLIC_` to make them available to the client-side code.
-</Banner>

docs/admin/collections.mdx

@@ -0,0 +1,173 @@
+---
+title: Collection Admin Config
+label: Collections
+order: 20
+desc:
+keywords: admin, components, custom, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
+---
+
+The behavior of [Collections](../configuration/collections) within the [Admin Panel](./overview) can be fully customized to fit the needs of your application. This includes grouping or hiding their navigation links, adding [Custom Components](./components), selecting which fields to display in the List View, and more.
+
+To configure Admin Options for Collections, use the `admin` property in your Collection Config:
+
+```ts
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
+
+export const MyCollection: CollectionConfig = {
+  // ...
+  admin: { // highlight-line
+    // ...
+  },
+}
+```
+
+## Admin Options
+
+The following options are available:
+
+| Option                       | Description                                                                                                                                                                                           |
+| ---------------------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`group`**                      | Text used as a label for grouping Collection and Global links together in the navigation.                                                                                                             |
+| **`hidden`**                     | Set to true or a function, called with the current user, returning true to exclude this Collection from navigation and admin routing.                                                                 |
+| **`hooks`**                      | Admin-specific hooks for this Collection. [More details](../hooks/collections).                                                                                                                                        |
+| **`useAsTitle`**                 | Specify a top-level field to use for a document title throughout the Admin Panel. If no field is defined, the ID of the document is used as the title.                                                |
+| **`description`**                | Text or React component to display below the Collection label in the List View to give editors more information.                                                                                      |
+| **`defaultColumns`**             | Array of field names that correspond to which columns to show by default in this Collection's List View.                                                                                              |
+| **`hideAPIURL`**                 | Hides the "API URL" meta field while editing documents within this Collection.                                                                                                                        |
+| **`enableRichTextLink`**         | The [Rich Text](../fields/rich-text) field features a `Link` element which allows for users to automatically reference related documents within their rich text. Set to `true` by default.         |
+| **`enableRichTextRelationship`** | The [Rich Text](../fields/rich-text) field features a `Relationship` element which allows for users to automatically reference related documents within their rich text. Set to `true` by default. |
+| **`meta`**                       | Metadata overrides to apply to the Admin Panel. Included properties are `description` and `openGraph`.                                                                           |
+| **`preview`**                    | Function to generate preview URLs within the Admin Panel that can point to your app. [More details](#preview).                                                                                                |
+| **`livePreview`**                | Enable real-time editing for instant visual feedback of your front-end application. [More details](../live-preview/overview).                                                                              |
+| **`components`**                 | Swap in your own React components to be used within this Collection. [More details](#components).                                                                                       |
+| **`listSearchableFields`**       | Specify which fields should be searched in the List search view. [More details](#list-searchable-fields).                                                                                                      |
+| **`pagination`**             | Set pagination-specific options for this Collection. [More details](#pagination).                                                                                                                              |
+
+### Components
+
+Collections can set their own [Custom Components](./components) which only apply to [Collection](../configuration/collections)-specific UI within the [Admin Panel](./overview). This includes elements such as the Save Button, or entire layouts such as the Edit View.
+
+To override Collection Components, use the `admin.components` property in your [Collection Config](../configuration/collections):
+
+```ts
+import type { SanitizedCollectionConfig } from 'payload'
+import { CustomSaveButton } from './CustomSaveButton'
+
+export const MyCollection: SanitizedCollectionConfig = {
+  // ...
+  admin: {
+    components: { // highlight-line
+      // ...
+    },
+  },
+}
+```
+
+The following options are available:
+
+| Path                       | Description                                                                                                            |
+| -------------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`beforeList`**           | An array of components to inject _before_ the built-in List View                                                          |
+| **`beforeListTable`**      | An array of components to inject _before_ the built-in List View's table                                                  |
+| **`afterList`**            | An array of components to inject _after_ the built-in List View                                                           |
+| **`afterListTable`**       | An array of components to inject _after_ the built-in List View's table                                                   |
+| **`edit.SaveButton`**      | Replace the default Save Button with a Custom Component. [Drafts](../versions/drafts) must be disabled.                                     |
+| **`edit.SaveDraftButton`** | Replace the default Save Draft Button with a Custom Component. [Drafts](../versions/drafts) must be enabled and autosave must be disabled. |
+| **`edit.PublishButton`**   | Replace the default Publish Button with a Custom Component. [Drafts](../versions/drafts) must be enabled.                                  |
+| **`edit.PreviewButton`**   | Replace the default Preview Button with a Custom Component. [Preview](#preview) must be enabled.                                         |
+| **`views`**                | Override or create new views within the Admin Panel. [More details](./views).                                     |
+
+<Banner type="success">
+  <strong>Note:</strong>
+  For details on how to build Custom Components, see [Building Custom Components](./components#building-custom-components).
+</Banner>
+
+### Preview
+
+It is possible to display a Preview Button within the Edit View of the Admin Panel. This will allow editors to visit the frontend of your app the corresponds to the document they are actively editing. This way they can preview the latest, potentially unpublished changes.
+
+To configure the Preview Button, set the `admin.preview` property to a function in your [Collection Config](../configuration/collections):
+
+```ts
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
+
+export const Posts: CollectionConfig = {
+  // ...
+  admin: {
+    // highlight-start
+    preview: (doc, { locale }) => {
+      if (doc?.slug) {
+        return `/${doc.slug}?locale=${locale}`
+      }
+
+      return null
+    },
+    // highlight-end
+  },
+}
+```
+
+The preview function receives two arguments:
+
+| Argument | Description |
+| --- | --- |
+| **`doc`** | The Document being edited. |
+| **`ctx`** | An object containing `locale` and `token` properties. The `token` is the currently logged-in user's JWT. |
+
+<Banner type="success">
+  <strong>Note:</strong>
+  For fully working example of this, check of the official [Draft Preview Example](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/examples/draft-preview) in the [Examples Directory](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/examples).
+</Banner>
+
+### Pagination
+
+All Collections receive their own List View which displays a paginated list of documents that can be sorted and filtered. The pagination behavior of the List View can be customized on a per-Collection basis, and uses the same [Pagination](../queries/pagination) API that Payload provides.
+
+To configure pagination options, use the `admin.pagination` property in your [Collection Config](../configuration/collections):
+
+```ts
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
+
+export const Posts: CollectionConfig = {
+  // ...
+  admin: {
+    // highlight-start
+    pagination: {
+      defaultLimit: 10,
+      limits: [10, 20, 50],
+    },
+    // highlight-end
+  },
+}
+```
+
+The following options are available:
+
+| Option         | Description                                                                                         |
+| -------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| `defaultLimit` | Integer that specifies the default per-page limit that should be used. Defaults to 10.              |
+| `limits`       | Provide an array of integers to use as per-page options for admins to choose from in the List View. |
+
+### List Searchable Fields
+
+In the List View, there is a "search" box that allows you to quickly find a document through a simple text search. By default, it searches on the ID field. If defined, the `admin.useAsTitle` field is used. Or, you can explicitly define which fields to search based on the needs of your application.
+
+To define which fields should be searched, use the `admin.listSearchableFields` property in your [Collection Config](../configuration/collections):
+
+```ts
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
+
+export const Posts: CollectionConfig = {
+  // ...
+  admin: {
+    // highlight-start
+    listSearchableFields: ['title', 'slug'],
+    // highlight-end
+  },
+}
+```
+
+<Banner type="warning">
+  <strong>Tip:</strong>
+  If you are adding `listSearchableFields`, make sure you index each of these fields so your admin queries can remain performant.
+</Banner>

docs/admin/customizing-css.mdx

@@ -1,51 +1,73 @@
 ---
 title: Customizing CSS & SCSS
 label: Customizing CSS
-order: 40
-desc: Customize your Payload admin panel further by adding your own CSS or SCSS style sheet to the configuration, powerful theme and design options are waiting for you.
-keywords: admin, css, scss, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, express
+order: 80
+desc: Customize the Payload Admin Panel further by adding your own CSS or SCSS style sheet to the configuration, powerful theme and design options are waiting for you.
+keywords: admin, css, scss, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
 ---
 
-### Adding your own CSS / SCSS
+Customizing the Payload [Admin Panel](./overview) through CSS alone is one of the easiest and most powerful ways to customize the look and feel of the dashboard. To allow for this level of customization, Payload:
 
-You can add your own CSS by providing your base Payload config with a path to your own CSS or SCSS. Customize the styling of any part of the Payload dashboard as necessary.
+1. Exposes a [root-level stylesheet](#global-css) for you to easily to inject custom selectors
+1. Provides a [CSS library](#css-library) that can be easily overridden or extended
+1. Uses [BEM naming conventions](http://getbem.com) so that class names are globally accessible
 
-To do so, provide your base Payload config with a path to your own stylesheet. It can be either a CSS or SCSS file.
+To customize the CSS within the Admin UI, determine scope and change you'd like to make, and then add your own CSS or SCSS to the configuration as needed.
 
-**Example in payload.config.js:**
+## Global CSS
 
-```ts
-import { buildConfig } from 'payload/config'
-import path from 'path'
+Global CSS refers to the CSS that is applied to the entire [Admin Panel](./overview). This is where you can have a significant impact to the look and feel of the Admin UI through just a few lines of code.
 
-const config = buildConfig({
-  admin: {
-    css: path.resolve(__dirname, 'relative/path/to/stylesheet.scss'),
-  },
-})
+You can add your own global CSS through the root `custom.scss` file of your app. This file is loaded into the root of the Admin Panel and can be used to inject custom selectors or styles however needed.
+
+Here is an example of how you might target the Dashboard View and change the background color:
+
+```scss
+.dashboard {
+  background-color: red; // highlight-line
+}
 ```
 
-### Overriding built-in styles
-
-To make it as easy as possible for you to override our styles, Payload uses [BEM naming conventions](http://getbem.com/) for all CSS within the Admin UI. If you provide your own CSS, you can override any built-in styles easily.
-
-In addition to adding your own style definitions, you can also override Payload's built-in CSS variables. We use as much as possible behind the scenes, and you can override any of them that you'd like to.
-
-You can find the built-in Payload CSS variables within [`./src/admin/scss/app.scss`](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/blob/main/packages/payload/src/admin/scss/app.scss) and [`./src/admin/scss/colors.scss`](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/blob/main/packages/payload/src/admin/scss/colors.scss). The following variables are defined and can be overridden:
-
-- Breakpoints
-- Base color shades (white to black by default)
-- Success / warning / error color shades
-- Theme-specific colors (background, input background, text color, etc.)
-- Elevation colors (used to determine how "bright" something should be when compared to the background)
-- Fonts
-- Horizontal gutter
-
-#### Dark mode
-
 <Banner type="warning">
-  If you're overriding colors or theme elevations, make sure to consider how your changes will
-  affect dark mode.
+  <strong>Note:</strong>
+  If you are building [Custom Components](./overview), it is best to import your own stylesheets directly into your components, rather than using the global stylesheet. You can continue to use the [CSS library](#css-library) as needed.
 </Banner>
 
-By default, Payload automatically overrides all `--theme-elevation`s and inverts all success / warning / error shades to suit dark mode. We also update some base theme variables like `--theme-bg`, `--theme-text`, etc.
+## Re-using Payload SCSS variables and utilities
+
+You can re-use Payload's SCSS variables and utilities in your own stylesheets by importing it from the UI package.
+
+```scss
+@import '~@payloadcms/ui/scss';
+```
+
+## CSS Library
+
+To make it as easy as possible for you to override default styles, Payload uses [BEM naming conventions](http://getbem.com/) for all CSS within the Admin UI. If you provide your own CSS, you can override any built-in styles easily, including targeting nested components and their various component states.
+
+You can also override Payload's built-in [CSS Variables](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/CSS/Using_CSS_custom_properties). These variables are widely consumed by the Admin Panel, so modifying them has a significant impact on the look and feel of the Admin UI.
+
+The following variables are defined and can be overridden:
+
+- [Breakpoints](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/blob/beta/packages/ui/src/scss/queries.scss)
+- [Colors](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/blob/beta/packages/ui/src/scss/colors.scss)
+  - Base color shades (white to black by default)
+  - Success / warning / error color shades
+  - Theme-specific colors (background, input background, text color, etc.)
+  - Elevation colors (used to determine how "bright" something should be when compared to the background)
+- [Sizing](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/blob/beta/packages/ui/src/scss/app.scss)
+  - Horizontal gutter
+  - Transition speeds
+  - Font sizes
+  - Etc.
+
+For an up-to-date, comprehensive list of all available variables, please refer to the [Source Code](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/blob/main/packages/ui/src/scss).
+
+<Banner type="warning">
+  <strong>Warning:</strong>
+  If you're overriding colors or theme elevations, make sure to consider how [your changes will affect dark mode](#dark-mode).
+</Banner>
+
+#### Dark Mode
+
+Colors are designed to automatically adapt to theme of the [Admin Panel](./overview). By default, Payload automatically overrides all `--theme-elevation` colors and inverts all success / warning / error shades to suit dark mode. We also update some base theme variables like `--theme-bg`, `--theme-text`, etc.

docs/admin/environment-vars.mdx

@@ -1,27 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Environment Variables in Admin UI
-label: Environment Variables
-order: 100
-desc: NEEDS TO BE WRITTEN
----
-
-## Admin environment vars
-
-<Banner type="warning">
-  <strong>Important:</strong>
-  <br />
-  Be careful about what variables you provide to your client-side code. Analyze every single one to
-  make sure that you're not accidentally leaking anything that an attacker could exploit. Only keys
-  that are safe for anyone to read in plain text should be provided to your Admin panel.
-</Banner>
-
-By default, `env` variables are **not** provided to the Admin panel for security and safety reasons.
-But, Payload provides you with a way to still provide `env` vars to your frontend code.
-
-**Payload will automatically supply any present `env` variables that are prefixed with `PAYLOAD_PUBLIC_` directly to the Admin panel.**
-
-For example, if you've got the following environment variable:
-
-`PAYLOAD_PUBLIC_STRIPE_PUBLISHABLE_KEY=pk_test_XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX`
-
-This key will automatically be made available to the Payload bundle and can be referenced in your Admin component code as `process.env.PAYLOAD_PUBLIC_STRIPE_PUBLISHABLE_KEY`.

docs/admin/excluding-server-code.mdx

@@ -1,206 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Excluding server-only code from admin UI
-label: Excluding server code
-order: 70
-desc: Learn how to exclude server-only code from the Payload Admin UI bundle
----
-
-Because the Admin Panel browser bundle includes your Payload Config file, files using server-only modules need to be excluded.
-It's common for your config to rely on server only modules to perform logic in access control functions, hooks, and other contexts.
-
-Any file that imports a server-only module such as `fs`, `stripe`, `authorizenet`, `nodemailer`, etc. **cannot** be included in the browser bundle.
-
-#### Example Scenario
-
-Say we have a collection called `Subscriptions` that has a `beforeChange` hook that creates a Stripe subscription whenever a Subscription document is created in Payload.
-
-**Collection config**:
-
-```ts
-// collections/Subscriptions/index.ts
-
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
-import createStripeSubscription from './hooks/createStripeSubscription'
-
-export const Subscription: CollectionConfig = {
-  slug: 'subscriptions',
-  hooks: {
-    beforeChange: [createStripeSubscription],
-  },
-  fields: [
-    {
-      name: 'stripeSubscriptionID',
-      type: 'text',
-      required: true,
-    },
-  ],
-}
-```
-
-**Collection hook**:
-
-```ts
-// collections/Subscriptions/hooks/createStripeSubscription.ts
-
-// highlight-start
-import Stripe from 'stripe' // <-- server-only module
-// highlight-end
-
-const stripe = new Stripe(process.env.STRIPE_SECRET_KEY)
-
-export const createStripeSubscription = async ({ data, operation }) => {
-  if (operation === 'create') {
-    const dataWithStripeID = { ...data }
-
-    // use Stripe to create a Stripe subscription
-    const subscription = await stripe.subscriptions.create({
-      // Configure the subscription accordingly
-    })
-
-    // Automatically add the Stripe subscription ID
-    // to the data that will be saved to this Subscription doc
-    dataWithStripeID.stripeSubscriptionID = subscription.id
-
-    return dataWithStripeID
-  }
-
-  return data
-}
-```
-
-<Banner type="error">
-  <strong>Warning:</strong>
-  <br />
-  The above code is NOT production-ready and should not be referenced to create Stripe
-  subscriptions. Although creating a beforeChange hook is a completely valid spot to do things like
-  create subscriptions, the code above is incomplete and insecure, meant for explanation purposes
-  only.
-</Banner>
-
-**As-is, this collection will prevent your Admin panel from bundling or loading correctly, because Stripe relies on some Node-only packages.**
-
-#### How to fix this
-
-You need to make sure that you use `alias`es to tell your bundler to import "safe" files vs. attempting to import any server-side code that you need to get rid of. Depending on your bundler (Webpack, Vite, etc.) the steps involved may be slightly different.
-
-The basic idea is to create a file that exports an empty object, and then alias import paths of any files that import server-only modules to that empty object file.
-
-This way when your bundler goes to import a file that contains server-only modules, it will instead import the empty object file, which will not break the browser bundle.
-
-### Aliasing server-only modules
-
-To remove files that contain server-only modules from your bundle, you can use an `alias`.
-
-In the Subscriptions config file above, we are importing the hook like so:
-
-```ts
-// collections/Subscriptions/index.ts
-
-import createStripeSubscription from './hooks/createStripeSubscription'
-```
-
-By default the browser bundle will now include all the code from that file and any files down the tree. We know that the file imports `stripe`.
-
-To fix this, we need to alias the `createStripeSubscription` file to a different file that can safely be included in the browser bundle.
-
-First, we will create a mock file to replace the server-only file when bundling:
-
-```js
-// mocks/modules.js
-
-export default {}
-
-/**
- * NOTE: if you are destructuring an import
- * the mock file will need to export matching
- * variables as the destructured object.
- *
- * export const namedExport = {}
- */
-```
-
-Aliasing with [Webpack](/docs/admin/webpack) can be done by:
-
-```ts
-// payload.config.ts
-
-import { buildConfig } from 'payload/config'
-import { webpackBundler } from '@payloadcms/bundler-webpack'
-
-import { Subscriptions } from './collections/Subscriptions'
-
-const mockModulePath = path.resolve(__dirname, 'mocks/emptyObject.js')
-const fullFilePath = path.resolve(
-  __dirname,
-  'collections/Subscriptions/hooks/createStripeSubscription',
-)
-
-export default buildConfig({
-  collections: [Subscriptions],
-  admin: {
-    bundler: webpackBundler(),
-    webpack: (config) => {
-      return {
-        ...config,
-        resolve: {
-          ...config.resolve,
-          // highlight-start
-          alias: {
-            ...config.resolve.alias,
-            [fullFilePath]: mockModulePath,
-          },
-          // highlight-end
-        },
-      }
-    },
-  },
-})
-```
-
-Aliasing with [Vite](/docs/admin/vite) can be done by:
-
-```ts
-// payload.config.ts
-
-import { buildConfig } from 'payload/config'
-import { viteBundler } from '@payloadcms/bundler-vite'
-
-import { Subscriptions } from './collections/Subscriptions'
-
-const mockModulePath = path.resolve(__dirname, 'mocks/emptyObject.js')
-
-export default buildConfig({
-  collections: [Subscriptions],
-  admin: {
-    bundler: viteBundler(),
-    vite: (incomingViteConfig) => {
-      const existingAliases = incomingViteConfig?.resolve?.alias || {}
-      let aliasArray: { find: string | RegExp; replacement: string }[] = []
-
-      // Pass the existing Vite aliases
-      if (Array.isArray(existingAliases)) {
-        aliasArray = existingAliases
-      } else {
-        aliasArray = Object.values(existingAliases)
-      }
-
-      // highlight-start
-      // Add your own aliases using the find and replacement keys
-      // remember, vite aliases are exact-match only
-      aliasArray.push({
-        find: '../server-only-module',
-        replacement: path.resolve(__dirname, './path/to/browser-safe-module.js'),
-      })
-      // highlight-end
-
-      return {
-        ...incomingViteConfig,
-        resolve: {
-          ...(incomingViteConfig?.resolve || {}),
-          alias: aliasArray,
-        },
-      }
-    },
-  },
-})
-```

docs/admin/fields.mdx

@@ -0,0 +1,576 @@
+---
+title: Customizing Fields
+label: Customizing Fields
+order: 60
+desc:
+keywords:
+---
+
+[Fields](../fields/overview) within the [Admin Panel](./overview) can be endlessly customized in their appearance and behavior without affecting their underlying data structure. Fields are designed to withstand heavy modification or even complete replacement through the use of [Custom Field Components](#field-components), [Conditional Logic](#conditional-logic), [Custom Validations](../fields/overview#validation), and more.
+
+For example, your app might need to render a specific interface that Payload does not inherently support, such as a color picker. To do this, you could replace the default [Text Field](../fields/text) input with your own user-friendly component that formats the data into a valid color value.
+
+<Banner type="success">
+  <strong>Tip:</strong>
+  Don't see a built-in field type that you need? Build it! Using a combination of [Field Validations](../fields/overview#validation)
+  and [Custom Components](./components), you can override the entirety of how a component functions within the [Admin Panel](./overview) to effectively create your own field type.
+</Banner>
+
+## Admin Options
+
+You can customize the appearance and behavior of fields within the [Admin Panel](./overview) through the `admin` property of any [Field Config](../fields/overview):
+
+```ts
+import type { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
+
+export const CollectionConfig: CollectionConfig = {
+  // ...
+  fields: [
+    // ...
+    {
+      name: 'myField',
+      type: 'text',
+      admin: { // highlight-line
+        // ...
+      },
+    }
+  ]
+}
+```
+
+The following options are available:
+
+| Option              | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                                      |
+| ------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`condition`**         | Programmatically show / hide fields based on other fields. [More details](../admin/fields#conditional-logic).                                                                                               |
+| **`components`**        | All Field Components can be swapped out for [Custom Components](../admin/components) that you define. [More details](../admin/fields).                                                                             |
+| **`description`**       | Helper text to display alongside the field to provide more information for the editor. [More details](../admin/fields#description).                                                                                                 |
+| **`position`**          | Specify if the field should be rendered in the sidebar by defining `position: 'sidebar'`.                                                                                                                                        |
+| **`width`**             | Restrict the width of a field. You can pass any string-based value here, be it pixels, percentages, etc. This property is especially useful when fields are nested within a `Row` type where they can be organized horizontally. |
+| **`style`**         | [CSS Properties](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/CSS) to inject into the root element of the field.                                                                                                           |
+| **`className`**         | Attach a [CSS class attribute](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/CSS/Class_selectors) to the root DOM element of a field.                                                                                                                                                                      |
+| **`readOnly`**          | Setting a field to `readOnly` has no effect on the API whatsoever but disables the admin component's editability to prevent editors from modifying the field's value.                                                            |
+| **`disabled`**          | If a field is `disabled`, it is completely omitted from the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview).                                                                                                                                                         |
+| **`disableBulkEdit`**   | Set `disableBulkEdit` to `true` to prevent fields from appearing in the select options when making edits for multiple documents.                                                                                                 |
+| **`disableListColumn`** | Set `disableListColumn` to `true` to prevent fields from appearing in the list view column selector.                                                                                                                             |
+| **`disableListFilter`** | Set `disableListFilter` to `true` to prevent fields from appearing in the list view filter options.                                                                                                                              |
+| **`hidden`**            | Will transform the field into a `hidden` input type. Its value will still submit with requests in the Admin Panel, but the field itself will not be visible to editors.        |
+
+## Field Components
+
+Within the [Admin Panel](./overview), fields are rendered in three distinct places:
+
+- [Field](#the-field-component) - The actual form field rendered in the Edit View.
+- [Cell](#the-cell-component) - The table cell component rendered in the List View.
+- [Filter](#the-filter-component) - The filter component rendered in the List View.
+
+To easily swap in Field Components with your own, use the `admin.components` property in your [Field Config](../fields/overview):
+
+```ts
+import type { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
+
+export const CollectionConfig: CollectionConfig = {
+  // ...
+  fields: [
+    // ...
+    {
+      // ...
+      admin: {
+        components: { // highlight-line
+          // ...
+        },
+      },
+    }
+  ]
+}
+```
+
+The following options are available:
+
+| Component    | Description                                                                                                                 |
+| ---------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`Field`**  | The form field rendered of the Edit View. [More details](#the-field-component).                                                |
+| **`Cell`**   | The table cell rendered of the List View. [More details](#the-cell-component).              |
+| **`Filter`** | The filter component rendered in the List View. [More details](#the-filter-component). || Component         | Description                                                                                                     |
+| **`Label`**       | Override the default Label of the Field Component. [More details](#the-label-component).                                    |
+| **`Error`**       | Override the default Error of the Field Component. [More details](#the-error-component).                                    |
+| **`Description`** | Override the default Description of the Field Component. [More details](#the-description-component).                      |
+| **`beforeInput`** | An array of elements that will be added before the input of the Field Component. [More details](#afterinput-and-beforeinput).|
+| **`afterInput`**  | An array of elements that will be added after the input of the Field Component. [More details](#afterinput-and-beforeinput). |
+
+_\* **`beforeInput`** and **`afterInput`** are only supported in fields that do not contain other fields, such as [`Text`](../fields/text), and [`Textarea`](../fields/textarea)._
+
+### The Field Component
+
+The Field Component is the actual form field rendered in the Edit View. This is the input that user's will interact with when editing a document.
+
+To easily swap in your own Field Component, use the `admin.components.Field` property in your [Field Config](../fields/overview):
+
+```ts
+import type { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
+
+export const CollectionConfig: CollectionConfig = {
+  // ...
+  fields: [
+    // ...
+    {
+      // ...
+      admin: {
+        components: {
+          Field: MyFieldComponent, // highlight-line
+        },
+      },
+    }
+  ]
+}
+```
+
+_For details on how to build Custom Components, see [Building Custom Components](./components#building-custom-components)._
+
+<Banner type="warning">
+  Instead of replacing the entire Field Component, you can alternately replace or slot-in only specific parts by using the [`Label`](#the-label-component), [`Error`](#the-error-component), [`beforeInput`](#afterinput-and-beforinput), and [`afterInput`](#afterinput-and-beforinput) properties.
+</Banner>
+
+All Field Components receive the following props:
+
+| Property         | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                                      |
+| ---------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`AfterInput`** | The rendered result of the `admin.components.afterInput` property. [More details](#afterinput-and-beforeinput).                                                                                                      |
+| **`BeforeInput`** | The rendered result of the `admin.components.beforeInput` property. [More details](#afterinput-and-beforeinput).                                                                                                      |
+| **`CustomDescription`** | The rendered result of the `admin.components.Description` property. [More details](#the-description-component).                                                                                                      |
+| **`CustomError`** | The rendered result of the `admin.components.Error` property. [More details](#the-error-component).                                                                                                      |
+| **`CustomLabel`** | The rendered result of the `admin.components.Label` property. [More details](#the-label-component).
+| **`path`**       | The static path of the field at render time. [More details](./hooks#usefieldprops). |
+| **`disabled`**   | The `admin.disabled` property defined in the [Field Config](../fields/overview). |
+| **`required`**   | The `admin.required` property defined in the [Field Config](../fields/overview). |
+| **`className`**  | The `admin.className` property defined in the [Field Config](../fields/overview). |
+| **`style`**      | The `admin.style` property defined in the [Field Config](../fields/overview).                                                                                                                                                      |
+| **`custom`**     | The `admin.custom` property defined in the [Field Config](../fields/overview).
+| **`placeholder`** | The `admin.placeholder` property defined in the [Field Config](../fields/overview). |
+| **`descriptionProps`** | An object that contains the props for the `FieldDescription` component.                                                                                                                                                                   |
+| **`labelProps`** | An object that contains the props needed for the `FieldLabel` component.                                                                                                                                                                         |
+| **`errorProps`** | An object that contains the props for the `FieldError` component.                                                                                                                                                                         |
+| **`docPreferences`** | An object that contains the preferences for the document.                                                                                                                                                                         |
+| **`label`**      | The label value provided in the field, it can be used with i18n.                                                                                                                                                                   |
+| **`locale`**     | The locale of the field. [More details](../configuration/localization).                                                                                                                                                                   |
+| **`localized`**  | A boolean value that represents if the field is localized or not. [More details](../fields/localized).                                                                                                                                                                   |
+| **`readOnly`**   | A boolean value that represents if the field is read-only or not.                                                                                                                                                                  |
+| **`rtl`**        | A boolean value that represents if the field should be rendered right-to-left or not. [More details](../configuration/i18n).                                                                                           |
+| **`user`**       | The currently authenticated user. [More details](../authentication/overview). |
+| **`validate`**   | A function that can be used to validate the field.                                                                                                                                                                                 |
+| **`hasMany`**    | If a [`relationship`](../fields/relationship) field, the `hasMany` property defined in the [Field Config](../fields/overview). |
+| **`maxLength`**  | If a [`text`](../fields/text) field, the `maxLength` property defined in the [Field Config](../fields/overview). |
+| **`minLength`**  | If a [`text`](../fields/text) field, the `minLength` property defined in the [Field Config](../fields/overview). |
+
+<Banner type="success">
+  <strong>Reminder:</strong>
+  All [Custom Server Components](./components) receive the `payload` and `i18n` properties by default. See [Building Custom Components](./components#building-custom-components) for more details.
+</Banner>
+
+#### Sending and receiving values from the form
+
+When swapping out the `Field` component, you are responsible for sending and receiving the field's `value` from the form itself.
+
+To do so, import the [`useField`](./hooks#usefield) hook from `@payloadcms/ui` and use it to manage the field's value:
+
+```tsx
+'use client'
+import { useField } from '@payloadcms/ui'
+
+export const CustomTextField: React.FC = () => {
+  const { value, setValue } = useField() // highlight-line
+
+  return (
+    <input
+      onChange={(e) => setValue(e.target.value)}
+      value={value}
+    />
+  )
+}
+```
+
+<Banner type="success">
+  For a complete list of all available React hooks, see the [Payload React Hooks](./hooks) documentation. For additional help, see [Building Custom Components](./components#building-custom-components).
+</Banner>
+
+### The Cell Component
+
+The Cell Component is rendered in the table of the List View. It represents the value of the field when displayed in a table cell.
+
+To easily swap in your own Cell Component, use the `admin.components.Cell` property in your [Field Config](../fields/overview):
+
+```ts
+import type { Field } from 'payload'
+
+export const myField: Field = {
+  name: 'myField',
+  type: 'text',
+  admin: {
+    components: {
+      Cell: MyCustomCell, // highlight-line
+    },
+  },
+}
+```
+
+_For details on how to build Custom Components, see [Building Custom Components](./components#building-custom-components)._
+
+All Cell Components receive the following props:
+
+| Property         | Description                                                       |
+| ---------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`name`** | The name of the field. |
+| **`className`**  | The `admin.className` property defined in the [Field Config](../fields/overview). |
+| **`fieldType`** | The `type` property defined in the [Field Config](../fields/overview). |
+| **`schemaPath`** | The path to the field in the schema. Similar to `path`, but without dynamic indices. |
+| **`isFieldAffectingData`** | A boolean value that represents if the field is affecting the data or not. |
+| **`label`** | The label value provided in the field, it can be used with i18n. |
+| **`labels`** | An object that contains the labels for the field. |
+| **`link`** | A boolean representing whether this cell should be wrapped in a link. |
+| **`onClick`** | A function that is called when the cell is clicked. |
+| **`dateDisplayFormat`** | If a [`date`](../fields/date) field, the `admin.dateDisplayFormat` property defined in the [Field Config](../fields/overview). |
+| **`options`** | If a [`select`](../fields/select) field, this is an array of options defined in the [Field Config](../fields/overview). [More details](../fields/select). |
+| **`relationTo`** | If a [`relationship`](../fields/relationship). or [`upload`](../fields/upload) field, this is the collection(s) the field is related to. |
+| **`richTextComponentMap`** | If a [`richText`](../fields/rich-text) field, this is an object that maps the rich text components. [More details](../fields/rich-text). |
+| **`blocks`** | If a [`blocks`](../fields/blocks) field, this is an array of labels and slugs representing the blocks defined in the [Field Config](../fields/overview). [More details](../fields/blocks). |
+
+<Banner type="info">
+  <strong>Tip:</strong>
+  Use the [`useTableCell`](./hooks#usetablecell) hook to subscribe to the field's `cellData` and `rowData`.
+</Banner>
+
+<Banner type="success">
+  <strong>Reminder:</strong>
+  All [Custom Server Components](./components) receive the `payload` and `i18n` properties by default. See [Building Custom Components](./components#building-custom-components) for more details.
+</Banner>
+
+### The Label Component
+
+The Label Component is rendered anywhere a field needs to be represented by a label. This is typically used in the Edit View, but can also be used in the List View and elsewhere.
+
+To easily swap in your own Label Component, use the `admin.components.Label` property in your [Field Config](../fields/overview):
+
+```ts
+import type { Field } from 'payload'
+
+export const myField: Field = {
+  name: 'myField',
+  type: 'text',
+  admin: {
+    components: {
+      Label: MyCustomLabel, // highlight-line
+    },
+  },
+}
+```
+
+_For details on how to build Custom Components, see [Building Custom Components](./components#building-custom-components)._
+
+Custom Label Components receive all [Field Component](#the-field-component) props, plus the following props:
+
+| Property       | Description                                                      |
+| -------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`schemaPath`** | The path to the field in the schema. Similar to `path`, but without dynamic indices. |
+
+<Banner type="success">
+  <strong>Reminder:</strong>
+  All [Custom Server Components](./components) receive the `payload` and `i18n` properties by default. See [Building Custom Components](./components#building-custom-components) for more details.
+</Banner>
+
+#### TypeScript
+
+When building Custom Error Components, you can import the component props to ensure type safety in your component. There is an explicit type for the Error Component, one for every [Field Type](../fields/overview). The convention is to append `ErrorComponent` to the type of field, i.e. `TextFieldErrorComponent`.
+
+```tsx
+import type {
+  ArrayFieldLabelComponent,
+  BlocksFieldLabelComponent,
+  CheckboxFieldLabelComponent,
+  CodeFieldLabelComponent,
+  CollapsibleFieldLabelComponent,
+  DateFieldLabelComponent,
+  EmailFieldLabelComponent,
+  GroupFieldLabelComponent,
+  HiddenFieldLabelComponent,
+  JSONFieldLabelComponent,
+  NumberFieldLabelComponent,
+  PointFieldLabelComponent,
+  RadioFieldLabelComponent,
+  RelationshipFieldLabelComponent,
+  RichTextFieldLabelComponent,
+  RowFieldLabelComponent,
+  SelectFieldLabelComponent,
+  TabsFieldLabelComponent,
+  TextFieldLabelComponent,
+  TextareaFieldLabelComponent,
+  UploadFieldLabelComponent
+} from 'payload'
+```
+
+### The Error Component
+
+The Error Component is rendered when a field fails validation. It is typically displayed beneath the field input in a visually-compelling style.
+
+To easily swap in your own Error Component, use the `admin.components.Error` property in your [Field Config](../fields/overview):
+
+```ts
+import type { Field } from 'payload'
+
+export const myField: Field = {
+  name: 'myField',
+  type: 'text',
+  admin: {
+    components: {
+      Error: MyCustomError, // highlight-line
+    },
+  },
+}
+```
+
+_For details on how to build Custom Components, see [Building Custom Components](./components#building-custom-components)._
+
+Custom Error Components receive all [Field Component](#the-field-component) props, plus the following props:
+
+| Property        | Description                                                   |
+| --------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`path`***       | The static path of the field at render time. [More details](./hooks#usefieldprops). |
+
+<Banner type="success">
+  <strong>Reminder:</strong>
+  All [Custom Server Components](./components) receive the `payload` and `i18n` properties by default. See [Building Custom Components](./components#building-custom-components) for more details.
+</Banner>
+
+#### TypeScript
+
+When building Custom Error Components, you can import the component props to ensure type safety in your component. There is an explicit type for the Error Component, one for every [Field Type](../fields/overview). The convention is to append `ErrorComponent` to the type of field, i.e. `TextFieldErrorComponent`.
+
+```tsx
+import type {
+  ArrayFieldErrorComponent,
+  BlocksFieldErrorComponent,
+  CheckboxFieldErrorComponent,
+  CodeFieldErrorComponent,
+  CollapsibleFieldErrorComponent,
+  DateFieldErrorComponent,
+  EmailFieldErrorComponent,
+  GroupFieldErrorComponent,
+  HiddenFieldErrorComponent,
+  JSONFieldErrorComponent,
+  NumberFieldErrorComponent,
+  PointFieldErrorComponent,
+  RadioFieldErrorComponent,
+  RelationshipFieldErrorComponent,
+  RichTextFieldErrorComponent,
+  RowFieldErrorComponent,
+  SelectFieldErrorComponent,
+  TabsFieldErrorComponent,
+  TextFieldErrorComponent,
+  TextareaFieldErrorComponent,
+  UploadFieldErrorComponent
+} from 'payload'
+```
+
+### The Description Property
+
+Field Descriptions are used to provide additional information to the editor about a field, such as special instructions. Their placement varies from field to field, but typically are displayed with subtle style differences beneath the field inputs.
+
+A description can be configured in three ways:
+
+  - As a string.
+  - As a function which returns a string. [More details](#description-functions).
+  - As a React component. [More details](#the-description-component).
+
+To easily add a Custom Description to a field, use the `admin.description` property in your [Field Config](../fields/overview):
+
+```ts
+import type { SanitizedCollectionConfig } from 'payload'
+
+export const MyCollectionConfig: SanitizedCollectionConfig = {
+  // ...
+  fields: [
+    // ...
+    {
+      name: 'myField',
+      type: 'text',
+      admin: {
+        description: 'Hello, world!' // highlight-line
+      },
+    },
+  ]
+}
+```
+
+<Banner type="warning">
+  <strong>Reminder:</strong>
+  To replace the Field Description with a [Custom Component](./components), use the `admin.components.Description` property. [More details](#the-description-component).
+</Banner>
+
+#### Description Functions
+
+Custom Descriptions can also be defined as a function. Description Functions are executed on the server and can be used to format simple descriptions based on the user's current [Locale](../configuration/localization).
+
+To easily add a Description Function to a field, set the `admin.description` property to a _function_ in your [Field Config](../fields/overview):
+
+```ts
+import type { SanitizedCollectionConfig } from 'payload'
+
+export const MyCollectionConfig: SanitizedCollectionConfig = {
+  // ...
+  fields: [
+    // ...
+    {
+      name: 'myField',
+      type: 'text',
+      admin: {
+        description: ({ t }) => `${t('Hello, world!')}` // highlight-line
+      },
+    },
+  ]
+}
+```
+
+All Description Functions receive the following arguments:
+
+| Argument       | Description                                                      |
+| -------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`t`**        | The `t` function used to internationalize the Admin Panel. [More details](../configuration/i18n) |
+
+### The Description Component
+
+Alternatively to the [Description Property](#the-description-property), you can also use a [Custom Component](./components) as the Field Description. This can be useful when you need to provide more complex feedback to the user, such as rendering dynamic field values or other interactive elements.
+
+To easily add a Description Component to a field, use the `admin.components.Description` property in your [Field Config](../fields/overview):
+
+```ts
+import type { SanitizedCollectionConfig } from 'payload'
+import { MyCustomDescription } from './MyCustomDescription'
+
+export const MyCollectionConfig: SanitizedCollectionConfig = {
+  // ...
+  fields: [
+    // ...
+    {
+      name: 'myField',
+      type: 'text',
+      admin: {
+        components: {
+          Description: MyCustomDescription, // highlight-line
+        }
+      }
+    }
+  ]
+}
+```
+
+_For details on how to build a Custom Description, see [Building Custom Components](./components#building-custom-components)._
+
+Custom Description Components receive all [Field Component](#the-field-component) props, plus the following props:
+
+| Property       | Description                                                      |
+| -------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`description`**    | The `description` property defined in the [Field Config](../fields/overview).         |
+
+<Banner type="success">
+  <strong>Reminder:</strong>
+  All [Custom Server Components](./components) receive the `payload` and `i18n` properties by default. See [Building Custom Components](./components#building-custom-components) for more details.
+</Banner>
+
+#### TypeScript
+
+When building Custom Description Components, you can import the component props to ensure type safety in your component. There is an explicit type for the Description Component, one for every [Field Type](../fields/overview). The convention is to append `DescriptionComponent` to the type of field, i.e. `TextFieldDescriptionComponent`.
+
+```tsx
+import type {
+  ArrayFieldDescriptionComponent,
+  BlocksFieldDescriptionComponent,
+  CheckboxFieldDescriptionComponent,
+  CodeFieldDescriptionComponent,
+  CollapsibleFieldDescriptionComponent,
+  DateFieldDescriptionComponent,
+  EmailFieldDescriptionComponent,
+  GroupFieldDescriptionComponent,
+  HiddenFieldDescriptionComponent,
+  JSONFieldDescriptionComponent,
+  NumberFieldDescriptionComponent,
+  PointFieldDescriptionComponent,
+  RadioFieldDescriptionComponent,
+  RelationshipFieldDescriptionComponent,
+  RichTextFieldDescriptionComponent,
+  RowFieldDescriptionComponent,
+  SelectFieldDescriptionComponent,
+  TabsFieldDescriptionComponent,
+  TextFieldDescriptionComponent,
+  TextareaFieldDescriptionComponent,
+  UploadFieldDescriptionComponent
+} from 'payload'
+```
+
+### afterInput and beforeInput
+
+With these properties you can add multiple components _before_ and _after_ the input element, as their name suggests. This is useful when you need to render additional elements alongside the field without replacing the entire field component.
+
+To add components before and after the input element, use the `admin.components.beforeInput` and `admin.components.afterInput` properties in your [Field Config](../fields/overview):
+
+```ts
+import type { SanitizedCollectionConfig } from 'payload'
+
+export const MyCollectionConfig: SanitizedCollectionConfig = {
+  // ...
+  fields: [
+    // ...
+    {
+      name: 'myField',
+      type: 'text',
+      admin: {
+        components: {
+          // highlight-start
+          beforeInput: [MyCustomComponent],
+          afterInput: [MyOtherCustomComponent],
+          // highlight-end
+        }
+      }
+    }
+  ]
+}
+```
+
+_For details on how to build Custom Components, see [Building Custom Components](./components#building-custom-components)._
+
+## Conditional Logic
+
+You can show and hide fields based on what other fields are doing by utilizing conditional logic on a field by field basis. The `condition` property on a field's admin config accepts a function which takes three arguments:
+
+- `data` - the entire document's data that is currently being edited
+- `siblingData` - only the fields that are direct siblings to the field with the condition
+- `{ user }` - the final argument is an object containing the currently authenticated user
+
+The `condition` function should return a boolean that will control if the field should be displayed or not.
+
+**Example:**
+
+```ts
+{
+  fields: [
+    {
+      name: 'enableGreeting',
+      type: 'checkbox',
+      defaultValue: false,
+    },
+    {
+      name: 'greeting',
+      type: 'text',
+      admin: {
+        // highlight-start
+        condition: (data, siblingData, { user }) => {
+          if (data.enableGreeting) {
+            return true
+          } else {
+            return false
+          }
+        },
+        // highlight-end
+      },
+    },
+  ]
+}
+```

docs/admin/globals.mdx

@@ -0,0 +1,108 @@
+---
+title: Global Admin Config
+label: Globals
+order: 30
+desc:
+keywords: admin, components, custom, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
+---
+
+The behavior of [Globals](../configuration/globals) within the [Admin Panel](./overview) can be fully customized to fit the needs of your application. This includes grouping or hiding their navigation links, adding [Custom Components](./components), setting page metadata, and more.
+
+To configure Admin Options for Globals, use the `admin` property in your Global Config:
+
+```ts
+import { GlobalConfig } from 'payload'
+
+export const MyGlobal: GlobalConfig = {
+  // ...
+  admin: { // highlight-line
+    // ...
+  },
+}
+```
+
+## Admin Options
+
+The following options are available:
+
+| Option        | Description                                                                                                                       |
+| ------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`group`**       | Text used as a label for grouping Collection and Global links together in the navigation.                                         |
+| **`hidden`**      | Set to true or a function, called with the current user, returning true to exclude this Global from navigation and admin routing. |
+| **`components`**  | Swap in your own React components to be used within this Global. [More details](#components).                           |
+| **`preview`**     | Function to generate a preview URL within the Admin Panel for this Global that can point to your app. [More details](#preview).           |
+| **`livePreview`** | Enable real-time editing for instant visual feedback of your front-end application. [More details](../live-preview/overview).          |
+| **`hideAPIURL`**  | Hides the "API URL" meta field while editing documents within this collection.                                                    |
+| **`meta`**        | Metadata overrides to apply to the Admin Panel. Included properties are `description` and `openGraph`.       |
+
+### Components
+
+Globals can set their own [Custom Components](./components) which only apply to [Global](../configuration/globals)-specific UI within the [Admin Panel](./overview). This includes elements such as the Save Button, or entire layouts such as the Edit View.
+
+To override Global Components, use the `admin.components` property in your [Global Config](../configuration/globals):
+
+```ts
+import type { SanitizedGlobalConfig } from 'payload'
+import { CustomSaveButton } from './CustomSaveButton'
+
+export const MyGlobal: SanitizedGlobalConfig = {
+  // ...
+  admin: {
+    components: { // highlight-line
+      // ...
+    },
+  },
+}
+```
+
+The following options are available:
+
+| Path                           | Description                                                                                                            |
+| ------------------------------ | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`elements.SaveButton`**      | Replace the default Save Button with a Custom Component. [Drafts](../versions/drafts) must be disabled.                                    |
+| **`elements.SaveDraftButton`** | Replace the default Save Draft Button with a Custom Component. [Drafts](../versions/drafts) must be enabled and autosave must be disabled. |
+| **`elements.PublishButton`**   | Replace the default Publish Button with a Custom Component. [Drafts](../versions/drafts) must be enabled.                                  |
+| **`elements.PreviewButton`**   | Replace the default Preview Button with a Custom Component. [Preview](#preview) must be enabled.                                         |
+| **`views`**                    | Override or create new views within the Admin Panel. [More details](./views).                                     |
+
+<Banner type="success">
+  <strong>Note:</strong>
+  For details on how to build Custom Components, see [Building Custom Components](./components#building-custom-components).
+</Banner>
+
+### Preview
+
+It is possible to display a Preview Button within the Edit View of the Admin Panel. This will allow editors to visit the frontend of your app the corresponds to the document they are actively editing. This way they can preview the latest, potentially unpublished changes.
+
+To configure the Preview Button, set the `admin.preview` property to a function in your Global Config:
+
+```ts
+import { GlobalConfig } from 'payload'
+
+export const MainMenu: GlobalConfig = {
+  // ...
+  admin: {
+    // highlight-start
+    preview: (doc, { locale }) => {
+      if (doc?.slug) {
+        return `/${doc.slug}?locale=${locale}`
+      }
+
+      return null
+    },
+    // highlight-end
+  },
+}
+```
+
+The preview function receives two arguments:
+
+| Argument | Description |
+| --- | --- |
+| **`doc`** | The Document being edited. |
+| **`ctx`** | An object containing `locale` and `token` properties. The `token` is the currently logged-in user's JWT. |
+
+<Banner type="success">
+  <strong>Note:</strong>
+  For fully working example of this, check of the official [Draft Preview Example](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/examples/draft-preview) in the [Examples Directory](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/examples).
+</Banner>

docs/admin/hooks.mdx

@@ -1,58 +1,104 @@
 ---
 title: React Hooks
 label: React Hooks
-order: 30
+order: 70
 desc: Make use of all of the powerful React hooks that Payload provides.
-keywords: admin, components, custom, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, express
+keywords: admin, components, custom, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
 ---
 
-Payload provides a variety of powerful hooks that can be used within your own React components. With them, you can interface with Payload itself and build just about any type of complex customization you can think of—directly in familiar React code.
+Payload provides a variety of powerful [React Hooks](https://react.dev/reference/react-dom/hooks) that can be used within your own [Custom Components](./components), such as [Custom Fields](./fields). With them, you can interface with Payload itself to build just about any type of complex customization you can think of.
 
-### useField
+<Banner type="warning">
+  <strong>Reminder:</strong>
+  All Custom Components are [React Server Components](https://react.dev/reference/rsc/server-components) by default. Hooks, on the other hand, are only available in client-side environments. To use hooks, [ensure your component is a client component](./components#client-components).
+</Banner>
 
-The `useField` hook is used internally within every applicable Payload field component, and it manages sending and receiving a field's state from its parent form.
+## useField
 
-Outside of internal use, its most common use-case is in custom `Field` components. When you build a custom React `Field` component, you'll be responsible for sending and receiving the field's `value` from the form itself. To do so, import the `useField` hook as follows:
+The `useField` hook is used internally within all field components. It manages sending and receiving a field's state from its parent form. When you build a [Custom Field Component](./fields), you will be responsible for sending and receiving the field's `value` to and from the form yourself.
+
+To do so, import the `useField` hook as follows:
 
 ```tsx
-import { useField } from 'payload/components/forms'
+'use client'
+import { useField } from '@payloadcms/ui'
 
-type Props = { path: string }
+const CustomTextField: React.FC = () => {
+  const { value, setValue, path } = useField() // highlight-line
 
-const CustomTextField: React.FC<Props> = ({ path }) => {
-  // highlight-start
-  const { value, setValue } = useField<string>({ path })
-  // highlight-end
-
-  return <input onChange={(e) => setValue(e.target.value)} value={value.path} />
+  return (
+    <div>
+      <p>
+        {path}
+      </p>
+      <input
+        onChange={(e) => { setValue(e.target.value) }}
+        value={value}
+      />
+    </div>
+  )
 }
 ```
 
-The `useField` hook accepts an `args` object and sends back information and helpers for you to make use of:
+The `useField` hook accepts the following arguments:
+
+| Property          | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                                   |
+| ----------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| `path`            | If you do not provide a `path` or a `name`, this hook will look for one using the [`useFieldProps`](#usefieldprops) hook.                                                                                                                         |
+| `validate`        | A validation function executed client-side _before_ submitting the form to the server. Different than [Field-level Validation](../fields/overview#validation) which runs strictly on the server. |
+| `disableFormData` | If `true`, the field will not be included in the form data when the form is submitted.                                                                                                                                         |
+| `hasRows` | If `true`, the field will be treated as a field with rows. This is useful for fields like `array` and `blocks`.                                                                                                                                         |
+
+The `useField` hook returns the following object:
 
 ```ts
-const field = useField<string>({
-  path: 'fieldPathHere', // required
-  validate: myValidateFunc, // optional
-  disableFormData?: false, // if true, the field's data will be ignored
-  condition?: myConditionHere, // optional, used to skip validation if condition fails
-})
-
-// Here is what `useField` sends back
-const {
-  showError, // whether or not the field should show as errored
-  errorMessage, // the error message to show, if showError
-  value, // the current value of the field from the form
-  formSubmitted, // if the form has been submitted
-  formProcessing, // if the form is currently processing
-  setValue, // method to set the field's value in form state
-  initialValue, // the initial value that the field mounted with
-} = field;
-
-// The rest of your component goes here
+type FieldResult<T> = {
+  errorMessage?: string
+  errorPaths?: string[]
+  filterOptions?: FilterOptionsResult
+  formInitializing: boolean
+  formProcessing: boolean
+  formSubmitted: boolean
+  initialValue?: T
+  path: string
+  permissions: FieldPermissions
+  readOnly?: boolean
+  rows?: Row[]
+  schemaPath: string
+  setValue: (val: unknown, disableModifyingForm?: boolean) => voi
+  showError: boolean
+  valid?: boolean
+  value: T
+}
 ```
 
-### useFormFields
+## useFieldProps
+
+All [Custom Field Components](./fields#the-field-component) are rendered on the server, and as such, only have access to static props at render time. But, some fields can be dynamic, such as when nested in an [`array`](../fields/array) or [`blocks`](../fields/block) field. For example, items can be added, re-ordered, or deleted on-the-fly.
+
+For this reason, dynamic props like `path` are managed in their own React context, which can be accessed using the `useFieldProps` hook:
+
+```tsx
+'use client'
+import { useFieldProps } from '@payloadcms/ui'
+
+const CustomTextField: React.FC = () => {
+  const { path } = useFieldProps() // highlight-line
+
+  return (
+    <div>
+      {path}
+    </div>
+  )
+}
+```
+
+<Banner type="success">
+  <strong>Tip:</strong>
+  The [`useField`](#usefield) hook calls the `useFieldProps` hook internally, so you don't need to use both in the same component unless explicitly needed.
+</Banner>
+
+## useFormFields
 
 There are times when a custom field component needs to have access to data from other fields, and you have a few options to do so. The `useFormFields` hook is a powerful and highly performant way to retrieve a form's field state, as well as to retrieve the `dispatchFields` method, which can be helpful for setting other fields' form states from anywhere within a form.
 
@@ -66,7 +112,8 @@ Thanks to the awesome package [`use-context-selector`](https://github.com/dai-sh
 You can pass a Redux-like selector into the hook, which will ensure that you retrieve only the field that you want. The selector takes an argument with type of `[fields: Fields, dispatch: React.Dispatch<Action>]]`.
 
 ```tsx
-import { useFormFields } from 'payload/components/forms'
+'use client'
+import type { useFormFields } from '@payloadcms/ui'
 
 const MyComponent: React.FC = () => {
   // Get only the `amount` field state, and only cause a rerender when that field changes
@@ -81,14 +128,16 @@ const MyComponent: React.FC = () => {
 }
 ```
 
-### useAllFormFields
+## useAllFormFields
 
 **To retrieve more than one field**, you can use the `useAllFormFields` hook. Your component will re-render when _any_ field changes, so use this hook only if you absolutely need to. Unlike the `useFormFields` hook, this hook does not accept a "selector", and it always returns an array with type of `[fields: Fields, dispatch: React.Dispatch<Action>]]`.
 
 You can do lots of powerful stuff by retrieving the full form state, like using built-in helper functions to reduce field state to values only, or to retrieve sibling data by path.
 
 ```tsx
-import { useAllFormFields, reduceFieldsToValues, getSiblingData } from 'payload/components/forms';
+'use client'
+import { useAllFormFields } from '@payloadcms/ui'
+import { reduceFieldsToValues, getSiblingData } from 'payload/shared'
 
 const ExampleComponent: React.FC = () => {
   // the `fields` const will be equal to all fields' state,
@@ -109,9 +158,9 @@ const ExampleComponent: React.FC = () => {
 };
 ```
 
-##### Updating other fields' values
+#### Updating other fields' values
 
-If you are building a custom component, then you should use `setValue` which is returned from the `useField` hook to programmatically set your field's value. But if you're looking to update _another_ field's value, you can use `dispatchFields` returned from `useFormFields`.
+If you are building a Custom Component, then you should use `setValue` which is returned from the `useField` hook to programmatically set your field's value. But if you're looking to update _another_ field's value, you can use `dispatchFields` returned from `useFormFields`.
 
 You can send the following actions to the `dispatchFields` function.
 
@@ -128,7 +177,7 @@ You can send the following actions to the `dispatchFields` function.
 
 To see types for each action supported within the `dispatchFields` hook, check out the Form types [here](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/blob/main/packages/payload/src/admin/components/forms/Form/types.ts).
 
-### useForm
+## useForm
 
 The `useForm` hook can be used to interact with the form itself, and sends back many methods that can be used to reactively fetch form state without causing rerenders within your components each time a field is changed. This is useful if you have action-based callbacks that your components fire, and need to interact with form state _based on a user action_.
 
@@ -141,7 +190,7 @@ The `useForm` hook can be used to interact with the form itself, and sends back
   up-to-date. They will be removed from this hook's response in an upcoming version.
 </Banner>
 
-The `useForm` hook returns an object with the following properties: |
+The `useForm` hook returns an object with the following properties:
 
 <TableWithDrawers
   columns={[
@@ -394,7 +443,7 @@ export const CustomArrayManager = () => {
 }`}
 </pre>
 
-  <p>An example config to go along with the custom component</p>
+  <p>An example config to go along with the Custom Component</p>
   <pre>
 {`const ExampleCollection = {
   slug: "example-collection",
@@ -491,7 +540,7 @@ export const CustomArrayManager = () => {
 }`}
 </pre>
 
-  <p>An example config to go along with the custom component</p>
+  <p>An example config to go along with the Custom Component</p>
   <pre>
 {`const ExampleCollection = {
   slug: "example-collection",
@@ -601,7 +650,7 @@ export const CustomArrayManager = () => {
 }`}
 </pre>
 
-  <p>An example config to go along with the custom component</p>
+  <p>An example config to go along with the Custom Component</p>
   <pre>
 {`const ExampleCollection = {
   slug: "example-collection",
@@ -635,23 +684,24 @@ export const CustomArrayManager = () => {
   ]}
 />
 
-### useCollapsible
+## useCollapsible
 
 The `useCollapsible` hook allows you to control parent collapsibles:
 
-| Property                  | Description                                                                                                  |
-| ------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ | --- |
-| **`isCollapsed`**         | State of the collapsible. `true` if open, `false` if collapsed                                               |
-| **`isVisible`**           | If nested, determine if the nearest collapsible is visible. `true` if no parent is closed, `false` otherwise |
-| **`toggle`**              | Toggles the state of the nearest collapsible                                                                 |
-| **`isWithinCollapsible`** | Determine when you are within another collaspible                                                            |     |
+| Property                  | Description                                                                                                   |
+| ------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`isCollapsed`**         | State of the collapsible. `true` if open, `false` if collapsed.                                               |
+| **`isVisible`**           | If nested, determine if the nearest collapsible is visible. `true` if no parent is closed, `false` otherwise. |
+| **`toggle`**              | Toggles the state of the nearest collapsible.                                                                 |
+| **`isWithinCollapsible`** | Determine when you are within another collapsible.                                                            |
 
 **Example:**
 
 ```tsx
+'use client'
 import React from 'react'
 
-import { useCollapsible } from 'payload/components/utilities'
+import { useCollapsible } from '@payloadcms/ui'
 
 const CustomComponent: React.FC = () => {
   const { isCollapsed, toggle } = useCollapsible()
@@ -667,14 +717,14 @@ const CustomComponent: React.FC = () => {
 }
 ```
 
-### useDocumentInfo
+## useDocumentInfo
 
 The `useDocumentInfo` hook provides lots of information about the document currently being edited, including the following:
 
 | Property                  | Description                                                                                                        |
 | ------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ |
-| **`collection`**          | If the doc is a collection, its collection config will be returned                                                 |
-| **`global`**              | If the doc is a global, its global config will be returned                                                         |
+| **`collection`**          | If the doc is a collection, its Collection Config will be returned                                                 |
+| **`global`**              | If the doc is a global, its Global Config will be returned                                                         |
 | **`id`**                  | If the doc is a collection, its ID will be returned                                                                |
 | **`preferencesKey`**      | The `preferences` key to use when interacting with document-level user preferences                                 |
 | **`versions`**            | Versions of the current doc                                                                                        |
@@ -687,7 +737,8 @@ The `useDocumentInfo` hook provides lots of information about the document curre
 **Example:**
 
 ```tsx
-import { useDocumentInfo } from 'payload/components/utilities'
+'use client'
+import { useDocumentInfo } from '@payloadcms/ui'
 
 const LinkFromCategoryToPosts: React.FC = () => {
   // highlight-start
@@ -707,12 +758,13 @@ const LinkFromCategoryToPosts: React.FC = () => {
 }
 ```
 
-### useLocale
+## useLocale
 
-In any custom component you can get the selected locale object with the `useLocale` hook. `useLocale`gives you the full locale object, consisting of a `label`, `rtl`(right-to-left) property, and then `code`. Here is a simple example:
+In any Custom Component you can get the selected locale object with the `useLocale` hook. `useLocale`gives you the full locale object, consisting of a `label`, `rtl`(right-to-left) property, and then `code`. Here is a simple example:
 
 ```tsx
-import { useLocale } from 'payload/components/utilities'
+'use client'
+import { useLocale } from '@payloadcms/ui'
 
 const Greeting: React.FC = () => {
   // highlight-start
@@ -728,7 +780,7 @@ const Greeting: React.FC = () => {
 }
 ```
 
-### useAuth
+## useAuth
 
 Useful to retrieve info about the currently logged in user as well as methods for interacting with it. It sends back an object with the following properties:
 
@@ -743,8 +795,9 @@ Useful to retrieve info about the currently logged in user as well as methods fo
 | **`permissions`**        | The permissions of the current user                                                     |
 
 ```tsx
-import { useAuth } from 'payload/components/utilities'
-import { User } from '../payload-types.ts'
+'use client'
+import { useAuth } from '@payloadcms/ui'
+import type { User } from '../payload-types.ts'
 
 const Greeting: React.FC = () => {
   // highlight-start
@@ -755,12 +808,13 @@ const Greeting: React.FC = () => {
 }
 ```
 
-### useConfig
+## useConfig
 
-Used to easily fetch the full Payload config.
+Used to easily retrieve the Payload [Client Config](./components#accessing-the-payload-config).
 
 ```tsx
-import { useConfig } from 'payload/components/utilities'
+'use client'
+import { useConfig } from '@payloadcms/ui'
 
 const MyComponent: React.FC = () => {
   // highlight-start
@@ -771,12 +825,13 @@ const MyComponent: React.FC = () => {
 }
 ```
 
-### useEditDepth
+## useEditDepth
 
 Sends back how many editing levels "deep" the current component is. Edit depth is relevant while adding new documents / editing documents in modal windows and other cases.
 
 ```tsx
-import { useEditDepth } from 'payload/components/utilities'
+'use client'
+import { useEditDepth } from '@payloadcms/ui'
 
 const MyComponent: React.FC = () => {
   // highlight-start
@@ -787,16 +842,17 @@ const MyComponent: React.FC = () => {
 }
 ```
 
-### usePreferences
+## usePreferences
 
 Returns methods to set and get user preferences. More info can be found [here](https://payloadcms.com/docs/admin/preferences).
 
-### useTheme
+## useTheme
 
 Returns the currently selected theme (`light`, `dark` or `auto`), a set function to update it and a boolean `autoMode`, used to determine if the theme value should be set automatically based on the user's device preferences.
 
 ```tsx
-import { useTheme } from 'payload/components/utilities'
+'use client'
+import { useTheme } from '@payloadcms/ui'
 
 const MyComponent: React.FC = () => {
   // highlight-start
@@ -819,12 +875,13 @@ const MyComponent: React.FC = () => {
 }
 ```
 
-### useTableColumns
+## useTableColumns
 
 Returns methods to manipulate table columns
 
 ```tsx
-import { useTableColumns } from 'payload/components/hooks'
+'use client'
+import { useTableColumns } from '@payloadcms/ui'
 
 const MyComponent: React.FC = () => {
   // highlight-start
@@ -843,7 +900,28 @@ const MyComponent: React.FC = () => {
 }
 ```
 
-### useDocumentEvents
+## useTableCell
+
+Similar to [`useFieldProps`](#usefieldprops), all [Custom Cell Components](./fields#the-cell-component) are rendered on the server, and as such, only have access to static props at render time. But, some props need to be dynamic, such as the field value itself.
+
+For this reason, dynamic props like `cellData` are managed in their own React context, which can be accessed using the `useTableCell` hook.
+
+```tsx
+'use client'
+import { useTableCell } from '@payloadcms/ui'
+
+const MyComponent: React.FC = () => {
+  const { cellData } = useTableCell() // highlight-line
+
+  return (
+    <div>
+      {cellData}
+    </div>
+  )
+}
+```
+
+## useDocumentEvents
 
 The `useDocumentEvents` hook provides a way of subscribing to cross-document events, such as updates made to nested documents within a drawer. This hook will report document events that are outside the scope of the document currently being edited. This hook provides the following:
 
@@ -855,7 +933,8 @@ The `useDocumentEvents` hook provides a way of subscribing to cross-document eve
 **Example:**
 
 ```tsx
-import { useDocumentEvents } from 'payload/components/hooks'
+'use client'
+import { useDocumentEvents } from '@payloadcms/ui'
 
 const ListenForUpdates: React.FC = () => {
   const { mostRecentUpdate } = useDocumentEvents()

docs/admin/overview.mdx

@@ -2,90 +2,242 @@
 title: The Admin Panel
 label: Overview
 order: 10
-desc: Manage your data and customize the Admin Panel by swapping in your own React components. Create, modify or remove views, fields, styles and much more.
-keywords: admin, components, custom, customize, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, express
+desc: Manage your data and customize the Payload Admin Panel by swapping in your own React components. Create, modify or remove views, fields, styles and much more.
+keywords: admin, components, custom, customize, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
 ---
 
-Payload dynamically generates a beautiful, fully functional React admin panel to manage your data. It's extremely powerful and can be customized / extended upon easily by swapping in your own React components. You can add additional views, modify how built-in views look / work, swap out Payload branding for your client's, build your own field types and much more.
+Payload dynamically generates a beautiful, [fully type-safe](../typescript/overview) Admin Panel to manage your users and data. It is highly performant, even with 100+ fields, and is translated in over 30 languages. Within the Admin Panel you can manage content, [render your site](../live-preview/overview), preview drafts, [diff versions](../versions/overview), and so much more.
 
-The Payload Admin panel can be bundled with our officially supported [Vite](/docs/admin/vite) and [webpack](/docs/admin/webpack) bundlers or you can integrate another bundler following our adapter pattern approach.
-When bundled, it is code-split, highly performant (even with 100+ fields), and written fully in TypeScript.
+The Admin Panel is designed to [white-label your brand](https://payloadcms.com/blog/white-label-admin-ui). You can endlessly customize and extend the Admin UI by swapping in your own [Custom Components](./components)—everything from simple field labels to entire views can be modified or replaced to perfectly tailor the interface for your editors.
+
+The Admin Panel is written in [TypeScript](https://www.typescriptlang.org) and built with [React](https://react.dev) using the [Next.js App Router](https://nextjs.org/docs/app). It supports [React Server Components](https://react.dev/reference/rsc/server-components), enabling the use of the [Local API](/docs/local-api/overview) on the front-end. You can install Payload into any [existing Next.js app in just one line](../getting-started/installation) and [deploy it anywhere](../production).
 
 <Banner type="success">
-  The Admin panel is meant to be simple enough to give you a starting point but not bring too much
-  complexity, so that you can easily customize it to suit the needs of your application and your
-  editors.
+  The Payload Admin Panel is designed to be as minimal and straightforward as possible to allow easy customization and control. [Learn more](./components).
 </Banner>
 
 <LightDarkImage
   srcLight="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/admin.jpg"
   srcDark="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/admin-dark.jpg"
-  alt="Admin panel with collapsible sidebar"
-  caption="Redesigned admin panel with a collapsible sidebar that's open by default, providing greater extensibility and enhanced horizontal real estate."
+  alt="Admin Panel with collapsible sidebar"
+  caption="Redesigned Admin Panel with a collapsible sidebar that's open by default, providing greater extensibility and enhanced horizontal real estate."
 />
 
+## Project Structure
+
+The Admin Panel serves as the entire HTTP layer for Payload, providing a full CRUD interface for your app. This means that both the [REST](../rest-api/overview) and [GraphQL](../graphql/overview) APIs are simply [Next.js Routes](https://nextjs.org/docs/app/building-your-application/routing) that exist directly alongside your front-end application.
+
+Once you [install Payload](../getting-started/installation), the following files and directories will be created in your app:
+
+```plaintext
+app/
+├─ (payload)/
+├── admin/
+├─── [[...segments]]/
+├──── page.tsx
+├──── not-found.tsx
+├── api/
+├─── [...slug]/
+├──── route.ts
+├── graphql/
+├──── route.ts
+├── graphql-playground/
+├──── route.ts
+├── custom.scss
+├── layout.tsx
+```
+
+<Banner type="info">
+  If you are not familiar with Next.js project structure, you can [learn more about it here](https://nextjs.org/docs/getting-started/project-structure).
+</Banner>
+
+As shown above, all Payload routes are nested within the `(payload)` route group. This creates a boundary between the Admin Panel and the rest of your application by scoping all layouts and styles. The `layout.tsx` file within this directory, for example, is where Payload manages the `html` tag of the document to set proper [`lang`](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/HTML/Global_attributes/lang) and [`dir`](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/HTML/Global_attributes/dir) attributes, etc.
+
+The `admin` directory contains all the _pages_ related to the interface itself, whereas the `api` and `graphql` directories contains all the _routes_ related to the [REST API](../rest-api/overview) and [GraphQL API](../graphql/overview). All admin routes are [easily configurable](#customizing-routes) to meet your application's exact requirements.
+
+<Banner type="warning">
+  <strong>Note:</strong>
+  If you don't use the [REST API](../rest/overview) or [GraphQL API](../graphql/overview), you can delete the [Next.js files corresponding to those routes](../admin/overview#project-structure), however, the overhead of this API is completely constrained to these endpoints, and will not slow down or affect Payload outside of the endpoints.
+</Banner>
+
+Finally, the `custom.scss` file is where you can add or override globally-oriented styles in the Admin Panel, such as modify the color palette. Customizing the look and feel through CSS alone is a powerful feature of the Admin Panel, [more on that here](./customizing-css).
+
+All auto-generated files will contain the following comments at the top of each file:
+
+```tsx
+/* THIS FILE WAS GENERATED AUTOMATICALLY BY PAYLOAD. */,
+/* DO NOT MODIFY IT BECAUSE IT COULD BE REWRITTEN AT ANY TIME. */
+```
+
 ## Admin Options
 
-All options for the Admin panel are defined in your base Payload config file.
+All options for the Admin Panel are defined in your [Payload Config](../configuration/overview) under the `admin` property:
 
-| Option            | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 |
-| ----------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| `bundler`         | The bundler that you would like to use to bundle the admin panel. Officially supported bundlers: [Webpack](/docs/admin/webpack) and [Vite](/docs/admin/vite).                                                                                                               |
-| `user`            | The `slug` of a Collection that you want be used to log in to the Admin dashboard. [More](/docs/admin/overview#the-admin-user-collection)                                                                                                                                   |
-| `buildPath`       | Specify an absolute path for where to store the built Admin panel bundle used in production. Defaults to `path.resolve(process.cwd(), 'build')`.                                                                                                                            |
-| `meta`            | Base meta data to use for the Admin panel. Included properties are `titleSuffix`, `ogImage`, and `favicon`.                                                                                                                                                                 |
-| `disable`         | If set to `true`, the entire Admin panel will be disabled.                                                                                                                                                                                                                  |
-| `indexHTML`       | Optionally replace the entirety of the `index.html` file used by the Admin panel. Reference the [base index.html file](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/blob/main/packages/payload/src/admin/index.html) to ensure your replacement has the appropriate HTML elements. |
-| `css`             | Absolute path to a stylesheet that you can use to override / customize the Admin panel styling. [More](/docs/admin/customizing-css).                                                                                                                                        |
-| `scss`            | Absolute path to a Sass variables / mixins stylesheet meant to override Payload styles to make for an easy re-skinning of the Admin panel. [More](/docs/admin/customizing-css#overriding-scss-variables).                                                                   |
-| `dateFormat`      | Global date format that will be used for all dates in the Admin panel. Any valid [date-fns](https://date-fns.org/) format pattern can be used.                                                                                                                              |
-| `avatar`          | Set account profile picture. Options: `gravatar`, `default` or a custom React component.                                                                                                                                                                                    |
-| `autoLogin`       | Used to automate admin log-in for dev and demonstration convenience. [More](/docs/authentication/config).                                                                                                                                                                   |
-| `livePreview`     | Enable real-time editing for instant visual feedback of your front-end application. [More](/docs/live-preview/overview).                                                                                                                                                    |
-| `components`      | Component overrides that affect the entirety of the Admin panel. [More](/docs/admin/components)                                                                                                                                                                             |
-| `webpack`         | Customize the Webpack config that's used to generate the Admin panel. [More](/docs/admin/webpack)                                                                                                                                                                           |
-| `vite`            | Customize the Vite config that's used to generate the Admin panel. [More](/docs/admin/vite)                                                                                                                                                                                 |
-| `logoutRoute`     | The route for the `logout` page.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            |
-| `inactivityRoute` | The route for the `logout` inactivity page.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 |
+```ts
+import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
+
+const config = buildConfig({
+  // ...
+  admin: { // highlight-line
+    // ...
+  },
+})
+```
+
+The following options are available:
+
+| Option        | Description                                                                                                                                                           |
+|---------------|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
+| `avatar`      | Set account profile picture. Options: `gravatar`, `default` or a custom React component.                                                                              |
+| `autoLogin`   | Used to automate log-in for dev and demonstration convenience. [More details](../authentication/overview).                                                            |
+| `buildPath`   | Specify an absolute path for where to store the built Admin bundle used in production. Defaults to `path.resolve(process.cwd(), 'build')`.                            |
+| `components`  | Component overrides that affect the entirety of the Admin Panel. [More details](./components).                                                                        |
+| `custom`      | Any custom properties you wish to pass to the Admin Panel.                                                                                                            |
+| `dateFormat`  | The date format that will be used for all dates within the Admin Panel. Any valid [date-fns](https://date-fns.org/) format pattern can be used.                       |
+| `disable`     | If set to `true`, the entire Admin Panel will be disabled.                                                                                                            |
+| `livePreview` | Enable real-time editing for instant visual feedback of your front-end application. [More details](../live-preview/overview).                                         |
+| `meta`        | Base metadata to use for the Admin Panel. Included properties are `titleSuffix`, `icons`, and `openGraph`. Can be overridden on a per Collection or per Global basis. |
+| `routes`      | Replace built-in Admin Panel routes with your own custom routes. [More details](#customizing-routes).                                                                 |
+| `user`        | The `slug` of the Collection that you want to allow to login to the Admin Panel. [More details](#the-admin-user-collection).                                          |
+
+<Banner type="success">
+  <strong>Reminder:</strong>
+  These are the _root-level_ options for the Admin Panel. You can also customize [Collection Admin Options](./collections) and [Global Admin Options](./globals) through their respective `admin` keys.
+</Banner>
 
 ### The Admin User Collection
 
-<Banner type="warning">
-  <strong>Important:</strong>
-  <br />
-  The Payload Admin panel can only be used by one Collection that supports
-  [Authentication](/docs/authentication/overview).
-</Banner>
-
-To specify which Collection to use to log in to the Admin panel, pass the `admin` options a `user` key equal to the slug of the Collection that you'd like to use.
-
-`payload.config.js`:
+To specify which Collection to allow to login to the Admin Panel, pass the `admin.user` key equal to the slug of any auth-enabled Collection:
 
 ```ts
-import { buildConfig } from 'payload/config'
+import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
 
 const config = buildConfig({
+  // ...
   admin: {
     user: 'admins', // highlight-line
   },
 })
 ```
 
-By default, if you have not specified a Collection, Payload will automatically provide you with a `User` Collection which will be used to access the Admin panel. You can customize or override the fields and settings of the default `User` Collection by passing your own collection using `users` as its `slug` to Payload. When this is done, Payload will use your provided `User` Collection instead of its default version.
+<Banner type="warning">
+  <strong>Important:</strong>
+  <br />
+  The Admin Panel can only be used by a single auth-enabled Collection. To enable authentication for a Collection, simply set `auth: true` in the Collection's configuration. See [Authentication](../authentication/overview) for more information.
+</Banner>
 
-**Note: you can use whatever Collection you'd like to access the Admin panel as long as the Collection supports Authentication. It doesn't need to be called `users`!**
+By default, if you have not specified a Collection, Payload will automatically provide a `User` Collection with access to the Admin Panel. You can customize or override the fields and settings of the default `User` Collection by adding your own Collection with `slug: 'users'`. Doing this will force Payload to use your provided `User` Collection instead of its default version.
 
-For example, you may wish to have two Collections that both support `Authentication`:
+You can use whatever Collection you'd like to access the Admin Panel as long as the Collection supports [Authentication](/docs/authentication/overview). It doesn't need to be called `users`. For example, you may wish to have two Collections that both support authentication:
 
-- `admins` - meant to have a higher level of permissions to manage your data and access the Admin panel
-- `customers` - meant for end users of your app that should not be allowed to log into the Admin panel
+- `admins` - meant to have a higher level of permissions to manage your data and access the Admin Panel
+- `customers` - meant for end users of your app that should not be allowed to log into the Admin Panel
 
-This is totally possible. For the above scenario, by specifying `admin: { user: 'admins' }`, your Payload Admin panel will use `admins`. Any users logged in as `customers` will not be able to log in via the Admin panel.
+To do this, specify `admin: { user: 'admins' }` in your config. This will provide access to the Admin Panel to only `admins`. Any users authenticated as `customers` will be prevented from accessing the Admin Panel.  See [Access Control](/docs/access-control/overview) for full details.
 
-### Light and dark modes
+### Role-based Access Control
 
-Users in the admin panel have access to choosing between light mode and dark mode for their editing experience. The setting is managed while logged into the admin UI within the user account page and will be stored with the browser. By default, the operating system preference is detected and used.
+It is also possible to allow multiple user types into the Admin Panel with limited permissions, known as role-based access control (RBAC). For example, you may wish to have two roles within the `admins` Collection:
 
-### Restricting user access
+- `super-admin` - full access to the Admin Panel to perform any action
+- `editor` - limited access to the Admin Panel to only manage content
 
-If you would like to restrict which users from a single Collection can access the Admin panel, you can use the `admin` access control function. [Click here](/docs/access-control/overview#admin) to learn more.
+To do this, add a `roles` or similar field to your auth-enabled Collection, then use the `access.admin` property to grant or deny access based on the value of that field. See [Access Control](/docs/access-control/overview) for full details. For a complete, working example of role-based access control, check out the official [Auth Example](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/examples/auth/payload).
+
+## Customizing Routes
+
+You have full control over the routes that Payload binds itself to. This includes both [Root-level Routes](#root-level-routes) such as the [REST API](../rest-api/overview), and [Admin-level Routes](#admin-level-routes) such as the user's account page. You can customize these routes to meet the needs of your application simply by specifying the desired paths in your config.
+
+### Root-level Routes
+
+Root-level routes are those that are not behind the `/admin` path, such as the [REST API](../rest-api/overview) and [GraphQL API](../graphql/overview), or the root path of the Admin Panel itself.
+
+To customize root-level routes, use the `routes` property in your [Payload Config](../configuration/overview):
+
+```ts
+import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
+
+const config = buildConfig({
+  // ...
+  routes: {
+    admin: '/custom-admin-route' // highlight-line
+  }
+})
+```
+
+The following options are available:
+
+| Option             | Default route           | Description                           |
+| ------------------ | ----------------------- | ------------------------------------- |
+| `admin`            | `/admin`                | The Admin Panel itself. |
+| `api`              | `/api`                  | The [REST API](../rest-api/overview) base path.               |
+| `graphQL`          | `/graphql`              | The [GraphQL API](../graphql/overview) base path.            |
+| `graphQLPlayground`| `/graphql-playground`   | The GraphQL Playground.               |
+
+<Banner type="success">
+  <strong>Tip:</strong>
+   You can easily add _new_ routes to the Admin Panel through [Custom Endpoints](../rest-api/overview#custom-endpoints) and [Custom Views](./views).
+</Banner>
+
+#### Customizing Root-level Routes
+
+You can change the Root-level Routes as needed, such as to mount the Admin Panel at the root of your application.
+
+Changing Root-level Routes also requires a change to [Project Structure](#project-structure) to match the new route. For example, if you set `routes.admin` to `/`, you would need to completely remove the `admin` directory from the project structure:
+
+```plaintext
+app/
+├─ (payload)/
+├── [[...segments]]/
+├──── ...
+```
+
+<Banner type="warning">
+  <strong>Note:</strong>
+  If you set Root-level Routes _before_ auto-generating the Admin Panel, your [Project Structure](#project-structure) will already be set up correctly.
+</Banner>
+
+### Admin-level Routes
+
+Admin-level routes are those behind the `/admin` path. These are the routes that are part of the Admin Panel itself, such as the user's account page, the login page, etc.
+
+To customize admin-level routes, use the `admin.routes` property in your [Payload Config](../configuration/overview):
+
+```ts
+import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
+
+const config = buildConfig({
+  // ...
+  admin: {
+    routes: {
+      account: '/my-account' // highlight-line
+    }
+  },
+})
+```
+
+The following options are available:
+
+| Option            | Default route           | Description                                     |
+| ----------------- | ----------------------- | ----------------------------------------------- |
+| `account`         | `/account`              | The user's account page.                        |
+| `createFirstUser` | `/create-first-user`    | The page to create the first user.              |
+| `forgot`          | `/forgot`               | The password reset page.                        |
+| `inactivity`      | `/logout-inactivity`    | The page to redirect to after inactivity.       |
+| `login`           | `/login`                | The login page.                                 |
+| `logout`          | `/logout`               | The logout page.                                |
+| `reset`           | `/reset`                | The password reset page.                        |
+| `unauthorized`    | `/unauthorized`         | The unauthorized page.                          |
+
+<Banner type="success">
+  <strong>Note:</strong>
+  You can also swap out entire _views_ out for your own, using the `admin.views` property of the Payload Config. See [Custom Views](./views) for more information.
+</Banner>
+
+## I18n
+
+The Payload Admin Panel is translated in over [30 languages and counting](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/beta/packages/translations). Languages are automatically detected based on the user's browser and used by the Admin Panel to display all text in that language. If no language was detected, or if the user's language is not yet supported, English will be chosen. Users can easily specify their language by selecting one from their account page. See [I18n](../configuration/i18n) for more information.
+
+## Light and Dark Modes
+
+Users in the Admin Panel have the ability to choose between light mode and dark mode for their editing experience. Users can select their preferred theme from their account page. Once selected, it is saved to their user's preferences and persisted across sessions and devices. If no theme was selected, the Admin Panel will automatically detect the operation system's theme and use that as the default.

docs/admin/preferences.mdx

@@ -1,18 +1,19 @@
 ---
 title: Managing User Preferences
 label: Preferences
-order: 50
-desc: Store the preferences of your users as they interact with the Admin panel.
-keywords: admin, preferences, custom, customize, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, express
+order: 70
+desc: Store the preferences of your users as they interact with the Admin Panel.
+keywords: admin, preferences, custom, customize, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
 ---
 
-As your users interact with your Admin panel, you might want to store their preferences in a persistent manner, so that when they revisit the Admin panel, they can pick right back up where they left off.
+As your users interact with the [Admin Panel](./overview), you might want to store their preferences in a persistent manner, so that when they revisit the Admin Panel in a different session or from a different device, they can pick right back up where they left off.
 
 Out of the box, Payload handles the persistence of your users' preferences in a handful of ways, including:
 
-1. Collection `List` view active columns, and their order, that users define
-1. Their last active locale
-1. The "collapsed" state of blocks, on a document level, as users edit or interact with documents
+1. Columns in the Collection List View: their active state and order
+1. The user's last active [Locale](../configuration/localization)
+1. The "collapsed" state of `blocks`, `array`, and `collapsible` fields
+1. The last-known state of the `Nav` component, etc.
 
 <Banner type="warning">
   <strong>Important:</strong>
@@ -21,38 +22,38 @@ Out of the box, Payload handles the persistence of your users' preferences in a
   that is reading or setting a preference via all provided authentication methods.
 </Banner>
 
-### Use cases
+## Use Cases
 
-This API is used significantly for internal operations of the Admin panel, as mentioned above. But, if you're building your own React components for use in the Admin panel, you can allow users to set their own preferences in correspondence to their usage of your components. For example:
+This API is used significantly for internal operations of the Admin Panel, as mentioned above. But, if you're building your own React components for use in the Admin Panel, you can allow users to set their own preferences in correspondence to their usage of your components. For example:
 
 - If you have built a "color picker", you could "remember" the last used colors that the user has set for easy access next time
 - If you've built a custom `Nav` component, and you've built in an "accordion-style" UI, you might want to store the `collapsed` state of each Nav collapsible item. This way, if an editor returns to the panel, their `Nav` state is persisted automatically
 - You might want to store `recentlyAccessed` documents to give admin editors an easy shortcut back to their recently accessed documents on the `Dashboard` or similar
 - Many other use cases exist. Invent your own! Give your editors an intelligent and persistent editing experience.
 
-### Database
+## Database
 
-Payload automatically creates an internally used `payload-preferences` collection that stores user preferences. Each document in the `payload-preferences` collection contains the following shape:
+Payload automatically creates an internally used `payload-preferences` Collection that stores user preferences. Each document in the `payload-preferences` Collection contains the following shape:
 
 | Key               | Value                                                             |
 | ----------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------- |
 | `id`              | A unique ID for each preference stored.                           |
 | `key`             | A unique `key` that corresponds to the preference.                |
 | `user.value`      | The ID of the `user` that is storing its preference.              |
-| `user.relationTo` | The `slug` of the collection that the `user` is logged in as.     |
+| `user.relationTo` | The `slug` of the Collection that the `user` is logged in as.     |
 | `value`           | The value of the preference. Can be any data shape that you need. |
 | `createdAt`       | A timestamp of when the preference was created.                   |
 | `updatedAt`       | A timestamp set to the last time the preference was updated.      |
 
-### APIs
+## APIs
 
 Preferences are available to both [GraphQL](/docs/graphql/overview#preferences) and [REST](/docs/rest-api/overview#) APIs.
 
-### Adding or reading Preferences in your own components
+## Adding or reading Preferences in your own components
 
-The Payload admin panel offers a `usePreferences` hook. The hook is only meant for use within the admin panel itself. It provides you with two methods:
+The Payload Admin Panel offers a `usePreferences` hook. The hook is only meant for use within the Admin Panel itself. It provides you with two methods:
 
-##### `getPreference`
+#### `getPreference`
 
 This async method provides an easy way to retrieve a user's preferences by `key`. It will return a promise containing the resulting preference value.
 
@@ -60,7 +61,7 @@ This async method provides an easy way to retrieve a user's preferences by `key`
 
 - `key`: the `key` of your preference to retrieve.
 
-##### `setPreference`
+#### `setPreference`
 
 Also async, this method provides you with an easy way to set a user preference. It returns `void`.
 
@@ -71,11 +72,12 @@ Also async, this method provides you with an easy way to set a user preference.
 
 ## Example
 
-Here is an example for how you can utilize `usePreferences` within your custom Admin panel components. Note - this example is not fully useful and is more just a reference for how to utilize the Preferences API. In this case, we are demonstrating how to set and retrieve a user's last used colors history within a `ColorPicker` or similar type component.
+Here is an example for how you can utilize `usePreferences` within your custom Admin Panel components. Note - this example is not fully useful and is more just a reference for how to utilize the Preferences API. In this case, we are demonstrating how to set and retrieve a user's last used colors history within a `ColorPicker` or similar type component.
 
-```
+```tsx
+'use client'
 import React, { Fragment, useState, useEffect, useCallback } from 'react';
-import { usePreferences } from 'payload/components/preferences';
+import { usePreferences } from '@payloadcms/ui'
 
 const lastUsedColorsPreferenceKey = 'last-used-colors';
 

docs/admin/views.mdx

@@ -0,0 +1,299 @@
+---
+title: Customizing Views
+label: Customizing Views
+order: 50
+desc:
+keywords:
+---
+
+Views are the individual pages that make up the [Admin Panel](./overview), such as the Dashboard, List, and Edit views. One of the most powerful ways to customize the Admin Panel is to create Custom Views. These are [Custom Components](./components) that can either replace built-in views or can be entirely new.
+
+There are four types of views within the Admin Panel:
+
+- [Root Views](#root-views)
+- [Collection Views](#collection-views)
+- [Global Views](#global-views)
+- [Document Views](#document-views)
+
+To swap in your own Custom Views, consult the list of available components. Determine the scope that corresponds to what you are trying to accomplish, then [author your React component(s)](#building-custom-views) accordingly.
+
+## Root Views
+
+Root Views are the main views of the [Admin Panel](./overview). These are views that are scoped directly under the `/admin` route, such as the Dashboard or Account views.
+
+To easily swap Root Views with your own, or to [create entirely new ones](#adding-new-root-views), use the `admin.components.views` property of your root [Payload Config](../configuration/overview):
+
+```ts
+import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
+
+const config = buildConfig({
+  // ...
+  admin: {
+    components: {
+      views: {
+        Dashboard: MyCustomDashboardView, // highlight-line
+      },
+    },
+  },
+})
+```
+
+_For details on how to build Custom Views, see [Building Custom Views](#building-custom-views)._
+
+The following options are available:
+
+| Property        | Description                                                                   |
+| --------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`Account`**   | The Account view is used to show the currently logged in user's Account page. |
+| **`Dashboard`** | The main landing page of the [Admin Panel](./overview).                                     |
+
+For more granular control, pass a configuration object instead. Payload exposes the following properties for each view:
+
+| Property           | Description                                                                                                                                                                                |
+| ------------------ | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ |
+| **`Component`** \* | Pass in the component that should be rendered when a user navigates to this route.                                                                                                         |
+| **`path`** \*      | Any valid URL path or array of paths that [`path-to-regexp`](https://www.npmjs.com/package/path-to-regex) understands.                                                                     |
+| **`exact`**        | Boolean. When true, will only match if the path matches the `usePathname()` exactly.                                                                                                     |
+| **`strict`**       | When true, a path that has a trailing slash will only match a `location.pathname` with a trailing slash. This has no effect when there are additional URL segments in the pathname. |
+| **`sensitive`**    | When true, will match if the path is case sensitive.                                                                                                                                       |
+
+_\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
+
+### Adding New Views
+
+To add a _new_ views to the [Admin Panel](./overview), simply add your own key to the `views` object with at least a `path` and `Component` property. For example:
+
+```ts
+import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
+
+const config = buildConfig({
+  // ...
+  admin: {
+    components: {
+      views: {
+        // highlight-start
+        MyCustomView: {
+        // highlight-end
+          Component: MyCustomView,
+          path: '/my-custom-view',
+        },
+      },
+    },
+  },
+})
+```
+
+The above example shows how to add a new [Root View](#root-views), but the pattern is the same for [Collection Views](#collection-views), [Global Views](#global-views), and [Document Views](#document-views). For help on how to build your own Custom Views, see [Building Custom Views](#building-custom-views).
+
+<Banner type="warning">
+  <strong>Note:</strong>
+  <br />
+  Routes are cascading, so unless explicitly given the `exact` property, they will
+  match on URLs that simply _start_ with the route's path. This is helpful when creating catch-all
+  routes in your application. Alternatively, define your nested route _before_ your parent
+  route.
+</Banner>
+
+## Collection Views
+
+Collection Views are views that are scoped under the `/collections` route, such as the Collection List and Document Edit views.
+
+To easily swap out Collection Views with your own, or to [create entirely new ones](#adding-new-views), use the `admin.components.views` property of your [Collection Config](../collections/overview):
+
+```ts
+import type { SanitizedCollectionConfig } from 'payload'
+
+export const MyCollectionConfig: SanitizedCollectionConfig = {
+  // ...
+  admin: {
+    components: {
+      views: {
+        Edit: MyCustomEditView, // highlight-line
+      },
+    },
+  },
+}
+```
+
+_For details on how to build Custom Views, see [Building Custom Views](#building-custom-views)._
+
+<Banner type="warning">
+  <strong>Note:</strong>
+  The `Edit` property will replace the _entire_ Edit View, including the title, tabs, etc., _as well as all nested [Document Views](#document-views)_, such as the API, Live Preview, and Version views. To replace only the Edit View precisely, use the `Edit.Default` key instead.
+</Banner>
+
+The following options are available:
+
+| Property   | Description                                                                                                       |
+| ---------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`Edit`** | The Edit View is used to edit a single document for any given Collection. [More details](#document-views).     |
+| **`List`** | The List View is used to show a list of documents for any given Collection.                                         |
+
+<Banner type="success">
+  <strong>Note:</strong>
+  You can also add _new_ Collection Views to the config by adding a new key to the `views` object with at least a `path` and `Component` property. See [Adding New Views](#adding-new-views) for more information.
+</Banner>
+
+## Global Views
+
+Global Views are views that are scoped under the `/globals` route, such as the Document Edit View.
+
+To easily swap out Global Views with your own or [create entirely new ones](#adding-new-views), use the `admin.components.views` property in your [Global Config](../globals/overview):
+
+```ts
+import type { SanitizedGlobalConfig } from 'payload'
+
+export const MyGlobalConfig: SanitizedGlobalConfig = {
+  // ...
+  admin: {
+    components: {
+      views: {
+        Edit: MyCustomEditView, // highlight-line
+      },
+    },
+  },
+})
+```
+
+_For details on how to build Custom Views, see [Building Custom Views](#building-custom-views)._
+
+<Banner type="warning">
+  <strong>Note:</strong>
+  The `Edit` property will replace the _entire_ Edit View, including the title, tabs, etc., _as well as all nested [Document Views](#document-views)_, such as the API, Live Preview, and Version views. To replace only the Edit View precisely, use the `Edit.Default` key instead.
+</Banner>
+
+The following options are available:
+
+| Property   | Description                                                         |
+| ---------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`Edit`** | The Edit View is used to edit a single document for any given Global. [More details](#document-views). |
+
+<Banner type="success">
+  <strong>Note:</strong>
+  You can also add _new_ Global Views to the config by adding a new key to the `views` object with at least a `path` and `Component` property. See [Adding New Views](#adding-new-views) for more information.
+</Banner>
+
+## Document Views
+
+Document Views are views that are scoped under the `/collections/:collectionSlug/:id` or the `/globals/:globalSlug` route, such as the Edit View or the API View. All Document Views keep their overall structure across navigation changes, such as their title and tabs, and replace only the content below.
+
+To easily swap out Document Views with your own, or to [create entirely new ones](#adding-new-document-views), use the `admin.components.views.Edit[key]` property in your [Collection Config](../collections/overview) or [Global Config](../globals/overview):
+
+```ts
+import type { SanitizedCollectionConfig } from 'payload'
+
+export const MyCollectionOrGlobalConfig: SanitizedCollectionConfig = {
+  // ...
+  admin: {
+    components: {
+      views: {
+        Edit: {
+          API: {
+            Component: MyCustomAPIView, // highlight-line
+          },
+        },
+      },
+    },
+  },
+})
+```
+
+_For details on how to build Custom Views, see [Building Custom Views](#building-custom-views)._
+
+<Banner type="warning">
+ <strong>Note:</strong>
+ If you need to replace the _entire_ Edit View, including _all_ nested Document Views, use the `Edit` key itself. See [Custom Collection Views](#collection-views) or [Custom Global Views](#global-views) for more information.
+</Banner>
+
+The following options are available:
+
+| Property          | Description                                                                                                                 |
+| ----------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`Default`**     | The Default view is the primary view in which your document is edited.                                                      |
+| **`Versions`**    | The Versions view is used to view the version history of a single document. [More details](../versions).                    |
+| **`Version`**     | The Version view is used to view a single version of a single document for a given collection. [More details](../versions). |
+| **`API`**         | The API view is used to display the REST API JSON response for a given document.                                            |
+| **`LivePreview`** | The LivePreview view is used to display the Live Preview interface. [More details](../live-preview).                        |
+
+### Document Tabs
+
+Each Document View can be given a new tab in the Edit View, if desired. Tabs are highly configurable, from as simple as changing the label to swapping out the entire component, they can be modified in any way. To add or customize tabs in the Edit View, use the `Component.Tab` key:
+
+```ts
+import type { SanitizedCollectionConfig } from 'payload'
+
+export const MyCollection: SanitizedCollectionConfig = {
+  slug: 'my-collection',
+  admin: {
+    components: {
+      views: {
+        Edit: {
+          MyCustomTab: {
+            Component: MyCustomTab,
+            path: '/my-custom-tab',
+            Tab: MyCustomTab // highlight-line
+          },
+          AnotherCustomView: {
+            Component: AnotherCustomView,
+            path: '/another-custom-view',
+            // highlight-start
+            Tab: {
+              label: 'Another Custom View',
+              href: '/another-custom-view',
+            }
+            // highlight-end
+          },
+        },
+      },
+    },
+  },
+}
+```
+
+<Banner type="warning">
+ <strong>Note:</strong>
+ This applies to _both_ Collections _and_ Globals.
+</Banner>
+
+## Building Custom Views
+
+Custom Views are just [Custom Components](./components) rendered at the page-level. To understand how to build Custom Views, first review the [Building Custom Components](./components#building-custom-components) guide. Once you have a Custom Component ready, you can use it as a Custom View.
+
+```ts
+import type { SanitizedCollectionConfig } from 'payload'
+import { MyCustomView } from './MyCustomView'
+
+export const MyCollectionConfig: SanitizedCollectionConfig = {
+  // ...
+  admin: {
+    components: {
+      views: {
+        Edit: MyCustomView, // highlight-line
+      },
+    },
+  },
+}
+```
+
+Your Custom Views will be provided with the following props:
+
+| Prop                      | Description                                                                                                                            |
+| ------------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`user`**                    | The currently logged in user.                                                                                                          |
+| **`locale`**                  | The current [Locale](../configuration/localization) of the [Admin Panel](./overview).                                                  |
+| **`navGroups`**               | The grouped navigation items according to `admin.group` in your [Collection Config](../collections/overview) or [Global Config](../globals/overview). |
+| **`params`**                  | An object containing the [Dynamic Route Parameters](https://nextjs.org/docs/app/building-your-application/routing/dynamic-routes).     |
+| **`permissions`**             | The permissions of the currently logged in user.                                                                                       |
+| **`searchParams`**            | An object containing the [Search Parameters](https://developer.mozilla.org/docs/Learn/Common_questions/What_is_a_URL#parameters).      |
+| **`visibleEntities`**         | The current user's visible entities according to your [Access Control](../access-control/overview).                                    |
+
+<Banner type="success">
+  <strong>Reminder:</strong>
+  All [Custom Server Components](./components) receive `payload` and `i18n` by default. See [Building Custom Components](./components#building-custom-components) for more details.
+</Banner>
+
+<Banner type="warning">
+  <strong>Important:</strong>
+  It's up to you to secure your custom views. If your view requires a user to be logged in or to
+  have certain access rights, you should handle that within your view component yourself.
+</Banner>

docs/admin/vite.mdx

@@ -1,163 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Vite
-label: Vite
-order: 90
-desc: NEEDS TO BE WRITTEN
----
-
-<Banner type="info">
-  The Vite bundler is currently in beta. If you would like to help us test this package, we'd love
-  to hear from you if you find any [bugs or issues](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/issues/)!
-</Banner>
-
-Payload has a Vite bundler that you can install and bundle the Admin Panel with. This is an alternative to the [Webpack](/docs/admin/webpack) bundler and might give some performance boosts to your development workflow.
-
-To use Vite as your bundler, first you need to install the package:
-
-```bash
-yarn add @payloadcms/bundler-vite
-```
-
-Then you will need to add the [bundler](/docs/admin/bundlers) to your Payload config:
-
-```ts
-import { buildConfig } from '@payloadcms/config'
-import { viteBundler } from '@payloadcms/bundler-vite'
-
-export default buildConfig({
-  collections: [],
-  admin: {
-    bundler: viteBundler(),
-  },
-})
-```
-
-Vite works fundamentally differently than Webpack. In development mode, it will first pre-bundle any of your dependencies that are CommonJS-only, and then it'll leverage ESM directly in your browser for a better HMR experience.
-
-It then uses Rollup to create production builds of your admin UI. With Vite, you should see a decent performance boost—especially after your first cold start. However, that first cold start might take a few more seconds.
-
-<Banner type="warning">
-  In most cases, Vite should work out of the box. But existing Payload plugins may need to make
-  compatibility changes to support Vite.
-</Banner>
-
-This is because Vite aliases work fundamentally differently than Webpack aliases, and Payload relies on aliasing server-only code out of the Payload config to ensure that the bundled admin JS works within your browser.
-
-Here are the main differences between how Vite aliases work and how Webpack aliases work.
-
-**Vite aliases do not work with absolute paths.**
-
-In Vite, alias keys must <strong>exactly match</strong> a import paths. If you have 2 files that import the same server-only module, but have different import paths, you would need to add 2 aliases to support both import paths.
-
-```ts
-// File A
-import serverOnlyModule from '../server-only-module'
-
-// File B
-import serverOnlyModule from '../../server-only-module'
-
-// payload.config.ts
-// You would need to add 2 aliases to support both import paths
-export const buildConfig({
-  collections: [],
-  admin: {
-    bundler: viteBundler(),
-    vite: (incomingViteConfig) => {
-      const existingAliases = incomingViteConfig?.resolve?.alias || {};
-      let aliasArray: { find: string | RegExp; replacement: string; }[] = [];
-
-      // Pass the existing Vite aliases
-      if (Array.isArray(existingAliases)) {
-        aliasArray = existingAliases;
-      } else {
-        aliasArray = Object.values(existingAliases);
-      }
-
-      // Add your own aliases using the find and replacement keys
-      aliasArray.push({
-        find: '../server-only-module',
-        replacement: path.resolve(__dirname, './path/to/browser-safe-module.js')
-        find: '../../server-only-module',
-        replacement: path.resolve(__dirname, './path/to/browser-safe-module.js')
-      });
-
-      return {
-        ...incomingViteConfig,
-        resolve: {
-          ...(incomingViteConfig?.resolve || {}),
-          alias: aliasArray,
-        }
-      };
-    },
-  }
-})
-```
-
-**Vite aliases do not get applied to pre-bundled dependencies.**
-
-This especially affects plugins, as plugins will be pre-bundled by Vite using `esbuild`. To get around this and support Vite, plugin authors need to configure an alias to their plugin at the top level, so that the alias will work accordingly.
-
-Here's an example. Say your plugin is called `payload-plugin-cool`. It's imported as follows:
-
-```ts
-import { myCoolPlugin } from 'payload-plugin-cool'
-```
-
-That plugin should create an alias to support Vite as follows:
-
-```ts
-{
-  // aliases go here
-  find: 'payload-plugin-cool',
-  replacement: path.resolve(__dirname, './my-admin-plugin.js')
-}
-
-```
-
-This will effectively alias the entire plugin and work with Vite. If the plugin requires admin-specific code, then the `./my-admin-plugin.js` alias target file should reflect any changes necessary to the admin UI that the main server-side plugin performs.
-
-### Extending the Vite config
-
-The Payload config supports a new property for plugins to be able to extend the Vite config specifically. That property exists on the main Payload config under `admin.vite`. You can check out the [Vite docs](https://vitejs.dev/config/shared-options.html) for more information on what you can do with the Vite config.
-
-It's a function that takes a Vite config, and returns an updated Vite config. Here's an example:
-
-```ts
-export const buildConfig({
-  collections: [],
-  admin: {
-    bundler: viteBundler(),
-    vite: (incomingViteConfig) => {
-      const existingAliases = incomingViteConfig?.resolve?.alias || {};
-      let aliasArray: { find: string | RegExp; replacement: string; }[] = [];
-
-      // Pass the existing Vite aliases
-      if (Array.isArray(existingAliases)) {
-        aliasArray = existingAliases;
-      } else {
-        aliasArray = Object.values(existingAliases);
-      }
-
-      // Add your own aliases using the find and replacement keys
-      aliasArray.push({
-        find: '../server-only-module',
-        replacement: path.resolve(__dirname, './path/to/browser-safe-module.js')
-      });
-
-      return {
-        ...incomingViteConfig,
-        resolve: {
-          ...(incomingViteConfig?.resolve || {}),
-          alias: aliasArray,
-        }
-      };
-    },
-  }
-})
-```
-
-Learn more about [aliasing server-only modules](https://payloadcms.com/docs/admin/excluding-server-code#aliasing-server-only-modules).
-
-Even though there is a new property for Vite configs specifically, we have implemented some "compatibility" between Webpack and Vite out-of-the-box.
-
-If your config specifies Webpack aliases, we attempt to leverage them automatically within the Vite config. They are merged into the Vite alias configuration seamlessly and may work out-of-the-box.

docs/admin/webpack.mdx

@@ -1,67 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Webpack
-label: Webpack
-order: 80
-desc: The Payload admin panel uses Webpack 5 and supports many common functionalities such as SCSS and Typescript out of the box to give you more freedom.
-keywords: admin, webpack, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, express
----
-
-Payload has a Webpack (v5) bundler that you can build the Admin panel with. For now, we recommended using it because it is stable. If you are feeling a bit more adventurous you can give the [Vite](/docs/admin/vite) bundler a shot.
-
-Out of the box, the Webpack bundler supports common functionalities such as SCSS and Typescript, but there are many cases where you may need to add support for additional functionalities.
-
-#### Installation
-
-```bash
-yarn add @payloadcms/bundler-webpack
-```
-
-#### Import the bundler
-
-```ts
-// payload.config.ts
-
-import { buildConfig } from 'payload/config'
-import { webpackBundler } from '@payloadcms/bundler-webpack'
-
-export default buildConfig({
-  // highlight-start
-  admin: {
-    bundler: webpackBundler(),
-  },
-  // highlight-end
-})
-```
-
-### Extending Webpack
-
-If you need to extend the Webpack config, you can do so by passing a function to the `admin.webpack` property on your Payload config.
-The function will receive the Webpack config as an argument and should return the modified config.
-
-```ts
-// payload.config.ts
-
-import { buildConfig } from 'payload/config'
-import { webpackBundler } from '@payloadcms/bundler-webpack'
-
-export default buildConfig({
-  admin: {
-    bundler: webpackBundler()
-    // highlight-start
-    webpack: (config) => {
-      // full control of the Webpack config
-
-      return config
-    },
-    // highlight-end
-  },
-})
-```
-
-<Banner type="success">
-  <strong>Tip:</strong>
-  <br />
-  If changes to your Webpack aliases are not surfacing, they might be
-  [cached](https://webpack.js.org/configuration/cache/) in `node_modules/.cache/webpack`. Try
-  deleting that folder and restarting your server.
-</Banner>

docs/authentication/api-keys.mdx

@@ -0,0 +1,81 @@
+---
+title: API Key Strategy
+label: API Key Strategy
+order: 50
+desc: Enable API key based authentication to interface with Payload.
+keywords: authentication, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
+---
+
+To integrate with third-party APIs or services, you might need the ability to generate API keys that can be used to identify as a certain user within Payload. API keys are generated on a user-by-user basis, similar to email and passwords, and are meant to represent a single user.
+
+For example, if you have a third-party service or external app that needs to be able to perform protected actions against Payload, first you need to create a user within Payload, i.e. `dev@thirdparty.com`. From your external application you will need to authenticate with that user, you have two options:
+
+1. Log in each time with that user and receive an expiring token to request with.
+1. Generate a non-expiring API key for that user to request with.
+
+<Banner type="success">
+  <strong>Tip:</strong>
+  <br/>
+  This is particularly useful as you can create a "user" that reflects an integration with a specific external service and assign a "role" or specific access only needed by that service/integration.
+</Banner>
+
+Technically, both of these options will work for third-party integrations but the second option with API key is simpler, because it reduces the amount of work that your integrations need to do to be authenticated properly.
+
+To enable API keys on a collection, set the `useAPIKey` auth option to `true`. From there, a new interface will appear in the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview) for each document within the collection that allows you to generate an API key for each user in the Collection.
+
+```ts
+import type { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
+
+export const ThirdPartyAccess: CollectionConfig = {
+  slug: 'third-party-access',
+  auth: {
+    useAPIKey: true, // highlight-line
+  },
+  fields: [],
+}
+```
+
+User API keys are encrypted within the database, meaning that if your database is compromised,
+your API keys will not be.
+
+<Banner type="warning">
+  <strong>Important:</strong>
+  If you change your `PAYLOAD_SECRET`, you will need to regenerate your API keys.
+  <br />
+  The secret key is used to encrypt the API keys, so if you change the secret, existing API keys will
+  no longer be valid.
+</Banner>
+
+### HTTP Authentication
+
+To authenticate REST or GraphQL API requests using an API key, set the `Authorization` header. The header is case-sensitive and needs the slug of the `auth.useAPIKey` enabled collection, then " API-Key ", followed by the `apiKey` that has been assigned. Payload's built-in middleware will then assign the user document to `req.user` and handle requests with the proper [Access Control](../access-control/overview). By doing this, Payload recognizes the request being made as a request by the user associated with that API key.
+
+**For example, using Fetch:**
+
+```ts
+import Users from '../collections/Users'
+
+const response = await fetch('http://localhost:3000/api/pages', {
+  headers: {
+    Authorization: `${Users.slug} API-Key ${YOUR_API_KEY}`,
+  },
+})
+```
+
+Payload ensures that the same, uniform [Access Control](../access-control/overview) is used across all authentication strategies. This enables you to utilize your existing Access Control configurations with both API keys and the standard email/password authentication. This consistency can aid in maintaining granular control over your API keys.
+
+### API Key Only Auth
+
+If you want to use API keys as the only authentication method for a collection, you can disable the default local strategy by setting `disableLocalStrategy` to `true` on the collection's `auth` property. This will disable the ability to authenticate with email and password, and will only allow for authentication via API key.
+
+```ts
+import type { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
+
+export const ThirdPartyAccess: CollectionConfig = {
+  slug: 'third-party-access',
+  auth: {
+    useAPIKey: true,
+    disableLocalStrategy: true, // highlight-line
+  },
+}
+```

docs/authentication/config.mdx

@@ -1,293 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Authentication Config
-label: Config
-order: 20
-desc: Enable and customize options in the Authentication config for features including Forgot Password, Login Attempts, API key usage and more.
-keywords: authentication, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, express
----
-
-Payload's Authentication is extremely powerful and gives you everything you need when you go to build a new app or site in a secure and responsible manner.
-
-To enable Authentication on a collection, define an `auth` property and set it to either `true` or to an object containing the options below.
-
-## Options
-
-| Option                     | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                                         |
-| -------------------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`useAPIKey`**            | Payload Authentication provides for API keys to be set on each user within an Authentication-enabled Collection. [More](/docs/authentication/config#api-keys)                                                                       |
-| **`tokenExpiration`**      | How long (in seconds) to keep the user logged in. JWTs and HTTP-only cookies will both expire at the same time.                                                                                                                     |
-| **`maxLoginAttempts`**     | Only allow a user to attempt logging in X amount of times. Automatically locks out a user from authenticating if this limit is passed. Set to `0` to disable.                                                                       |
-| **`lockTime`**             | Set the time (in milliseconds) that a user should be locked out if they fail authentication more times than `maxLoginAttempts` allows for.                                                                                          |
-| **`depth`**                | How many levels deep a `user` document should be populated when creating the JWT and binding the `user` to the express `req`. Defaults to `0` and should only be modified if absolutely necessary, as this will affect performance. |
-| **`cookies`**              | Set cookie options, including `secure`, `sameSite`, and `domain`. For advanced users.                                                                                                                                               |
-| **`forgotPassword`**       | Customize the way that the `forgotPassword` operation functions. [More](/docs/authentication/config#forgot-password)                                                                                                                |
-| **`verify`**               | Set to `true` or pass an object with verification options to require users to verify by email before they are allowed to log into your app. [More](/docs/authentication/config#email-verification)                                  |
-| **`disableLocalStrategy`** | Advanced - disable Payload's built-in local auth strategy. Only use this property if you have replaced Payload's auth mechanisms with your own.                                                                                     |
-| **`strategies`**           | Advanced - an array of PassportJS authentication strategies to extend this collection's authentication with. [More](/docs/authentication/config#strategies)                                                                         |
-
-### API keys
-
-To integrate with third-party APIs or services, you might need the ability to generate API keys that can be used to identify as a certain user within Payload.
-
-In Payload, users are essentially documents within a collection. Just like you can authenticate as a user with an email and password, which is considered as our default local auth strategy, you can also authenticate as a user with an API key. API keys are generated on a user-by-user basis, similar to email and passwords, and are meant to represent a single user.
-
-For example, if you have a third-party service or external app that needs to be able to perform protected actions at its discretion, you have two options:
-
-1. Create a user for the third-party app, and log in each time to receive a token before you attempt to access any protected actions
-1. Enable API key support for the Collection, where you can generate a non-expiring API key per user in the collection. This is particularly useful as you can create a "user" that reflects an integration with a specific external service and assign a "role" or specific access only needed by that service/integration. Alternatively, you could create a "super admin" user and assign an API key to that user so that any requests made with that API key are considered as being made by that super user.
-
-Technically, both of these options will work for third-party integrations but the second option with API key is simpler, because it reduces the amount of work that your integrations need to do to be authenticated properly.
-
-To enable API keys on a collection, set the `useAPIKey` auth option to `true`. From there, a new interface will appear in the Admin panel for each document within the collection that allows you to generate an API key for each user in the Collection.
-
-<Banner type="success">
-  User API keys are encrypted within the database, meaning that if your database is compromised,
-  your API keys will not be.
-</Banner>
-
-<Banner type="warning">
-  <strong>Important:</strong>
-  If you change your `PAYLOAD_SECRET`, you will need to regenerate your API keys.
-  <br />
-  The secret key is used to encrypt the API keys, so if you change the secret, existing API keys will
-  no longer be valid.
-</Banner>
-
-#### Authenticating via API Key
-
-To authenticate REST or GraphQL API requests using an API key, set the `Authorization` header. The header is case-sensitive and needs the slug of the `auth.useAPIKey` enabled collection, then " API-Key ", followed by the `apiKey` that has been assigned. Payload's built-in middleware will then assign the user document to `req.user` and handle requests with the proper access control. By doing this, Payload recognizes the request being made as a request by the user associated with that API key.
-
-**For example, using Fetch:**
-
-```ts
-import User from '../collections/User'
-
-const response = await fetch('http://localhost:3000/api/pages', {
-  headers: {
-    Authorization: `${User.slug} API-Key ${YOUR_API_KEY}`,
-  },
-})
-```
-
-Payload ensures that the same, uniform access control is used across all authentication strategies. This enables you to utilize your existing access control configurations with both API keys and the standard email/password authentication. This consistency can aid in maintaining granular control over your API keys.
-
-#### API Key _Only_ Authentication
-
-If you want to use API keys as the only authentication method for a collection, you can disable the default local strategy by setting `disableLocalStrategy` to `true` on the collection's `auth` property. This will disable the ability to authenticate with email and password, and will only allow for authentication via API key.
-
-```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
-
-export const Customers: CollectionConfig = {
-  slug: 'customers',
-  auth: {
-    useAPIKey: true,
-    disableLocalStrategy: true,
-  },
-}
-```
-
-### Forgot Password
-
-You can customize how the Forgot Password workflow operates with the following options on the `auth.forgotPassword` property:
-
-**`generateEmailHTML`**
-
-Function that accepts one argument, containing `{ req, token, user }`, that allows for overriding the HTML within emails that are sent to users attempting to reset their password. The function should return a string that supports HTML, which can be a full HTML email.
-
-<Banner type="success">
-  <strong>Tip:</strong>
-  <br />
-  HTML templating can be used to create custom email templates, inline CSS automatically, and more.
-  You can make a reusable function that standardizes all email sent from Payload, which makes
-  sending custom emails more DRY. Payload doesn't ship with an HTML templating engine, so you are
-  free to choose your own.
-</Banner>
-
-Example:
-
-```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
-
-export const Customers: CollectionConfig = {
-  slug: 'customers',
-  auth: {
-    forgotPassword: {
-      // highlight-start
-      generateEmailHTML: ({ req, token, user }) => {
-        // Use the token provided to allow your user to reset their password
-        const resetPasswordURL = `https://yourfrontend.com/reset-password?token=${token}`
-
-        return `
-          <!doctype html>
-          <html>
-            <body>
-              <h1>Here is my custom email template!</h1>
-              <p>Hello, ${user.email}!</p>
-              <p>Click below to reset your password.</p>
-              <p>
-                <a href="${resetPasswordURL}">${resetPasswordURL}</a>
-              </p>
-            </body>
-          </html>
-        `
-      },
-      // highlight-end
-    },
-  },
-}
-```
-
-<Banner type="warning">
-  <strong>Important:</strong>
-  <br />
-  If you specify a different URL to send your users to for resetting their password, such as a page
-  on the frontend of your app or similar, you need to handle making the call to the Payload REST or
-  GraphQL reset-password operation yourself on your frontend, using the token that was provided for
-  you. Above, it was passed via query parameter.
-</Banner>
-
-**`generateEmailSubject`**
-
-Similarly to the above `generateEmailHTML`, you can also customize the subject of the email. The function argument are the same but you can only return a string - not HTML.
-
-Example:
-
-```ts
-{
-  slug: 'customers',
-  auth: {
-    forgotPassword: {
-      // highlight-start
-      generateEmailSubject: ({ req, user }) => {
-        return `Hey ${user.email}, reset your password!`;
-      }
-      // highlight-end
-    }
-  }
-}
-```
-
-### Email Verification
-
-If you'd like to require email verification before a user can successfully log in, you can enable it by passing `true` or an `options` object to `auth.verify`. The following options are available:
-
-**`generateEmailHTML`**
-
-Function that accepts one argument, containing `{ req, token, user }`, that allows for overriding the HTML within emails that are sent to users indicating how to validate their account. The function should return a string that supports HTML, which can optionally be a full HTML email.
-
-Example:
-
-```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
-
-export const Customers: CollectionConfig = {
-  slug: 'customers',
-  auth: {
-    verify: {
-      // highlight-start
-      generateEmailHTML: ({ req, token, user }) => {
-        // Use the token provided to allow your user to verify their account
-        const url = `https://yourfrontend.com/verify?token=${token}`
-
-        return `Hey ${user.email}, verify your email by clicking here: ${url}`
-      },
-      // highlight-end
-    },
-  },
-}
-```
-
-<Banner type="warning">
-  <strong>Important:</strong>
-  <br />
-  If you specify a different URL to send your users to for email verification, such as a page on the
-  frontend of your app or similar, you need to handle making the call to the Payload REST or GraphQL
-  verification operation yourself on your frontend, using the token that was provided for you.
-  Above, it was passed via query parameter.
-</Banner>
-
-**`generateEmailSubject`**
-
-Similarly to the above `generateEmailHTML`, you can also customize the subject of the email. The function argument are the same but you can only return a string - not HTML.
-
-Example:
-
-```ts
-{
-  slug: 'customers',
-  auth: {
-    forgotPassword: {
-      // highlight-start
-      generateEmailSubject: ({ req, user }) => {
-        return `Hey ${user.email}, reset your password!`;
-      }
-      // highlight-end
-    }
-  }
-}
-```
-
-### Strategies
-
-As of Payload `1.0.0`, you can add additional authentication strategies to Payload easily by passing them to your collection's `auth.strategies` array.
-
-Behind the scenes, Payload uses PassportJS to power its local authentication strategy, so most strategies listed on the PassportJS website will work seamlessly. Combined with adding custom components to the admin panel's `Login` view, you can create advanced authentication strategies directly within Payload.
-
-<Banner type="warning">
-  This is an advanced feature, so only attempt this if you are an experienced developer. Otherwise,
-  just let Payload's built-in authentication handle user auth for you.
-</Banner>
-
-The `strategies` property is an array that takes objects with the following properties:
-
-**`strategy`**
-
-This property can accept a Passport strategy directly, or you can pass a function that takes a `payload` argument, and returns a Passport strategy.
-
-**`name`**
-
-If you pass a strategy to the `strategy` property directly, the `name` property is optional and allows you to override the strategy's built-in name.
-
-However, if you pass a function to `strategy`, `name` is a required property.
-
-In either case, Payload will prefix the strategy name with the collection `slug` that the strategy is passed to.
-
-### Admin autologin
-
-For testing and demo purposes you may want to skip forcing the admin user to login in order to access the panel.
-The `admin.autologin` property is used to configure the how visitors are handled when accessing the admin panel.
-The default is that all users will have to login and this should not be enabled for environments where data needs to protected.
-
-#### autoLogin Options
-
-| Option            | Description                                                                                                     |
-| ----------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`email`**       | The email address of the user to login as                                                                       |
-| **`password`**    | The password of the user to login as                                                                            |
-| **`prefillOnly`** | If set to true, the login credentials will be prefilled but the user will still need to click the login button. |
-
-The recommended way to use this feature is behind an environment variable to ensure it is disabled when in production.
-
-**Example:**
-
-```ts
-export default buildConfig({
-  admin: {
-    user: 'users',
-    // highlight-start
-    autoLogin:
-      process.env.PAYLOAD_PUBLIC_ENABLE_AUTOLOGIN === 'true'
-        ? {
-            email: 'test@example.com',
-            password: 'test',
-            prefillOnly: true,
-          }
-        : false,
-    // highlight-end
-  },
-  collections: [
-    /** */
-  ],
-})
-```

docs/authentication/cookies.mdx

@@ -0,0 +1,87 @@
+---
+title: Cookie Strategy
+label: Cookie Strategy
+order: 40
+desc: Enable HTTP Cookie based authentication to interface with Payload.
+keywords: authentication, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
+---
+
+Payload offers the ability to [Authenticate](./overview) via HTTP-only cookies. These can be read from the responses of `login`, `logout`, `refresh`, and `me` auth operations.
+
+<Banner type="success">
+  <strong>Tip:</strong>
+  You can access the logged-in user from within [Access Control](../access-control/overview) and [Hooks](../hooks/overview) through the `req.user` argument. [More details](./token-data).
+</Banner>
+
+### Automatic browser inclusion
+
+Modern browsers automatically include `http-only` cookies when making requests directly to URLs—meaning that if you are running your API on `https://example.com`, and you have logged in and visit `https://example.com/test-page`, your browser will automatically include the Payload authentication cookie for you.
+
+### HTTP Authentication
+
+However, if you use `fetch` or similar APIs to retrieve Payload resources from its REST or GraphQL API, you must specify to include credentials (cookies).
+
+Fetch example, including credentials:
+
+```ts
+const response = await fetch('http://localhost:3000/api/pages', {
+  credentials: 'include',
+})
+
+const pages = await response.json()
+```
+
+For more about including cookies in requests from your app to your Payload API, [read the MDN docs](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Fetch_API/Using_Fetch#Sending_a_request_with_credentials_included).
+
+<Banner type="success">
+  <strong>Tip:</strong>
+  To make sure you have a Payload cookie set properly in your browser after logging in, you can use
+  the browsers Developer Tools > Application > Cookies > [your-domain-here]. The Developer tools
+  will still show HTTP-only cookies.
+</Banner>
+
+### CSRF Attacks
+
+CSRF (cross-site request forgery) attacks are common and dangerous. By using an HTTP-only cookie, Payload removes many XSS vulnerabilities, however, CSRF attacks can still be possible.
+
+For example, let's say you have a popular app `https://payload-finances.com` that allows users to manage finances, send and receive money. As Payload is using HTTP-only cookies, that means that browsers automatically will include cookies when sending requests to your domain - <strong>no matter what page created the request</strong>.
+
+So, if a user of `https://payload-finances.com` is logged in and is browsing around on the internet, they might stumble onto a page with malicious intent. Let's look at an example:
+
+```ts
+// malicious-intent.com
+// makes an authenticated request as on your behalf
+
+const maliciousRequest = await fetch(`https://payload-finances.com/api/me`, {
+  credentials: 'include'
+}).then(res => await res.json())
+```
+
+In this scenario, if your cookie was still valid, malicious-intent.com would be able to make requests like the one above on your behalf. This is a CSRF attack.
+
+### CSRF Prevention
+
+Define domains that your trust and are willing to accept Payload HTTP-only cookie based requests from. Use the `csrf` option on the base Payload Config to do this:
+
+```ts
+// payload.config.ts
+
+import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
+
+const config = buildConfig({
+  serverURL: 'https://my-payload-instance.com',
+  // highlight-start
+  csrf: [
+    // whitelist of domains to allow cookie auth from
+    'https://your-frontend-app.com',
+    'https://your-other-frontend-app.com',
+    // `config.serverURL` is added by default if defined
+  ],
+  // highlight-end
+  collections: [
+    // collections here
+  ],
+})
+
+export default config
+```

docs/authentication/custom-strategies.mdx

@@ -0,0 +1,94 @@
+---
+title: Custom Strategies
+label: Custom Strategies
+order: 60
+desc: Create custom authentication strategies to handle everything auth in Payload.
+keywords: authentication, config, configuration, overview, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
+---
+
+<Banner type="warning">
+  This is an advanced feature, so only attempt this if you are an experienced developer. Otherwise,
+  just let Payload's built-in authentication handle user auth for you.
+</Banner>
+
+### Creating a strategy
+
+At the core, a strategy is a way to authenticate a user making a request. As of `3.0` we moved away from [Passport](https://www.passportjs.org) in favor of pulling back the curtain and putting you in full control.
+
+A strategy is made up of the following:
+
+| Parameter                   | Description                                                               |
+| --------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`name`** \*               | The name of your strategy                                                 |
+| **`authenticate`**&nbsp;\*  | A function that takes in the parameters below and returns a user or null. |
+
+The `authenticate` function is passed the following arguments:
+
+| Argument            | Description                                                                                       |
+| ------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`headers`** \*    | The headers on the incoming request. Useful for retrieving identifiable information on a request. |
+| **`payload`** \*    | The Payload class. Useful for authenticating the identifiable information against Payload.        |
+| **`isGraphQL`**     | Whether or not the request was made from a GraphQL endpoint. Default is `false`.                  |
+
+
+### Example Strategy
+
+At its core a strategy simply takes information from the incoming request and returns a user. This is exactly how Payload's built-in strategies function.
+
+Your `authenticate` method should return an object containing a Payload user document and any optional headers that you'd like Payload to set for you when we return a response.
+
+```ts
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
+
+export const Users: CollectionConfig = {
+  slug: 'users',
+  auth: {
+    disableLocalStrategy: true,
+    // highlight-start
+    strategies: [
+      {
+        name: 'custom-strategy',
+        authenticate: ({ payload, headers }) => {
+          const usersQuery = await payload.find({
+            collection: 'users',
+            where: {
+              code: {
+                equals: headers.get('code'),
+              },
+              secret: {
+                equals: headers.get('secret'),
+              },
+            },
+          })
+
+          return {
+            // Send the user back to authenticate,
+            // or send null if no user should be authenticated
+            user: usersQuery.docs[0] || null,
+
+            // Optionally, you can return headers
+            // that you'd like Payload to set here when
+            // it returns the response
+            responseHeaders: new Headers({
+              'some-header': 'my header value'
+            })
+          }
+        }
+      }
+    ]
+    // highlight-end
+  },
+  fields: [
+    {
+      name: 'code',
+      type: 'text',
+      index: true,
+      unique: true,
+    },
+    {
+      name: 'secret',
+      type: 'text',
+    },
+  ]
+}
+```

docs/authentication/email.mdx

@@ -0,0 +1,203 @@
+---
+title: Authentication Emails
+label: Email Verification
+order: 30
+desc: Email Verification allows users to verify their email address before they're account is fully activated. Email Verification ties directly into the Email functionality that Payload provides.
+keywords: authentication, email, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
+---
+
+[Authentication](./overview) ties directly into the [Email](../email) functionality that Payload provides. This allows you to send emails to users for verification, password resets, and more. While Payload provides default email templates for these actions, you can customize them to fit your brand.
+
+## Email Verification
+
+Email Verification forces users to prove they have access to the email address they can authenticate. This will help to reduce spam accounts and ensure that users are who they say they are.
+
+To enable Email Verification, use the `auth.verify` property on your [Collection Config](../configuration/collections):
+
+```ts
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
+
+export const Customers: CollectionConfig = {
+  // ...
+  auth: {
+    verify: true // highlight-line
+  },
+}
+```
+
+<Banner type="info">
+  <strong>Tip:</strong>
+  Verification emails are fully customizable. [More details](#generateEmailHTML).
+</Banner>
+
+The following options are available:
+
+| Option               | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                                         |
+|----------------------|-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
+| **`generateEmailHTML`** | Allows for overriding the HTML within emails that are sent to users indicating how to validate their account. [More details](#generateEmailHTML). |
+| **`generateEmailSubject`** | Allows for overriding the subject of the email that is sent to users indicating how to validate their account. [More details](#generateEmailSubject). |
+
+#### generateEmailHTML
+
+Function that accepts one argument, containing `{ req, token, user }`, that allows for overriding the HTML within emails that are sent to users indicating how to validate their account. The function should return a string that supports HTML, which can optionally be a full HTML email.
+
+```ts
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
+
+export const Customers: CollectionConfig = {
+  // ...
+  auth: {
+    verify: {
+      // highlight-start
+      generateEmailHTML: ({ req, token, user }) => {
+        // Use the token provided to allow your user to verify their account
+        const url = `https://yourfrontend.com/verify?token=${token}`
+
+        return `Hey ${user.email}, verify your email by clicking here: ${url}`
+      },
+      // highlight-end
+    },
+  },
+}
+```
+
+<Banner type="warning">
+  <strong>Important:</strong>
+  If you specify a different URL to send your users to for email verification, such as a page on the
+  frontend of your app or similar, you need to handle making the call to the Payload REST or GraphQL
+  verification operation yourself on your frontend, using the token that was provided for you.
+  Above, it was passed via query parameter.
+</Banner>
+
+#### generateEmailSubject
+
+Similarly to the above `generateEmailHTML`, you can also customize the subject of the email. The function argument are the same but you can only return a string - not HTML.
+
+```ts
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
+
+export const Customers: CollectionConfig = {
+  // ...
+  auth: {
+    verify: {
+      // highlight-start
+      generateEmailSubject: ({ req, user }) => {
+        return `Hey ${user.email}, reset your password!`;
+      }
+      // highlight-end
+    }
+  }
+}
+```
+
+## Forgot Password
+
+You can customize how the Forgot Password workflow operates with the following options on the `auth.forgotPassword` property:
+
+```ts
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
+
+export const Customers: CollectionConfig = {
+  // ...
+  auth: {
+    forgotPassword: { // highlight-line
+      // ...
+    },
+  },
+}
+```
+
+The following options are available:
+
+| Option               | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                                         |
+|----------------------|-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
+| **`generateEmailHTML`** | Allows for overriding the HTML within emails that are sent to users attempting to reset their password. [More details](#generateEmailHTML). |
+| **`generateEmailSubject`** | Allows for overriding the subject of the email that is sent to users attempting to reset their password. [More details](#generateEmailSubject). |
+
+#### generateEmailHTML
+
+This function allows for overriding the HTML within emails that are sent to users attempting to reset their password. The function should return a string that supports HTML, which can be a full HTML email.
+
+```ts
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
+
+export const Customers: CollectionConfig = {
+  // ...
+  auth: {
+    forgotPassword: {
+      // highlight-start
+      generateEmailHTML: ({ req, token, user }) => {
+        // Use the token provided to allow your user to reset their password
+        const resetPasswordURL = `https://yourfrontend.com/reset-password?token=${token}`
+
+        return `
+          <!doctype html>
+          <html>
+            <body>
+              <h1>Here is my custom email template!</h1>
+              <p>Hello, ${user.email}!</p>
+              <p>Click below to reset your password.</p>
+              <p>
+                <a href="${resetPasswordURL}">${resetPasswordURL}</a>
+              </p>
+            </body>
+          </html>
+        `
+      },
+      // highlight-end
+    },
+  },
+}
+```
+
+<Banner type="warning">
+  <strong>Important:</strong>
+  If you specify a different URL to send your users to for resetting their password, such as a page
+  on the frontend of your app or similar, you need to handle making the call to the Payload REST or
+  GraphQL reset-password operation yourself on your frontend, using the token that was provided for
+  you. Above, it was passed via query parameter.
+</Banner>
+
+<Banner type="success">
+  <strong>Tip:</strong>
+  HTML templating can be used to create custom email templates, inline CSS automatically, and more.
+  You can make a reusable function that standardizes all email sent from Payload, which makes
+  sending custom emails more DRY. Payload doesn't ship with an HTML templating engine, so you are
+  free to choose your own.
+</Banner>
+
+The following arguments are passed to the `generateEmailHTML` function:
+
+| Argument | Description                                                                                   |
+|----------|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
+| `req`    | The request object.                                                                           |
+| `token`  | The token that is generated for the user to reset their password.                             |
+| `user`   | The user document that is attempting to reset their password.                                 |
+
+#### generateEmailSubject
+
+Similarly to the above `generateEmailHTML`, you can also customize the subject of the email. The function argument are the same but you can only return a string - not HTML.
+
+```ts
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
+
+export const Customers: CollectionConfig = {
+  // ...
+  auth: {
+    forgotPassword: {
+      // highlight-start
+      generateEmailSubject: ({ req, user }) => {
+        return `Hey ${user.email}, reset your password!`;
+      }
+      // highlight-end
+    }
+  }
+}
+```
+
+The following arguments are passed to the `generateEmailSubject` function:
+
+| Argument | Description                                                                                   |
+|----------|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
+| `req`    | The request object.                                                                           |
+| `user`   | The user document that is attempting to reset their password.                                 |

docs/authentication/jwt.mdx

@@ -0,0 +1,51 @@
+---
+title: JWT Strategy
+label: JWT Strategy
+order: 40
+desc: Enable JSON Web Token based authentication to interface with Payload.
+keywords: authentication, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
+---
+
+Payload offers the ability to [Authenticate](./overview) via JSON Web Tokens (JWT). These can be read from the responses of `login`, `logout`, `refresh`, and `me` auth operations.
+
+<Banner type="success">
+  <strong>Tip:</strong>
+  You can access the logged-in user from within [Access Control](../access-control/overview) and [Hooks](../hooks/overview) through the `req.user` argument. [More details](./token-data).
+</Banner>
+
+### Identifying Users Via The Authorization Header
+
+In addition to authenticating via an HTTP-only cookie, you can also identify users via the `Authorization` header on an HTTP request.
+
+Example:
+
+```ts
+const user = await fetch('http://localhost:3000/api/users/login', {
+  method: 'POST',
+  body: JSON.stringify({
+    email: 'dev@payloadcms.com',
+    password: 'password',
+  })
+}).then(req => await req.json())
+
+const request = await fetch('http://localhost:3000', {
+  headers: {
+    Authorization: `JWT ${user.token}`,
+  },
+})
+```
+
+### Omitting The Token
+
+In some cases you may want to prevent the token from being returned from the auth operations. You can do that by setting `removeTokenFromResponse` to `true` like so:
+
+```ts
+import type { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
+
+export const UsersWithoutJWTs: CollectionConfig = {
+  slug: 'users-without-jwts',
+  auth: {
+    removeTokenFromRepsonse: true, // highlight-line
+  },
+}
+```

docs/authentication/operations.mdx

@@ -1,16 +1,16 @@
 ---
 title: Authentication Operations
 label: Operations
-order: 30
+order: 20
 desc: Enabling Authentication automatically makes key operations available such as Login, Logout, Verify, Unlock, Reset Password and more.
-keywords: authentication, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, express
+keywords: authentication, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
 ---
 
-Enabling Authentication on a Collection automatically exposes additional auth-based operations in the Local, REST, and GraphQL APIs.
+Enabling [Authentication](./overview) on a [Collection](../configuration/collections) automatically exposes additional auth-based operations in the [Local API](../local-api/overview), [REST API](../rest-api/overview), and [GraphQL API](../graphql/overview).
 
-### Access
+## Access
 
-The Access operation returns what a logged in user can and can't do with the collections and globals that are registered via your config. This data can be immensely helpful if your app needs to show and hide certain features based on access control, as the Payload Admin panel does.
+The Access operation returns what a logged in user can and can't do with the collections and globals that are registered via your config. This data can be immensely helpful if your app needs to show and hide certain features based on [Access Control](../access-control/overview), just as the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview) does.
 
 **REST API endpoint**:
 
@@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ query {
 
 Document access can also be queried on a collection/global basis. Access on a global can queried like `http://localhost:3000/api/global-slug/access`, Collection document access can be queried like `http://localhost:3000/api/collection-slug/access/:id`.
 
-### Me
+## Me
 
 Returns either a logged in user with token or null when there is no logged in user.
 
@@ -105,9 +105,9 @@ query {
 }
 ```
 
-### Login
+## Login
 
-Accepts an `email` and `password`. On success, it will return the logged in user as well as a token that can be used to authenticate. In the GraphQL and REST APIs, this operation also automatically sets an HTTP-only cookie including the user's token. If you pass an Express `res` to the Local API operation, Payload will set a cookie there as well.
+Accepts an `email` and `password`. On success, it will return the logged in user as well as a token that can be used to authenticate. In the GraphQL and REST APIs, this operation also automatically sets an HTTP-only cookie including the user's token. If you pass a `res` to the Local API operation, Payload will set a cookie there as well.
 
 **Example REST API login**:
 
@@ -166,7 +166,7 @@ const result = await payload.login({
 })
 ```
 
-### Logout
+## Logout
 
 As Payload sets HTTP-only cookies, logging out cannot be done by just removing a cookie in JavaScript, as HTTP-only cookies are inaccessible by JS within the browser. So, Payload exposes a `logout` operation to delete the token in a safe way.
 
@@ -189,9 +189,9 @@ mutation {
 }
 ```
 
-### Refresh
+## Refresh
 
-Allows for "refreshing" JWTs. If your user has a token that is about to expire, but the user is still active and using the app, you might want to use the `refresh` operation to receive a new token by sending the operation the token that is about to expire.
+Allows for "refreshing" JWTs. If your user has a token that is about to expire, but the user is still active and using the app, you might want to use the `refresh` operation to receive a new token by executing this operation via the authenticated user.
 
 This operation requires a non-expired token to send back a new one. If the user's token has already expired, you will need to allow them to log in again to retrieve a new token.
 
@@ -237,14 +237,7 @@ mutation {
 }
 ```
 
-<Banner type="success">
-  The Refresh operation will automatically find the user's token in either a JWT header or the
-  HTTP-only cookie. But, you can specify the token you're looking to refresh by providing the REST
-  API with a `token` within the JSON body of the request, or by providing the GraphQL resolver a
-  `token` arg.
-</Banner>
-
-### Verify by Email
+## Verify by Email
 
 If your collection supports email verification, the Verify operation will be exposed which accepts a verification token and sets the user's `_verified` property to `true`, thereby allowing the user to authenticate with the Payload API.
 
@@ -276,11 +269,11 @@ const result = await payload.verifyEmail({
 })
 ```
 
-### Unlock
+## Unlock
 
-If a user locks themselves out and you wish to deliberately unlock them, you can utilize the Unlock operation. The Admin panel features an Unlock control automatically for all collections that feature max login attempts, but you can programmatically unlock users as well by using the Unlock operation.
+If a user locks themselves out and you wish to deliberately unlock them, you can utilize the Unlock operation. The [Admin Panel](../admin/overview) features an Unlock control automatically for all collections that feature max login attempts, but you can programmatically unlock users as well by using the Unlock operation.
 
-To restrict who is allowed to unlock users, you can utilize the [`unlock`](/docs/access-control/overview#unlock) access control function.
+To restrict who is allowed to unlock users, you can utilize the [`unlock`](../access-control/overview#unlock) access control function.
 
 **Example REST API unlock**:
 
@@ -309,13 +302,13 @@ const result = await payload.unlock({
 })
 ```
 
-### Forgot Password
+## Forgot Password
 
 Payload comes with built-in forgot password functionality. Submitting an email address to the Forgot Password operation will generate an email and send it to the respective email address with a link to reset their password.
 
 The link to reset the user's password contains a token which is what allows the user to securely reset their password.
 
-By default, the Forgot Password operations send users to the Payload Admin panel to reset their password, but you can customize the generated email to send users to the frontend of your app instead by [overriding the email HTML](/docs/authentication/config#forgot-password).
+By default, the Forgot Password operations send users to the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview) to reset their password, but you can customize the generated email to send users to the frontend of your app instead by [overriding the email HTML](/docs/authentication/overview#forgot-password).
 
 **Example REST API Forgot Password**:
 
@@ -361,7 +354,7 @@ const token = await payload.forgotPassword({
   use the token to "reset" their password.
 </Banner>
 
-### Reset Password
+## Reset Password
 
 After a user has "forgotten" their password and a token is generated, that token can be used to send to the reset password operation along with a new password which will allow the user to reset their password securely.
 

docs/authentication/overview.mdx

@@ -3,7 +3,7 @@ title: Authentication Overview
 label: Overview
 order: 10
 desc: Payload provides highly secure user Authentication out of the box, and you can fully customize, override, or remove the default Authentication support.
-keywords: authentication, config, configuration, overview, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, express
+keywords: authentication, config, configuration, overview, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
 ---
 
 <YouTube
@@ -11,38 +11,47 @@ keywords: authentication, config, configuration, overview, documentation, Conten
   title="Simplified Authentication for Headless CMS: Unlocking Reusability in One Line"
 />
 
-<Banner>
-  Payload provides for highly secure and customizable user Authentication out of the box, which
-  allows for users to identify themselves to Payload.
-</Banner>
+Authentication is a critical part of any application. Payload provides a secure, portable way to manage user accounts out of the box. Payload Authentication is designed to be used in both the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview), all well as your own external applications, completely eliminating the need for paid, third-party platforms and services.
 
-Authentication is used within the Payload Admin panel itself as well as throughout your app(s) themselves however you determine necessary.
+Here are some common use cases of Authentication in your own applications:
 
-![Authentication admin panel functionality](https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/auth-admin.jpg)
-_Admin panel screenshot depicting an Admins Collection with Auth enabled_
+- Customer accounts for an e-commerce app
+- User accounts for a SaaS product
+- P2P apps or social sites where users need to log in and manage their profiles
+- Online games where players need to track their progress over time
 
-**Here are some common use cases of Authentication outside of Payload's dashboard itself:**
+When Authentication is enabled on a [Collection](../configuration/collections), Payload injects all necessary functionality to support the entire user flow. This includes all [auth-related operations](./operations) like account creation, logging in and out, and resetting passwords, all [auth-related emails](./email) like email verification and password reset, as well as any necessary UI to manage users from the Admin Panel.
 
-- Customer accounts for an ecommerce app
-- Customer accounts for a SaaS product
-- P2P app or social site where users need to log in and manage their profiles
-- Online game where players need to track their progress over time
-
-By default, Payload provides you with a `User` collection that supports Authentication, which is used to access the Admin panel. But, you can add support to one or many Collections of your own. For more information on how to customize, override, or remove the default `User` collection, [click here](/docs/admin/overview#the-admin-user-collection).
-
-### Enabling Auth on a collection
-
-Every Payload Collection can opt-in to supporting Authentication by specifying the `auth` property on the Collection's config to either `true` or to an object containing `auth` options.
-
-**For a full list of all `auth` options, [click here](/docs/authentication/config).**
-
-Simple example collection:
+To enable Authentication on a Collection, use the `auth` property in the [Collection Config](../configuration/collection#auth):
 
 ```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
+
+export const Users: CollectionConfig = {
+  // ...
+  auth: true, // highlight-line
+}
+```
+
+![Authentication Admin Panel functionality](https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/auth-admin.jpg)
+_Admin Panel screenshot depicting an Admins Collection with Auth enabled_
+
+## Config Options
+
+Any [Collection](../configuration/collections) can opt-in to supporting Authentication. Once enabled, each Document that is created within the Collection can be thought of as a "user". This enables a complete authentication workflow on your Collection, such as logging in and out, resetting their password, and more.
+
+<Banner type="warning">
+  <strong>Note:</strong>
+  By default, Payload provides an auth-enabled `User` Collection which is used to access the Admin Panel. [More details](../admin/overview#the-admin-user-collection).
+</Banner>
+
+To enable Authentication on a Collection, use the `auth` property in the [Collection Config](../configuration/collections):
+
+```ts
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
 
 export const Admins: CollectionConfig = {
-  slug: 'admins',
+  // ...
   // highlight-start
   auth: {
     tokenExpiration: 7200, // How many seconds to keep the user logged in
@@ -52,125 +61,136 @@ export const Admins: CollectionConfig = {
     // More options are available
   },
   // highlight-end
-  fields: [
-    {
-      name: 'role',
-      type: 'select',
-      required: true,
-      options: ['user', 'admin', 'editor', 'developer'],
-    },
-  ],
 }
 ```
 
-**By enabling Authentication on a config, the following modifications will automatically be made to your Collection:**
-
-1. `email` as well as password `salt` & `hash` fields will be added to your Collection's schema
-1. The Admin panel will feature a new set of corresponding UI to allow for changing password and editing email
-1. [A new set of `operations`](/docs/authentication/operations) will be exposed via Payload's REST, Local, and GraphQL APIs
-
-Once enabled, each document that is created within the Collection can be thought of as a `user` - who can make use of commonly required authentication functions such as logging in / out, resetting their password, and more.
-
-### Logging in / out, resetting password, etc.
-
-[Click here](/docs/authentication/operations) for a list of all automatically-enabled Auth operations, including `login`, `logout`, `refresh`, and others.
-
-### Token-based auth
-
-Successfully logging in returns a `JWT` (JSON web token) which is how a user will identify themselves to Payload. By providing this JWT via either an HTTP-only cookie or an `Authorization: JWT` or `Authorization: Bearer` header, Payload will automatically identify the user and add its user JWT data to the Express `req`, which is available throughout Payload including within access control, hooks, and more.
-
-You can specify what data gets encoded to the JWT token by setting `saveToJWT` to true in your auth collection fields. If you wish to use a different key other than the field `name`, you can provide it to `saveToJWT` as a string. It is also possible to use `saveToJWT` on fields that are nested in inside groups and tabs. If a group has a `saveToJWT` set it will include the object with all sub-fields in the token. You can set `saveToJWT: false` for any fields you wish to omit. If a field inside a group has `saveToJWT` set, but the group does not, the field will be included at the top level of the token.
-
-<Banner type="success">
+<Banner type="info">
   <strong>Tip:</strong>
-  <br />
-  You can access the logged-in user from access control functions and hooks via the Express{' '}
-  <strong>req</strong>. The logged-in user is automatically added as the <strong>user</strong>{' '}
-  property.
+  For default auth behavior, set `auth: true`. This is a good starting point for most applications.
 </Banner>
 
-### HTTP-only cookies
-
-Payload `login`, `logout`, and `refresh` operations make use of HTTP-only cookies for authentication purposes. HTTP-only cookies are a highly secure method of storing identifiable data on a user's device so that Payload can automatically recognize a returning user until their cookie expires. They are totally protected from common XSS attacks and cannot be read at all via JavaScript in the browser.
-
-##### Automatic browser inclusion
-
-Modern browsers automatically include `http-only` cookies when making requests directly to URLs—meaning that if you are running your API on http://example.com, and you have logged in and visit http://example.com/test-page, your browser will automatically include the Payload authentication cookie for you.
-
-##### Using Fetch or other HTTP APIs
-
-However, if you use `fetch` or similar APIs to retrieve Payload resources from its REST or GraphQL API, you need to specify to include credentials (cookies).
-
-Fetch example, including credentials:
-
-```ts
-const response = await fetch('http://localhost:3000/api/pages', {
-  credentials: 'include',
-})
-
-const pages = await response.json()
-```
-
-For more about how to automatically include cookies in requests from your app to your Payload API, [click here](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Fetch_API/Using_Fetch#Sending_a_request_with_credentials_included).
-
-<Banner type="success">
-  <strong>Tip:</strong>
-  <br />
-  To make sure you have a Payload cookie set properly in your browser after logging in, you can use
-  Chrome's Developer Tools - Application - Cookies - [your-domain-here]. The Chrome Developer tools
-  will still show HTTP-only cookies, even when JavaScript running on the page can't.
-</Banner>
-
-### CSRF Protection
-
-CSRF (cross-site request forgery) attacks are common and dangerous. By using an HTTP-only cookie, Payload removes many XSS vulnerabilities, however, CSRF attacks can still be possible.
-
-For example, let's say you have a very popular app running at coolsite.com. This app allows users to manage finances and send / receive money. As Payload is using HTTP-only cookies, that means that browsers automatically will include cookies when sending requests to your domain - no matter what page created the request.
-
-So, if a user of coolsite.com is logged in and just browsing around on the internet, they might stumble onto a page with bad intentions. That bad page might automatically make requests to all sorts of sites to see if they can find one that they can log into - and coolsite.com might be on their list. If your user was logged in while they visited that evil site, the attacker could do whatever they wanted as if they were your coolsite.com user by just sending requests to the coolsite API (which would automatically include the auth cookie). They could send themselves a bunch of money from your user's account, change the user's password, etc. This is what a CSRF attack is.
-
 <Banner type="warning">
-  <strong>
-    To protect against CSRF attacks, Payload only accepts cookie-based authentication from domains
-    that you explicitly whitelist.
-  </strong>
+  <strong>Note:</strong>
+  Auth-enabled Collections with be automatically injected with the `hash`, `salt`, and `email` fields. [More details](../fields/overview#field-names).
 </Banner>
 
-To define domains that should allow users to identify themselves via the Payload HTTP-only cookie, use the `csrf` option on the base Payload config to whitelist domains that you trust.
+The following options are available:
 
-`payload.config.ts`:
+| Option                     | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                                         |
+|----------------------------|-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
+| **`cookies`**              | Set cookie options, including `secure`, `sameSite`, and `domain`. For advanced users.                                                                                                                                               |
+| **`depth`**                | How many levels deep a `user` document should be populated when creating the JWT and binding the `user` to the `req`. Defaults to `0` and should only be modified if absolutely necessary, as this will affect performance. |
+| **`disableLocalStrategy`** | Advanced - disable Payload's built-in local auth strategy. Only use this property if you have replaced Payload's auth mechanisms with your own.                                                                                     |
+| **`forgotPassword`**       | Customize the way that the `forgotPassword` operation functions. [More details](./email#forgot-password).                                                                                                             |
+| **`lockTime`**             | Set the time (in milliseconds) that a user should be locked out if they fail authentication more times than `maxLoginAttempts` allows for.                                                                                          |
+| **`loginWithUsername`**    | Ability to allow users to login with username/password. [More](/docs/authentication/overview#login-with-username)                                                                                                                     |
+| **`maxLoginAttempts`**     | Only allow a user to attempt logging in X amount of times. Automatically locks out a user from authenticating if this limit is passed. Set to `0` to disable.                                                                       |
+| **`strategies`**           | Advanced - an array of custom authentification strategies to extend this collection's authentication with. [More details](./custom-strategies).                                                                         |
+| **`tokenExpiration`**      | How long (in seconds) to keep the user logged in. JWTs and HTTP-only cookies will both expire at the same time.                                                                                                                     |
+| **`useAPIKey`**            | Payload Authentication provides for API keys to be set on each user within an Authentication-enabled Collection. [More details](./api-keys).                                                                       |
+| **`verify`**               | Set to `true` or pass an object with verification options to require users to verify by email before they are allowed to log into your app. [More details](./email#email-verification).                                  |
 
-```ts
-import { buildConfig } from 'payload/config'
+### Login With Username
 
-const config = buildConfig({
-  collections: [
-    // collections here
-  ],
-  // highlight-start
-  csrf: [
-    // whitelist of domains to allow cookie auth from
-    'https://your-frontend-app.com',
-    'https://your-other-frontend-app.com',
-  ],
-  // highlight-end
-})
-
-export default config
-```
-
-### Identifying users via the Authorization Header
-
-In addition to authenticating via an HTTP-only cookie, you can also identify users via the `Authorization` header on an HTTP request.
+You can allow users to login with their username instead of their email address by setting the `loginWithUsername` property to `true`.
 
 Example:
 
 ```ts
-const request = await fetch('http://localhost:3000', {
-  headers: {
-    Authorization: `JWT ${token}`,
+{
+  slug: 'customers',
+  auth: {
+    loginWithUsername: true,
   },
+}
+```
+
+Or, you can pass an object with additional options:
+
+```ts
+{
+  slug: 'customers',
+  auth: {
+    loginWithUsername: {
+      allowEmailLogin: true, // default: false
+      requireEmail: false, // default: false
+    },
+  },
+}
+```
+
+**`allowEmailLogin`**
+
+If set to `true`, users can log in with either their username or email address. If set to `false`, users can only log in with their username.
+
+**`requireEmail`**
+
+If set to `true`, an email address is required when creating a new user. If set to `false`, email is not required upon creation.
+
+## Auto-Login
+
+For testing and demo purposes you may want to skip forcing the user to login in order to access your application. Typically, all users should be required to login, however, you can speed up local development time by enabling auto-login.
+
+To enable auto-login, set the `autoLogin` property in the [Admin Config](../configuration/admin):
+
+```ts
+import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
+
+export default buildConfig({
+  // ...
+  // highlight-start
+  autoLogin:
+    process.env.NEXT_PUBLIC_ENABLE_AUTOLOGIN === 'true'
+      ? {
+          email: 'test@example.com',
+          password: 'test',
+          prefillOnly: true,
+        }
+      : false,
+  // highlight-end
 })
 ```
 
-You can retrieve a user's token via the response to `login`, `refresh`, and `me` auth operations.
+<Banner type="warning">
+  <strong>Warning:</strong>
+  The recommended way to use this feature is behind an [Environment Variable](../configuration/environment-vars). This will ensure it is _disabled_ in production.
+</Banner>
+
+The following options are available:
+
+| Option            | Description                                                                                                     |
+|-------------------|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
+| **`username`**    | The username of the user to login as                                                                            |
+| **`email`**       | The email address of the user to login as                                                                       |
+| **`password`**    | The password of the user to login as. This is only needed if `prefillOnly` is set to true                       |
+| **`prefillOnly`** | If set to true, the login credentials will be prefilled but the user will still need to click the login button. |
+
+## Operations
+
+All auth-related operations are available via Payload's REST, Local, and GraphQL APIs. These operations are automatically added to your Collection when you enable Authentication. [More details](./operations).
+
+## Strategies
+
+Out of the box Payload ships with a three powerful Authentication strategies:
+
+- [HTTP-Only Cookies](./cookies)
+- [JSON Web Tokens (JWT)](./jwt)
+- [API-Keys](./api-keys)
+
+Each of these strategies can work together or independently. You can also create your own custom strategies to fit your specific needs. [More details](./custom-strategies).
+
+### HTTP-Only Cookies
+
+[HTTP-only cookies](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/HTTP/Cookies) are a highly secure method of storing identifiable data on a user's device so that Payload can automatically recognize a returning user until their cookie expires. They are totally protected from common XSS attacks and <strong>cannot be read by JavaScript in the browser</strong>, unlike JWT's. [More details](./cookies).
+
+### JSON Web Tokens
+
+JWT (JSON Web Tokens) can also be utilized to perform authentication. Tokens are generated on `login`, `refresh` and `me` operations and can be attached to future requests to authenticate users. [More details](./jwt).
+
+### API Keys
+
+API Keys can be enabled on auth collections. These are particularly useful when you want to authenticate against Payload from a third party service. [More details](./api-keys).
+
+### Custom Strategies
+
+There are cases where these may not be enough for your application. Payload is extendable by design so you can wire up your own strategy when you need to. [More details](./custom-strategies).

docs/authentication/token-data.mdx

@@ -0,0 +1,107 @@
+---
+title: Token Data
+label: Token Data
+order: 70
+desc: Storing data for read on the request object.
+keywords: authentication, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
+---
+
+During the lifecycle of a request you will be able to access the data you have configured to be stored in the JWT by accessing `req.user`. The user object is automatically appeneded to the request for you.
+
+### Definining Token Data
+
+You can specify what data gets encoded to the Cookie/JWT-Token by setting `saveToJWT` property on fields within your auth collection.
+
+```ts
+import type { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
+
+export const Users: CollectionConfig = {
+  slug: 'users',
+  auth: true,
+  fields: [
+    {
+      // will be stored in the JWT
+      saveToJWT: true,
+      type: 'select',
+      name: 'role',
+      options: [
+        'super-admin',
+        'user',
+      ]
+    },
+    {
+      // the entire object will be stored in the JWT
+      // tab fields can do the same thing!
+      saveToJWT: true,
+      type: 'group',
+      name: 'group1',
+      fields: [
+        {
+          type: 'text',
+          name: 'includeField',
+        },
+        {
+          // will be omitted from the JWT
+          saveToJWT: false,
+          type: 'text',
+          name: 'omitField',
+        },
+      ]
+    },
+    {
+      type: 'group',
+      name: 'group2',
+      fields: [
+        {
+          // will be stored in the JWT
+          // but stored at the top level
+          saveToJWT: true,
+          type: 'text',
+          name: 'includeField',
+        },
+        {
+          type: 'text',
+          name: 'omitField',
+        },
+      ]
+    },
+  ]
+}
+```
+
+<Banner type="success">
+  <strong>Tip:</strong>
+  <br/>
+  If you wish to use a different key other than the field `name`, you can define `saveToJWT` as a string.
+</Banner>
+
+
+### Using Token Data
+
+This is especially helpful when writing [Hooks](../hooks/overview) and [Access Control](../access-control/overview) that depend on user defined fields.
+
+```ts
+import type { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
+
+export const Invoices: CollectionConfig = {
+  slug: 'invoices',
+  access: {
+    read: ({ req, data }) => {
+      if (!req?.user) return false
+      // highlight-start
+      if ({ req.user?.role === 'super-admin'}) {
+        return true
+      }
+      // highlight-end
+      return data.owner === req.user.id
+    }
+  }
+  fields: [
+    {
+      name: 'owner',
+      relationTo: 'users'
+    },
+    // ... other fields
+  ],
+}
+```

docs/authentication/using-middleware.mdx

@@ -1,56 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Using the Payload Auth Middleware
-label: Using the Middleware
-order: 40
-desc: Make full use of Payload's built-in authentication with your own custom Express endpoints by adding Payload's authentication middleware.
-keywords: authentication, middleware, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, express
----
-
-Because Payload uses your existing Express server, you are free to add whatever logic you need to your app through endpoints of your own. However, Payload does not add its middleware to your Express app itself—instead, it scopes all of its middleware to Payload-specific routers.
-
-This approach has a ton of benefits - it's great for isolation of concerns and limiting scope, but it also means that your additional routes won't have access to Payload's user authentication.
-
-<Banner type="success">
-  You can make full use of Payload's built-in authentication within your own custom Express
-  endpoints by adding Payload's authentication middleware.
-</Banner>
-
-<Banner type="warning">
-  Payload must be initialized before the `payload.authenticate` middleware can be used. This is done
-  by calling `payload.init()` prior to adding the middleware.
-</Banner>
-
-Example in `server.js`:
-
-```ts
-import express from 'express'
-import payload from 'payload'
-
-const app = express()
-
-const start = async () => {
-  await payload.init({
-    secret: 'PAYLOAD_SECRET_KEY',
-    express: app,
-  })
-
-  const router = express.Router()
-
-  // Note: Payload must be initialized before the `payload.authenticate` middleware can be used
-  router.use(payload.authenticate) // highlight-line
-
-  router.get('/', (req, res) => {
-    if (req.user) {
-      return res.send(`Authenticated successfully as ${req.user.email}.`)
-    }
-
-    return res.send('Not authenticated')
-  })
-
-  app.use('/some-route-here', router)
-
-  app.listen(3000)
-}
-
-start()
-```

docs/cloud/configuration.mdx

@@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ desc: Quickly configure and deploy your Payload Cloud project in a few simple st
 keywords: configuration, config, settings, project, cloud, payload cloud, deploy, deployment
 ---
 
-### Select your plan
+## Select your plan
 
 Once you have created a project, you will need to select your plan. This will determine the resources that are allocated to your project and the features that are available to you.
 
@@ -17,7 +17,7 @@ Once you have created a project, you will need to select your plan. This will de
   anytime.
 </Banner>
 
-### Project Details
+## Project Details
 
 | Option           | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   |
 | ---------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
@@ -26,7 +26,7 @@ Once you have created a project, you will need to select your plan. This will de
 | **Project Slug** | Choose a unique slug to identify your project. This needs to be unique for your team and you can change it any time.                                                                                                                          |
 | **Team**         | Select the team you want to create the project under. If this is your first project, a personal team will be created for you automatically. You can modify your team settings and invite new members at any time from the Team Settings page. |
 
-### Build Settings
+## Build Settings
 
 If you are deploying a new project from a template, the following settings will be automatically configured for you. If you are using your own repository, you need to make sure your build settings are accurate for your project to deploy correctly.
 
@@ -39,17 +39,17 @@ If you are deploying a new project from a template, the following settings will
 | **Branch to Deploy** | Select the branch of your repository that you want to deploy from. This is the branch that will be used to build your project when you commit new changes.        |
 | **Default Domain**   | Set a default domain for your project. This must be unique and you will not able to change it. You can always add a custom domain later in your project settings. |
 
-### Environment Variables
+## Environment Variables
 
 Any of the features in Payload Cloud that require environment variables will automatically be provided to your application. If your app requires any custom environment variables, you can set them here.
 
 <Banner type="warning">
-  Note: For security reasons, any variables you wish to provide to the Admin panel must be prefixed
-  with `PAYLOAD_PUBLIC_`.  Learn more
-  [here](https://payloadcms.com/docs/admin/webpack#admin-environment-vars).
+  Note: For security reasons, any variables you wish to provide to the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview) must be prefixed
+  with `NEXT_PUBLIC_`.  Learn more
+  [here](../configuration/environment-vars).
 </Banner>
 
-### Payment
+## Payment
 
 Payment methods can be set per project and can be updated any time. You can use team’s default payment method, or add a new one. Modify your payment methods in your Project settings / Team settings.
 

docs/cloud/projects.mdx

@@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ desc: Manage your Payload Cloud projects.
 keywords: cloud, payload cloud, projects, project, overview, database, file storage, build settings, environment variables, custom domains, email, developing locally
 ---
 
-### Overview
+## Overview
 
 <Banner>
   The overview tab shows your most recent deployment, along with build and deployment logs. From
@@ -18,19 +18,19 @@ keywords: cloud, payload cloud, projects, project, overview, database, file stor
 ![Payload Cloud Overview Page](https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/cloud/overview-page.jpg)
 _A screenshot of the Overview page for a Cloud project._
 
-### Database
+## Database
 
 Your Payload Cloud project comes with a MongoDB serverless Atlas DB instance or a Dedicated Atlas cluster, depending on your plan. To interact with your cloud database, you will be provided with a MongoDB connection string. This can be found under the **Database** tab of your project.
 
 `mongodb+srv://your_connection_string`
 
-### File Storage
+## File Storage
 
 Payload Cloud gives you S3 file storage backed by Cloudflare as a CDN, and this plugin extends Payload so that all of your media will be stored in S3 rather than locally.
 
 AWS Cognito is used for authentication to your S3 bucket. The [Payload Cloud Plugin](https://github.com/payloadcms/plugin-cloud) will automatically pick up these values. These values are only if you'd like to access your files directly, outside of Payload Cloud.
 
-#### Accessing Files Outside of Payload Cloud
+### Accessing Files Outside of Payload Cloud
 
 If you'd like to access your files outside of Payload Cloud, you'll need to retrieve some values from your project's settings and put them into your environment variables. In Payload Cloud, navigate to the File Storage tab and copy the values using the copy button. Put these values in your .env file. Also copy the Cognito Password value separately and put into your .env file as well.
 
@@ -50,21 +50,19 @@ PAYLOAD_CLOUD_COGNITO_PASSWORD=
 
 The plugin will pick up these values and use them to access your files.
 
-### Build Settings
+## Build Settings
 
 You can update settings from your Project’s Settings tab. Changes to your build settings will trigger a redeployment of your project.
 
-### Environment Variables
+## Environment Variables
 
 From the Environment Variables page of the Settings tab, you can add, update and delete variables for use in your project. Like build settings, these changes will trigger a redeployment of your project.
 
 <Banner>
-  Note: For security reasons, any variables you wish to provide to the Admin panel must be prefixed
-  with `PAYLOAD_PUBLIC_`.  Learn more
-  [here](https://payloadcms.com/docs/admin/webpack#admin-environment-vars).
+  Note: For security reasons, any variables you wish to provide to the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview) must be prefixed with `NEXT_PUBLIC_`. [More details](../configuration/environment-vars).
 </Banner>
 
-### Custom Domains
+## Custom Domains
 
 With Payload Cloud, you can add custom domain names to your project. To do so, first go to the Domains page of the Settings tab of your project. Here you can see your default domain. To add a new domain, type in the domain name you wish to use.
 
@@ -84,27 +82,27 @@ export default buildConfig({
 })
 ```
 
-### Email
+## Email
 
 Powered by [Resend](https://resend.com), Payload Cloud comes with integrated email support out of the box. No configuration is needed, and you can use `payload.sendEmail()` to send email right from your Payload app. To learn more about sending email with Payload, checkout the [Email Configuration](https://payloadcms.com/docs/email/overview) overview.
 
 If you are on the Pro or Enterprise plan, you can add your own custom Email domain name. From the Email page of your project’s Settings, add the domain you wish to use for email delivery. This will generate a set of DNS records. Add these records to your DNS provider and click verify to check that your records are resolving properly. Once verified, your emails will now be sent from your custom domain name.
 
-### Developing Locally
+## Developing Locally
 
 To make changes to your project, you will need to clone the repository defined in your project settings to your local machine. In order to run your project locally, you will need configure your local environment first. Refer to your repository’s `README.md` file to see the steps needed for your specific template.
 
 From there, you are ready to make updates to your project. When you are ready to make your changes live, commit your changes to the branch you specified in your Project settings, and your application will automatically trigger a redeploy and build from your latest commit.
 
-### Cloud Plugin
+## Cloud Plugin
 
-Projects generated from a template will come pre-configured with the official Cloud Plugin, but if you are using your own repository you will need to add this into your project. To do so, add the plugin to your Payload config:
+Projects generated from a template will come pre-configured with the official Cloud Plugin, but if you are using your own repository you will need to add this into your project. To do so, add the plugin to your Payload Config:
 
 `yarn add @payloadcms/plugin-cloud`
 
 ```js
 import { payloadCloud } from '@payloadcms/plugin-cloud'
-import { buildConfig } from 'payload/config'
+import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
 
 export default buildConfig({
   plugins: [payloadCloud()],
@@ -113,11 +111,11 @@ export default buildConfig({
 ```
 
 <Banner type="warning">
-  **Note:** If your Payload config already has an email with transport, this will take precedence
+  **Note:** If your Payload Config already has an email with transport, this will take precedence
   over Payload Cloud's email service.
 </Banner>
 
-##### **Optional configuration**
+#### **Optional configuration**
 
 If you wish to opt-out of any Payload cloud features, the plugin also accepts options to do so.
 

docs/cloud/teams.mdx

@@ -14,22 +14,22 @@ keywords: team, teams, billing, subscription, payment, plan, plans, cloud, paylo
 ![Payload Cloud Team Settings](https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/cloud/team-settings.jpg)
 _A screenshot of the Team Settings page._
 
-### Members
+## Members
 
 Each team has members that can interact with your projects. You can invite multiple people to your team and each individual can belong to more than one team. You can assign them either `owner` or `user` permissions. Owners are able to make admin-only changes, such as deleting projects, and editing billing information.
 
-### Adding Members
+## Adding Members
 
 To add a new member to your team, visit your Team’s Settings page, and click “Invite Teammate”. You can then add their email address, and assign their role. Press “Save” to send the invitations, which will send an email to the invited team member where they can create a new account.
 
-### Billing
+## Billing
 
 Users can update billing settings and subscriptions for any teams where they are designated as an `owner`. To make updates to the team’s payment methods, visit the Billing page under the Team Settings tab. You can add new cards, delete cards, and set a payment method as a default. The default payment method will be used in the event that another payment method fails.
 
-### Subscriptions
+## Subscriptions
 
 From the Subscriptions page, a team owner can see all current plans for their team. From here, you can see the price of each plan, if there is an active trial, and when you will be billed next.
 
-### Invoices
+## Invoices
 
 The Invoices page will you show you the invoices for your account, as well as the status on their payment.

docs/configuration/collections.mdx

@@ -3,185 +3,104 @@ title: Collection Configs
 label: Collections
 order: 20
 desc: Structure your Collections for your needs by defining fields, adding slugs and labels, establishing access control, tying in hooks, setting timestamps and more.
-keywords: collections, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, express
+keywords: collections, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
 ---
 
-Payload Collections are defined through configs of their own, and you can define as many as your application needs. Each
-Collection will scaffold a new collection automatically in your database of choice, based on fields that you define.
+A Collection is a group of records, called Documents, that all share a common schema. You can define as many Collections as your application needs. Each Document in a Collection is stored in the [Database](../database/overview) based on the [Fields](../fields/overview) that you define, and automatically generates a [Local API](../local-api/overview), [REST API](../rest-api/overview), and [GraphQL API](../graphql/overview) used to manage your Documents.
 
-It's often best practice to write your Collections in separate files and then import them into the main Payload config.
+Collections are also used to achieve [Authentication](../authentication/overview) in Payload. By defining a Collection with `auth` options, that Collection receives additional operations to support user authentication.
 
-## Options
+Collections are the primary way to structure recurring data in your application, such as users, products, pages, posts, and other types of content that you might want to manage. Each Collection can have its own unique [Access Control](../access-control/overview), [Hooks](../hooks/overview), [Admin Options](#admin-options), and more.
 
-| Option                 | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                              |
-|------------------------|--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
-| **`slug`** \*          | Unique, URL-friendly string that will act as an identifier for this Collection.                                                                                                                                          |
-| **`fields`** \*        | Array of field types that will determine the structure and functionality of the data stored within this Collection. [Click here](/docs/fields/overview) for a full list of field types as well as how to configure them. |
-| **`labels`**           | Singular and plural labels for use in identifying this Collection throughout Payload. Auto-generated from slug if not defined.                                                                                           |
-| **`admin`**            | Admin-specific configuration. See below for [more detail](#admin-options).                                                                                                                                               |
-| **`hooks`**            | Entry points to "tie in" to Collection actions at specific points. [More](/docs/hooks/overview#collection-hooks)                                                                                                         |
-| **`access`**           | Provide access control functions to define exactly who should be able to do what with Documents in this Collection. [More](/docs/access-control/overview/#collections)                                                   |
-| **`auth`**             | Specify options if you would like this Collection to feature authentication. For more, consult the [Authentication](/docs/authentication/config) documentation.                                                          |
-| **`upload`**           | Specify options if you would like this Collection to support file uploads. For more, consult the [Uploads](/docs/upload/overview) documentation.                                                                         |
-| **`timestamps`**       | Set to false to disable documents' automatically generated `createdAt` and `updatedAt` timestamps.                                                                                                                       |
-| **`versions`**         | Set to true to enable default options, or configure with object properties. [More](/docs/versions/overview#collection-config)                                                                                            |
-| **`endpoints`**        | Add custom routes to the REST API. Set to `false` to disable routes. [More](/docs/rest-api/overview#custom-endpoints)                                                                                                    |
-| **`graphQL`**          | An object with `singularName` and `pluralName` strings used in schema generation. Auto-generated from slug if not defined. Set to `false` to disable GraphQL.                                                            |
-| **`typescript`**       | An object with property `interface` as the text used in schema generation. Auto-generated from slug if not defined.                                                                                                      |
-| **`disableDuplicate`** | When true, do not show the "Duplicate" button while editing documents within this collection and prevent `duplicate` from all APIs.                                                                                      |
-| **`defaultSort`**      | Pass a top-level field to sort by default in the collection List view. Prefix the name of the field with a minus symbol ("-") to sort in descending order.                                                               |
-| **`dbName`**      | Custom table or collection name depending on the database adapter. Auto-generated from slug if not defined.
-| **`custom`**           | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                                                                                                |
-
-_\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
-
-#### Simple collection example
+To define a Collection Config, use the `collection` property in your [Payload Config](./overview):
 
 ```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
+import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
 
-export const Orders: CollectionConfig = {
-  slug: 'orders',
-  fields: [
-    {
-      name: 'total',
-      type: 'number',
-      required: true,
-    },
-    {
-      name: 'placedBy',
-      type: 'relationship',
-      relationTo: 'customers',
-      required: true,
-    },
+export default buildConfig({
+  // ...
+  collections: [ // highlight-line
+    // Your Collections go here
   ],
-}
+})
 ```
 
-#### More collection config examples
+<Banner type="success">
+  <strong>Tip:</strong>
+  If your Collection is only ever meant to contain a single Document, consider using a [Global](./globals) instead.
+</Banner>
 
-You can find an assortment
-of [example collection configs](https://github.com/payloadcms/public-demo/tree/master/src/payload/collections) in the Public
-Demo source code on GitHub.
+## Config Options
 
-### Admin options
+It's often best practice to write your Collections in separate files and then import them into the main [Payload Config](../overview).
 
-You can customize the way that the Admin panel behaves on a collection-by-collection basis by defining the `admin`
-property on a collection's config.
-
-| Option                       | Description                                                                                                                                                                                           |
-| ---------------------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| `group`                      | Text used as a label for grouping collection and global links together in the navigation.                                                                                                             |
-| `hidden`                     | Set to true or a function, called with the current user, returning true to exclude this collection from navigation and admin routing.                                                                 |
-| `hooks`                      | Admin-specific hooks for this collection. [More](#admin-hooks)                                                                                                                                        |
-| `useAsTitle`                 | Specify a top-level field to use for a document title throughout the Admin panel. If no field is defined, the ID of the document is used as the title.                                                |
-| `description`                | Text or React component to display below the Collection label in the List view to give editors more information.                                                                                      |
-| `defaultColumns`             | Array of field names that correspond to which columns to show by default in this collection's List view.                                                                                              |
-| `hideAPIURL`                 | Hides the "API URL" meta field while editing documents within this collection.                                                                                                                        |
-| `enableRichTextLink`         | The [Rich Text](/docs/fields/rich-text) field features a `Link` element which allows for users to automatically reference related documents within their rich text. Set to `true` by default.         |
-| `enableRichTextRelationship` | The [Rich Text](/docs/fields/rich-text) field features a `Relationship` element which allows for users to automatically reference related documents within their rich text. Set to `true` by default. |
-| `preview`                    | Function to generate preview URLS within the Admin panel that can point to your app. [More](#preview).                                                                                                |
-| `livePreview`                | Enable real-time editing for instant visual feedback of your front-end application. [More](/docs/live-preview/overview).                                                                              |
-| `components`                 | Swap in your own React components to be used within this collection. [More](/docs/admin/components#collections)                                                                                       |
-| `listSearchableFields`       | Specify which fields should be searched in the List search view. [More](#list-searchable-fields)                                                                                                      |
-| **`pagination`**             | Set pagination-specific options for this collection. [More](#pagination)                                                                                                                              |
-
-### Preview
-
-Collection `admin` options can accept a `preview` function that will be used to generate a link pointing to the frontend
-of your app to preview data.
-
-If the function is specified, a Preview button will automatically appear in the corresponding collection's Edit view.
-Clicking the Preview button will link to the URL that is generated by the function.
-
-**The preview function accepts two arguments:**
-
-1. The document being edited
-1. An `options` object, containing `locale` and `token` properties. The `token` is the currently logged-in user's JWT.
-
-**Example collection with preview function:**
+Here is what a simple Collection Config might look like:
 
 ```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
 
 export const Posts: CollectionConfig = {
   slug: 'posts',
   fields: [
     {
-      name: 'slug',
+      name: 'title',
       type: 'text',
-      required: true,
-    },
-  ],
-  admin: {
-    preview: (doc, { locale }) => {
-      if (doc?.slug) {
-        return `https://bigbird.com/preview/posts/${doc.slug}?locale=${locale}`
-      }
-
-      return null
-    },
-  },
+    }
+  ]
 }
 ```
 
-### Pagination
+<Banner type="success">
+  <strong>Reminder:</strong>
+  For a more complex example, see the [Public Demo](https://github.com/payloadcms/public-demo) source code on GitHub, or the [Templates](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/templates) and [Examples](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/examples) directories in the Payload repository.
+</Banner>
 
-Here are a few options that you can specify options for pagination on a collection-by-collection basis:
+The following options are available:
 
-| Option         | Description                                                                                         |
-| -------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| `defaultLimit` | Integer that specifies the default per-page limit that should be used. Defaults to 10.              |
-| `limits`       | Provide an array of integers to use as per-page options for admins to choose from in the List view. |
+| Option                 | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                              |
+|------------------------|--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
+| **`admin`**            | The configuration options for the Admin Panel. [More details](../admin/collections).                                                                                                                                            |
+| **`access`**           | Provide Access Control functions to define exactly who should be able to do what with Documents in this Collection. [More details](../access-control/collections).                                                   |
+| **`auth`**             | Specify options if you would like this Collection to feature authentication. [More details](../authentication/overview).                                                          |
+| **`custom`**           | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                          |
+| **`disableDuplicate`** | When true, do not show the "Duplicate" button while editing documents within this Collection and prevent `duplicate` from all APIs.                                                                                      |
+| **`defaultSort`**      | Pass a top-level field to sort by default in the Collection List View. Prefix the name of the field with a minus symbol ("-") to sort in descending order.                                                               |
+| **`dbName`**      | Custom table or Collection name depending on the Database Adapter. Auto-generated from slug if not defined. |
+| **`endpoints`**        | Add custom routes to the REST API. Set to `false` to disable routes. [More details](../rest-api/overview#custom-endpoints).                                                                                                    |
+| **`fields`** \*        | Array of field types that will determine the structure and functionality of the data stored within this Collection. [More details](../fields/overview). |
+| **`graphQL`**          | An object with `singularName` and `pluralName` strings used in schema generation. Auto-generated from slug if not defined. Set to `false` to disable GraphQL.                                                            |
+| **`hooks`**            | Entry point for Hooks. [More details](../hooks/overview#collection-hooks).                                                                                                         |
+| **`labels`**           | Singular and plural labels for use in identifying this Collection throughout Payload. Auto-generated from slug if not defined.                                                                                           |
+| **`slug`** \*          | Unique, URL-friendly string that will act as an identifier for this Collection.                                                                                                                                          |
+| **`timestamps`**       | Set to false to disable documents' automatically generated `createdAt` and `updatedAt` timestamps.                                                                                                                       |
+| **`typescript`**       | An object with property `interface` as the text used in schema generation. Auto-generated from slug if not defined.                                                                                                                                                                                  |
+| **`upload`**           | Specify options if you would like this Collection to support file uploads. For more, consult the [Uploads](../upload/overview) documentation.                                                                         |
+| **`versions`**         | Set to true to enable default options, or configure with object properties. [More details](../versions/overview#collection-config).                                                                                            |
 
-### Access control
+_\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 
-You can specify extremely granular access control (what users can do with documents in a collection) on a collection by
-collection basis. To learn more, go to the [Access Control](/docs/access-control/overview) docs.
+### Fields
+
+Fields define the schema of the Documents within a Collection. To learn more, go to the [Fields](../fields/overview) documentation.
+
+### Access Control
+
+[Collection Access Control](../access-control/overview) determines what a user can and cannot do with any given Document within a Collection. To learn more, go to the [Access Control](../access-control/overview) documentation.
 
 ### Hooks
 
-Hooks are a powerful way to extend collection functionality and execute your own logic, and can be defined on a
-collection by collection basis. To learn more, go to the [Hooks](/docs/hooks/overview) documentation.
+[Collection Hooks](../hooks/collections) allow you to tie into the lifecycle of your Documents so you can execute your own logic during specific events. To learn more, go to the [Hooks](../hooks/overview) documentation.
 
-### Field types
+### Admin Options
 
-Collections support all field types that Payload has to offer—including simple fields like text and checkboxes all the
-way to more complicated layout-building field groups like Blocks. [Click here](/docs/fields/overview) to learn more
-about field types.
+You can customize the way that the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview) behaves on a Collection-by-Collection basis. To learn more, go to the [Collection Admin Options](../admin/collections) documentation.
 
-### List Searchable Fields
+## TypeScript
 
-In the List view, there is a "search" box that allows you to quickly find a document with a search. By default, it
-searches on the ID field. If you have `admin.useAsTitle` defined, the list search will use that field. However, you can
-define more than one field to search to make it easier on your admin editors to find the data they need.
+You can import types from Payload to help make writing your Collection configs easier and type-safe. There are two main types that represent the Collection Config, `CollectionConfig` and `SanitizeCollectionConfig`.
 
-For example, let's say you have a Posts collection with `title`, `metaDescription`, and `tags` fields - and you want all
-three of those fields to be searchable in the List view. You can simply
-add `admin.listSearchableFields: ['title', 'metaDescription', 'tags']` - and the admin UI will automatically search on
-those three fields plus the ID field.
-
-<Banner type="warning">
-  <strong>Note:</strong>
-  <br />
-  If you are adding <strong>listSearchableFields</strong>, make sure you index each of these fields
-  so your admin queries can remain performant.
-</Banner>
-
-### TypeScript
-
-You can import collection types as follows:
+The `CollectionConfig` type represents a raw Collection Config in its full form, where only the bare minimum properties are marked as required. The `SanitizedCollectionConfig` type represents a Collection Config after it has been fully sanitized. Generally, this is only used internally by Payload.
 
 ```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
-
-// This is the type used for incoming collection configs.
-// Only the bare minimum properties are marked as required.
-```
-
-```ts
-import { SanitizedCollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
-
-// This is the type used after an incoming collection config is fully sanitized.
-// Generally, this is only used internally by Payload.
+import { CollectionConfig, SanitizedCollectionConfig } from 'payload'
 ```

docs/configuration/environment-vars.mdx

@@ -0,0 +1,101 @@
+---
+title: Environment Variables
+label: Environment Variables
+order: 100
+desc: Learn how to use Environment Variables in your Payload project
+---
+
+Environment Variables are a way to store sensitive information that your application needs to function. This could be anything from API keys to [Database](../database/overview) credentials. Payload allows you to easily use Environment Variables within your config and throughout your application.
+
+## Next.js Applications
+
+If you are using Next.js, no additional setup is required other than creating your `.env` file.
+
+To use Environment Variables, add a `.env` file to the root of your project:
+
+```plaintext
+project-name/
+├─ .env
+├─ package.json
+├─ payload.config.ts
+```
+
+Here is an example of what an `.env` file might look like:
+
+```plaintext
+SERVER_URL=localhost:3000
+DATABASE_URI=mongodb://localhost:27017/my-database
+```
+
+To use Environment Variables in your Payload Config, you can access them directly from `process.env`:
+
+```ts
+import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
+
+export default buildConfig({
+  serverURL: process.env.SERVER_URL, // highlight-line
+  // ...
+})
+```
+
+## Client-side Environments
+
+For security and safety reasons, the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview) does **not** include Environment Variables in its _client-side_ bundle by default. But, Next.js provides a mechanism to expose Environment Variables to the client-side bundle when needed.
+
+If you are building a [Custom Component](../admin/components) and need to access Environment Variables from the client-side, you can do so by prefixing them with `NEXT_PUBLIC_`.
+
+<Banner type="warning">
+  <strong>Important:</strong>
+  Be careful about what variables you provide to your client-side code. Analyze every single one to make sure that you're not accidentally leaking sensitive information. Only ever include keys that are safe for the public to read in plain text.
+</Banner>
+
+For example, if you've got the following Environment Variable:
+
+```bash
+NEXT_PUBLIC_STRIPE_PUBLISHABLE_KEY=pk_test_XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
+```
+
+This key will automatically be made available to the client-side Payload bundle and can be referenced in your Custom Component as follows:
+
+```tsx
+'use client'
+import React from 'react'
+
+const stripeKey = process.env.NEXT_PUBLIC_STRIPE_PUBLISHABLE_KEY // highlight-line
+
+const MyClientComponent = () => {
+  // do something with the key
+
+  return (
+    <div>
+      My Client Component
+    </div>
+  )
+}
+```
+
+For more information, check out the [Next.js Documentation](https://nextjs.org/docs/app/building-your-application/configuring/environment-variables).
+
+## Outside of Next.js
+
+If you are using Payload outside of Next.js, we suggest using the [`dotenv`](https://www.npmjs.com/package/dotenv) package to handle Environment Variables from `.env` files. This will automatically load your Environment Variables into `process.env`.
+
+To do this, import the package as high up in your application as possible:
+
+```ts
+import dotenv from 'dotenv'
+dotenv.config() // highlight-line
+
+import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
+
+export default buildConfig({
+  serverURL: process.env.SERVER_URL,
+  // ...
+})
+```
+
+<Banner type="warning">
+  <strong>Tip:</strong>
+  Be sure that `dotenv` can find your `.env` file. By default, it will look for a file named `.env` in the root of your project. If you need to specify a different file, pass the path into the config options.
+</Banner>
+

docs/configuration/express.mdx

@@ -1,81 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Express
-label: Express
-order: 60
-desc: Payload utilizes Express middleware packages, you can customize how they work by passing in configuration options.
-keywords: config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, express
----
-
-Payload utilizes a few Express-specific middleware packages within its own routers. You can customize how they work by passing in configuration options to the main Payload config's `express` property.
-
-### Custom Middleware
-
-Payload allows you to pass in custom Express middleware to be used on all of the routes it opens. This is useful for adding logging or any other custom functionality to your endpoints.
-
-There are 2 exposed properties. Each property is an array of middleware functions.
-
-- `preMiddleware` - runs before any of the Payload middleware
-- `postMiddleware` - runs after all of the Payload middleware
-
-```ts
-{
-  express: {
-    preMiddleware: [
-      (req, res, next) => {
-        // do something
-        next()
-      }
-    ],
-    postMiddleware: [
-      (req, res, next) => {
-        // do something
-        next()
-      }
-    ]
-  }
-}
-
-// Example logging middleware function
-const requestLoggerMiddleware = (req, res, next) => {
-  req.payload.logger.info(`request: ${req.method} ${req.url}`)
-  next()
-}
-```
-
-### JSON
-
-`express.json()` is used to parse JSON body content into JavaScript objects accessible on the Express `req`. Payload allows you to customize all of the `json` method's options. Common examples of customization use-cases are increasing the max allowed JSON body size which defaults to `2MB`.
-
-**Example payload.config.js for how to increase the max JSON size allowed to be sent to Payload endpoints:**
-
-```js
-{
-	express: {
-		json: {
-			limit: '4mb',
-		}
-	}
-}
-```
-
-You can find a list of all available options that are able to be passed to `express.json()` [here](https://expressjs.com/en/api.html).
-
-### Compression
-
-Payload uses the `compression` package to optimize transfer size for all of the routes it opens, and you can pass customization options through the Payload config.
-
-To customize compression options, pass an object to the Payload config's `express` property.
-
-**Example payload.config.js:**
-
-```js
-{
-  express: {
-    compression: {
-      // settings go here
-    }
-  }
-}
-```
-
-Typically, the default options for this package are suitable. However, for a list of all available customization options, [click here](http://expressjs.com/en/resources/middleware/compression.html).

docs/configuration/globals.mdx

@@ -3,39 +3,41 @@ title: Global Configs
 label: Globals
 order: 30
 desc: Set up your Global config for your needs by defining fields, adding slugs and labels, establishing access control, tying in hooks and more.
-keywords: globals, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, express
+keywords: globals, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
 ---
 
-Global configs are in many ways similar to [Collections](/docs/configuration/collections). The big difference is that Collections will potentially contain _many_ documents, while a Global is a "one-off". Globals are perfect for things like header nav, site-wide banner alerts, app-wide localized strings, and other "global" data that your site or app might rely on.
+Globals are in many ways similar to [Collections](../configuration/collections), except they correspond to only a single Document. You can define as many Globals as your application needs. Each Global Document is stored in the [Database](../database/overview) based on the [Fields](../fields/overview) that you define, and automatically generates a [Local API](../local-api/overview), [REST API](../rest-api/overview), and [GraphQL API](../graphql/overview) used to manage your Documents.
 
-As with Collection configs, it's often best practice to write your Globals in separate files and then import them into the main Payload config.
+Globals are the primary way to structure singletons in Payload, such as a header navigation, site-wide banner alerts, or app-wide localized strings. Each Global can have its own unique [Access Control](../access-control/overview), [Hooks](../hooks/overview), [Admin Options](#admin-options), and more.
 
-## Options
-
-| Option             | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                          |
-| ------------------ | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`slug`** \*      | Unique, URL-friendly string that will act as an identifier for this Global.                                                                                                                                          |
-| **`fields`** \*    | Array of field types that will determine the structure and functionality of the data stored within this Global. [Click here](/docs/fields/overview) for a full list of field types as well as how to configure them. |
-| **`label`**        | Text for the name in the Admin panel or an object with keys for each language. Auto-generated from slug if not defined.                                                                                              |
-| **`description`**  | Text or React component to display below the Global header to give editors more information.                                                                                                                         |
-| **`admin`**        | Admin-specific configuration. See below for [more detail](/docs/configuration/globals#admin-options).                                                                                                                |
-| **`hooks`**        | Entry points to "tie in" to collection actions at specific points. [More](/docs/hooks/overview#global-hooks)                                                                                                         |
-| **`access`**       | Provide access control functions to define exactly who should be able to do what with this Global. [More](/docs/access-control/overview/#globals)                                                                    |
-| **`versions`**     | Set to true to enable default options, or configure with object properties. [More](/docs/versions/overview#globals-config)                                                                                           |
-| **`endpoints`**    | Add custom routes to the REST API. [More](/docs/rest-api/overview#custom-endpoints)                                                                                                                                  |
-| **`graphQL.name`** | Text used in schema generation. Auto-generated from slug if not defined.                                                                                                                                             |
-| **`typescript`**   | An object with property `interface` as the text used in schema generation. Auto-generated from slug if not defined.                                                                                                  |
-| **`custom`**       | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                                                                                            |
-| **`dbName`**       | Custom table or collection name for this global depending on the database adapter. Auto-generated from slug if not defined.
-
-_\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
-
-#### Simple Global example
+To define a Global Config, use the `globals` property in your [Payload Config](./overview):
 
 ```ts
-import { GlobalConfig } from 'payload/types'
+import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
 
-const Nav: GlobalConfig = {
+export default buildConfig({
+  // ...
+  globals: [ // highlight-line
+    // Your Globals go here
+  ],
+})
+```
+
+<Banner type="success">
+  <strong>Tip:</strong>
+  If you have more than one Global that share the same structure, consider using a [Collection](../configuration/collections) instead.
+</Banner>
+
+## Config Options
+
+It's often best practice to write your Globals in separate files and then import them into the main [Payload Config](./overview).
+
+Here is what a simple Global Config might look like:
+
+```ts
+import { GlobalConfig } from 'payload'
+
+export const Nav: GlobalConfig = {
   slug: 'nav',
   fields: [
     {
@@ -54,90 +56,55 @@ const Nav: GlobalConfig = {
     },
   ],
 }
-
-export default Nav
 ```
 
-#### Global config example
+<Banner type="success">
+  <strong>Reminder:</strong>
+  For a more complex example, see the [Public Demo](https://github.com/payloadcms/public-demo) source code on GitHub, or the [Templates](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/templates) and [Examples](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/examples) directories in the Payload repository.
+</Banner>
 
-You can find a few [example Global configs](https://github.com/payloadcms/public-demo/tree/master/src/payload/globals) in the Public Demo source code on GitHub.
+The following options are available:
 
-### Admin options
+| Option             | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                          |
+| ------------------ | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`access`**       | Provide Access Control functions to define exactly who should be able to do what with this Global. [More details](../access-control/globals).                                                                    |
+| **`admin`**        | The configuration options for the Admin Panel. [More details](../admin/globals).                                                                           |
+| **`custom`**       | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                                                                                            |
+| **`dbName`**       | Custom table or collection name for this Global depending on the Database Adapter. Auto-generated from slug if not defined. |
+| **`description`**  | Text or React component to display below the Global header to give editors more information.                                                                                                                         |
+| **`endpoints`**    | Add custom routes to the REST API. [More details](../rest-api/overview#custom-endpoints).                                                                                                                                  |
+| **`fields`** \*    | Array of field types that will determine the structure and functionality of the data stored within this Global. [More details](../fields/overview). |
+| **`graphQL.name`** | Text used in schema generation. Auto-generated from slug if not defined.                                                                                                                          |
+| **`hooks`**        | Entry point for Hooks. [More details](../hooks/overview#global-hooks).  |
+| **`label`**        | Text for the name in the Admin Panel or an object with keys for each language. Auto-generated from slug if not defined.                                                                                                                                                                                      |
+| **`slug`** \*      | Unique, URL-friendly string that will act as an identifier for this Global.                                                                                                                                          |
+| **`typescript`**   | An object with property `interface` as the text used in schema generation. Auto-generated from slug if not defined.    |
+| **`versions`**     | Set to true to enable default options, or configure with object properties. [More details](../versions/overview#globals-config).                                                                                           |
 
-You can customize the way that the Admin panel behaves on a Global-by-Global basis by defining the `admin` property on a Global's config.
+_\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 
-| Option        | Description                                                                                                                       |
-| ------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| `group`       | Text used as a label for grouping collection and global links together in the navigation.                                         |
-| `hidden`      | Set to true or a function, called with the current user, returning true to exclude this global from navigation and admin routing. |
-| `components`  | Swap in your own React components to be used within this Global. [More](/docs/admin/components#globals)                           |
-| `preview`     | Function to generate a preview URL within the Admin panel for this global that can point to your app. [More](#preview).           |
-| `livePreview` | Enable real-time editing for instant visual feedback of your front-end application. [More](/docs/live-preview/overview).          |
-| `hideAPIURL`  | Hides the "API URL" meta field while editing documents within this collection.                                                    |
+### Fields
 
-### Preview
+Fields define the schema of the Global. To learn more, go to the [Fields](../fields/overview) documentation.
 
-Global `admin` options can accept a `preview` function that will be used to generate a link pointing to the frontend of your app to preview data.
+### Access Control
 
-If the function is specified, a Preview button will automatically appear in the corresponding global's Edit view. Clicking the Preview button will link to the URL that is generated by the function.
-
-**The preview function accepts two arguments:**
-
-1. The document being edited
-1. An `options` object, containing `locale` and `token` properties. The `token` is the currently logged-in user's JWT.
-
-**Example global with preview function:**
-
-```ts
-import { GlobalConfig } from 'payload/types'
-
-export const MyGlobal: GlobalConfig = {
-  slug: 'my-global',
-  fields: [
-    {
-      name: 'slug',
-      type: 'text',
-      required: true,
-    },
-  ],
-  admin: {
-    preview: (doc, { locale }) => {
-      if (doc?.slug) {
-        return `https://bigbird.com/preview/${doc.slug}?locale=${locale}`
-      }
-
-      return null
-    },
-  },
-}
-```
-
-### Access control
-
-As with Collections, you can specify extremely granular access control (what users can do with this Global) on a Global-by-Global basis. However, Globals only have `update` and `read` access control due to their nature of only having one document. To learn more, go to the [Access Control](/docs/access-control/overview) docs.
+[Global Access Control](../access-control/globals) determines what a user can and cannot do with any given Global Document. To learn more, go to the [Access Control](../access-control/overview) documentation.
 
 ### Hooks
 
-Globals also fully support a smaller subset of Hooks. To learn more, go to the [Hooks](/docs/hooks/overview) documentation.
+[Global Hooks](../hooks/globals) allow you to tie into the lifecycle of your Documents so you can execute your own logic during specific events. To learn more, go to the [Hooks](../hooks/overview) documentation.
 
-### Field types
+### Admin Options
 
-Globals support all field types that Payload has to offer—including simple fields like text and checkboxes all the way to more complicated layout-building field groups like Blocks. [Click here](/docs/fields/overview) to learn more about field types.
+You can customize the way that the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview) behaves on a Global-by-Global basis. To learn more, go to the [Global Admin Options](../admin/globals) documentation.
 
-### TypeScript
+## TypeScript
 
-You can import global types as follows:
+You can import types from Payload to help make writing your Global configs easier and type-safe. There are two main types that represent the Global Config, `GlobalConfig` and `SanitizeGlobalConfig`.
+
+The `GlobalConfig` type represents a raw Global Config in its full form, where only the bare minimum properties are marked as required. The `SanitizedGlobalConfig` type represents a Global Config after it has been fully sanitized. Generally, this is only used internally by Payload.
 
 ```ts
-import { GlobalConfig } from 'payload/types'
-
-// This is the type used for incoming global configs.
-// Only the bare minimum properties are marked as required.
-```
-
-```ts
-import { SanitizedGlobalConfig } from 'payload/types'
-
-// This is the type used after an incoming global config is fully sanitized.
-// Generally, this is only used internally by Payload.
+import { GlobalConfig, SanitizedGlobalConfig } from 'payload'
 ```

docs/configuration/i18n.mdx

@@ -3,94 +3,98 @@ title: I18n
 label: I18n
 order: 40
 desc: Manage and customize internationalization support in your CMS editor experience
-keywords: internationalization, i18n, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, express
+keywords: internationalization, i18n, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
 ---
 
-Not only does Payload support managing localized content, it also has internationalization support so that admin users can work in their preferred language. Payload's i18n support is built on top of [i18next](https://www.i18next.com). It comes included by default and can be extended in your config.
+The [Admin Panel](../admin/overview) is translated in over [30 languages and counting](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/beta/packages/translations). With I18n, editors can navigate the interface and read API error messages in their preferred language. This is similar to [Localization](./localization), but instead of managing translations for the data itself, you are managing translations for your application's interface.
 
-While Payload's built-in features come translated, you may want to also translate parts of your project's configuration too. This is possible in places like collections and globals labels and groups, field labels, descriptions and input placeholder text. The admin UI will display all the correct translations you provide based on the user's language.
+By default, Payload comes with preinstalled with English, but you can easily load other languages into your own application. Languages are automatically detected based on the request. If no language was detected, or if the user's language is not yet supported by your application, English will be chosen.
 
-Here is an example of a simple collection supporting both English and Spanish editors:
+To configure I18n, use the `i18n` key in your [Payload Config](./overview):
 
 ```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
+import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
 
-export const Articles: CollectionConfig = {
-  slug: 'articles',
-  labels: {
-    singular: {
-      en: 'Article',
-      es: 'Artículo',
-    },
-    plural: {
-      en: 'Articles',
-      es: 'Artículos',
-    },
+export default buildConfig({
+  // ...
+  i18n: { // highlight-line
+    // ...
   },
-  admin: {
-    group: { en: 'Content', es: 'Contenido' },
-  },
-  fields: [
-    {
-      name: 'title',
-      type: 'text',
-      label: {
-        en: 'Title',
-        es: 'Título',
-      },
-      admin: {
-        placeholder: { en: 'Enter title', es: 'Introduce el título' },
-      },
-    },
-    {
-      name: 'type',
-      type: 'radio',
-      options: [
-        {
-          value: 'news',
-          label: { en: 'News', es: 'Noticias' },
-        }, // etc...
-      ],
-    },
-  ],
-}
+})
 ```
 
-### Admin UI
-
-The Payload admin panel reads the language settings of a user's browser and display all text in that language, or will fall back to English if the user's language is not yet supported.
-After a user logs in, they can change their language selection in the `/account` view.
-
-<Banner>
+<Banner type="success">
   <strong>Note:</strong>
-  <br />
-  If there is a language that Payload does not yet support, we accept code
-  [contributions](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/blob/main/CONTRIBUTING.md).
+  If there is a language that Payload does not yet support, we accept [code contributions](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/blob/main/CONTRIBUTING.md).
 </Banner>
 
-### Node Express
+## Config Options
 
-Payload's backend uses express middleware to set the language on incoming requests before they are handled. This allows backend validation to return error messages in the user's own language or system generated emails to be sent using the correct translation. You can make HTTP requests with the `accept-language` header and Payload will use that language.
-
-Anywhere in your Payload app that you have access to the `req` object, you can access i18next's extensive internationalization features assigned to `req.i18n`. To access text translations you can use `req.t('namespace:key')`.
-
-Read the i18next [API documentation](https://www.i18next.com/overview/api) to learn more.
-
-### Configuration Options
-
-In your Payload config, you can add translations and customize the settings in `i18n`. Payload will use your custom options and merge it with the default, allowing you to override the settings Payload provides.
-
-**Example Payload config extending i18n:**
+You can easily customize and override any of the i18n settings that Payload provides by default. Payload will use your custom options and merge them in with its own.
 
 ```ts
-import { buildConfig } from 'payload/config'
+import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
+
+export default buildConfig({
+  // ...
+  // highlight-start
+  i18n: {
+    fallbackLanguage: 'en', // default
+    debug: false, // default
+  }
+  // highlight-end
+})
+```
+
+The following options are available:
+
+| Option                | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                                   |
+| --------------------- | --------------------------------|
+| **`fallbackLanguage`**     | The language to fall back to if the user's preferred language is not supported. Default is `'en'`.                                                                                                                           |
+| **`debug`**           | Whether to log debug information to the console. Default is `false`.                                                                                                                                                         |
+| **`translations`**    | An object containing the translations. The keys are the language codes and the values are the translations.                                                                                                                |
+| **`supportedLanguages`** | An object containing the supported languages. The keys are the language codes and the values are the translations.                                                                                                         |
+
+## Adding Languages
+
+You can easily add new languages to your Payload app by providing the translations for the new language. Payload maintains a number of built-in translations that can be imported from `@payloadcms/translations`, but you can also provide your own [Custom Translations](#custom-translations) to support any language.
+
+To add a new language, use the `i18n.supportedLanguages` key in your [Payload Config](./overview):
+
+```ts
+import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
+import { en } from '@payloadcms/translations/languages/en'
+import { de } from '@payloadcms/translations/languages/de'
+
+export default buildConfig({
+  // ...
+  // highlight-start
+  i18n: {
+    supportedLanguages: { en, de },
+  },
+  // highlight-end
+})
+```
+
+<Banner type="warning">
+ <strong>Tip:</strong>
+ It's best to only support the languages that you need so that the bundled JavaScript is kept to a minimum for your project.
+</Banner>
+
+### Custom Translations
+
+You can customize Payload's built-in translations either by extending existing languages or by adding new languages entirely. This can be done by injecting new translation strings into existing languages, or by providing an entirely new language keys altogether.
+
+To add Custom Translations, use the `i18n.translations` key in your [Payload Config](./overview):
+
+```ts
+import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
 
 export default buildConfig({
   //...
   i18n: {
-    fallbackLng: 'en', // default
-    debug: false, // default
-    resources: {
+    // highlight-start
+    translations: {
       en: {
         custom: {
           // namespace can be anything you want
@@ -102,9 +106,133 @@ export default buildConfig({
         },
       },
     },
+    // highlight-end
   },
   //...
 })
 ```
 
-See the i18next [configuration options](https://www.i18next.com/overview/configuration-options) to learn more.
+### Project Translations
+
+While Payload's built-in features come fully translated, you may also want to translate parts of your own project. This is possible in places like [Collections](./collections) and [Globals](./globals), such as on their labels and groups, field labels, descriptions or input placeholder text.
+
+To do this, provide the translations wherever applicable, keyed to the language code:
+
+```ts
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
+
+export const Articles: CollectionConfig = {
+  slug: 'articles',
+  labels: {
+    singular: {
+      // highlight-start
+      en: 'Article',
+      es: 'Artículo',
+      // highlight-end
+    },
+    plural: {
+      // highlight-start
+      en: 'Articles',
+      es: 'Artículos',
+      // highlight-end
+    },
+  },
+  admin: {
+    group: {
+      // highlight-start
+      en: 'Content',
+      es: 'Contenido',
+      // highlight-end
+    },
+  },
+  fields: [
+    {
+      name: 'title',
+      type: 'text',
+      label: {
+        // highlight-start
+        en: 'Title',
+        es: 'Título',
+        // highlight-end
+      },
+      admin: {
+        placeholder: {
+          // highlight-start
+          en: 'Enter title',
+          es: 'Introduce el título'
+          // highlight-end
+        },
+      },
+    },
+  ],
+}
+```
+
+## Node
+
+Payload's backend sets the language on incoming requests before they are handled. This allows backend validation to return error messages in the user's own language or system generated emails to be sent using the correct translation. You can make HTTP requests with the `accept-language` header and Payload will use that language.
+
+Anywhere in your Payload app that you have access to the `req` object, you can access Payload's extensive internationalization features assigned to `req.i18n`. To access text translations you can use `req.t('namespace:key')`.
+
+## TypeScript
+
+In order to use custom translations in your project, you need to provide the types for the translations.
+
+Here is an example of how you can define the types for the custom translations in a [Custom Component](../admin/components):
+
+```ts
+'use client'
+import type { NestedKeysStripped } from '@payloadcms/translations'
+import type React from 'react'
+
+import { useTranslation } from '@payloadcms/ui/providers/Translation'
+
+const customTranslations = {
+  en: {
+    general: {
+      test: 'Custom Translation',
+    },
+  },
+}
+
+type CustomTranslationObject = typeof customTranslations.en
+type CustomTranslationKeys = NestedKeysStripped<CustomTranslationObject>
+
+export const MyComponent: React.FC = () => {
+  const { i18n, t } = useTranslation<CustomTranslationObject, CustomTranslationKeys>() // These generics merge your custom translations with the default client translations
+
+  return t('general:test')
+}
+
+```
+
+Additionally, Payload exposes the `t` function in various places, for example in labels. Here is how you would type those:
+
+```ts
+import type {
+  DefaultTranslationKeys,
+  NestedKeysStripped,
+  TFunction,
+} from '@payloadcms/translations'
+import type { Field } from 'payload'
+
+const customTranslations = {
+  en: {
+    general: {
+      test: 'Custom Translation',
+    },
+  },
+}
+
+type CustomTranslationObject = typeof customTranslations.en
+type CustomTranslationKeys = NestedKeysStripped<CustomTranslationObject>
+
+const field: Field = {
+  name: 'myField',
+  type: 'text',
+  label: (
+    { t }: { t: TFunction<CustomTranslationKeys | DefaultTranslationKeys> }, // The generic passed to TFunction does not automatically merge the custom translations with the default translations. We need to merge them ourselves here
+  ) => t('fields:addLabel'),
+}
+```
+

docs/configuration/localization.mdx

@@ -2,39 +2,48 @@
 title: Localization
 label: Localization
 order: 50
-desc: Add and maintain as many locales as you need by adding Localization to your Payload config, set options for default locale, fallbacks, fields and more.
-keywords: localization, internationalization, i18n, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, express
+desc: Add and maintain as many locales as you need by adding Localization to your Payload Config, set options for default locale, fallbacks, fields and more.
+keywords: localization, internationalization, i18n, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
 ---
 
-Payload features deep field-based localization support. Maintaining as many locales as you need is easy. All
-localization support is opt-in by default. To do so, follow the two steps below.
+Localization is one of the most important features of a modern CMS. It allows you to manage content in multiple languages, then serve it to your users based on their requested language. This is similar to [I18n](./i18n), but instead of managing translations for your application's interface, you are managing translations for the data itself.
 
-### Enabling in the Payload config
+With Localization, you can begin to serve personalized content to your users based on their specific language preferences, such as a multilingual website or multi-site application. There are no limits to the number of locales you can add to your Payload project.
 
-Add the `localization` property to your Payload config to enable localization project-wide. You'll need to provide a
-list of all locales that you'd like to support as well as set a few other options.
-
-**Example Payload config set up for localization:**
+To configure Localization, use the `localization` key in your [Payload Config](./overview):
 
 ```ts
-import { buildConfig } from 'payload/config'
+import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
 
 export default buildConfig({
-  collections: [
-    // collections go here
-  ],
-  localization: {
-    locales: ['en', 'es', 'de'],
-    defaultLocale: 'en',
-    fallback: true,
+  // ...
+  localization: { // highlight-line
+    // ...
   },
 })
 ```
 
-**Example Payload config set up for localization with full locales objects:**
+## Config Options
+
+Add the `localization` property to your Payload Config to enable Localization project-wide. You'll need to provide a list of all locales that you'd like to support as well as set a few other options.
+
+To configure locales, use the `localization.locales` property in your [Payload Config](./overview):
 
 ```ts
-import { buildConfig } from 'payload/config'
+import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
+
+export default buildConfig({
+  // ...
+  localization: {
+    locales: ['en', 'es', 'de'] // highlight-line
+  },
+})
+```
+
+You can also define locales using [full configuration objects](#locale-object):
+
+```ts
+import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
 
 export default buildConfig({
   collections: [
@@ -49,7 +58,8 @@ export default buildConfig({
       {
         label: 'Arabic',
         code: 'ar',
-        // opt-in to setting default text-alignment on Input fields to rtl (right-to-left) when current locale is rtl
+        // opt-in to setting default text-alignment on Input fields to rtl (right-to-left)
+        // when current locale is rtl
         rtl: true,
       },
     ],
@@ -59,50 +69,26 @@ export default buildConfig({
 })
 ```
 
-**Example Payload config set up for localization with full locales objects (
-including [internationalization](/docs/configuration/i18n) support):**
+<Banner type="success">
+  <strong>Tip:</strong>
+  Localization works very well alongside [I18n](/docs/configuration/i18n).
+</Banner>
 
-```ts
-import { buildConfig } from 'payload/config'
+The following options are available:
 
-export default buildConfig({
-  collections: [
-    // collections go here
-  ],
-  localization: {
-    locales: [
-      {
-        label: {
-          en: 'English', // English label
-          nb: 'Engelsk', // Norwegian label
-        },
-        code: 'en',
-      },
-      {
-        label: {
-          en: 'Norwegian', // English label
-          nb: 'Norsk', // Norwegian label
-        },
-        code: 'nb',
-      },
-    ],
-    defaultLocale: 'en',
-    fallback: true,
-  },
-})
-```
+| Option         | Description                                                                                                                    |
+| -------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ |
+| **`locales`**  | Array of all the languages that you would like to support. [More details](#locales)                                            |
+| **`defaultLocale`** | Required string that matches one of the locale codes from the array provided. By default, if no locale is specified, documents will be returned in this locale. |
+| **`fallback`** | Boolean enabling "fallback" locale functionality. If a document is requested in a locale, but a field does not have a localized value corresponding to the requested locale, then if this property is enabled, the document will automatically fall back to the fallback locale value. If this property is not enabled, the value will not be populated. |
 
-**Here is a brief explanation of each of the options available within the `localization` property:**
+### Locales
 
-**`locales`**
+The locales array is a list of all the languages that you would like to support. This can be strings for each language code, or [full configuration objects](#locale-object) for more advanced options.
 
-Array-based list of all the languages that you would like to support. This can be an array containing strings for each
-language code you want your project to store and serve or objects with a `label`, a locale `code`, `rtl` (
-right-to-left), and `fallbackLocale` property. The locale codes do not need to be in any specific format. It's up to you
-to define how to represent your locales. Common patterns are to use two-letter ISO 639 language codes or four-letter
-language and country codes (ISO 3166‑1) such as `en-US`, `en-UK`, `es-MX`, etc.
+The locale codes do not need to be in any specific format. It's up to you to define how to represent your locales. Common patterns are to use two-letter ISO 639 language codes or four-letter language and country codes (ISO 3166‑1) such as `en-US`, `en-UK`, `es-MX`, etc.
 
-### Locale Properties:
+#### Locale Object
 
 | Option               | Description                                                                                                                    |
 | -------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ |
@@ -113,68 +99,48 @@ language and country codes (ISO 3166‑1) such as `en-US`, `en-UK`, `es-MX`, etc
 
 _\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 
-**`defaultLocale`**
+## Field Localization
 
-Required string that matches one of the locale codes from the array provided. By default, if no locale is specified,
-documents will be returned in this locale.
+Payload Localization works on a **field** level—not a document level. In addition to configuring the base Payload Config to support Localization, you need to specify each field that you would like to localize.
 
-**`fallback`**
-
-Boolean enabling "fallback" locale functionality. If a document is requested in a locale, but a field does not have a
-localized value corresponding to the requested locale, then if this property is enabled, the document will automatically
-fall back to the fallback locale value. If this property is not enabled, the value will not be populated.
-
-### Field by field localization
-
-Payload localization works on a **field** level—not a document level. In addition to configuring the base Payload config
-to support localization, you need to specify each field that you would like to localize.
-
-**Here is an example of how to enable localization for a field:**
+**Here is an example of how to enable Localization for a field:**
 
 ```js
 {
   name: 'title',
-    type
-:
-  'text',
-    // highlight-start
-    localized
-:
-  true,
+  type: 'text',
+  // highlight-start
+  localized: true,
   // highlight-end
 }
 ```
 
-With the above configuration, the `title` field will now be saved in the database as an object of all locales instead of
-a single string.
+With the above configuration, the `title` field will now be saved in the database as an object of all locales instead of a single string.
 
-All field types with a `name` property support the `localized` property—even the more complex field types like `array`s
-and `block`s.
+All field types with a `name` property support the `localized` property—even the more complex field types like `array`s and `block`s.
 
-<Banner>
+<Banner type="info">
   <strong>Note:</strong>
-  <br />
-  Enabling localization for field types that support nested fields will automatically create
+  Enabling Localization for field types that support nested fields will automatically create
   localized "sets" of all fields contained within the field. For example, if you have a page layout
   using a blocks field type, you have the choice of either localizing the full layout, by enabling
-  localization on the top-level blocks field, or only certain fields within the layout.
+  Localization on the top-level blocks field, or only certain fields within the layout.
 </Banner>
 
 <Banner type="warning">
   <strong>Important:</strong>
-  <br />
   When converting an existing field to or from `localized: true` the data structure in the document
   will change for this field and so existing data for this field will be lost. Before changing the
-  localization setting on fields with existing data, you may need to consider a field migration
+  Localization setting on fields with existing data, you may need to consider a field migration
   strategy.
 </Banner>
 
-### Retrieving localized docs
+## Retrieving Localized Docs
 
 When retrieving documents, you can specify which locale you'd like to receive as well as which fallback locale should be
 used.
 
-##### REST API
+#### REST API
 
 REST API locale functionality relies on URL query parameters.
 
@@ -185,7 +151,7 @@ Specify your desired locale by providing the `locale` query parameter directly i
 **`?fallback-locale=`**
 
 Specify fallback locale to be used by providing the `fallback-locale` query parameter. This can be provided as either a
-valid locale as provided to your base Payload config, or `'null'`, `'false'`, or `'none'` to disable falling back.
+valid locale as provided to your base Payload Config, or `'null'`, `'false'`, or `'none'` to disable falling back.
 
 **Example:**
 
@@ -193,7 +159,7 @@ valid locale as provided to your base Payload config, or `'null'`, `'false'`, or
 fetch('https://localhost:3000/api/pages?locale=es&fallback-locale=none');
 ```
 
-##### GraphQL API
+#### GraphQL API
 
 In the GraphQL API, you can specify `locale` and `fallbackLocale` args to all relevant queries and mutations.
 
@@ -221,7 +187,7 @@ query {
   arguments in nested related document queries.
 </Banner>
 
-##### Local API
+#### Local API
 
 You can specify `locale` as well as `fallbackLocale` within the Local API as well as properties on the `options`
 argument. The `locale` property will accept any valid locale, and the `fallbackLocale` property will accept any valid
@@ -237,10 +203,9 @@ const posts = await payload.find({
 })
 ```
 
-<Banner type="alert">
+<Banner type="success">
   <strong>Tip:</strong>
-  <br />
-  The REST and Local APIs can return all localization data in one request by passing 'all' or '*' as
+  The REST and Local APIs can return all Localization data in one request by passing 'all' or '*' as
   the <strong>locale</strong> parameter. The response will be structured so that field values come
   back as the full objects keyed for each locale instead of the single, translated value.
 </Banner>

docs/configuration/overview.mdx

@@ -2,196 +2,249 @@
 title: The Payload Config
 label: Overview
 order: 10
-desc: The Payload config is central to everything that Payload does, from adding custom React components, to modifying collections, controlling localization and much more.
-keywords: overview, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, express
+desc: The Payload Config is central to everything that Payload does, from adding custom React components, to modifying collections, controlling localization and much more.
+keywords: overview, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
 ---
 
-Payload is a _config-based_, code-first CMS and application framework. The Payload config is central to everything that Payload does. It scaffolds the data that Payload stores as well as maintains custom React components, hook logic, custom validations, and much more.
+Payload is a _config-based_, code-first CMS and application framework. The Payload Config is central to everything that Payload does, allowing for deep configuration of your application through a simple and intuitive API. The Payload Config is a fully-typed JavaScript object that can be infinitely extended upon.
 
-**Also, because the Payload source code is fully written in TypeScript, its configs are strongly typed—meaning that even if you aren't using TypeScript, your IDE (such as VSCode) may still provide helpful information like type-ahead suggestions while you write your config.**
+Everything from your [Database](../database/overview) choice, to the appearance of the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview), is fully controlled through the Payload Config. From here you can define [Fields](../fields/overview), add [Localization](./localization), enable [Authentication](../authentication/overview), configure [Access Control](../access-control/overview), and so much more.
 
-<Banner type="warning">
-  <strong>Important:</strong>
-  <br />
-  This file is included in the Payload admin bundle, so make sure you do not embed any sensitive
-  information.
-</Banner>
-
-## Options
-
-| Option                | Description                                                                                                                                                                        |
-| --------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| `admin` \*            | Base Payload admin configuration. Specify bundler\*, custom components, control metadata, set the Admin user collection, and [more](/docs/admin/overview#admin-options). Required. |
-| `editor` \*           | Rich Text Editor which will be used by richText fields. Required.                                                                                                                  |
-| `db` \*               | Database Adapter which will be used by Payload. Read more [here](/docs/database/overview). Required.                                                                               |
-| `serverURL`           | A string used to define the absolute URL of your app including the protocol, for example `https://example.com`. No paths allowed, only protocol, domain and (optionally) port      |
-| `collections`         | An array of all Collections that Payload will manage. To read more about how to define your collection configs, [click here](/docs/configuration/collections).                     |
-| `globals`             | An array of all Globals that Payload will manage. For more on Globals and their configs, [click here](/docs/configuration/globals).                                                |
-| `cors`                | Either a whitelist array of URLS to allow CORS requests from, or a wildcard string (`'*'`) to accept incoming requests from any domain.                                            |
-| `localization`        | Opt-in and control how Payload handles the translation of your content into multiple locales. [More](/docs/configuration/localization)                                             |
-| `graphQL`             | Manage GraphQL-specific functionality here. Define your own queries and mutations, manage query complexity limits, and [more](/docs/graphql/overview#graphql-options).             |
-| `cookiePrefix`        | A string that will be prefixed to all cookies that Payload sets.                                                                                                                   |
-| `csrf`                | A whitelist array of URLs to allow Payload cookies to be accepted from as a form of CSRF protection. [More](/docs/authentication/overview#csrf-protection)                         |
-| `defaultDepth`        | If a user does not specify `depth` while requesting a resource, this depth will be used. [More](/docs/getting-started/concepts#depth)                                              |
-| `maxDepth`            | The maximum allowed depth to be permitted application-wide. This setting helps prevent against malicious queries. Defaults to `10`.                                                |
-| `indexSortableFields` | Automatically index all sortable top-level fields in the database to improve sort performance and add database compatibility for Azure Cosmos and similar.                         |
-| `upload`              | Base Payload upload configuration. [More](/docs/upload/overview#payload-wide-upload-options).                                                                                      |
-| `routes`              | Control the routing structure that Payload binds itself to. Specify `admin`, `api`, `graphQL`, and `graphQLPlayground`.                                                            |
-| `email`               | Base email settings to allow Payload to generate email such as Forgot Password requests and other requirements. [More](/docs/email/overview#configuration)                         |
-| `express`             | Express-specific middleware options such as compression and JSON parsing. [More](/docs/configuration/express)                                                                      |
-| `debug`               | Enable to expose more detailed error information.                                                                                                                                  |
-| `telemetry`           | Disable Payload telemetry by passing `false`. [More](/docs/configuration/overview#telemetry)                                                                                       |
-| `rateLimit`           | Control IP-based rate limiting for all Payload resources. Used to prevent DDoS attacks and [more](/docs/production/preventing-abuse#rate-limiting-requests).                       |
-| `hooks`               | Tap into Payload-wide hooks. [More](/docs/hooks/overview)                                                                                                                          |
-| `plugins`             | An array of Payload plugins. [More](/docs/plugins/overview)                                                                                                                        |
-| `endpoints`           | An array of custom API endpoints added to the Payload router. [More](/docs/rest-api/overview#custom-endpoints)                                                                     |
-| `custom`              | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                                                          |
-
-_\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
-
-#### Simple example
+The Payload Config is a `payload.config.ts` file typically located in the root of your project:
 
 ```ts
-import { buildConfig } from 'payload/config'
-import { mongooseAdapter } from '@payloadcms/db-mongodb'
-import { postgresAdapter } from '@payloadcms/db-postgres' // beta
-
-import { viteBundler } from '@payloadcms/bundler-vite'
-import { webpackBundler } from '@payloadcms/bundler-webpack'
-
-import { lexicalEditor } from '@payloadcms/richtext-lexical' // beta
-import { slateEditor } from '@payloadcms/richtext-slate'
+import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
 
 export default buildConfig({
-  admin: {
-    bundler: webpackBundler(), // or viteBundler()
-  },
-  db: mongooseAdapter({}) // or postgresAdapter({}),
-  editor: lexicalEditor({}) // or slateEditor({})
+  // Your config goes here
+})
+```
+
+The Payload Config is strongly typed and ties directly into Payload's TypeScript codebase. This means your IDE (such as VSCode) will provide helpful information like type-ahead suggestions while you write your config.
+
+<Banner type="success">
+  <strong>Tip:</strong>
+  The location of your Payload Config can be customized. [More details](#customizing--automating-config-location-detection).
+</Banner>
+
+## Config Options
+
+To author your Payload Config, first determine which [Database](../database/overview) you'd like to use, then use [Collections](./collections) or [Globals](./globals) to define the schema of your data.
+
+Here is one of the simplest possible Payload configs:
+
+```ts
+import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
+import { mongooseAdapter } from '@payloadcms/db-mongodb'
+// import { postgresAdapter } from '@payloadcms/db-postgres'
+
+export default buildConfig({
+  secret: process.env.PAYLOAD_SECRET,
+  db: mongooseAdapter({
+    url: process.env.DATABASE_URI,
+  }),
   collections: [
     {
       slug: 'pages',
       fields: [
         {
           name: 'title',
-          type: 'text',
-          required: true,
-        },
-        {
-          name: 'content',
-          type: 'richText',
-          required: true,
-        },
-      ],
-    },
-  ],
-  globals: [
-    {
-      slug: 'header',
-      fields: [
-        {
-          name: 'nav',
-          type: 'array',
-          fields: [
-            {
-              name: 'page',
-              type: 'relationship',
-              relationTo: 'pages',
-            },
-          ],
-        },
-      ],
-    },
+          type: 'text'
+        }
+      ]
+    }
   ],
 })
 ```
 
-#### Full example config
+<Banner type="success">
+  <strong>Note:</strong>
+  For a more complex example, see the [Public Demo](https://github.com/payloadcms/public-demo) source code on GitHub, or the [Templates](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/templates) and [Examples](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/examples) directories in the Payload repository.
+</Banner>
 
-You can see a full [example config](https://github.com/payloadcms/public-demo/blob/master/src/payload/payload.config.ts) in the Public Demo source code on GitHub.
+The following options are available:
 
-### Using environment variables in your config
+| Option                     | Description                                                                                                                                                                                    |
+|----------------------------|------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
+| **`admin`**                | The configuration options for the Admin Panel, including Custom Components, Live Preview, etc. [More details](../admin/overview#admin-options).                                                |
+| **`bin`**                  | Register custom bin scripts for Payload to execute.                                                                                                                                            |
+| **`editor`**               | The Rich Text Editor which will be used by `richText` fields. [More details](../rich-text/overview).                                                                                           |
+| **`db`** \*                | The Database Adapter which will be used by Payload. [More details](../database/overview).                                                                                                      |
+| **`serverURL`**            | A string used to define the absolute URL of your app. This includes the protocol, for example `https://example.com`. No paths allowed, only protocol, domain and (optionally) port.            |
+| **`collections`**          | An array of Collections for Payload to manage. [More details](./collections).                                                                                                                  |
+| **`globals`**              | An array of Globals for Payload to manage. [More details](./globals).                                                                                                                          |
+| **`cors`**                 | Cross-origin resource sharing (CORS) is a mechanism that accept incoming requests from given domains. You can also customize the `Access-Control-Allow-Headers` header. [More details](#cors). |
+| **`localization`**         | Opt-in to translate your content into multiple locales. [More details](./localization).                                                                                                        |
+| **`graphQL`**              | Manage GraphQL-specific functionality, including custom queries and mutations, query complexity limits, etc. [More details](../graphql/overview#graphql-options).                              |
+| **`cookiePrefix`**         | A string that will be prefixed to all cookies that Payload sets.                                                                                                                               |
+| **`csrf`**                 | A whitelist array of URLs to allow Payload to accept cookies from. [More details](../authentication/overview#csrf-protection).                                                                 |
+| **`defaultDepth`**         | If a user does not specify `depth` while requesting a resource, this depth will be used. [More details](../queries/depth).                                                                     |
+| **`defaultMaxTextLength`** | The maximum allowed string length to be permitted application-wide. Helps to prevent malicious public document creation.                                                                       |
+| **`maxDepth`**             | The maximum allowed depth to be permitted application-wide. This setting helps prevent against malicious queries. Defaults to `10`. [More details](../queries/depth).                          |
+| **`indexSortableFields`**  | Automatically index all sortable top-level fields in the database to improve sort performance and add database compatibility for Azure Cosmos and similar.                                     |
+| **`upload`**               | Base Payload upload configuration. [More details](../upload/overview#payload-wide-upload-options).                                                                                             |
+| **`routes`**               | Control the routing structure that Payload binds itself to. [More details](../admin/overview#root-level-routes).                                                                               |
+| **`email`**                | Configure the Email Adapter for Payload to use. [More details](../email/overview).                                                                                                             |
+| **`debug`**                | Enable to expose more detailed error information.                                                                                                                                              |
+| **`telemetry`**            | Disable Payload telemetry by passing `false`. [More details](#telemetry).                                                                                                                      |
+| **`rateLimit`**            | Control IP-based rate limiting for all Payload resources. Used to prevent DDoS attacks, etc. [More details](../production/preventing-abuse#rate-limiting-requests).                            |
+| **`hooks`**                | An array of Root Hooks. [More details](../hooks/overview).                                                                                                                                     |
+| **`plugins`**              | An array of Plugins. [More details](../plugins/overview).                                                                                                                                      |
+| **`endpoints`**            | An array of Custom Endpoints added to the Payload router. [More details](../rest-api/overview#custom-endpoints).                                                                               |
+| **`custom`**               | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins).                                                                                                                                     |
+| **`i18n`**                 | Internationalization configuration. Pass all i18n languages you'd like the admin UI to support. Defaults to English-only. [More details](./i18n).                                              |
+| **`secret`** \*            | A secure, unguessable string that Payload will use for any encryption workflows - for example, password salt / hashing.                                                                        |
+| **`sharp`**                | If you would like Payload to offer cropping, focal point selection, and automatic media resizing, install and pass the Sharp module to the config here.                                        |
+| **`typescript`**           | Configure TypeScript settings here. [More details](#typescript).                                                                                                                               |
 
-We suggest using the `dotenv` package to handle environment variables alongside of Payload. All that's necessary to do is to require the package as high up in your application as possible (for example, at the top of your `server.js` file), and ensure that it can find an `.env` file that you create.
+_\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 
-**Add this line to the top of your server:**
+<Banner type="warning">
+  <strong>Note:</strong>
+  Some properties are removed from the client-side bundle. [More details](../admin/components#accessing-the-payload-config).
+</Banner>
 
-```
-require('dotenv').config()
-// ...
-// the rest of your `server.js` file goes here
+
+### Typescript Config
+
+Payload exposes a variety of TypeScript settings that you can leverage. These settings are used to auto-generate TypeScript interfaces for your [Collections](../configuration/collections) and [Globals](../configuration/globals), and to ensure that Payload uses your [Generated Types](../typescript/overview) for all [Local API](../local-api/overview) methods.
+
+To customize the TypeScript settings, use the `typescript` property in your Payload Config:
+
+```ts
+import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
+
+export default buildConfig({
+  // ...
+  typescript: { // highlight-line
+    // ...
+  }
+})
 ```
 
-Note that if you rely on any environment variables in your config itself, you should also call `dotenv()` at the top of your config itself as well. There's no harm in calling it in both your server and your config itself!
+The following options are available:
 
-**Here is an example project structure w/ `dotenv` and an `.env` file:**
+| Option          | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                 |
+| --------------- | --------------------- |
+| **`autoGenerate`** | By default, Payload will auto-generate TypeScript interfaces for all collections and globals that your config defines. Opt out by setting `typescript.autoGenerate: false`. [More details](../typescript/overview). |
+| **`declare`**     | By default, Payload adds a `declare` block to your generated types, which makes sure that Payload uses your generated types for all Local API methods. Opt out by setting `typescript.declare: false`. |
+| **`outputFile`**  | Control the output path and filename of Payload's auto-generated types by defining the `typescript.outputFile` property to a full, absolute path. |
 
-```
-project-name
----- .env
----- package.json
----- payload.config.js
----- server.js
-```
+## Config Location
+
+For Payload command-line scripts, we need to be able to locate your Payload Config. We'll check a variety of locations for the presence of `payload.config.ts` by default, including:
+
+1. The root current working directory
+1. The `compilerOptions` in your `tsconfig`*
+1. The `dist` directory*
+
+_\* Config location detection is different between development and production environments. See below for more details._
 
 <Banner type="warning">
   <strong>Important:</strong>
-  <br />
-  If you use an environment variable to configure any properties that are required for the Admin
-  panel to function (ex. serverURL or any routes), you need to make sure that your Admin panel code
-  can access it. [Click here](/docs/admin/webpack#admin-environment-vars) for more info.
+  Ensure your `tsconfig.json` is properly configured for Payload to auto-detect your config location. If if does not exist, or does not specify the proper `compilerOptions`, Payload will default to the current working directory.
 </Banner>
 
-### Customizing & Automating Config Location Detection
+**Development Mode**
 
-Payload is designed to automatically locate your configuration file. By default, it will first look in the root of your current working directory for a file named `payload.config.js` or `payload.config.ts` if you're using TypeScript.
+In development mode, if the configuration file is not found at the root, Payload will attempt to read your `tsconfig.json`, and attempt to find the config file specified in the `rootDir`:
 
-In development mode, if the configuration file is not found at the root, Payload will attempt to read your `tsconfig.json`, and search in the directory specified in `compilerOptions.rootDir` (typically "src").
+```json
+{
+  // ...
+  // highlight-start
+  "compilerOptions": {
+    "rootDir": "src"
+  }
+  // highlight-end
+}
+```
 
-In production mode, Payload will first attempt to find the config file in the output directory specified in `compilerOptions.outDir` of your `tsconfig.json`, then fallback to the source directory (`compilerOptions.rootDir`), and finally will check the 'dist' directory.
+**Production Mode**
 
-Please ensure your `tsconfig.json` is properly configured if you want Payload to accurately auto-detect your configuration file location. If `tsconfig.json` does not exist or doesn't specify `rootDir` or `outDir`, Payload will default to the current working directory.
+In production mode, Payload will first attempt to find the config file in the `outDir` of your `tsconfig.json`, and if not found, will fallback to the `rootDor` directory:
 
-#### Overriding the Config Location
+```json
+{
+  // ...
+  // highlight-start
+  "compilerOptions": {
+    "outDir": "dist",
+    "rootDir": "src"
+  }
+  // highlight-end
+}
+```
 
-In addition to the above automated detection, you can specify your own location for the Payload config file. This is done by using the environment variable `PAYLOAD_CONFIG_PATH`. The path you provide via this environment variable can either be absolute or relative to your current working directory. This can be useful in situations where your Payload config is not in a standard location, or you wish to switch between multiple configurations.
+If none was in either location, Payload will finally check the `dist` directory.
 
-**Example in package.json:**
+### Customizing the Config Location
+
+In addition to the above automated detection, you can specify your own location for the Payload Config. This can be useful in situations where your config is not in a standard location, or you wish to switch between multiple configurations. To do this, Payload exposes an [Environment Variable](..environment-variables) to bypass all automatic config detection.
+
+To use a custom config location, set the `PAYLOAD_CONFIG_PATH` environment variable:
 
 ```json
 {
   "scripts": {
-    "dev": "PAYLOAD_CONFIG_PATH=path/to/custom-config.js node server.js"
+    "payload": "PAYLOAD_CONFIG_PATH=/path/to/custom-config.ts payload"
   }
 }
 ```
 
-When `PAYLOAD_CONFIG_PATH` is set, Payload will use this path to load the configuration, bypassing all automated detection.
+<Banner type="info">
+  <strong>Tip:</strong>
+  `PAYLOAD_CONFIG_PATH` can be either an absolute path, or path relative to your current working directory.
+</Banner>
 
-### Developing within the Config
+## Telemetry
 
-Payload comes with `isomorphic-fetch` installed which means that even in Node, you can use the `fetch` API just as you would within the browser. No need to import `axios` or similar, unless you want to!
-
-### TypeScript
-
-You can import config types as follows:
-
-```ts
-import { Config } from 'payload/config'
-
-// This is the type used for an incoming Payload config.
-// Only the bare minimum properties are marked as required.
-```
-
-```ts
-import { SanitizedConfig } from 'payload/config'
-
-// This is the type used after an incoming Payload config is fully sanitized.
-// Generally, this is only used internally by Payload.
-```
-
-### Telemetry
-
-Payload collects **completely anonymous** telemetry data about general usage. This data is super important to us and helps us accurately understand how we're growing and what we can do to build the software into everything that it can possibly be. The telemetry that we collect also help us demonstrate our growth in an accurate manner, which helps us as we seek investment to build and scale our team. If we can accurately demonstrate our growth, we can more effectively continue to support Payload as free and open-source software. To opt out of telemetry, you can pass `telemetry: false` within your Payload config.
+Payload collects **completely anonymous** telemetry data about general usage. This data is super important to us and helps us accurately understand how we're growing and what we can do to build the software into everything that it can possibly be. The telemetry that we collect also help us demonstrate our growth in an accurate manner, which helps us as we seek investment to build and scale our team. If we can accurately demonstrate our growth, we can more effectively continue to support Payload as free and open-source software. To opt out of telemetry, you can pass `telemetry: false` within your Payload Config.
 
 For more information about what we track, take a look at our [privacy policy](/privacy).
+
+## Cross-origin resource sharing (CORS)
+
+Cross-origin resource sharing (CORS) can be configured with either a whitelist array of URLS to allow CORS requests from, a wildcard string (`*`) to accept incoming requests from any domain, or a object with the following properties:
+
+| Option    | Description                                                                                                                                                                        |
+| --------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`origins`** | Either a whitelist array of URLS to allow CORS requests from, or a wildcard string (`'*'`) to accept incoming requests from any domain. |
+| **`headers`**  | A list of allowed headers that will be appended in `Access-Control-Allow-Headers`. |
+
+Here's an example showing how to allow incoming requests from any domain:
+
+```ts
+import { buildConfig } from 'payload/config'
+
+export default buildConfig({
+  // ...
+  cors: '*' // highlight-line
+})
+```
+
+Here's an example showing how to append a new header (`x-custom-header`) in `Access-Control-Allow-Headers`:
+
+```ts
+import { buildConfig } from 'payload/config'
+
+export default buildConfig({
+  // ...
+  // highlight-start
+  cors: {
+    origins: ['http://localhost:3000']
+    headers: ['x-custom-header']
+  }
+  // highlight-end
+})
+```
+
+## TypeScript
+
+You can import types from Payload to help make writing your config easier and type-safe. There are two main types that represent the Payload Config, `Config` and `SanitizedConfig`.
+
+The `Config` type represents a raw Payload Config in its full form. Only the bare minimum properties are marked as required. The `SanitizedConfig` type represents a Payload Config after it has been fully sanitized. Generally, this is only used internally by Payload.
+
+```ts
+import { Config, SanitizedConfig } from 'payload'
+```

docs/database/migrations.mdx

@@ -2,7 +2,7 @@
 title: Migrations
 label: Migrations
 order: 20
-keywords: database, migrations, ddl, sql, mongodb, postgres, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, typescript, node, react, express
+keywords: database, migrations, ddl, sql, mongodb, postgres, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, typescript, node, react, nextjs
 desc: Payload features first-party database migrations all done in TypeScript.
 ---
 
@@ -24,7 +24,7 @@ Ensure you have an npm script called "payload" in your `package.json` file.
   because Payload should not be globally installed on your system.
 </Banner>
 
-### Migration file contents
+## Migration file contents
 
 Payload stores all created migrations in a folder that you can specify. By default, migrations are stored
 in `./src/migrations`.
@@ -34,8 +34,8 @@ that will be called if for some reason the migration fails to complete successfu
 all changes that you attempt to make within the migration, and the `down` should ideally revert any changes you make.
 
 For an added level of safety, migrations should leverage Payload [transactions](/docs/database/transactions). Migration
-functions should make use of the `req` by adding it to the arguments of your payload local API calls such
-as `payload.create` and database adapter methods like `payload.db.create`.
+functions should make use of the `req` by adding it to the arguments of your Payload Local API calls such
+as `payload.create` and Database Adapter methods like `payload.db.create`.
 
 Here is an example migration file:
 
@@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ export async function down({ payload, req }: MigrateDownArgs): Promise<void> {
 }
 ```
 
-### Migrations Directory
+## Migrations Directory
 
 Each DB adapter has an optional property `migrationDir` where you can override where you want your migrations to be
 stored/read. If this is not specified, Payload will check the default and possibly make a best effort to find your
@@ -124,3 +124,90 @@ Drops all entities from the database and re-runs all migrations from scratch.
 ```text
 npm run payload migrate:fresh
 ```
+
+## When to run migrations
+
+Depending on which Database Adapter you use, your migration workflow might differ subtly.
+
+In relational databases, migrations will be **required** for non-development database environments. But with MongoDB, you might only need to run migrations once in a while (or never even need them).
+
+#### MongoDB
+
+In MongoDB, you'll only ever really need to run migrations for times where you change your database shape, and you have lots of existing data that you'd like to transform from Shape A to Shape B.
+
+In this case, you can create a migration by running `pnpm payload migrate:create`, and then write the logic that you need to perform to migrate your documents to their new shape. You can then either run your migrations in CI before you build / deploy, or you can run them locally, against your production database, by using your production database connection string on your local computer and running the `pnpm payload migrate` command.
+
+#### Postgres
+
+In relational databases like Postgres, migrations are a bit more important, because each time you add a new field or a new collection, you'll need to update the shape of your database to match your Payload Config (otherwise you'll see errors upon trying to read / write your data).
+
+That means that Postgres users of Payload should become familiar with the entire migration workflow from top to bottom.
+
+Here is an overview of a common workflow for working locally against a development database, creating migrations, and then running migrations against your production database before deploying.
+
+**1 - work locally using push mode**
+
+Payload uses Drizzle ORM's powerful `push` mode to automatically sync data changes to your database for you while in development mode. By default, this is enabled and is the suggested workflow to using Postgres and Payload while doing local development.
+
+You can disable this setting and solely use migrations to manage your local development database (pass `push: false` to your Postgres adapter), but if you do disable it, you may see frequent errors while running development mode. This is because Payload will have updated to your new data shape, but your local database will not have updated.
+
+For this reason, we suggest that you leave `push` as its default setting and treat your local dev database as a sandbox.
+
+For more information about push mode and prototyping in development, [click here](/docs/beta/database/postgres#prototyping-in-dev-mode).
+
+The typical workflow in Payload is to build out your Payload configs, install plugins, and make progress in development mode - allowing Drizzle to push your changes to your local database for you. Once you're finished, you can create a migration.
+
+But importantly, you do not need to run migrations against your development database, because Drizzle will have already pushed your changes to your database for you.
+
+<Banner type="warning">
+  Warning: do not mix "push" and migrations with your local development database. If you use "push"
+  locally, and then try to migrate, Payload will throw a warning, telling you that these two methods
+  are not meant to be used interchangeably.
+</Banner>
+
+**2 - create a migration**
+
+Once you're done with working in your Payload Config, you can create a migration. It's best practice to try and complete a specific task or fully build out a feature before you create a migration.
+
+But once you're ready, you can run `pnpm payload migrate:create`, which will perform the following steps for you:
+
+- We will look for any existing migrations, and automatically generate SQL changes necessary to convert your schema from its prior state to the new state of your Payload Config
+- We will then create a new migration file in your `/migrations` folder that contains all the SQL necessary to be run
+
+We won't immediately run this migration for you, however.
+
+<Banner type="success">
+  Tip: migrations created by Payload are relatively programmatic in nature, so there should not be any surprises, but before you check in the created migration it's a good idea to always double-check the contents of the migration files.
+</Banner>
+
+**3 - set up your build process to run migrations**
+
+Generally, you want to run migrations before you build Payload for production. This typically happens in your CI pipeline and can usually be configured on platforms like Payload Cloud, Vercel, or Netlify by specifying your build script.
+
+A common set of scripts in a `package.json`, set up to run migrations in CI, might look like this:
+
+```js
+  "scripts": {
+    // For running in dev mode
+    "dev": "next dev --turbo",
+
+    // To build your Next + Payload app for production
+    "build": "next build",
+
+    // A "tie-in" to Payload's CLI for convenience
+    // this helps you run `pnpm payload migrate:create` and similar
+    "payload": "cross-env NODE_OPTIONS=--no-deprecation payload",
+
+    // This command is what you'd set your `build script` to.
+    // Notice how it runs `payload migrate` and then `pnpm build`?
+    // This will run all migrations for you before building, in your CI,
+    // against your production database
+    "ci": "payload migrate && pnpm build",
+  },
+```
+
+In the example above, we've specified a `ci` script which we can use as our "build script" in the platform that we are deploying to production with.
+
+This will require that your build pipeline can connect to your database, and it will simply run the `payload migrate` command prior to starting the build process. By calling `payload migrate`, Payload will automatically execute any migrations in your `/migrations` folder that have not yet been executed against your production database, in the order that they were created.
+
+If it fails, the deployment will be rejected. But now, with your build script set up to run your migrations, you will be all set! Next time you deploy, your CI will execute the required migrations for you, and your database will be caught up with the shape that your Payload Config requires.

docs/database/mongodb.mdx

@@ -3,13 +3,13 @@ title: MongoDB
 label: MongoDB
 order: 40
 desc: Payload has supported MongoDB natively since we started. The flexible nature of MongoDB lends itself well to Payload's powerful fields.
-keywords: MongoDB, documentation, typescript, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, express
+keywords: MongoDB, documentation, typescript, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
 ---
 
 To use Payload with MongoDB, install the package `@payloadcms/db-mongodb`. It will come with everything you need to
 store your Payload data in MongoDB.
 
-Then from there, pass it to your Payload config as follows:
+Then from there, pass it to your Payload Config as follows:
 
 ```ts
 import { mongooseAdapter } from '@payloadcms/db-mongodb'
@@ -28,17 +28,18 @@ export default buildConfig({
 })
 ```
 
-### Options
+## Options
 
-| Option               | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   |
-| -------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | --- |
-| `autoPluralization`  | Tell Mongoose to auto-pluralize any collection names if it encounters any singular words used as collection `slug`s.                                                                                                                                                                          |
-| `connectOptions`     | Customize MongoDB connection options. Payload will connect to your MongoDB database using default options which you can override and extend to include all the [options](https://mongoosejs.com/docs/connections.html#options) available to mongoose.                                         |
+| Option               | Description |
+| -------------------- | ----------- |
+| `autoPluralization`  | Tell Mongoose to auto-pluralize any collection names if it encounters any singular words used as collection `slug`s. |
+| `connectOptions`     | Customize MongoDB connection options. Payload will connect to your MongoDB database using default options which you can override and extend to include all the [options](https://mongoosejs.com/docs/connections.html#options) available to mongoose. |
 | `disableIndexHints`  | Set to true to disable hinting to MongoDB to use 'id' as index. This is currently done when counting documents for pagination, as it increases the speed of the count function used in that query. Disabling this optimization might fix some problems with AWS DocumentDB. Defaults to false |
-| `migrationDir`       | Customize the directory that migrations are stored.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                           |
-| `transactionOptions` | An object with configuration properties used in [transactions](https://www.mongodb.com/docs/manual/core/transactions/) or `false` which will disable the use of transactions.                                                                                                                 |     |
+| `migrationDir`       | Customize the directory that migrations are stored. |
+| `transactionOptions` | An object with configuration properties used in [transactions](https://www.mongodb.com/docs/manual/core/transactions/) or `false` which will disable the use of transactions. |
+| `collation`          | Enable language-specific string comparison with customizable options. Available on MongoDB 3.4+. Defaults locale to "en". Example: `{ strength: 3 }`. For a full list of collation options and their definitions, see the [MongoDB documentation](https://www.mongodb.com/docs/manual/reference/collation/). |
 
-### Access to Mongoose models
+## Access to Mongoose models
 
 After Payload is initialized, this adapter exposes all of your Mongoose models and they are available for you to work
 with directly.

docs/database/overview.mdx

@@ -2,24 +2,49 @@
 title: Database
 label: Overview
 order: 10
-keywords: database, mongodb, postgres, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, typescript, node, react, express
+keywords: database, mongodb, postgres, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, typescript, node, react, nextjs
 desc: With Payload, you bring your own database and own your data. You have full control.
 ---
 
-Payload interacts with your database via the database adapter that you choose. Right now, Payload officially supports two database adapters:
+Payload is database agnostic, meaning you can use any type of database behind Payload's familiar APIs. Payload is designed to interact with your database through a Database Adapter, which is a thin layer that translates Payload's internal data structures into your database's native data structures.
 
-1. [MongoDB](/docs/database/mongodb) w/ [Mongoose](https://mongoosejs.com/)
-1. [Postgres](/docs/database/postgres) w/ [Drizzle](https://drizzle.team/)
+Currently, Payload officially supports the following Database Adapters:
 
-We will be adding support for SQLite and MySQL in the near future using Drizzle ORM.
+- [MongoDB](/docs/database/mongodb) with [Mongoose](https://mongoosejs.com/)
+- [Postgres](/docs/database/postgres) with [Drizzle](https://drizzle.team/)
+- Coming soon: SQLite and MySQL using Drizzle.
 
-To use a specific database adapter, you need to install it and configure it according to its own specifications. Visit the documentation for your applicable database adapter to learn more.
+To configure a Database Adapter, use the `db` property in your [Payload Config](../configuration/overview):
 
-## Selecting a database
+```ts
+import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
+import { mongooseAdapter } from '@payloadcms/db-mongodb'
+
+export default buildConfig({
+  // ...
+  // highlight-start
+  db: mongooseAdapter({
+    url: process.env.DATABASE_URI,
+  }),
+  // highlight-end
+})
+```
+
+<Banner type="warning">
+  <strong>Reminder:</strong>
+  The Database Adapter is an external dependency and must be installed in your project separately from Payload. You can find the installation instructions for each Database Adapter in their respective documentation.
+</Banner>
+
+## Selecting a Database
 
 There are several factors to consider when choosing which database technology and hosting option is right for your project and workload. Payload can theoretically support any database, but it's up to you to decide which database to use.
 
-#### When to use MongoDB
+There are two main categories of databases to choose from:
+
+- [Non-Relational Databases](#non-relational-databases)
+- [Relational Databases](#relational-databases)
+
+### Non-Relational Databases
 
 If your project has a lot of dynamic fields, and you are comfortable with allowing Payload to enforce data integrity across your documents, MongoDB is a great choice. With it, your Payload documents are stored as _one_ document in your database—no matter if you have localization enabled, how many block or array fields you have, etc. This means that the shape of your data in your database will very closely reflect your field schema, and there is minimal complexity involved in storing or retrieving your data.
 
@@ -27,47 +52,21 @@ You should prefer MongoDB if:
 
 - You prefer simplicity within your database
 - You don't want to deal with keeping production / staging databases in sync via [DDL changes](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Data_definition_language)
-- Most (or everything) in your project is localized
-- You leverage a lot of array fields, block fields, or `hasMany` select fields and similar
+- Most (or everything) in your project is [Localized](../configuration/localization)
+- You leverage a lot of [Arrays](../fields/array), [Blocks](../fields/blocks), or `hasMany` [Select](../fields/select) fields
 
-#### When to use a relational DB
+### Relational Databases
 
 Many projects might call for more rigid database architecture where the shape of your data is strongly enforced at the database level. For example, if you know the shape of your data and it's relatively "flat", and you don't anticipate it to change often, your workload might suit relational databases like Postgres very well.
 
 You should prefer a relational DB like Postgres if:
 
-- You are comfortable with migration workflows
+- You are comfortable with [Migrations](./migrations)
 - You require enforced data consistency at the database level
 - You have a lot of relationships between collections and require relationships to be enforced
 
-#### Differences in Payload features
+## Payload Differences
 
-It's important to note that almost everything Payload does is available in all of our officially supported database adapters, including localization, arrays, blocks, etc.
+It's important to note that nearly every Payload feature is available in all of our officially supported Database Adapters, including [Localization](../configuration/localization), [Arrays](../fields/array), [Blocks](../fields/blocks), etc. The only thing that is not supported in Postgres yet is the [Point Field](/docs/fields/point), but that should be added soon.
 
-The only thing that is not supported in Postgres yet is the [Point field](/docs/fields/point), but that should be added soon.
-
-It's up to you to choose which database you would like to use.
-
-## Configuration
-
-To configure the database for your Payload application, an adapter can be assigned to `config.db`. This property is required within your Payload config.
-
-Here's an example:
-
-```ts
-import { postgresAdapter } from '@payloadcms/db-postgres'
-
-export default buildConfig({
-  // Your config goes here
-  collections: [
-    // Collections go here
-  ],
-  // Here is where you pass your database adapter
-  // and the adapter will require options specific to itself
-  db: postgresAdapter({
-    pool: {
-      connectionString: process.env.DATABASE_URI,
-    },
-  }),
-})
-```
+It's up to you to choose which database you would like to use based on the requirements of your project. Payload has no opinion on which database you should ultimately choose.

docs/database/postgres.mdx

@@ -2,20 +2,15 @@
 title: Postgres
 label: Postgres
 order: 50
-desc: Payload supports Postgres through an officially supported Drizzle database adapter.
-keywords: Postgres, documentation, typescript, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, express
+desc: Payload supports Postgres through an officially supported Drizzle Database Adapter.
+keywords: Postgres, documentation, typescript, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
 ---
 
 To use Payload with Postgres, install the package `@payloadcms/db-postgres`. It leverages Drizzle ORM and `node-postgres` to interact with a Postgres database that you provide.
 
-<Banner>
-  The Postgres database adapter is currently in beta. If you would like to help us test this
-  package, we'd love to hear if you find any bugs or issues!
-</Banner>
-
 It automatically manages changes to your database for you in development mode, and exposes a full suite of migration controls for you to leverage in order to keep other database environments in sync with your schema. DDL transformations are automatically generated.
 
-To configure Payload to use Postgres, pass the `postgresAdapter` to your Payload config as follows:
+To configure Payload to use Postgres, pass the `postgresAdapter` to your Payload Config as follows:
 
 ```ts
 import { postgresAdapter } from '@payloadcms/db-postgres'
@@ -36,22 +31,22 @@ export default buildConfig({
 })
 ```
 
-### Options
+## Options
 
-| Option                | Description                                                                                                                                                                                           |
-|-----------------------|-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
-| `pool` \*             | [Pool connection options](https://orm.drizzle.team/docs/quick-postgresql/node-postgres) that will be passed to Drizzle and `node-postgres`.                                                           |
-| `push`                | Disable Drizzle's [`db push`](https://orm.drizzle.team/kit-docs/overview#prototyping-with-db-push) in development mode. By default, `push` is enabled for development mode only.                      |
-| `migrationDir`        | Customize the directory that migrations are stored.                                                                                                                                                   |
-| `logger`              | The instance of the logger to be passed to drizzle. By default Payload's will be used.                                                                                                                |
-| `schemaName`   | A string for the postgres schema to use, defaults to 'public'.                                                                                                                   |
-| `localesSuffix`       | A string appended to the end of table names for storing localized fields. Default is '_locales'.                                                                                                      |
-| `relationshipsSuffix` | A string appended to the end of table names for storing relationships. Default is '_rels'.                                                                                                            |
-| `versionsSuffix`      | A string appended to the end of table names for storing versions. Defaults to '_v'.                                                                                                                   |
+| Option                      | Description                                                                                                                                                                      |
+|-----------------------------|----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
+| `pool` \*                   | [Pool connection options](https://orm.drizzle.team/docs/quick-postgresql/node-postgres) that will be passed to Drizzle and `node-postgres`.                                      |
+| `push`                      | Disable Drizzle's [`db push`](https://orm.drizzle.team/kit-docs/overview#prototyping-with-db-push) in development mode. By default, `push` is enabled for development mode only. |
+| `migrationDir`              | Customize the directory that migrations are stored.                                                                                                                              |
+| `logger`                    | The instance of the logger to be passed to drizzle. By default Payload's will be used.                                                                                           |
+| `schemaName` (experimental) | A string for the postgres schema to use, defaults to 'public'.                                                                                                                   |
+| `idType`                    | A string of 'serial', or 'uuid' that is used for the data type given to id columns.                                                                                              |
+| `transactionOptions`        | A PgTransactionConfig object for transactions, or set to `false` to disable using transactions. [More details](https://orm.drizzle.team/docs/transactions)                       |
+| `localesSuffix`             | A string appended to the end of table names for storing localized fields. Default is '_locales'.                                                                                 |
+| `relationshipsSuffix`       | A string appended to the end of table names for storing relationships. Default is '_rels'.                                                                                       |
+| `versionsSuffix`            | A string appended to the end of table names for storing versions. Defaults to '_v'.                                                                                              |
 
-
-
-### Access to Drizzle
+## Access to Drizzle
 
 After Payload is initialized, this adapter will expose the full power of Drizzle to you for use if you need it.
 
@@ -61,7 +56,7 @@ You can access Drizzle as follows:
 payload.db.drizzle
 ```
 
-### Tables, relations, and enums
+## Tables, relations, and enums
 
 In addition to exposing Drizzle directly, all of the tables, Drizzle relations, and enum configs are exposed for you via the `payload.db` property as well.
 
@@ -69,29 +64,18 @@ In addition to exposing Drizzle directly, all of the tables, Drizzle relations,
 - Enums - `payload.db.enums`
 - Relations - `payload.db.relations`
 
-### Prototyping in development mode
+## Prototyping in development mode
 
 Drizzle exposes two ways to work locally in development mode.
 
-The first is [`db push`](https://orm.drizzle.team/kit-docs/overview#prototyping-with-db-push), which automatically pushes changes you make to your Payload config (and therefore, Drizzle schema) to your database so you don't have to manually migrate every time you change your Payload config. This only works in development mode, and should not be mixed with manually running [`migrate`](/docs/database/migrations) commands.
+The first is [`db push`](https://orm.drizzle.team/kit-docs/overview#prototyping-with-db-push), which automatically pushes changes you make to your Payload Config (and therefore, Drizzle schema) to your database so you don't have to manually migrate every time you change your Payload Config. This only works in development mode, and should not be mixed with manually running [`migrate`](/docs/database/migrations) commands.
 
 You will be warned if any changes that you make will entail data loss while in development mode. Push is enabled by default, but you can opt out if you'd like.
 
-Alternatively, you can disable `push` and rely solely on migrations to keep your local database in sync with your Payload config.
+Alternatively, you can disable `push` and rely solely on migrations to keep your local database in sync with your Payload Config.
 
-### Migration workflows
+## Migration workflows
 
-Migrations are extremely powerful thanks to the seamless way that Payload and Drizzle work together. Let's take the following scenario:
+In Postgres, migrations are a fundamental aspect of working with Payload and you should become familiar with how they work.
 
-1. You are building your Payload config locally, with a local database used for testing.
-1. You have left the default setting of `push` enabled, so every time you change your Payload config (add or remove fields, collections, etc.), Drizzle will automatically push changes to your local DB.
-1. Once you're done with your changes, or have completed a feature, you can run `npm run payload migrate:create`.
-1. Payload and Drizzle will look for any existing migrations, and automatically generate all SQL changes necessary to convert your schema from its prior state into the state of your current Payload config, and store the resulting DDL in a newly created migration.
-1. Once you're ready to go to production, you will be able to run `npm run payload migrate` against your production database, which will apply any new migrations that have not yet run.
-1. Now your production database is in sync with your Payload config!
-
-<Banner type="warning">
-  Warning: do not mix "push" and migrations with your local development database. If you use "push"
-  locally, and then try to migrate, Payload will throw a warning, telling you that these two methods
-  are not meant to be used interchangeably.
-</Banner>
+For more information about migrations, [click here](/docs/beta/database/migrations#when-to-run-migrations).

docs/database/sqlite.mdx

@@ -0,0 +1,81 @@
+---
+title: SQLite
+label: SQLite
+order: 60
+desc: Payload supports SQLite through an officially supported Drizzle Database Adapter.
+keywords: SQLite, documentation, typescript, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
+---
+
+To use Payload with SQLite, install the package `@payloadcms/db-sqlite`. It leverages Drizzle ORM and `libSQL` to interact with a SQLite database that you provide.
+
+It automatically manages changes to your database for you in development mode, and exposes a full suite of migration controls for you to leverage in order to keep other database environments in sync with your schema. DDL transformations are automatically generated.
+
+To configure Payload to use SQLite, pass the `sqliteAdapter` to your Payload Config as follows:
+
+```ts
+import { sqliteAdapter } from '@payloadcms/db-sqlite'
+
+export default buildConfig({
+  // Your config goes here
+  collections: [
+    // Collections go here
+  ],
+  // Configure the SQLite adapter here
+  db: sqliteAdapter({
+    // SQLite-specific arguments go here.
+    // `client.url` is required.
+    client: {
+      url: process.env.DATABASE_URL,
+      authToken: process.env.DATABASE_AUTH_TOKEN,
+    }
+  }),
+})
+```
+
+## Options
+
+| Option                | Description                                                                                                                                                                      |
+|-----------------------|----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
+| `client` \*           | [Client connection options](https://orm.drizzle.team/docs/get-started-sqlite#turso) that will be passed to `createClient` from `@libsql/client`.                                 |
+| `push`                | Disable Drizzle's [`db push`](https://orm.drizzle.team/kit-docs/overview#prototyping-with-db-push) in development mode. By default, `push` is enabled for development mode only. |
+| `migrationDir`        | Customize the directory that migrations are stored.                                                                                                                              |
+| `logger`              | The instance of the logger to be passed to drizzle. By default Payload's will be used.                                                                                           |
+| `transactionOptions`  | A SQLiteTransactionConfig object for transactions, or set to `false` to disable using transactions. [More details](https://orm.drizzle.team/docs/transactions)                   |
+| `localesSuffix`       | A string appended to the end of table names for storing localized fields. Default is '_locales'.                                                                                 |
+| `relationshipsSuffix` | A string appended to the end of table names for storing relationships. Default is '_rels'.                                                                                       |
+| `versionsSuffix`      | A string appended to the end of table names for storing versions. Defaults to '_v'.                                                                                              |
+
+
+
+## Access to Drizzle
+
+After Payload is initialized, this adapter will expose the full power of Drizzle to you for use if you need it.
+
+You can access Drizzle as follows:
+
+```text
+payload.db.drizzle
+```
+
+## Tables and relations
+
+In addition to exposing Drizzle directly, all of the tables and Drizzle relations are exposed for you via the `payload.db` property as well.
+
+- Tables - `payload.db.tables`
+- Relations - `payload.db.relations`
+
+## Prototyping in development mode
+
+Drizzle exposes two ways to work locally in development mode.
+
+The first is [`db push`](https://orm.drizzle.team/kit-docs/overview#prototyping-with-db-push), which automatically pushes changes you make to your Payload Config (and therefore, Drizzle schema) to your database so you don't have to manually migrate every time you change your Payload Config. This only works in development mode, and should not be mixed with manually running [`migrate`](/docs/database/migrations) commands.
+
+You will be warned if any changes that you make will entail data loss while in development mode. Push is enabled by default, but you can opt out if you'd like.
+
+Alternatively, you can disable `push` and rely solely on migrations to keep your local database in sync with your Payload Config.
+
+## Migration workflows
+
+In SQLite, migrations are a fundamental aspect of working with Payload and you should become familiar with how they work.
+
+For more information about migrations, [click here](/docs/beta/database/migrations#when-to-run-migrations).

docs/database/transactions.mdx

@@ -2,7 +2,7 @@
 title: Transactions
 label: Transactions
 order: 30
-keywords: database, transactions, sql, mongodb, postgres, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, typescript, node, react, express
+keywords: database, transactions, sql, mongodb, postgres, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, typescript, node, react, nextjs
 desc: Database transactions are fully supported within Payload.
 ---
 
@@ -20,7 +20,8 @@ The initial request made to Payload will begin a new transaction and attach it t
 
 ```ts
 const afterChange: CollectionAfterChangeHook = async ({ req }) => {
-  // because req.transactionID is assigned from Payload and passed through, my-slug will only persist if the entire request is successful
+  // because req.transactionID is assigned from Payload and passed through,
+  // my-slug will only persist if the entire request is successful
   await req.payload.create({
     req,
     collection: 'my-slug',
@@ -31,7 +32,7 @@ const afterChange: CollectionAfterChangeHook = async ({ req }) => {
 }
 ```
 
-### Async Hooks with Transactions
+## Async Hooks with Transactions
 
 Since Payload hooks can be async and be written to not await the result, it is possible to have an incorrect success response returned on a request that is rolled back. If you have a hook where you do not `await` the result, then you should **not** pass the `req.transactionID`.
 
@@ -58,7 +59,7 @@ const afterChange: CollectionAfterChangeHook = async ({ req }) => {
 }
 ```
 
-### Direct Transaction Access
+## Direct Transaction Access
 
 When writing your own scripts or custom endpoints, you may wish to have direct control over transactions. This is useful for interacting with your database outside of Payload's local API.
 
@@ -67,3 +68,7 @@ The following functions can be used for managing transactions:
 `payload.db.beginTransaction` - Starts a new session and returns a transaction ID for use in other Payload Local API calls.
 `payload.db.commitTransaction` - Takes the identifier for the transaction, finalizes any changes.
 `payload.db.rollbackTransaction` - Takes the identifier for the transaction, discards any changes.
+
+## Disabling Transactions
+
+If you wish to disable transactions entirely, you can do so by passing `false` as the `transactionOptions` in your database adapter configuration. All the official Payload database adapters support this option.

docs/email/overview.mdx

@@ -2,166 +2,165 @@
 title: Email Functionality
 label: Overview
 order: 10
-desc: Payload uses NodeMailer to allow you to send emails smoothly from your app. Set up email functions such as password resets, order confirmations and more.
-keywords: email, overview, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, express
+desc: Payload uses an adapter pattern to enable email functionality. Set up email functions such as password resets, order confirmations and more.
+keywords: email, overview, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
 ---
 
-### Introduction
+## Introduction
 
-Payload comes ready to send your application's email. Whether you simply need built-in password reset
-email to work or you want customers to get an order confirmation email, you're almost there. Payload makes use of
-[NodeMailer](https://nodemailer.com) for email and won't get in your way for those already familiar.
+Payload has a few email adapters that can be imported to enable email functionality. The [@payloadcms/email-nodemailer](https://www.npmjs.com/package/@payloadcms/email-nodemailer) package will be the package most will want to install. This package provides an easy way to use [Nodemailer](https://nodemailer.com) for email and won't get in your way for those already familiar.
 
-For email to send from your Payload server, some configuration is required. The settings you provide will be set
-in the `email` property object of your payload init call. Payload will make use of the transport that you have configured for it for things like reset password or verifying new user accounts and email send methods are available to you as well on your payload instance.
+The email adapter should be passed into the `email` property of the Payload Config. This will allow Payload to send [auth-related emails](../authentication/email) for things like password resets, new user verification, and any other email sending needs you may have.
 
-### Configuration
+## Configuration
 
-**Three ways to set it up**
+### Default Configuration
 
-1. **Default**: When email is not needed, a mock email handler will be created and used when nothing is provided. This is ideal for development environments and can be changed later when ready to [go to production](/docs/production/deployment).
-1. **Recommended**: Set the `transportOptions` and Payload will do the set up for you.
-1. **Advanced**: The `transport` object can be assigned a nodemailer transport object set up in your server scripts and given for Payload to use.
+When email is not needed or desired, Payload will log a warning on startup notifying that email is not configured. A  warning message will also be logged on any attempt to send an email.
 
-The following options are configurable in the `email` property object as part of the options object when calling payload.init().
+### Email Adapter
 
-| Option                   | Description                                                                                                                                                                            |
-| ------------------------ | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`fromName`** \*        | The name part of the From field that will be seen on the delivered email                                                                                                               |
-| **`fromAddress`** \*     | The email address part of the From field that will be used when delivering email                                                                                                       |
-| **`transport`**          | The NodeMailer transport object for when you want to do it yourself, not needed when transportOptions is set                                                                           |
-| **`transportOptions`**   | An object that configures the transporter that Payload will create. For all the available options see the [NodeMailer documentation](https://nodemailer.com) or see the examples below |
-| **`logMockCredentials`** | If set to true and no transport/transportOptions, ethereal credentials will be logged to console on startup                                                                            |
+An email adapter will require at least the following fields:
 
-_\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
+| Option                      | Description                                                                      |
+| --------------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`defaultFromName`** \*    | The name part of the From field that will be seen on the delivered email         |
+| **`defaultFromAddress`** \* | The email address part of the From field that will be used when delivering email |
 
-### Use SMTP
 
-Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) options can be passed in using the `transportOptions` object on the `email` options. See the [NodeMailer SMTP documentation](https://nodemailer.com/smtp/) for more information, including details on when `secure` should and should not be set to `true`.
+### Official Email Adapters
+
+| Name       | Package                                                                                    | Description                                                                                                                                                                                     |
+| ---------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| Nodemailer | [@payloadcms/email-nodemailer](https://www.npmjs.com/package/@payloadcms/email-nodemailer) | Use any [Nodemailer transport](https://nodemailer.com/transports), including SMTP, Resend, SendGrid, and more. This was provided by default in Payload 2.x. This is the easiest migration path. |
+| Resend     | [@payloadcms/email-resend](https://www.npmjs.com/package/@payloadcms/email-resend)         | Resend email via their REST API. This is preferred for serverless platforms such as Vercel because it is much more lightweight than the nodemailer adapter.                                     |
+
+## Nodemailer Configuration
+
+| Option                 | Description                                                                                                                                                                            |
+| ---------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`transport`**        | The Nodemailer transport object for when you want to do it yourself, not needed when transportOptions is set                                                                           |
+| **`transportOptions`** | An object that configures the transporter that Payload will create. For all the available options see the [Nodemailer documentation](https://nodemailer.com) or see the examples below |
+
+## Use SMTP
+
+Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) options can be passed in using the `transportOptions` object on the `email` options. See the [Nodemailer SMTP documentation](https://nodemailer.com/smtp/) for more information, including details on when `secure` should and should not be set to `true`.
 
 **Example email options using SMTP:**
 
 ```ts
-payload.init({
-  email: {
+import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
+import { nodemailerAdapter } from '@payloadcms/email-nodemailer'
+
+export default buildConfig({
+  email: nodemailerAdapter({
+    defaultFromAddress: 'info@payloadcms.com',
+    defaultFromName: 'Payload',
+    // Nodemailer transportOptions
     transportOptions: {
       host: process.env.SMTP_HOST,
+      port: 587,
       auth: {
         user: process.env.SMTP_USER,
         pass: process.env.SMTP_PASS,
       },
-      port: Number(process.env.SMTP_HOST),
-      secure: Number(process.env.SMTP_PORT) === 465, // true for port 465, false (the default) for 587 and others
-      requireTLS: true,
     },
-    fromName: 'hello',
-    fromAddress: 'hello@example.com',
-  },
-  // ...
+  }),
 })
 ```
 
-<Banner type="warning">
-  It is best practice to avoid saving credentials or API keys directly in your code, use
-  [environment variables](/docs/configuration/overview#using-environment-variables-in-your-config).
-</Banner>
-
-### Use an email service
-
-Many third party mail providers are available and offer benefits beyond basic SMTP. As an example, your payload init could look like this if you wanted to use SendGrid.com, though the same approach would work for any other [NodeMailer transports](https://nodemailer.com/transports/) shown here or provided by another third party.
+**Example email options using nodemailer.createTransport:**
 
 ```ts
-import payload from 'payload'
-import nodemailerSendgrid from 'nodemailer-sendgrid'
-
-const sendGridAPIKey = process.env.SENDGRID_API_KEY
-
-payload.init({
-  ...(sendGridAPIKey
-    ? {
-        email: {
-          transportOptions: nodemailerSendgrid({
-            apiKey: sendGridAPIKey,
-          }),
-          fromName: 'Admin',
-          fromAddress: 'admin@example.com',
-        },
-      }
-    : {}),
-})
-```
-
-### Use a custom NodeMailer transport
-
-To take full control of the mail transport you may wish to use `nodemailer.createTransport()` on your server and provide it to Payload init.
-
-```ts
-import payload from 'payload'
+import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
+import { nodemailerAdapter } from '@payloadcms/email-nodemailer'
 import nodemailer from 'nodemailer'
 
-const payload = require('payload')
-const nodemailer = require('nodemailer')
-
-const transport = await nodemailer.createTransport({
-  host: process.env.SMTP_HOST,
-  port: 587,
-  auth: {
-    user: process.env.SMTP_USER,
-    pass: process.env.SMTP_PASS,
-  },
-})
-
-payload.init({
-  email: {
-    fromName: 'Admin',
-    fromAddress: 'admin@example.com',
-    transport,
-  },
-  // ...
+export default buildConfig({
+  email: nodemailerAdapter({
+    defaultFromAddress: 'info@payloadcms.com',
+    defaultFromName: 'Payload',
+    // Any Nodemailer transport can be used
+    transport: nodemailer.createTransport({
+      host: process.env.SMTP_HOST,
+      port: 587,
+      auth: {
+        user: process.env.SMTP_USER,
+        pass: process.env.SMTP_PASS,
+      },
+    }),
+  }),
 })
 ```
 
-### Sending Mail
+**Custom Transport:**
 
-With a working transport you can call it anywhere you have access to payload by calling `payload.sendEmail(message)`. The `message` will contain the `to`, `subject` and `email` or `text` for the email being sent. To see all available message configuration options see [NodeMailer](https://nodemailer.com/message).
+You also have the ability to bring your own nodemailer transport. This is an example of using the SendGrid nodemailer transport.
 
-### Mock transport
-
-By default, Payload uses a mock implementation that only sends mail to the [ethereal](https://ethereal.email) capture service that will never reach a user's inbox. While in development you may wish to make use of the captured messages which is why the payload output during server output helpfully logs this out on the server console.
-
-To see ethereal credentials, add `logMockCredentials: true` to the email options. This will cause them to be logged to console on startup.
 
 ```ts
-payload.init({
-  email: {
-    fromName: 'Admin',
-    fromAddress: 'admin@example.com',
-    logMockCredentials: true, // Optional
-  },
-  // ...
+import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
+import { nodemailerAdapter } from '@payloadcms/email-nodemailer'
+import nodemailerSendgrid from 'nodemailer-sendgrid'
+
+
+export default buildConfig({
+  email: nodemailerAdapter({
+    defaultFromAddress: 'info@payloadcms.com',
+    defaultFromName: 'Payload',
+    transportOptions: nodemailerSendgrid({
+      apiKey: process.env.SENDGRID_API_KEY,
+    }),
+  }),
 })
 ```
 
-**Console output when starting payload with a mock email instance and logMockCredentials: true**
+During development, if you pass nothing to `nodemailerAdapter`, it will use the [ethereal.email](https://ethereal.email) service.
 
-```
-[06:37:21] INFO  (payload): Starting Payload...
-[06:37:22] INFO  (payload): Payload Demo Initialized
-[06:37:22] INFO  (payload): listening on 3000...
-[06:37:22] INFO  (payload): Connected to MongoDB server successfully!
-[06:37:23] INFO  (payload): E-mail configured with mock configuration
-[06:37:23] INFO  (payload): Log into mock email provider at https://ethereal.email
-[06:37:23] INFO  (payload): Mock email account username: hhav5jw7doo4euev@ethereal.email
-[06:37:23] INFO  (payload): Mock email account password: VNdGcvDZeyEhtuPBqf
+This will log the ethereal.email details to console on startup.
+
+```ts
+import { nodemailerAdapter } from '@payloadcms/email-nodemailer'
+
+export default buildConfig({
+  email: nodemailerAdapter(),
+})
 ```
 
-The mock email handler is used when payload is started with neither `transport` or `transportOptions` to know how to deliver email.
+## Resend Configuration
 
-<Banner type="warning">
-  The randomly generated email account username and password will be different each time the Payload
-  server starts.
-</Banner>
+The Resend adapter requires an API key to be passed in the options. This can be found in the Resend dashboard. This is the preferred package if you are deploying on Vercel because this is much more lightweight than the Nodemailer adapter.
 
-### Using multiple mail providers
+| Option | Description                         |
+| ------ | ----------------------------------- |
+| apiKey | The API key for the Resend service. |
+
+```ts
+import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
+import { resendAdapter } from '@payloadcms/email-resend'
+
+export default buildConfig({
+  email: resendAdapter({
+    defaultFromAddress: 'dev@payloadcms.com',
+    defaultFromName: 'Payload CMS',
+    apiKey: process.env.RESEND_API_KEY || '',
+  }),
+})
+```
+
+## Sending Mail
+
+With a working transport you can call it anywhere you have access to Payload by calling `payload.sendEmail(message)`. The `message` will contain the `to`, `subject` and `html` or `text` for the email being sent. Other options are also available and can be seen in the sendEmail args. Support for these will depend on the adapter being used.
+
+```ts
+// Example of sending an email
+const email = await payload.sendEmail({
+  to: 'test@example.com',
+  subject: 'This is a test email',
+  text: 'This is my message body',
+})
+```
+
+## Using multiple mail providers
 
 Payload supports the use of a single transporter of email, but there is nothing stopping you from having more. Consider a use case where sending bulk email is handled differently than transactional email and could be done using a [hook](/docs/hooks/overview).

docs/examples/overview.mdx

@@ -0,0 +1,40 @@
+---
+title: Examples
+label: Overview
+order: 10
+desc:
+keywords: example, examples, starter, boilerplate, template, templates
+---
+
+Payload provides a vast array of examples to help you get started with your project no matter what you are working on. These examples are designed to be easy to get up and running, and to be easy to understand. They showcase nothing more than the specific features being demonstrated so you can easily decipher what is going on.
+
+Examples are changing every day, so be sure to check back often to see what new examples have been added. If you have a specific example you would like to see, please feel free to start a new [Discussion](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/discussions) or open a new [PR](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/pulls) to add it yourself.
+
+- [Auth](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/examples/auth)
+- [Custom Server](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/examples/custom-server)
+- [Draft Preview](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/examples/draft-preview)
+- [Email](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/examples/email)
+- [Form Builder](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/examples/form-builder)
+- [Hierarchy](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/examples/hierarchy)
+- [Live Preview](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/examples/live-preview)
+- [Multi-tenant](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/examples/multi-tenant)
+- [Nested Docs](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/examples/nested-docs)
+- [Redirects](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/examples/redirects)
+- [Tailwind / Shadcn-ui](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/examples/tailwind-shadcn-ui)
+- [Tests](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/examples/testing)
+- [Virtual Fields](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/examples/virtual-fields)
+- [White-label Admin UI](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/examples/whitelabel)
+
+When necessary, some examples include a front-end. Examples that require a front-end share this folder structure:
+
+```plaintext
+example/
+├── payload/
+├── next-app/
+├── next-pages/
+├── react-router/
+├── vue/
+├── svelte/
+```
+
+Where `payload` is your Payload project, and the other directories are dedicated to their respective front-end framework. We are adding new examples every day, so if your framework of choice is not yet supported in any particular example, please feel free to start a new [Discussion](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/discussions) or open a new [PR](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/pulls) to add it yourself.

docs/fields/array.mdx

@@ -2,68 +2,96 @@
 title: Array Field
 label: Array
 order: 20
-desc: Array fields are intended for sets of repeating fields, that you define. Learn how to use array fields, see examples and options.
-keywords: array, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, express
+desc: Array Fields are intended for sets of repeating fields, that you define. Learn how to use Array Fields, see examples and options.
+keywords: array, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
 ---
 
-<Banner>
-  The Array field type is used when you need to have a set of "repeating" fields. It stores an array
-  of objects containing the fields that you define. Its uses can be simple or highly complex.
-</Banner>
+The Array Field is used when you need to have a set of "repeating" [Fields](./overview). It stores an array of objects containing fields that you define. These fields can be of any type, including other arrays to achieve infinitely nested structures.
 
-<LightDarkImage
-  srcLight="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/array.png"
-  srcDark="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/array-dark.png"
-  alt="Array field with two Rows in Payload admin panel"
-  caption="Admin panel screenshot of an Array field with two Rows"
-/>
-
-**Example uses:**
+Arrays are useful for many different types of content from simple to complex, such as:
 
 - A "slider" with an image ([upload field](/docs/fields/upload)) and a caption ([text field](/docs/fields/text))
 - Navigational structures where editors can specify nav items containing pages ([relationship field](/docs/fields/relationship)), an "open in new tab" [checkbox field](/docs/fields/checkbox)
 - Event agenda "timeslots" where you need to specify start & end time ([date field](/docs/fields/date)), label ([text field](/docs/fields/text)), and Learn More page [relationship](/docs/fields/relationship)
 
-### Config
+<LightDarkImage
+  srcLight="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/array.png"
+  srcDark="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/array-dark.png"
+  alt="Array field with two Rows in Payload Admin Panel"
+  caption="Admin Panel screenshot of an Array field with two Rows"
+/>
 
-| Option              | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        |
-| ------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`name`** \*       | To be used as the property name when stored and retrieved from the database. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-names)                                                                                                                                                             |
-| **`label`**         | Text used as the heading in the Admin panel or an object with keys for each language. Auto-generated from name if not defined.                                                                                                                                                     |
-| **`fields`** \*     | Array of field types to correspond to each row of the Array.                                                                                                                                                                                                                       |
-| **`validate`**      | Provide a custom validation function that will be executed on both the Admin panel and the backend. [More](/docs/fields/overview#validation)                                                                                                                                       |
-| **`minRows`**       | A number for the fewest allowed items during validation when a value is present.                                                                                                                                                                                                   |
-| **`maxRows`**       | A number for the most allowed items during validation when a value is present.                                                                                                                                                                                                     |
-| **`saveToJWT`**     | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/config), include its data in the user JWT.                                                                                                                                      |
-| **`hooks`**         | Provide field-based hooks to control logic for this field. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-hooks)                                                                                                                                                                         |
-| **`access`**        | Provide field-based access control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-access-control)                                                                                                                            |
-| **`hidden`**        | Restrict this field's visibility from all APIs entirely. Will still be saved to the database, but will not appear in any API or the Admin panel.                                                                                                                                   |
-| **`defaultValue`**  | Provide an array of row data to be used for this field's default value. [More](/docs/fields/overview#default-values)                                                                                                                                                               |
-| **`localized`**     | Enable localization for this field. Requires [localization to be enabled](/docs/configuration/localization) in the Base config. If enabled, a separate, localized set of all data within this Array will be kept, so there is no need to specify each nested field as `localized`. |
-| **`required`**      | Require this field to have a value.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                |
-| **`labels`**        | Customize the row labels appearing in the Admin dashboard.                                                                                                                                                                                                                         |
-| **`admin`**         | Admin-specific configuration. See below for [more detail](#admin-config).                                                                                                                                                                                                          |
-| **`custom`**        | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                                                                                                                                                          |
-| **`interfaceName`** | Create a top level, reusable [Typescript interface](/docs/typescript/generating-types#custom-field-interfaces) & [GraphQL type](/docs/graphql/graphql-schema#custom-field-schemas).                                                                                                |
-| **`dbName`**        | Custom table name for the field when using SQL database adapter ([Postgres](/docs/database/postgres)). Auto-generated from name if not defined.                                                                                                                                    |
+To create an Array Field, set the `type` to `array` in your [Field Config](./overview):
+
+```ts
+import type { Field } from 'payload/types'
+
+export const MyArrayField: Field = {
+  // ...
+  // highlight-start
+  type: 'array',
+  fields: [
+    // ...
+  ],
+  // highlight-end
+}
+```
+
+## Config Options
+
+| Option                 | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        |
+| ---------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`name`** \*          | To be used as the property name when stored and retrieved from the database. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-names)                                                                                                                                                             |
+| **`label`**            | Text used as the heading in the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview) or an object with keys for each language. Auto-generated from name if not defined.                                                                                                                                                     |
+| **`fields`** \*        | Array of field types to correspond to each row of the Array.                                                                                                                                                                                                                       |
+| **`validate`**         | Provide a custom validation function that will be executed on both the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview) and the backend. [More](/docs/fields/overview#validation)                                                                                                                                       |
+| **`minRows`**          | A number for the fewest allowed items during validation when a value is present.                                                                                                                                                                                                   |
+| **`maxRows`**          | A number for the most allowed items during validation when a value is present.                                                                                                                                                                                                     |
+| **`saveToJWT`**        | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/overview), include its data in the user JWT.                                                                                                                                      |
+| **`hooks`**            | Provide Field Hooks to control logic for this field. [More details](../hooks/fields).                                                                                                                                                                         |
+| **`access`**           | Provide Field Access Control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More details](../access-control/fields).                                                                                                                                                  |
+| **`hidden`**           | Restrict this field's visibility from all APIs entirely. Will still be saved to the database, but will not appear in any API or the Admin Panel.                                                                                                                                   |
+| **`defaultValue`**     | Provide an array of row data to be used for this field's default value. [More](/docs/fields/overview#default-values)                                                                                                                                                               |
+| **`localized`**        | Enable localization for this field. Requires [localization to be enabled](/docs/configuration/localization) in the Base config. If enabled, a separate, localized set of all data within this Array will be kept, so there is no need to specify each nested field as `localized`. |
+| **`required`**         | Require this field to have a value.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                |
+| **`labels`**           | Customize the row labels appearing in the Admin dashboard.                                                                                                                                                                                                                         |
+| **`admin`**            | Admin-specific configuration. [More details](#admin-options).                                                                                                                                                                                                          |
+| **`custom`**           | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                                                                                                                                                          |
+| **`interfaceName`**    | Create a top level, reusable [Typescript interface](/docs/typescript/generating-types#custom-field-interfaces) & [GraphQL type](/docs/graphql/graphql-schema#custom-field-schemas).                                                                                                |
+| **`dbName`**           | Custom table name for the field when using SQL Database Adapter ([Postgres](/docs/database/postgres)). Auto-generated from name if not defined.                                                                                                                                    |
+| **`typescriptSchema`** | Override field type generation with providing a JSON schema                                                                                                                                                                                                                        |
 
 _\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 
-### Admin Config
+## Admin Options
 
-In addition to the default [field admin config](/docs/fields/overview#admin-config), you can adjust the following properties:
+The customize the appearance and behavior of the Array Field in the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview), you can use the `admin` option:
+
+```ts
+import type { Field } from 'payload/types'
+
+export const MyArrayField: Field = {
+  // ...
+  admin: { // highlight-line
+    // ...
+  },
+}
+```
+
+The Array Field inherits all of the default options from the base [Field Admin Config](../admin/fields#admin-options), plus the following additional options:
 
 | Option                    | Description                                                                                                          |
 | ------------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
 | **`initCollapsed`**       | Set the initial collapsed state                                                                                      |
 | **`components.RowLabel`** | Function or React component to be rendered as the label on the array row. Receives `({ data, index, path })` as args |
+| **`isSortable`**          | Disable order sorting by setting this value to `false`                                                               |
 
-### Example
+## Example
 
-`collections/ExampleCollection.ts`
+In this example, we have an Array Field called `slider` that contains a set of fields for a simple image slider. Each row in the array has a `title`, `image`, and `caption`. We also customize the row label to display the title if it exists, or a default label if it doesn't.
 
 ```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
 
 export const ExampleCollection: CollectionConfig = {
   slug: 'example-collection',

docs/fields/blocks.mdx

@@ -2,62 +2,88 @@
 title: Blocks Field
 label: Blocks
 order: 30
-desc: The Blocks field type is a great layout build and can be used to construct any flexible content model. Learn how to use Block fields, see examples and options.
-keywords: blocks, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, express
+desc: The Blocks Field is a great layout build and can be used to construct any flexible content model. Learn how to use Block Fields, see examples and options.
+keywords: blocks, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
 ---
 
-<Banner>
-  The Blocks field type is <strong>incredibly powerful</strong> and can be used as a{' '}
-  <em>layout builder</em> as well as to define any other flexible content model you can think of. It
-  stores an array of objects, where each object must match the shape of one of your provided block
-  configs.
-</Banner>
+The Blocks Field is <strong>incredibly powerful</strong>, storing an array of objects based on the fields that your define, where each item in the array is a "block" with its own unique schema.
 
-<LightDarkImage
-  srcLight="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/blocks.png"
-  srcDark="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/blocks-dark.png"
-  alt="Admin panel screenshot of add Blocks drawer view"
-  caption="Admin panel screenshot of add Blocks drawer view"
-/>
-
-**Example uses:**
+Blocks are a great way to create a flexible content model that can be used to build a wide variety of content types, including:
 
 - A layout builder tool that grants editors to design highly customizable page or post layouts. Blocks could include configs such as `Quote`, `CallToAction`, `Slider`, `Content`, `Gallery`, or others.
 - A form builder tool where available block configs might be `Text`, `Select`, or `Checkbox`.
 - Virtual event agenda "timeslots" where a timeslot could either be a `Break`, a `Presentation`, or a `BreakoutSession`.
 
-### Field config
+<LightDarkImage
+  srcLight="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/blocks.png"
+  srcDark="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/blocks-dark.png"
+  alt="Admin Panel screenshot of add Blocks drawer view"
+  caption="Admin Panel screenshot of add Blocks drawer view"
+/>
 
-| Option             | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        |
-| ------------------ | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`name`** \*      | To be used as the property name when stored and retrieved from the database. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-names)                                                                                                                                                             |
-| **`label`**        | Text used as the heading in the Admin panel or an object with keys for each language. Auto-generated from name if not defined.                                                                                                                                                     |
-| **`blocks`** \*    | Array of [block configs](/docs/fields/blocks#block-configs) to be made available to this field.                                                                                                                                                                                    |
-| **`validate`**     | Provide a custom validation function that will be executed on both the Admin panel and the backend. [More](/docs/fields/overview#validation)                                                                                                                                       |
-| **`minRows`**      | A number for the fewest allowed items during validation when a value is present.                                                                                                                                                                                                   |
-| **`maxRows`**      | A number for the most allowed items during validation when a value is present.                                                                                                                                                                                                     |
-| **`saveToJWT`**    | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/config), include its data in the user JWT.                                                                                                                                      |
-| **`hooks`**        | Provide field-level hooks to control logic for this field. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-hooks)                                                                                                                                                                         |
-| **`access`**       | Provide field-level access control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-access-control)                                                                                                                            |
-| **`hidden`**       | Restrict this field's visibility from all APIs entirely. Will still be saved to the database, but will not appear in any API response or the Admin panel.                                                                                                                          |
-| **`defaultValue`** | Provide an array of block data to be used for this field's default value. [More](/docs/fields/overview#default-values)                                                                                                                                                             |
-| **`localized`**    | Enable localization for this field. Requires [localization to be enabled](/docs/configuration/localization) in the Base config. If enabled, a separate, localized set of all data within this field will be kept, so there is no need to specify each nested field as `localized`. |
-| **`unique`**       | Enforce that each entry in the Collection has a unique value for this field.                                                                                                                                                                                                       |
-| **`labels`**       | Customize the block row labels appearing in the Admin dashboard.                                                                                                                                                                                                                   |
-| **`admin`**        | Admin-specific configuration. See below for [more detail](#admin-config).                                                                                                                                                                                                          |
-| **`custom`**       | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                                                                                                                                                          |
+To add a Blocks Field, set the `type` to `blocks` in your [Field Config](./overview):
+
+```ts
+import type { Field } from 'payload/types'
+
+export const MyBlocksField: Field = {
+  // ...
+  // highlight-start
+  type: 'blocks',
+  blocks: [
+    // ...
+  ],
+  // highlight-end
+}
+```
+
+## Config Options
+
+| Option                 | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        |
+| ---------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`name`** \*          | To be used as the property name when stored and retrieved from the database. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-names)                                                                                                                                                             |
+| **`label`**            | Text used as the heading in the Admin Panel or an object with keys for each language. Auto-generated from name if not defined.                                                                                                                                                     |
+| **`blocks`** \*        | Array of [block configs](/docs/fields/blocks#block-configs) to be made available to this field.                                                                                                                                                                                    |
+| **`validate`**         | Provide a custom validation function that will be executed on both the Admin Panel and the backend. [More](/docs/fields/overview#validation)                                                                                                                                       |
+| **`minRows`**          | A number for the fewest allowed items during validation when a value is present.                                                                                                                                                                                                   |
+| **`maxRows`**          | A number for the most allowed items during validation when a value is present.                                                                                                                                                                                                     |
+| **`saveToJWT`**        | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/overview), include its data in the user JWT.                                                                                                                                      |
+| **`hooks`**            | Provide Field Hooks to control logic for this field. [More details](../hooks/fields).                                                                                                                                                                         |
+| **`access`**           | Provide Field Access Control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More details](../access-control/fields).                                                                                                                                                  |
+| **`hidden`**           | Restrict this field's visibility from all APIs entirely. Will still be saved to the database, but will not appear in any API response or the Admin Panel.                                                                                                                          |
+| **`defaultValue`**     | Provide an array of block data to be used for this field's default value. [More](/docs/fields/overview#default-values)                                                                                                                                                             |
+| **`localized`**        | Enable localization for this field. Requires [localization to be enabled](/docs/configuration/localization) in the Base config. If enabled, a separate, localized set of all data within this field will be kept, so there is no need to specify each nested field as `localized`. |
+| **`unique`**           | Enforce that each entry in the Collection has a unique value for this field.                                                                                                                                                                                                       |
+| **`labels`**           | Customize the block row labels appearing in the Admin dashboard.                                                                                                                                                                                                                   |
+| **`admin`**            | Admin-specific configuration. [More details](#admin-options).                                                                                                                                                                                                          |
+| **`custom`**           | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                                                                                                                                                          |
+| **`typescriptSchema`** | Override field type generation with providing a JSON schema                                                                                                                                                                                                                        |
 
 _\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 
-### Admin Config
+## Admin Options
 
-In addition to the default [field admin config](/docs/fields/overview#admin-config), you can adjust the following properties:
+The customize the appearance and behavior of the Blocks Field in the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview), you can use the `admin` option:
 
-| Option              | Description                     |
-| ------------------- | ------------------------------- |
-| **`initCollapsed`** | Set the initial collapsed state |
+```ts
+import type { Field } from 'payload/types'
 
-### Block configs
+export const MyBlocksField: Field = {
+  // ...
+  admin: { // highlight-line
+    // ...
+  },
+}
+```
+
+The Blocks Field inherits all of the default options from the base [Field Admin Config](../admin/fields#admin-options), plus the following additional options:
+
+| Option              | Description                        |
+| ------------------- | ---------------------------------- |
+| **`initCollapsed`**    | Set the initial collapsed state |
+| **`isSortable`**       | Disable order sorting by setting this value to `false` |
+
+## Block Configs
 
 Blocks are defined as separate configs of their own.
 
@@ -80,10 +106,10 @@ Blocks are defined as separate configs of their own.
 | **`imageAltText`**         | Customize this block's image thumbnail alt text.                                                                                                                                    |
 | **`interfaceName`**        | Create a top level, reusable [Typescript interface](/docs/typescript/generating-types#custom-field-interfaces) & [GraphQL type](/docs/graphql/graphql-schema#custom-field-schemas). |
 | **`graphQL.singularName`** | Text to use for the GraphQL schema name. Auto-generated from slug if not defined. NOTE: this is set for deprecation, prefer `interfaceName`.                                        |
-| **`dbName`**               | Custom table name for this block type when using SQL database adapter ([Postgres](/docs/database/postgres)). Auto-generated from slug if not defined.
+| **`dbName`**               | Custom table name for this block type when using SQL Database Adapter ([Postgres](/docs/database/postgres)). Auto-generated from slug if not defined.
 | **`custom`**               | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                                                           |
 
-#### Auto-generated data per block
+### Auto-generated data per block
 
 In addition to the field data that you define on each block, Payload will store two additional properties on each block:
 
@@ -93,14 +119,14 @@ The `blockType` is saved as the slug of the block that has been selected.
 
 **`blockName`**
 
-The Admin panel provides each block with a `blockName` field which optionally allows editors to label their blocks for better editability and readability.
+The Admin Panel provides each block with a `blockName` field which optionally allows editors to label their blocks for better editability and readability.
 
-### Example
+## Example
 
 `collections/ExampleCollection.js`
 
 ```ts
-import { Block, CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
+import { Block, CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
 
 const QuoteBlock: Block = {
   slug: 'Quote', // required
@@ -138,10 +164,10 @@ export const ExampleCollection: CollectionConfig = {
 }
 ```
 
-### TypeScript
+## TypeScript
 
 As you build your own Block configs, you might want to store them in separate files but retain typing accordingly. To do so, you can import and use Payload's `Block` type:
 
 ```ts
-import type { Block } from 'payload/types'
+import type { Block } from 'payload'
 ```

docs/fields/checkbox.mdx

@@ -3,44 +3,56 @@ title: Checkbox Field
 label: Checkbox
 order: 40
 desc: Checkbox field types allow the developer to save a boolean value in the database. Learn how to use Checkbox fields, see examples and options.
-keywords: checkbox, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, express
+keywords: checkbox, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
 ---
 
-<Banner>The Checkbox field type saves a boolean in the database.</Banner>
+The Checkbox Field saves a boolean in the database.
 
 <LightDarkImage
   srcLight="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/checkbox.png"
   srcDark="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/checkbox-dark.png"
-  alt="Checkbox field with text field in Payload admin panel"
-  caption="Admin panel screenshot of Checkbox field with Text field below"
+  alt="Checkbox field with text field in Payload Admin Panel"
+  caption="Admin Panel screenshot of Checkbox field with Text field below"
 />
 
-### Config
+To add a Checkbox Field, set the `type` to `checkbox` in your [Field Config](./overview):
 
-| Option             | Description                                                                                                                                                                 |
-| ------------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`name`** \*      | To be used as the property name when stored and retrieved from the database. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-names)                                                      |
-| **`label`**        | Text used as a field label in the Admin panel or an object with keys for each language.                                                                                     |
-| **`validate`**     | Provide a custom validation function that will be executed on both the Admin panel and the backend. [More](/docs/fields/overview#validation)                                |
-| **`index`**        | Build an [index](/docs/database/overview) for this field to produce faster queries. Set this field to `true` if your users will perform queries on this field's data often. |
-| **`saveToJWT`**    | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/config), include its data in the user JWT.                               |
-| **`hooks`**        | Provide field-based hooks to control logic for this field. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-hooks)                                                                  |
-| **`access`**       | Provide field-based access control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-access-control)                     |
-| **`hidden`**       | Restrict this field's visibility from all APIs entirely. Will still be saved to the database, but will not appear in any API or the Admin panel.                            |
-| **`defaultValue`** | Provide data to be used for this field's default value, will default to false if field is also `required`. [More](/docs/fields/overview#default-values)                     |
-| **`localized`**    | Enable localization for this field. Requires [localization to be enabled](/docs/configuration/localization) in the Base config.                                             |
-| **`required`**     | Require this field to have a value.                                                                                                                                         |
-| **`admin`**        | Admin-specific configuration. See the [default field admin config](/docs/fields/overview#admin-config) for more details.                                                    |
-| **`custom`**       | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                                                   |
+```ts
+import type { Field } from 'payload/types'
+
+export const MyCheckboxField: Field = {
+  // ...
+  type: 'checkbox', // highlight-line
+}
+```
+
+## Config Options
+
+| Option                 | Description                                                                                                                                                                 |
+| ---------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`name`** \*          | To be used as the property name when stored and retrieved from the database. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-names)                                                      |
+| **`label`**            | Text used as a field label in the Admin Panel or an object with keys for each language.                                                                                     |
+| **`validate`**         | Provide a custom validation function that will be executed on both the Admin Panel and the backend. [More](/docs/fields/overview#validation)                                |
+| **`index`**            | Build an [index](/docs/database/overview) for this field to produce faster queries. Set this field to `true` if your users will perform queries on this field's data often. |
+| **`saveToJWT`**        | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/overview), include its data in the user JWT.                               |
+| **`hooks`**            | Provide Field Hooks to control logic for this field. [More details](../hooks/fields).                                                                                                                                                                         |
+| **`access`**           | Provide Field Access Control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More details](../access-control/fields).                                                                                                                                                  |
+| **`hidden`**           | Restrict this field's visibility from all APIs entirely. Will still be saved to the database, but will not appear in any API or the Admin Panel.                            |
+| **`defaultValue`**     | Provide data to be used for this field's default value, will default to false if field is also `required`. [More](/docs/fields/overview#default-values)                     |
+| **`localized`**        | Enable localization for this field. Requires [localization to be enabled](/docs/configuration/localization) in the Base config.                                             |
+| **`required`**         | Require this field to have a value.                                                                                                                                         |
+| **`admin`**            | Admin-specific configuration. [More details](../admin/fields#admin-options).                                                    |
+| **`custom`**           | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                                                   |
+| **`typescriptSchema`** | Override field type generation with providing a JSON schema                                                                                                                 |
 
 _\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 
-### Example
+## Example
 
-`collections/ExampleCollection.ts`
+Here is an example of a Checkbox Field in a Collection:
 
 ```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
 
 export const ExampleCollection: CollectionConfig = {
   slug: 'example-collection',

docs/fields/code.mdx

@@ -4,61 +4,81 @@ label: Code
 order: 50
 desc: The Code field type will store any string in the Database. Learn how to use Code fields, see examples and options.
 
-keywords: code, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, express
+keywords: code, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
 ---
 
-<Banner>
-  The Code field type saves a string in the database, but provides the Admin panel with a code
-  editor styled interface.
-</Banner>
+The Code Field saves a string in the database, but provides the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview) with a code editor styled interface.
 
 <LightDarkImage
   srcLight="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/code.png"
   srcDark="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/code-dark.png"
-  alt="Shows a Code field in the Payload admin panel"
-  caption="Admin panel screenshot of a Code field"
+  alt="Shows a Code field in the Payload Admin Panel"
+  caption="This field is using the `monaco-react` editor syntax highlighting."
 />
 
-This field uses the `monaco-react` editor syntax highlighting.
+To add a Code Field, set the `type` to `code` in your [Field Config](./overview):
 
-### Config
+```ts
+import type { Field } from 'payload/types'
 
-| Option             | Description                                                                                                                                                                 |
-| ------------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`name`** \*      | To be used as the property name when stored and retrieved from the database. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-names)                                                      |
-| **`label`**        | Text used as a field label in the Admin panel or an object with keys for each language.                                                                                     |
-| **`unique`**       | Enforce that each entry in the Collection has a unique value for this field.                                                                                                |
-| **`index`**        | Build an [index](/docs/database#overview) for this field to produce faster queries. Set this field to `true` if your users will perform queries on this field's data often. |
-| **`minLength`**    | Used by the default validation function to ensure values are of a minimum character length.                                                                                 |
-| **`maxLength`**    | Used by the default validation function to ensure values are of a maximum character length.                                                                                 |
-| **`validate`**     | Provide a custom validation function that will be executed on both the Admin panel and the backend. [More](/docs/fields/overview#validation)                                |
-| **`saveToJWT`**    | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/config), include its data in the user JWT.                               |
-| **`hooks`**        | Provide field-based hooks to control logic for this field. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-hooks)                                                                  |
-| **`access`**       | Provide field-based access control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-access-control)                     |
-| **`hidden`**       | Restrict this field's visibility from all APIs entirely. Will still be saved to the database, but will not appear in any API or the Admin panel.                            |
-| **`defaultValue`** | Provide data to be used for this field's default value. [More](/docs/fields/overview#default-values)                                                                        |
-| **`localized`**    | Enable localization for this field. Requires [localization to be enabled](/docs/configuration/localization) in the Base config.                                             |
-| **`required`**     | Require this field to have a value.                                                                                                                                         |
-| **`admin`**        | Admin-specific configuration. See below for [more detail](#admin-config).                                                                                                   |
-| **`custom`**       | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                                                   |
+export const MyBlocksField: Field = {
+  // ...
+  type: 'code', // highlight-line
+}
+```
+
+## Config Options
+
+| Option                 | Description                                                                                                                                                                 |
+| ---------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`name`** \*          | To be used as the property name when stored and retrieved from the database. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-names)                                                      |
+| **`label`**            | Text used as a field label in the Admin Panel or an object with keys for each language.                                                                                     |
+| **`unique`**           | Enforce that each entry in the Collection has a unique value for this field.                                                                                                |
+| **`index`**            | Build an [index](/docs/database#overview) for this field to produce faster queries. Set this field to `true` if your users will perform queries on this field's data often. |
+| **`minLength`**        | Used by the default validation function to ensure values are of a minimum character length.                                                                                 |
+| **`maxLength`**        | Used by the default validation function to ensure values are of a maximum character length.                                                                                 |
+| **`validate`**         | Provide a custom validation function that will be executed on both the Admin Panel and the backend. [More](/docs/fields/overview#validation)                                |
+| **`saveToJWT`**        | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/overview), include its data in the user JWT.                               |
+| **`hooks`**            | Provide Field Hooks to control logic for this field. [More details](../hooks/fields).                                                                                                                                                                         |
+| **`access`**           | Provide Field Access Control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More details](../access-control/fields).                                                                                                                                                  |
+| **`hidden`**           | Restrict this field's visibility from all APIs entirely. Will still be saved to the database, but will not appear in any API or the Admin Panel.                            |
+| **`defaultValue`**     | Provide data to be used for this field's default value. [More](/docs/fields/overview#default-values)                                                                        |
+| **`localized`**        | Enable localization for this field. Requires [localization to be enabled](/docs/configuration/localization) in the Base config.                                             |
+| **`required`**         | Require this field to have a value.                                                                                                                                         |
+| **`admin`**            | Admin-specific configuration. See below for [more detail](#admin-options).                                                                                                   |
+| **`custom`**           | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                                                   |
+| **`typescriptSchema`** | Override field type generation with providing a JSON schema                                                                                                                 |
 
 _\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 
-### Admin Config
+## Admin Options
 
-In addition to the default [field admin config](/docs/fields/overview#admin-config), you can adjust the following properties:
+The customize the appearance and behavior of the Code Field in the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview), you can use the `admin` option:
+
+```ts
+import type { Field } from 'payload/types'
+
+export const MyCodeField: Field = {
+  // ...
+  admin: { // highlight-line
+    // ...
+  },
+}
+```
+
+The Code Field inherits all of the default options from the base [Field Admin Config](../admin/fields#admin-options), plus the following additional options:
 
 | Option              | Description                                                                                                                                                                     |
 | ------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
 | **`language`**      | This property can be set to any language listed [here](https://github.com/microsoft/monaco-editor/tree/main/src/basic-languages).                                               |
 | **`editorOptions`** | Options that can be passed to the monaco editor, [view the full list](https://microsoft.github.io/monaco-editor/typedoc/interfaces/editor.IDiffEditorConstructionOptions.html). |
 
-### Example
+## Example
 
 `collections/ExampleCollection.ts
 
 ```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
 
 export const ExampleCollection: CollectionConfig = {
   slug: 'example-collection',

docs/fields/collapsible.mdx

@@ -3,46 +3,72 @@ title: Collapsible Field
 label: Collapsible
 order: 60
 desc: With the Collapsible field, you can place fields within a collapsible layout component that can be collapsed / expanded.
-keywords: row, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, express
+keywords: row, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
 ---
 
-<Banner>
-  The Collapsible field is presentational-only and only affects the Admin panel. By using it, you
-  can place fields within a nice layout component that can be collapsed / expanded.
-</Banner>
+The Collapsible Field is presentational-only and only affects the Admin Panel. By using it, you can place fields within a nice layout component that can be collapsed / expanded.
 
 <LightDarkImage
   srcLight="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/collapsible.png"
   srcDark="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/collapsible-dark.png"
-  alt="Shows a Collapsible field in the Payload admin panel"
-  caption="Admin panel screenshot of a Collapsible field"
+  alt="Shows a Collapsible field in the Payload Admin Panel"
+  caption="Admin Panel screenshot of a Collapsible field"
 />
 
-### Config
+To add a Collapsible Field, set the `type` to `collapsible` in your [Field Config](./overview):
+
+```ts
+import type { Field } from 'payload/types'
+
+export const MyCollapsibleField: Field = {
+  // ...
+  // highlight-start
+  type: 'collapsible',
+  fields: [
+    // ...
+  ],
+  // highlight-end
+}
+```
+
+## Config Options
 
 | Option          | Description                                                                                                                                                                  |
 | --------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
 | **`label`** \*  | A label to render within the header of the collapsible component. This can be a string, function or react component. Function/components receive `({ data, path })` as args. |
 | **`fields`** \* | Array of field types to nest within this Collapsible.                                                                                                                        |
-| **`admin`**     | Admin-specific configuration. See below for [more detail](#admin-config).                                                                                                    |
+| **`admin`**     | Admin-specific configuration. [More details](#admin-options).                                                                                                    |
 | **`custom`**    | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                                                    |
 
 _\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 
-### Admin Config
+## Admin Options
 
-In addition to the default [field admin config](/docs/fields/overview#admin-config), you can adjust the following properties:
+The customize the appearance and behavior of the Collapsible Field in the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview), you can use the `admin` option:
+
+```ts
+import type { Field } from 'payload/types'
+
+export const MyCollapsibleField: Field = {
+  // ...
+  admin: { // highlight-line
+    // ...
+  },
+}
+```
+
+The Collapsible Field inherits all of the default options from the base [Field Admin Config](../admin/fields#admin-options), plus the following additional options:
 
 | Option              | Description                     |
 | ------------------- | ------------------------------- |
 | **`initCollapsed`** | Set the initial collapsed state |
 
-### Example
+## Example
 
 `collections/ExampleCollection.ts`
 
 ```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
 
 export const ExampleCollection: CollectionConfig = {
   slug: 'example-collection',

docs/fields/date.mdx

@@ -3,46 +3,66 @@ title: Date Field
 label: Date
 order: 70
 desc: The Date field type stores a Date in the database. Learn how to use and customize the Date field, see examples and options.
-keywords: date, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, express
+keywords: date, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
 ---
 
-<Banner>
-  The Date field type saves a Date in the database and provides the Admin panel with a customizable
-  time picker interface.
-</Banner>
+The Date Field saves a Date in the database and provides the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview) with a customizable time picker interface.
 
 <LightDarkImage
   srcLight="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/date.png"
   srcDark="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/date-dark.png"
-  alt="Shows a Date field in the Payload admin panel"
-  caption="Admin panel screenshot of a Date field"
+  alt="Shows a Date field in the Payload Admin Panel"
+  caption="This field is using the `react-datepicker` component for UI."
 />
 
-This field uses [`react-datepicker`](https://www.npmjs.com/package/react-datepicker) for the Admin panel component.
+To add a Date Field, set the `type` to `date` in your [Field Config](./overview):
 
-### Config
+```ts
+import type { Field } from 'payload/types'
 
-| Option             | Description                                                                                                                                                                 |
-| ------------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`name`** \*      | To be used as the property name when stored and retrieved from the database. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-names)                                                      |
-| **`label`**        | Text used as a field label in the Admin panel or an object with keys for each language.                                                                                     |
-| **`index`**        | Build an [index](/docs/database/overview) for this field to produce faster queries. Set this field to `true` if your users will perform queries on this field's data often. |
-| **`validate`**     | Provide a custom validation function that will be executed on both the Admin panel and the backend. [More](/docs/fields/overview#validation)                                |
-| **`saveToJWT`**    | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/config), include its data in the user JWT.                               |
-| **`hooks`**        | Provide field-based hooks to control logic for this field. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-hooks)                                                                  |
-| **`access`**       | Provide field-based access control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-access-control)                     |
-| **`hidden`**       | Restrict this field's visibility from all APIs entirely. Will still be saved to the database, but will not appear in any API or the Admin panel.                            |
-| **`defaultValue`** | Provide data to be used for this field's default value. [More](/docs/fields/overview#default-values)                                                                        |
-| **`localized`**    | Enable localization for this field. Requires [localization to be enabled](/docs/configuration/localization) in the Base config.                                             |
-| **`required`**     | Require this field to have a value.                                                                                                                                         |
-| **`admin`**        | Admin-specific configuration. See below for [more detail](#admin-config).                                                                                                   |
-| **`custom`**       | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                                                   |
+export const MyDateField: Field = {
+  // ...
+  type: 'date', // highlight-line
+}
+```
+
+## Config Options
+
+| Option                 | Description                                                                                                                                                                 |
+| ---------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`name`** \*          | To be used as the property name when stored and retrieved from the database. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-names)                                                      |
+| **`label`**            | Text used as a field label in the Admin Panel or an object with keys for each language.                                                                                     |
+| **`index`**            | Build an [index](/docs/database/overview) for this field to produce faster queries. Set this field to `true` if your users will perform queries on this field's data often. |
+| **`validate`**         | Provide a custom validation function that will be executed on both the Admin Panel and the backend. [More](/docs/fields/overview#validation)                                |
+| **`saveToJWT`**        | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/overview), include its data in the user JWT.                               |
+| **`hooks`**            | Provide Field Hooks to control logic for this field. [More details](../hooks/fields).                                                                                                                                                                         |
+| **`access`**           | Provide Field Access Control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More details](../access-control/fields).                                                                                                                                                  |
+| **`hidden`**           | Restrict this field's visibility from all APIs entirely. Will still be saved to the database, but will not appear in any API or the Admin Panel.                            |
+| **`defaultValue`**     | Provide data to be used for this field's default value. [More](/docs/fields/overview#default-values)                                                                        |
+| **`localized`**        | Enable localization for this field. Requires [localization to be enabled](/docs/configuration/localization) in the Base config.                                             |
+| **`required`**         | Require this field to have a value.                                                                                                                                         |
+| **`admin`**            | Admin-specific configuration. [More details](#admin-options).                                                                                                   |
+| **`custom`**           | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                                                   |
+| **`typescriptSchema`** | Override field type generation with providing a JSON schema                                                                                                                 |
 
 _\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 
-### Admin Config
+## Admin Options
 
-In addition to the default [field admin config](/docs/fields/overview#admin-config), you can customize the following fields that will adjust how the component displays in the admin panel via the `date` property.
+The customize the appearance and behavior of the Date Field in the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview), you can use the `admin` option:
+
+```ts
+import type { Field } from 'payload/types'
+
+export const MyDateField: Field = {
+  // ...
+  admin: { // highlight-line
+    // ...
+  },
+}
+```
+
+The Date Field inherits all of the default options from the base [Field Admin Config](../admin/fields#admin-options), plus the following additional options:
 
 | Property                       | Description                                                                                                                            |
 | ------------------------------ | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
@@ -61,7 +81,7 @@ In addition to the default [field admin config](/docs/fields/overview#admin-conf
 
 _\* This property is passed directly to [react-datepicker](https://github.com/Hacker0x01/react-datepicker/blob/master/docs/datepicker.md). ._
 
-#### Display Format and Picker Appearance
+### Display Format and Picker Appearance
 
 These properties only affect how the date is displayed in the UI. The full date is always stored in the format `YYYY-MM-DDTHH:mm:ss.SSSZ` (e.g. `1999-01-01T8:00:00.000+05:00`).
 
@@ -71,12 +91,12 @@ These properties only affect how the date is displayed in the UI. The full date
 
 When only `pickerAppearance` is set, an equivalent format will be rendered in the date field cell. To overwrite this format, set `displayFormat`.
 
-### Example
+## Example
 
 `collections/ExampleCollection.ts`
 
 ```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
 
 export const ExampleCollection: CollectionConfig = {
   slug: 'example-collection',

docs/fields/email.mdx

@@ -3,57 +3,79 @@ title: Email Field
 label: Email
 order: 80
 desc: The Email field enforces that the value provided is a valid email address. Learn how to use Email fields, see examples and options.
-keywords: email, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, express
+keywords: email, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
 ---
 
-<Banner>The Email field enforces that the value provided is a valid email address.</Banner>
+The Email Field enforces that the value provided is a valid email address.
 
 <LightDarkImage
   srcLight="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/email.png"
   srcDark="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/email-dark.png"
-  alt="Shows an Email field in the Payload admin panel"
-  caption="Admin panel screenshot of an Email field"
+  alt="Shows an Email field in the Payload Admin Panel"
+  caption="Admin Panel screenshot of an Email field"
 />
 
-### Config
+To create an Email Field, set the `type` to `email` in your [Field Config](./overview):
 
-| Option             | Description                                                                                                                                                                 |
-| ------------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`name`** \*      | To be used as the property name when stored and retrieved from the database. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-names)                                                      |
-| **`label`**        | Text used as a field label in the Admin panel or an object with keys for each language.                                                                                     |
-| **`unique`**       | Enforce that each entry in the Collection has a unique value for this field.                                                                                                |
-| **`index`**        | Build an [index](/docs/database/overview) for this field to produce faster queries. Set this field to `true` if your users will perform queries on this field's data often. |
-| **`validate`**     | Provide a custom validation function that will be executed on both the Admin panel and the backend. [More](/docs/fields/overview#validation)                                |
-| **`saveToJWT`**    | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/config), include its data in the user JWT.                               |
-| **`hooks`**        | Provide field-based hooks to control logic for this field. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-hooks)                                                                  |
-| **`access`**       | Provide field-based access control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-access-control)                     |
-| **`hidden`**       | Restrict this field's visibility from all APIs entirely. Will still be saved to the database, but will not appear in any API or the Admin panel.                            |
-| **`defaultValue`** | Provide data to be used for this field's default value. [More](/docs/fields/overview#default-values)                                                                        |
-| **`localized`**    | Enable localization for this field. Requires [localization to be enabled](/docs/configuration/localization) in the Base config.                                             |
-| **`required`**     | Require this field to have a value.                                                                                                                                         |
-| **`admin`**        | Admin-specific configuration. See below for [more detail](#admin-config).                                                                                                   |
-| **`custom`**       | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                                                   |
+```ts
+import type { Field } from 'payload/types'
+
+export const MyEmailField: Field = {
+  // ...
+  type: 'email', // highlight-line
+}
+```
+
+## Config Options
+
+| Option                 | Description                                                                                                                                                                 |
+| ---------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`name`** \*          | To be used as the property name when stored and retrieved from the database. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-names)                                                      |
+| **`label`**            | Text used as a field label in the Admin Panel or an object with keys for each language.                                                                                     |
+| **`unique`**           | Enforce that each entry in the Collection has a unique value for this field.                                                                                                |
+| **`index`**            | Build an [index](/docs/database/overview) for this field to produce faster queries. Set this field to `true` if your users will perform queries on this field's data often. |
+| **`validate`**         | Provide a custom validation function that will be executed on both the Admin Panel and the backend. [More](/docs/fields/overview#validation)                                |
+| **`saveToJWT`**        | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/overview), include its data in the user JWT.                               |
+| **`hooks`**            | Provide Field Hooks to control logic for this field. [More details](../hooks/fields).                                                                                                                                                                         |
+| **`access`**           | Provide Field Access Control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More details](../access-control/fields).                                                                                                                                                  |
+| **`hidden`**           | Restrict this field's visibility from all APIs entirely. Will still be saved to the database, but will not appear in any API or the Admin Panel.                            |
+| **`defaultValue`**     | Provide data to be used for this field's default value. [More](/docs/fields/overview#default-values)                                                                        |
+| **`localized`**        | Enable localization for this field. Requires [localization to be enabled](/docs/configuration/localization) in the Base config.                                             |
+| **`required`**         | Require this field to have a value.                                                                                                                                         |
+| **`admin`**            | Admin-specific configuration. [More details](#admin-options).                                                                                                   |
+| **`custom`**           | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                                                   |
+| **`typescriptSchema`** | Override field type generation with providing a JSON schema                                                                                                                 |
 
 _\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 
-### Admin config
+## Admin Options
 
-In addition to the default [field admin config](/docs/fields/overview#admin-config), this field type allows for the following `admin` properties:
+The customize the appearance and behavior of the Email Field in the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview), you can use the `admin` option:
 
-**`placeholder`**
+```ts
+import type { Field } from 'payload/types'
 
-Set this property to define a placeholder string for the field.
+export const MyEmailField: Field = {
+  // ...
+  admin: { // highlight-line
+    // ...
+  },
+}
+```
 
-**`autoComplete`**
+The Email Field inherits all of the default options from the base [Field Admin Config](../admin/fields#admin-options), plus the following additional options:
 
-Set this property to a string that will be used for browser autocomplete.
+| Property                       | Description                                                                                                                            |
+| ------------------------------ | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`placeholder`**              | Set this property to define a placeholder string for the field.                                                                         |
+| **`autoComplete`**             | Set this property to a string that will be used for browser autocomplete.                                                               |
 
-### Example
+## Example
 
 `collections/ExampleCollection.ts`
 
 ```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
 
 export const ExampleCollection: CollectionConfig = {
   slug: 'example-collection',

docs/fields/group.mdx

@@ -3,55 +3,82 @@ title: Group Field
 label: Group
 order: 90
 desc: The Group field allows other fields to be nested under a common property. Learn how to use Group fields, see examples and options.
-keywords: group, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, express
+keywords: group, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
 ---
 
-<Banner>
-  The Group field allows fields to be nested under a common property name. It also groups fields
-  together visually in the Admin panel.
-</Banner>
+The Group Field allows [Fields](./overview) to be nested under a common property name. It also groups fields together visually in the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview).
 
 <LightDarkImage
   srcLight="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/group.png"
   srcDark="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/group-dark.png"
-  alt="Shows a Group field in the Payload admin panel"
-  caption="Admin panel screenshot of a Group field"
+  alt="Shows a Group field in the Payload Admin Panel"
+  caption="Admin Panel screenshot of a Group field"
 />
 
-### Config
+To add a Group Field, set the `type` to `group` in your [Field Config](./overview):
 
-| Option              | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        |
-| ------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`name`** \*       | To be used as the property name when stored and retrieved from the database. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-names)                                                                                                                                                             |
-| **`fields`** \*     | Array of field types to nest within this Group.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    |
-| **`label`**         | Used as a heading in the Admin panel and to name the generated GraphQL type.                                                                                                                                                                                                       |
-| **`validate`**      | Provide a custom validation function that will be executed on both the Admin panel and the backend. [More](/docs/fields/overview#validation)                                                                                                                                       |
-| **`saveToJWT`**     | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/config), include its data in the user JWT.                                                                                                                                      |
-| **`hooks`**         | Provide field-based hooks to control logic for this field. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-hooks)                                                                                                                                                                         |
-| **`access`**        | Provide field-based access control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-access-control)                                                                                                                            |
-| **`hidden`**        | Restrict this field's visibility from all APIs entirely. Will still be saved to the database, but will not appear in any API or the Admin panel.                                                                                                                                   |
-| **`defaultValue`**  | Provide an object of data to be used for this field's default value. [More](/docs/fields/overview#default-values)                                                                                                                                                                  |
-| **`localized`**     | Enable localization for this field. Requires [localization to be enabled](/docs/configuration/localization) in the Base config. If enabled, a separate, localized set of all data within this Group will be kept, so there is no need to specify each nested field as `localized`. |
-| **`admin`**         | Admin-specific configuration. See below for [more detail](#admin-config).                                                                                                                                                                                                          |
-| **`custom`**        | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                                                                                                                                                          |
-| **`interfaceName`** | Create a top level, reusable [Typescript interface](/docs/typescript/generating-types#custom-field-interfaces) & [GraphQL type](/docs/graphql/graphql-schema#custom-field-schemas).                                                                                                |
+```ts
+import type { Field } from 'payload/types'
+
+export const MyGroupField: Field = {
+  // ...
+  // highlight-start
+  type: 'group',
+  fields: [
+    // ...
+  ],
+  // highlight-end
+}
+```
+
+## Config Options
+
+| Option                 | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        |
+| ---------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`name`** \*          | To be used as the property name when stored and retrieved from the database. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-names)                                                                                                                                                             |
+| **`fields`** \*        | Array of field types to nest within this Group.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    |
+| **`label`**            | Used as a heading in the Admin Panel and to name the generated GraphQL type.                                                                                                                                                                                                       |
+| **`validate`**         | Provide a custom validation function that will be executed on both the Admin Panel and the backend. [More](/docs/fields/overview#validation)                                                                                                                                       |
+| **`saveToJWT`**        | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/overview), include its data in the user JWT.                                                                                                                                      |
+| **`hooks`**            | Provide Field Hooks to control logic for this field. [More details](../hooks/fields).                                                                                                                                                                         |
+| **`access`**           | Provide Field Access Control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More details](../access-control/fields).                                                                                                                                                  |
+| **`hidden`**           | Restrict this field's visibility from all APIs entirely. Will still be saved to the database, but will not appear in any API or the Admin Panel.                                                                                                                                   |
+| **`defaultValue`**     | Provide an object of data to be used for this field's default value. [More](/docs/fields/overview#default-values)                                                                                                                                                                  |
+| **`localized`**        | Enable localization for this field. Requires [localization to be enabled](/docs/configuration/localization) in the Base config. If enabled, a separate, localized set of all data within this Group will be kept, so there is no need to specify each nested field as `localized`. |
+| **`admin`**            | Admin-specific configuration. [More details](#admin-options).                                                                                                                                                                                                          |
+| **`custom`**           | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                                                                                                                                                          |
+| **`interfaceName`**    | Create a top level, reusable [Typescript interface](/docs/typescript/generating-types#custom-field-interfaces) & [GraphQL type](/docs/graphql/graphql-schema#custom-field-schemas).                                                                                                |
+| **`typescriptSchema`** | Override field type generation with providing a JSON schema                                                                                                                                                                                                                        |
 
 _\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 
-### Admin config
+## Admin Options
 
-In addition to the default [field admin config](/docs/fields/overview#admin-config), the Group allows for the following admin property:
+The customize the appearance and behavior of the Group Field in the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview), you can use the `admin` option:
 
-**`hideGutter`**
+```ts
+import type { Field } from 'payload/types'
 
-Set this property to `true` to hide this field's gutter within the admin panel. The field gutter is rendered as a vertical line and padding, but often if this field is nested within a Group, Block, or Array, you may want to hide the gutter.
+export const MyGroupField: Field = {
+  // ...
+  admin: { // highlight-line
+    // ...
+  },
+}
+```
 
-### Example
+The Group Field inherits all of the default options from the base [Field Admin Config](../admin/fields#admin-options), plus the following additional options:
+
+| Option              | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                                   |
+| ------------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`hideGutter`**    | Set this property to `true` to hide this field's gutter within the Admin Panel. The field gutter is rendered as a vertical line and padding, but often if this field is nested within a Group, Block, or Array, you may want to hide the gutter. |
+
+## Example
 
 `collections/ExampleCollection.ts`
 
 ```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
 
 export const ExampleCollection: CollectionConfig = {
   slug: 'example-collection',

docs/fields/json.mdx

@@ -4,58 +4,79 @@ label: JSON
 order: 50
 desc: The JSON field type will store any string in the Database. Learn how to use JSON fields, see examples and options.
 
-keywords: json, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, express
+keywords: json, jsonSchema, schema, validation, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
 ---
 
-<Banner>
-  The JSON field type saves actual JSON in the database, which differs from the Code field that
-  saves the value as a string in the database.
-</Banner>
+The JSON Field saves actual JSON in the database, which differs from the Code field that saves the value as a string in the database.
 
 <LightDarkImage
   srcLight="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/json.png"
   srcDark="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/json-dark.png"
-  alt="Shows a JSON field in the Payload admin panel"
-  caption="Admin panel screenshot of a JSON field"
+  alt="Shows a JSON field in the Payload Admin Panel"
+  caption="This field is using the `monaco-react` editor syntax highlighting."
 />
 
-This field uses the `monaco-react` editor syntax highlighting.
+To add a JSON Field, set the `type` to `json` in your [Field Config](./overview):
 
-### Config
+```ts
+import type { Field } from 'payload/types'
 
-| Option             | Description                                                                                                                                                                 |
-| ------------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`name`** \*      | To be used as the property name when stored and retrieved from the database. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-names)                                                      |
-| **`label`**        | Text used as a field label in the Admin panel or an object with keys for each language.                                                                                     |
-| **`unique`**       | Enforce that each entry in the Collection has a unique value for this field.                                                                                                |
-| **`index`**        | Build an [index](/docs/database/overview) for this field to produce faster queries. Set this field to `true` if your users will perform queries on this field's data often. |
-| **`validate`**     | Provide a custom validation function that will be executed on both the Admin panel and the backend. [More](/docs/fields/overview#validation)                                |
-| **`saveToJWT`**    | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/config), include its data in the user JWT.                               |
-| **`hooks`**        | Provide field-based hooks to control logic for this field. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-hooks)                                                                  |
-| **`access`**       | Provide field-based access control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-access-control)                     |
-| **`hidden`**       | Restrict this field's visibility from all APIs entirely. Will still be saved to the database, but will not appear in any API or the Admin panel.                            |
-| **`defaultValue`** | Provide data to be used for this field's default value. [More](/docs/fields/overview#default-values)                                                                        |
-| **`localized`**    | Enable localization for this field. Requires [localization to be enabled](/docs/configuration/localization) in the Base config.                                             |
-| **`required`**     | Require this field to have a value.                                                                                                                                         |
-| **`admin`**        | Admin-specific configuration. See below for [more detail](#admin-config).                                                                                                   |
-| **`custom`**       | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                                                   |
+export const MyJSONField: Field = {
+  // ...
+  type: 'json', // highlight-line
+}
+```
+
+## Config Options
+
+| Option                 | Description                                                                                                                                                                 |
+| ---------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`name`** \*          | To be used as the property name when stored and retrieved from the database. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-names)                                                      |
+| **`label`**            | Text used as a field label in the Admin Panel or an object with keys for each language.                                                                                     |
+| **`unique`**           | Enforce that each entry in the Collection has a unique value for this field.                                                                                                |
+| **`index`**            | Build an [index](/docs/database/overview) for this field to produce faster queries. Set this field to `true` if your users will perform queries on this field's data often. |
+| **`validate`**         | Provide a custom validation function that will be executed on both the Admin Panel and the backend. [More](/docs/fields/overview#validation)                                |
+| **`jsonSchema`**       | Provide a JSON schema that will be used for validation. [JSON schemas](https://json-schema.org/learn/getting-started-step-by-step)                                          |
+| **`saveToJWT`**        | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/overview), include its data in the user JWT.                               |
+| **`hooks`**            | Provide Field Hooks to control logic for this field. [More details](../hooks/fields).                                                                                                                                                                         |
+| **`access`**           | Provide Field Access Control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More details](../access-control/fields).                                                                                                                                                  |
+| **`hidden`**           | Restrict this field's visibility from all APIs entirely. Will still be saved to the database, but will not appear in any API or the Admin Panel.                            |
+| **`defaultValue`**     | Provide data to be used for this field's default value. [More](/docs/fields/overview#default-values)                                                                        |
+| **`localized`**        | Enable localization for this field. Requires [localization to be enabled](/docs/configuration/localization) in the Base config.                                             |
+| **`required`**         | Require this field to have a value.                                                                                                                                         |
+| **`admin`**            | Admin-specific configuration. [More details](#admin-options).                                                                                                   |
+| **`custom`**           | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                                                   |
+| **`typescriptSchema`** | Override field type generation with providing a JSON schema                                                                                                                 |
 
 _\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 
-### Admin Config
+## Admin Options
 
-In addition to the default [field admin config](/docs/fields/overview#admin-config), you can adjust the following properties:
+The customize the appearance and behavior of the JSON Field in the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview), you can use the `admin` option:
+
+```ts
+import type { Field } from 'payload/types'
+
+export const MyJSONField: Field = {
+  // ...
+  admin: { // highlight-line
+    // ...
+  },
+}
+```
+
+The JSON Field inherits all of the default options from the base [Field Admin Config](../admin/fields#admin-options), plus the following additional options:
 
 | Option              | Description                                                                                                                                                   |
 | ------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
 | **`editorOptions`** | Options that can be passed to the monaco editor, [view the full list](https://microsoft.github.io/monaco-editor/typedoc/variables/editor.EditorOptions.html). |
 
-### Example
+## Example
 
-`collections/ExampleCollection.ts
+`collections/ExampleCollection.ts`
 
 ```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
 
 export const ExampleCollection: CollectionConfig = {
   slug: 'example-collection',
@@ -68,3 +89,67 @@ export const ExampleCollection: CollectionConfig = {
   ],
 }
 ```
+## JSON Schema Validation
+
+Payload JSON fields fully support the [JSON schema](https://json-schema.org/) standard. By providing a schema in your field config, the editor will be guided in the admin UI, getting typeahead for properties and their formats automatically. When the document is saved, the default validation will prevent saving any invalid data in the field according to the schema in your config.
+
+If you only provide a URL to a schema, Payload will fetch the desired schema if it is publicly available. If not, it is recommended to add the schema directly to your config or import it from another file so that it can be implemented consistently in your project.
+
+
+### Local JSON Schema
+
+`collections/ExampleCollection.ts`
+
+```ts
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
+
+export const ExampleCollection: CollectionConfig = {
+  slug: 'example-collection',
+  fields: [
+    {
+      name: 'customerJSON', // required
+      type: 'json', // required
+      jsonSchema: {
+        uri: 'a://b/foo.json', // required
+        fileMatch: ['a://b/foo.json'], // required
+        schema: {
+          type: 'object',
+          properties: {
+            foo: {
+              enum: ['bar', 'foobar'],
+            }
+          },
+        },
+      },
+
+    },
+  ],
+}
+// {"foo": "bar"} or {"foo": "foobar"} - ok
+// Attempting to create {"foo": "not-bar"} will throw an error
+```
+
+### Remote JSON Schema
+
+`collections/ExampleCollection.ts`
+
+```ts
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
+
+export const ExampleCollection: CollectionConfig = {
+  slug: 'example-collection',
+  fields: [
+    {
+      name: 'customerJSON', // required
+      type: 'json', // required
+      jsonSchema: {
+        uri: 'https://example.com/customer.schema.json', // required
+        fileMatch: ['https://example.com/customer.schema.json'], // required
+      },
+    },
+  ],
+}
+// If 'https://example.com/customer.schema.json' has a JSON schema
+// {"foo": "bar"} or {"foo": "foobar"} - ok
+// Attempting to create {"foo": "not-bar"} will throw an error
+```

docs/fields/number.mdx

@@ -3,69 +3,85 @@ title: Number Field
 label: Number
 order: 100
 desc: Number fields store and validate numeric data. Learn how to use and format Number fields, see examples and Number field options.
-keywords: number, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, express
+keywords: number, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
 ---
 
-<Banner>
-  The Number field stores and validates numeric entry and supports additional numerical validation
-  and formatting features.
-</Banner>
+The Number Field stores and validates numeric entry and supports additional numerical validation and formatting features.
 
 <LightDarkImage
   srcLight="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/number.png"
   srcDark="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/number-dark.png"
-  alt="Shows a Number field in the Payload admin panel"
-  caption="Admin panel screenshot of a Number field"
+  alt="Shows a Number field in the Payload Admin Panel"
+  caption="Admin Panel screenshot of a Number field"
 />
 
-### Config
+To add a Number Field, set the `type` to `number` in your [Field Config](./overview):
 
-| Option             | Description                                                                                                                                                                          |
-|--------------------|--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
-| **`name`** \*      | To be used as the property name when stored and retrieved from the database. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-names)                                                               |
-| **`label`**        | Text used as a field label in the Admin panel or an object with keys for each language.                                                                                              |
-| **`min`**          | Minimum value accepted. Used in the default `validation` function.                                                                                                                   |
-| **`max`**          | Maximum value accepted. Used in the default `validation` function.                                                                                                                   |
-| **`hasMany`**      | Makes this field an ordered array of numbers instead of just a single number.                                                                                                        |
-| **`minRows`**      | Minimum number of numbers in the numbers array, if `hasMany` is set to true.                                                                                                         |
-| **`maxRows`**      | Maximum number of numbers in the numbers array, if `hasMany` is set to true.                                                                                                         |
-| **`unique`**       | Enforce that each entry in the Collection has a unique value for this field.                                                                                                         |
-| **`index`**        | Build an [index](/docs/database/overview) for this field to produce faster queries. Set this field to `true` if your users will perform queries on this field's data often.          |
-| **`validate`**     | Provide a custom validation function that will be executed on both the Admin panel and the backend. [More](/docs/fields/overview#validation)                                         |
-| **`saveToJWT`**    | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/config), include its data in the user JWT.                                        |
-| **`hooks`**        | Provide field-based hooks to control logic for this field. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-hooks)                                                                           |
-| **`access`**       | Provide field-based access control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-access-control)                              |
-| **`hidden`**       | Restrict this field's visibility from all APIs entirely. Will still be saved to the database, but will not appear in any API or the Admin panel.                                     |
-| **`defaultValue`** | Provide data to be used for this field's default value. [More](/docs/fields/overview#default-values)                                                                                 |
-| **`localized`**    | Enable localization for this field. Requires [localization to be enabled](/docs/configuration/localization) in the Base config.                                                      |
-| **`required`**     | Require this field to have a value.                                                                                                                                                  |
-| **`admin`**        | Admin-specific configuration. See below for [more detail](#admin-config).                                                                                                            |
-| **`custom`**       | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                                                            |
+```ts
+import type { Field } from 'payload/types'
+
+export const MyNumberField: Field = {
+  // ...
+  type: 'number', // highlight-line
+}
+```
+
+## Config Options
+
+| Option                 | Description                                                                                                                                                                 |
+| ---------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`name`** \*          | To be used as the property name when stored and retrieved from the database. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-names)                                                      |
+| **`label`**            | Text used as a field label in the Admin Panel or an object with keys for each language.                                                                                     |
+| **`min`**              | Minimum value accepted. Used in the default `validation` function.                                                                                                          |
+| **`max`**              | Maximum value accepted. Used in the default `validation` function.                                                                                                          |
+| **`hasMany`**          | Makes this field an ordered array of numbers instead of just a single number.                                                                                               |
+| **`minRows`**          | Minimum number of numbers in the numbers array, if `hasMany` is set to true.                                                                                                |
+| **`maxRows`**          | Maximum number of numbers in the numbers array, if `hasMany` is set to true.                                                                                                |
+| **`unique`**           | Enforce that each entry in the Collection has a unique value for this field.                                                                                                |
+| **`index`**            | Build an [index](/docs/database/overview) for this field to produce faster queries. Set this field to `true` if your users will perform queries on this field's data often. |
+| **`validate`**         | Provide a custom validation function that will be executed on both the Admin Panel and the backend. [More](/docs/fields/overview#validation)                                |
+| **`saveToJWT`**        | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/overview), include its data in the user JWT.                               |
+| **`hooks`**            | Provide Field Hooks to control logic for this field. [More details](../hooks/fields).                                                                                                                                                                         |
+| **`access`**           | Provide Field Access Control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More details](../access-control/fields).                                                                                                                                                  |
+| **`hidden`**           | Restrict this field's visibility from all APIs entirely. Will still be saved to the database, but will not appear in any API or the Admin Panel.                            |
+| **`defaultValue`**     | Provide data to be used for this field's default value. [More](/docs/fields/overview#default-values)                                                                        |
+| **`localized`**        | Enable localization for this field. Requires [localization to be enabled](/docs/configuration/localization) in the Base config.                                             |
+| **`required`**         | Require this field to have a value.                                                                                                                                         |
+| **`admin`**            | Admin-specific configuration. [More details](#admin-options).                                                                                                   |
+| **`custom`**           | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                                                   |
+| **`typescriptSchema`** | Override field type generation with providing a JSON schema                                                                                                                 |
 
 _\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 
-### Admin config
+## Admin Options
 
-In addition to the default [field admin config](/docs/fields/overview#admin-config), this field type allows for the following `admin` properties:
+The customize the appearance and behavior of the Number Field in the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview), you can use the `admin` option:
 
-**`step`**
+```ts
+import type { Field } from 'payload/types'
 
-Set a value for the number field to increment / decrement using browser controls.
+export const MyNumberField: Field = {
+  // ...
+  admin: { // highlight-line
+    // ...
+  },
+}
+```
 
-**`placeholder`**
+The Number Field inherits all of the default options from the base [Field Admin Config](../admin/fields#admin-options), plus the following additional options:
 
-Set this property to define a placeholder string for the field.
+| Property                       | Description                                                                                                                            |
+| ------------------------------ | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`step`**                     | Set a value for the number field to increment / decrement using browser controls.                                                      |
+| **`placeholder`**              | Set this property to define a placeholder string for the field.                                                                       |
+| **`autoComplete`**             | Set this property to a string that will be used for browser autocomplete.                                                             |
 
-**`autoComplete`**
-
-Set this property to a string that will be used for browser autocomplete.
-
-### Example
+## Example
 
 `collections/ExampleCollection.ts`
 
 ```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
 
 export const ExampleCollection: CollectionConfig = {
   slug: 'example-collection',

docs/fields/overview.mdx

@@ -2,99 +2,320 @@
 title: Fields Overview
 label: Overview
 order: 10
-desc: Fields are the building blocks of Payload, find out how to add or remove a field, change field type, add hooks, define access control and validation.
-keywords: overview, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, express
+desc: Fields are the building blocks of Payload, find out how to add or remove a field, change field type, add hooks, define Access Control and Validation.
+keywords: overview, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
 ---
 
-<Banner type="info">
-  Fields are the building blocks of Payload. Collections and Globals both use Fields to define the
-  shape of the data that they store. Payload offers a wide variety of field types - both simple and
-  complex.
-</Banner>
+Fields are the building blocks of Payload. They define the schema of the Documents that will be stored in the [Database](../database/overview), as well as automatically generate the corresponding UI within the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview).
 
-Fields are defined as an array on Collections and Globals via the `fields` key. They define the shape of the data that will be stored as well as automatically construct the corresponding Admin UI.
+There are many [Field Types](#field-types) to choose from, ranging anywhere from simple text strings to nested arrays and blocks. Most fields save data to the database, while others are strictly presentational. Fields can have [Custom Validations](#validation), [Conditional Logic](../admin/fields#conditional-logic), [Access Control](#field-level-access-control), [Hooks](#field-level-hooks), and so much more.
 
-The required `type` property on a field determines what values it can accept, how it is presented in the API, and how the field will be rendered in the admin interface.
-
-**Simple collection with two fields:**
+To configure fields, use the `fields` property in your [Collection](../configuration/collections) or [Global](../configuration/globals) config:
 
 ```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
+import type { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
 
 export const Page: CollectionConfig = {
-  slug: 'pages',
-  fields: [
-    {
-      name: 'myField',
-      type: 'text', // highlight-line
-    },
-    {
-      name: 'otherField',
-      type: 'checkbox', // highlight-line
-    },
-  ],
+  // ...
+  fields: [ // highlight-line
+    // ...
+  ]
 }
 ```
 
-### Field types
+<Banner type="success">
+  You can fully customize the appearance and behavior of all fields within the Admin Panel. [More details](../admin/fields).
+</Banner>
 
-- [Array](/docs/fields/array) - for repeating content, supports nested fields
-- [Blocks](/docs/fields/blocks) - block-based fields, allowing powerful layout creation
-- [Checkbox](/docs/fields/checkbox) - boolean true / false checkbox
-- [Code](/docs/fields/code) - code editor that saves a string to the database
-- [Collapsible](/docs/fields/collapsible) - used for admin layout, nest fields within a collapsible component
-- [Date](/docs/fields/date) - date / time field that saves a timestamp
-- [Email](/docs/fields/email) - validates the entry is a properly formatted email
-- [Group](/docs/fields/group) - nest fields within an object
-- [JSON](/docs/fields/json) - saves actual JSON in the database
-- [Number](/docs/fields/number) - field that enforces that its value be a number
-- [Point](/docs/fields/point) - geometric coordinates for location data
-- [Radio](/docs/fields/radio) - radio button group, allowing only one value to be selected
-- [Relationship](/docs/fields/relationship) - assign relationships to other collections
-- [Rich Text](/docs/fields/rich-text) - fully extensible Rich Text editor
-- [Row](/docs/fields/row) - used for admin field layout, no effect on data shape
-- [Select](/docs/fields/select) - dropdown / picklist style value selector
-- [Tabs](/docs/fields/tabs) - used for admin layout, nest fields within tabs
-- [Text](/docs/fields/text) - simple text input
-- [Textarea](/docs/fields/textarea) - allows a bit larger of a text editor
-- [Upload](/docs/fields/upload) - allows local file and image upload
-- [UI](/docs/fields/ui) - inject your own custom components and do whatever you need
+## Field Types
 
-### Field-level hooks
+Payload provides a wide variety of built-in Field Types, each with its own unique properties and behaviors that determine which values it can accept, how it is presented in the API, and how it will be rendered in the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview).
 
-One of the most powerful parts about Payload is its ability for you to define field-level hooks that can control the logic of your fields to a fine-grained level. for more information about how to define field hooks, [click here](/docs/hooks/overview#field-hooks).
+To configure fields, use the `fields` property in your [Collection](../configuration/collections) or [Global](../configuration/globals) config:
 
-### Field-level access control
+```ts
+import type { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
 
-In addition to being able to define access control on a document-level, you can define extremely granular permissions on a field by field level. For more information about field-level access control, [click here](/docs/access-control/overview#fields).
+export const Page: CollectionConfig = {
+  slug: 'pages',
+  // highlight-start
+  fields: [
+    {
+      name: 'field',
+      type: 'text',
+    }
+  ]
+  // highlight-end
+}
+```
 
-### Field names
+<Banner type="warning">
+  <strong>Reminder:</strong>
+  Each field is an object with at least the `type` property. This matches the field to its corresponding Field Type. [More details](#field-options).
+</Banner>
 
-Some fields use their `name` property as a unique identifier to store and retrieve from the database. `__v`, `salt`, and `hash` are all reserved field names which are sanitized from Payload's config and cannot be used.
+There are two main categories of fields in Payload:
+
+- [Data Fields](#data-fields)
+- [Presentational Fields](#presentational-fields)
+
+To begin writing fields, first determine which [Field Type](#field-types) best supports your application. Then to author your field accordingly using the [Field Options](#field-options) for your chosen field type.
+
+### Data Fields
+
+Data Fields are used to store data in the [Database](../database/overview). All Data Fields have a `name` property. This is the key that will be used to store the field's value.
+
+Here are the available Data Fields:
+
+- [Array](./array) - for repeating content, supports nested fields
+- [Blocks](./blocks) - for block-based content, supports nested fields
+- [Checkbox](./checkbox) - saves boolean true / false values
+- [Code](./code) - renders a code editor interface that saves a string
+- [Date](./date) - renders a date picker and saves a timestamp
+- [Email](./email) - ensures the value is a properly formatted email address
+- [Group](./group) - nests fields within a keyed object
+- [JSON](./json) - renders a JSON editor interface that saves a JSON object
+- [Number](./number) - saves numeric values
+- [Point](./point) - for location data, saves geometric coordinates
+- [Radio](./radio) - renders a radio button group that allows only one value to be selected
+- [Relationship](./relationship) - assign relationships to other collections
+- [Rich Text](./rich-text) - renders a fully extensible rich text editor
+- [Select](./select) - renders a dropdown / picklist style value selector
+- [Tabs (Named)](./tabs) - similar to group, but renders nested fields within a tabbed layout
+- [Text](./text) - simple text input that saves a string
+- [Textarea](./textarea) - similar to text, but allows for multi-line input
+- [Upload](./upload) - allows local file and image upload
+
+### Presentational Fields
+
+Presentational Fields do not store data in the database. Instead, they are used to organize and present other fields in the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview), or to add custom UI components.
+
+Here are the available Presentational Fields:
+
+- [Collapsible](/docs/fields/collapsible) - nests fields within a collapsible component
+- [Row](/docs/fields/row) - aligns fields horizontally
+- [Tabs (Unnamed)](/docs/fields/tabs) - nests fields within a tabbed layout
+- [UI](/docs/fields/ui) - blank field for custom UI components
+
+<Banner type="warning">
+  <strong>Tip:</strong>
+  Don't see a Field Type that fits your needs? You can build your own using a [Custom Field Component](../admin/fields#the-field-component).
+</Banner>
+
+## Field Options
+
+All fields require at least the `type` property. This matches the field to its corresponding [Field Type](#field-types) to determine its appearance and behavior within the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview). Each Field Type has its own unique set of options based on its own type.
+
+To set a field's type, use the `type` property in your Field Config:
+
+```ts
+import type { Field } from 'payload'
+
+export const MyField: Field = {
+  type: 'text', // highlight-line
+  name: 'myField',
+}
+```
+
+<Banner type="warning">
+  For a full list of configuration options, see the documentation for each [Field Type](#field-types).
+</Banner>
+
+### Field Names
+
+All [Data Fields](#data-fields) require a `name` property. This is the key that will be used to store and retrieve the field's value in the database. This property must be unique within the Collection, Global, or nested group that it is defined in.
+
+To set a field's name, use the `name` property in your Field Config:
+
+```ts
+import type { Field } from 'payload'
+
+export const MyField: Field = {
+  type: 'text',
+  name: 'myField', // highlight-line
+}
+```
+
+Payload reserves various field names for internal use. Using reserved field names will result in your field being sanitized from the config.
+
+The following field names are forbidden and cannot be used:
+
+  - `__v`
+  - `salt`
+  - `hash`
+  - `file`
+
+### Field-level Hooks
+
+In addition to being able to define [Hooks](../hooks/overview) on a document-level, you can define extremely granular logic field-by-field.
+
+To define Field-level Hooks, use the `hooks` property in your Field Config:
+
+```ts
+import type { Field } from 'payload'
+
+export const MyField: Field = {
+  type: 'text',
+  name: 'myField',
+  // highlight-start
+  hooks: {
+    // ...
+  }
+  // highlight-end
+}
+```
+
+For full details on Field-level Hooks, see the [Field Hooks](../hooks/fields) documentation.
+
+### Field-level Access Control
+
+In addition to being able to define [Access Control](../access-control/overview) on a document-level, you can define extremely granular permissions field-by-field.
+
+To define Field-level Access Control, use the `access` property in your Field Config:
+
+```ts
+import type { Field } from 'payload'
+
+export const MyField: Field = {
+  type: 'text',
+  name: 'myField',
+  // highlight-start
+  access: {
+    // ...
+  }
+  // highlight-end
+}
+```
+
+For full details on Field-level Access Control, see the [Field Access Control](../access-control/fields) documentation.
+
+### Default Values
+
+Fields can be optionally prefilled with initial values. This is used in both the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview) as well as API requests to populate missing or undefined field values during the `create` or `update` operations.
+
+To set a field's default value, use the `defaultValue` property in your Field Config:
+
+```ts
+import type { Field } from 'payload'
+
+export const MyField: Field = {
+  type: 'text',
+  name: 'myField',
+  defaultValue: 'Hello, World!', // highlight-line
+}
+```
+
+Default values can be defined as a static value or a function that returns a value. When a `defaultValue` is defined statically, Payload's DB adapters will apply it to the database schema or models.
+
+Functions can be written to make use of the following argument properties:
+
+- `user` - the authenticated user object
+- `locale` - the currently selected locale string
+
+Here is an example of a `defaultValue` function:
+
+```ts
+import type { Field } from 'payload'
+
+const translation: {
+  en: 'Written by'
+  es: 'Escrito por'
+}
+
+export const myField: Field = {
+  name: 'attribution',
+  type: 'text',
+  // highlight-start
+  defaultValue: ({ user, locale }) =>
+    `${translation[locale]} ${user.name}`,
+  // highlight-end
+}
+```
+
+<Banner type="success">
+  <strong>Tip:</strong>
+  You can use async `defaultValue` functions to fill fields with data from API requests.
+</Banner>
 
 ### Validation
 
-Field validation is enforced automatically based on the field type and other properties such as `required` or `min` and `max` value constraints on certain field types. This default behavior can be replaced by providing your own validate function for any field. It will be used on both the frontend and the backend, so it should not rely on any Node-specific packages. The validation function can be either synchronous or asynchronous and expects to return either `true` or a string error message to display in both API responses and within the Admin panel.
+Fields are automatically validated based on their [Field Type](#field-types) and other [Field Options](#field-options) such as `required` or `min` and `max` value constraints. If needed, however, field validations can be customized or entirely replaced by providing your own custom validation functions.
 
-There are two arguments available to custom validation functions.
+To set a custom field validation function, use the `validate` property in your Field Config:
 
-1. The value which is currently assigned to the field
-2. An optional object with dynamic properties for more complex validation having the following:
+```ts
+import type { Field } from 'payload'
+
+export const MyField: Field = {
+  type: 'text',
+  name: 'myField',
+  validate: value => Boolean(value) || 'This field is required' // highlight-line
+}
+```
+
+Custom validation functions should return either `true` or a `string` representing the error message to display in API responses.
+
+The following arguments are provided to the `validate` function:
+
+| Argument | Description                                                                                   |
+| -------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| `value`  | The value of the field being validated.                                                        |
+| `ctx`   | An object with additional data and context. [More details](#validation-context) |
+
+#### Validation Context
+
+The `ctx` argument contains full document data, sibling field data, the current operation, and other useful information such as currently authenticated in user:
+
+```ts
+import type { Field } from 'payload'
+
+export const MyField: Field = {
+  type: 'text',
+  name: 'myField',
+  // highlight-start
+  validate: (val, { user }) =>
+    Boolean(user) || 'You must be logged in to save this field',
+  // highlight-end
+}
+```
+
+The following additional properties are provided in the `ctx` object:
 
 | Property      | Description                                                                                                              |
 | ------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ |
-| `data`        | An object containing the full collection or global document currently being edited                                       |
-| `siblingData` | An object containing document data that is scoped to only fields within the same parent of this field                    |
-| `operation`   | Will be `create` or `update` depending on the UI action or API call                                                      |
-| `id`          | The `id` of the current document being edited. `id` is `undefined` during the `create` operation                         |
-| `t`           | The function for translating text, [more](/docs/configuration/i18n)                                                      |
-| `user`        | An object containing the currently authenticated user                                                                    |
-| `payload`     | If the `validate` function is being executed on the server, Payload will be exposed for easily running local operations. |
+| `data`        | An object containing the full collection or global document currently being edited.                                       |
+| `siblingData` | An object containing document data that is scoped to only fields within the same parent of this field.                    |
+| `operation`   | Will be `create` or `update` depending on the UI action or API call.                                                      |
+| `id`          | The `id` of the current document being edited. `id` is `undefined` during the `create` operation.                         |
+| `req`        | The current HTTP request object. Contains `payload`, `user`, etc. |
 
-### Example
+#### Reusing Default Field Validations
+
+When using custom validation functions, Payload will use yours in place of the default. However, you might want to simply augment the default validation with your own custom logic.
+
+To reuse default field validations, call them from within your custom validation function:
 
 ```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
+import { text } from 'payload/shared'
+
+const field: Field = {
+  name: 'notBad',
+  type: 'text',
+  validate: (val, args) => {
+    if (val === 'bad') return 'This cannot be "bad"'
+    return text(val, args) // highlight-line
+  },
+}
+```
+
+#### Async Field Validations
+
+Custom validation functions can also be asynchronous depending on your needs. This makes it possible to make requests to external services or perform other miscellaneous asynchronous logic.
+
+To write asynchronous validation functions, use the `async` keyword to define your function:
+
+```ts
+import type { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
 
 export const Orders: CollectionConfig = {
   slug: 'orders',
@@ -102,220 +323,68 @@ export const Orders: CollectionConfig = {
     {
       name: 'customerNumber',
       type: 'text',
+      // highlight-start
       validate: async (val, { operation }) => {
-        if (operation !== 'create') {
-          // skip validation on update
-          return true
-        }
+        if (operation !== 'create') return true
         const response = await fetch(`https://your-api.com/customers/${val}`)
-        if (response.ok) {
-          return true
-        }
-
+        if (response.ok) return true
         return 'The customer number provided does not match any customers within our records.'
       },
+      // highlight-end
     },
   ],
 }
 ```
 
-When supplying a field `validate` function, Payload will use yours in place of the default. To make use of the default field validation in your custom logic you can import, call and return the result as needed.
+### Admin Options
 
-For example:
+In addition to each field's base configuration, you can use the `admin` key to specify traits and properties for fields that will only effect how they are _rendered_ within the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview), such as their appearance or behavior.
 
 ```ts
-import { text } from 'payload/fields/validations'
+import type { Field } from 'payload'
 
-const field: Field = {
-  name: 'notBad',
+export const MyField: Field = {
   type: 'text',
-  validate: (val, args) => {
-    if (val === 'bad') {
-      return 'This cannot be "bad"'
-    }
-    // highlight-start
-    return text(val, args)
-    // highlight-end
-  },
+  name: 'myField',
+  admin: { // highlight-line
+    // ...
+  }
 }
 ```
 
-### Customizable ID
+For full details on Admin Options, see the [Field Admin Options](../admin/fields) documentation.
 
-Collections ID fields are generated automatically by default. An explicit `id` field can be declared in the `fields` array to override this behavior.
-Users are then required to provide a custom ID value when creating a record through the Admin UI or API.
-Valid ID types are `number` and `text`.
+## Custom ID Fields
 
-Example:
+All [Collections](../configuration/collections) automatically generate their own ID field. If needed, you can override this behavior by providing an explicit ID field to your config. This will force users to provide a their own ID value when creating a record.
+
+To define a custom ID field, add a new field with the `name` property set to `id`:
 
 ```ts
-{
+import type { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
+
+export const MyCollection: CollectionConfig = {
+  // ...
   fields: [
     {
-      name: 'id',
+      name: 'id', // highlight-line
       type: 'number',
     },
   ],
 }
 ```
 
-### Admin config
+<Banner type="warning">
+  <strong>Reminder:</strong>
+  The Custom ID Fields can only be of type [`Number`](./number) or [`Text`](./text).
 
-In addition to each field's base configuration, you can define specific traits and properties for fields that only have effect on how they are rendered in the Admin panel. The following properties are available for all fields within the `admin` property:
-
-| Option            | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                                      |
-| ----------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| `condition`       | You can programmatically show / hide fields based on what other fields are doing. [Click here](#conditional-logic) for more info.                                                                                                |
-| `components`      | All field components can be completely and easily swapped out for custom components that you define. [Click here](#custom-components) for more info.                                                                             |
-| `description`     | Helper text to display with the field to provide more information for the editor user. [Click here](#description) for more info.                                                                                                 |
-| `position`        | Specify if the field should be rendered in the sidebar by defining `position: 'sidebar'`.                                                                                                                                        |
-| `width`           | Restrict the width of a field. you can pass any string-based value here, be it pixels, percentages, etc. This property is especially useful when fields are nested within a `Row` type where they can be organized horizontally. |
-| `style`           | Attach raw CSS style properties to the root DOM element of a field.                                                                                                                                                              |
-| `className`       | Attach a CSS class name to the root DOM element of a field.                                                                                                                                                                      |
-| `readOnly`        | Setting a field to `readOnly` has no effect on the API whatsoever but disables the admin component's editability to prevent editors from modifying the field's value.                                                            |
-| `disabled`        | If a field is `disabled`, it is completely omitted from the Admin panel.                                                                                                                                                         |
-| `disableBulkEdit` | Set `disableBulkEdit` to `true` to prevent fields from appearing in the select options when making edits for multiple documents.                                                                                                 |
-| `hidden`          | Setting a field's `hidden` property on its `admin` config will transform it into a `hidden` input type. Its value will still submit with the Admin panel's requests, but the field itself will not be visible to editors.        |
-
-### Custom components
-
-All Payload fields support the ability to swap in your own React components with ease. For more information, including examples, [click here](/docs/admin/components#fields).
-
-### Conditional logic
-
-You can show and hide fields based on what other fields are doing by utilizing conditional logic on a field by field basis. The `condition` property on a field's admin config accepts a function which takes three arguments:
-
-- `data` - the entire document's data that is currently being edited
-- `siblingData` - only the fields that are direct siblings to the field with the condition
-- `{ user }` - the final argument is an object containing the currently authenticated user
-
-The `condition` function should return a boolean that will control if the field should be displayed or not.
-
-**Example:**
-
-```ts
-{
-  fields: [
-    {
-      name: 'enableGreeting',
-      type: 'checkbox',
-      defaultValue: false,
-    },
-    {
-      name: 'greeting',
-      type: 'text',
-      admin: {
-        // highlight-start
-        condition: (data, siblingData, { user }) => {
-          if (data.enableGreeting) {
-            return true
-          } else {
-            return false
-          }
-        },
-        // highlight-end
-      },
-    },
-  ]
-}
-```
-
-### Default values
-
-Fields can be prefilled with starting values using the `defaultValue` property. This is used in the admin UI and also on the backend as API requests will be populated with missing or undefined field values. You can assign the defaultValue directly in the field configuration or supply a function for dynamic behavior. Values assigned during a create request on the server are added before validation occurs.
-
-Functions are called with an optional argument object containing:
-
-- `user` - the authenticated user object
-- `locale` - the currently selected locale string
-
-Here is an example of a defaultValue function that uses both:
-
-```ts
-const translation: {
-  en: 'Written by'
-  es: 'Escrito por'
-}
-
-const field = {
-  name: 'attribution',
-  type: 'text',
-  // highlight-start
-  defaultValue: ({ user, locale }) => `${translation[locale]} ${user.name}`,
-  // highlight-end
-}
-```
-
-<Banner type="success">
-  You can use async defaultValue functions to fill fields with data from API requests.
+  Custom ID fields with type `text` must not contain `/` or `.` characters.
 </Banner>
 
-### Description
+## TypeScript
 
-A description can be configured in three ways.
-
-- As a string
-- As a function which returns a string
-- As a React component
-
-Functions are called with an optional argument object with the following shape, and React components are rendered with the following props:
-
-- `path` - the path of the field
-- `value` - the current value of the field
-
-As shown above, you can simply provide a string that will show by the field, but there are use cases where you may want to create some dynamic feedback. By using a function or a component for the `description` property you can provide realtime feedback as the user interacts with the form.
-
-**Function Example:**
+You can import the Payload `Field` type as well as other common types from the `payload` package. [More details](../typescript/overview).
 
 ```ts
-{
-  fields: [
-    {
-      name: 'message',
-      type: 'text',
-      maxLength: 20,
-      admin: {
-        description: ({ path, value }) =>
-          `${typeof value === 'string' ? 20 - value.length : '20'} characters left (field: ${path})`,
-      },
-    },
-  ]
-}
-```
-
-This example will display the number of characters allowed as the user types.
-
-**Component Example:**
-
-```ts
-{
-  fields: [
-    {
-      name: 'message',
-      type: 'text',
-      maxLength: 20,
-      admin: {
-        description:
-          ({ path, value }) => (
-            <div>
-              Character count:
-              {' '}
-              { value?.length || 0 }
-               (field: {path})
-            </div>
-          )
-      }
-    }
-  ]
-}
-```
-
-This component will count the number of characters entered, as well as display the path of the field.
-
-### TypeScript
-
-You can import the internal Payload `Field` type as well as other common field types as follows:
-
-```ts
-import type { Field } from 'payload/types'
+import type { Field } from 'payload'
 ```

docs/fields/point.mdx

@@ -3,59 +3,62 @@ title: Point Field
 label: Point
 order: 110
 desc: The Point field type stores coordinates in the database. Learn how to use Point field for geolocation and geometry.
-
-keywords: point, geolocation, geospatial, geojson, 2dsphere, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, express
+keywords: point, geolocation, geospatial, geojson, 2dsphere, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
 ---
 
-<Banner>
-  The Point field type saves a pair of coordinates in the database and assigns an index for location
-  related queries.
-</Banner>
-
-<Banner type="warning">
-  <strong>Note:</strong> The Point field type is currently only supported in MongoDB.
-</Banner>
+The Point Field saves a pair of coordinates in the database and assigns an index for location related queries. The data structure in the database matches the GeoJSON structure to represent point. The Payload APIs simplifies the object data to only the [longitude, latitude] location.
 
 <LightDarkImage
   srcLight="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/point.png"
   srcDark="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/point-dark.png"
-  alt="Shows a Point field in the Payload admin panel"
-  caption="Admin panel screenshot of a Point field"
+  alt="Shows a Point field in the Payload Admin Panel"
+  caption="Admin Panel screenshot of a Point field"
 />
 
-The data structure in the database matches the GeoJSON structure to represent point. The Payload APIs simplifies the object data to only the [longitude, latitude] location.
+To add a Point Field, set the `type` to `point` in your [Field Config](./overview):
 
-### Config
+```ts
+import type { Field } from 'payload/types'
 
-| Option             | Description                                                                                                                                                                               |
-| ------------------ | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`name`** \*      | To be used as the property name when stored and retrieved from the database. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-names)                                                                    |
-| **`label`**        | Used as a field label in the Admin panel and to name the generated GraphQL type.                                                                                                          |
-| **`unique`**       | Enforce that each entry in the Collection has a unique value for this field.                                                                                                              |
-| **`index`**        | Build an [index](/docs/database/overview) for this field to produce faster queries. To support location queries, point index defaults to `2dsphere`, to disable the index set to `false`. |
-| **`validate`**     | Provide a custom validation function that will be executed on both the Admin panel and the backend. [More](/docs/fields/overview#validation)                                              |
-| **`saveToJWT`**    | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/config), include its data in the user JWT.                                             |
-| **`hooks`**        | Provide field-based hooks to control logic for this field. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-hooks)                                                                                |
-| **`access`**       | Provide field-based access control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-access-control)                                   |
-| **`hidden`**       | Restrict this field's visibility from all APIs entirely. Will still be saved to the database, but will not appear in any API or the Admin panel.                                          |
-| **`defaultValue`** | Provide data to be used for this field's default value. [More](/docs/fields/overview#default-values)                                                                                      |
-| **`localized`**    | Enable localization for this field. Requires [localization to be enabled](/docs/configuration/localization) in the Base config.                                                           |
-| **`required`**     | Require this field to have a value.                                                                                                                                                       |
-| **`admin`**        | Admin-specific configuration. See below for [more detail](#admin-config).                                                                                                                 |
-| **`custom`**       | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                                                                 |
+export const MyPointField: Field = {
+  // ...
+  type: 'point', // highlight-line
+}
+```
+
+<Banner type="warning">
+  <strong>Important:</strong>
+  The Point Field is currently only supported in MongoDB.
+</Banner>
+
+## Config
+
+| Option                 | Description                                                                                                                                                                               |
+| ---------------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`name`** \*          | To be used as the property name when stored and retrieved from the database. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-names)                                                                    |
+| **`label`**            | Used as a field label in the Admin Panel and to name the generated GraphQL type.                                                                                                          |
+| **`unique`**           | Enforce that each entry in the Collection has a unique value for this field.                                                                                                              |
+| **`index`**            | Build an [index](/docs/database/overview) for this field to produce faster queries. To support location queries, point index defaults to `2dsphere`, to disable the index set to `false`. |
+| **`validate`**         | Provide a custom validation function that will be executed on both the Admin Panel and the backend. [More](/docs/fields/overview#validation)                                              |
+| **`saveToJWT`**        | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/overview), include its data in the user JWT.                                             |
+| **`hooks`**            | Provide Field Hooks to control logic for this field. [More details](../hooks/fields).                                                                                                                                                                         |
+| **`access`**           | Provide Field Access Control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More details](../access-control/fields).                                                                                                                                                  |
+| **`hidden`**           | Restrict this field's visibility from all APIs entirely. Will still be saved to the database, but will not appear in any API or the Admin Panel.                                          |
+| **`defaultValue`**     | Provide data to be used for this field's default value. [More](/docs/fields/overview#default-values)                                                                                      |
+| **`localized`**        | Enable localization for this field. Requires [localization to be enabled](/docs/configuration/localization) in the Base config.                                                           |
+| **`required`**         | Require this field to have a value.                                                                                                                                                       |
+| **`admin`**            | Admin-specific configuration. [More details](../admin/fields#admin-options).                                                                                                                    |
+| **`custom`**           | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                                                                 |
+| **`typescriptSchema`** | Override field type generation with providing a JSON schema                                                                                                                               |
 
 _\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 
-<Banner type="warning">
-  <strong>Note:</strong> The Point field type is currently only supported in MongoDB.
-</Banner>
-
-### Example
+## Example
 
 `collections/ExampleCollection.ts`
 
 ```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
 
 export const ExampleCollection: CollectionConfig = {
   slug: 'example-collection',
@@ -69,6 +72,6 @@ export const ExampleCollection: CollectionConfig = {
 }
 ```
 
-### Querying
+## Querying
 
 In order to do query based on the distance to another point, you can use the `near` operator. When querying using the near operator, the returned documents will be sorted by nearest first.

docs/fields/radio.mdx

@@ -3,40 +3,54 @@ title: Radio Group Field
 label: Radio Group
 order: 120
 desc: The Radio field type allows for the selection of one value from a predefined set of possible values. Learn how to use Radio fields, see examples and options.
-keywords: radio, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, express
+keywords: radio, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
 ---
 
-<Banner>
-  The Radio Group field type allows for the selection of one value from a predefined set of possible
-  values and presents a radio group-style set of inputs to the Admin panel.
-</Banner>
+The Radio Field allows for the selection of one value from a predefined set of possible values and presents a radio group-style set of inputs to the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview).
 
 <LightDarkImage
   srcLight="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/radio.png"
   srcDark="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/radio-dark.png"
-  alt="Shows a Radio field in the Payload admin panel"
-  caption="Admin panel screenshot of a Radio field"
+  alt="Shows a Radio field in the Payload Admin Panel"
+  caption="Admin Panel screenshot of a Radio field"
 />
 
-### Config
+To add a Radio Field, set the `type` to `radio` in your [Field Config](./overview):
 
-| Option             | Description                                                                                                                                                                 |
-| ------------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`name`** \*      | To be used as the property name when stored and retrieved from the database. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-names)                                                      |
-| **`options`** \*   | Array of options to allow the field to store. Can either be an array of strings, or an array of objects containing an `label` string and a `value` string.                  |
-| **`label`**        | Text used as a field label in the Admin panel or an object with keys for each language.                                                                                     |
-| **`validate`**     | Provide a custom validation function that will be executed on both the Admin panel and the backend. [More](/docs/fields/overview#validation)                                |
-| **`index`**        | Build an [index](/docs/database/overview) for this field to produce faster queries. Set this field to `true` if your users will perform queries on this field's data often. |
-| **`saveToJWT`**    | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/config), include its data in the user JWT.                               |
-| **`hooks`**        | Provide field-based hooks to control logic for this field. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-hooks)                                                                  |
-| **`access`**       | Provide field-based access control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-access-control)                     |
-| **`hidden`**       | Restrict this field's visibility from all APIs entirely. Will still be saved to the database, but will not appear in any API or the Admin panel.                            |
-| **`defaultValue`** | Provide data to be used for this field's default value. The default value must exist within provided values in `options`. [More](/docs/fields/overview#default-values)      |
-| **`localized`**    | Enable localization for this field. Requires [localization to be enabled](/docs/configuration/localization) in the Base config.                                             |
-| **`required`**     | Require this field to have a value.                                                                                                                                         |
-| **`admin`**        | Admin-specific configuration. See below for [more detail](#admin-config).                                                                                                   |
-| **`custom`**       | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                                                   |
-| **`enumName`**     | Custom enum name for this field when using SQL database adapter ([Postgres](/docs/database/postgres)). Auto-generated from name if not defined.
+```ts
+import type { Field } from 'payload/types'
+
+export const MyRadioField: Field = {
+  // ...
+  // highlight-start
+  type: 'radio',
+  options: [
+    // ...
+  ]
+  // highlight-end
+}
+```
+
+## Config Options
+
+| Option                 | Description                                                                                                                                                                 |
+| ---------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`name`** \*          | To be used as the property name when stored and retrieved from the database. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-names)                                                      |
+| **`options`** \*       | Array of options to allow the field to store. Can either be an array of strings, or an array of objects containing an `label` string and a `value` string.                  |
+| **`label`**            | Text used as a field label in the Admin Panel or an object with keys for each language.                                                                                     |
+| **`validate`**         | Provide a custom validation function that will be executed on both the Admin Panel and the backend. [More](/docs/fields/overview#validation)                                |
+| **`index`**            | Build an [index](/docs/database/overview) for this field to produce faster queries. Set this field to `true` if your users will perform queries on this field's data often. |
+| **`saveToJWT`**        | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/overview), include its data in the user JWT.                               |
+| **`hooks`**            | Provide Field Hooks to control logic for this field. [More details](../hooks/fields).                                                                                                                                                                         |
+| **`access`**           | Provide Field Access Control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More details](../access-control/fields).                                                                                                                                                  |
+| **`hidden`**           | Restrict this field's visibility from all APIs entirely. Will still be saved to the database, but will not appear in any API or the Admin Panel.                            |
+| **`defaultValue`**     | Provide data to be used for this field's default value. The default value must exist within provided values in `options`. [More](/docs/fields/overview#default-values)      |
+| **`localized`**        | Enable localization for this field. Requires [localization to be enabled](/docs/configuration/localization) in the Base config.                                             |
+| **`required`**         | Require this field to have a value.                                                                                                                                         |
+| **`admin`**            | Admin-specific configuration. [More details](#admin-options).                                                                                                   |
+| **`custom`**           | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                                                   |
+| **`enumName`**         | Custom enum name for this field when using SQL Database Adapter ([Postgres](/docs/database/postgres)). Auto-generated from name if not defined.                             |
+| **`typescriptSchema`** | Override field type generation with providing a JSON schema                                                                                                                 |
 
 _\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 
@@ -49,20 +63,33 @@ _\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
   being used as a GraphQL enum.
 </Banner>
 
-### Admin config
+## Admin Options
 
-In addition to the default [field admin config](/docs/fields/overview#admin-config), the Radio Group field type allows for the specification of the following `admin` properties:
+The customize the appearance and behavior of the Radio Field in the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview), you can use the `admin` option:
 
-**`layout`**
+```ts
+import type { Field } from 'payload/types'
 
-The `layout` property allows for the radio group to be styled as a horizonally or vertically distributed list. The default value is `horizontal`.
+export const MyRadioField: Field = {
+  // ...
+  admin: { // highlight-line
+    // ...
+  },
+}
+```
 
-### Example
+The Radio Field inherits all of the default options from the base [Field Admin Config](../admin/fields#admin-options), plus the following additional options:
+
+| Property                       | Description                                                                                                                            |
+| ------------------------------ | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`layout`**                   | Allows for the radio group to be styled as a horizonally or vertically distributed list. The default value is `horizontal`.          |
+
+## Example
 
 `collections/ExampleCollection.ts`
 
 ```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
 
 export const ExampleCollection: CollectionConfig = {
   slug: 'example-collection',

docs/fields/relationship.mdx

@@ -3,80 +3,95 @@ title: Relationship Field
 label: Relationship
 order: 130
 desc: The Relationship field provides the ability to relate documents together. Learn how to use Relationship fields, see examples and options.
-keywords: relationship, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, express
+keywords: relationship, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
 ---
 
-<Banner>
-  The Relationship field is one of the most powerful fields Payload features. It provides for the
-  ability to easily relate documents together.
-</Banner>
+The Relationship Field is one of the most powerful fields Payload features. It provides for the ability to easily relate documents together.
 
 <LightDarkImage
   srcLight="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/relationship.png"
   srcDark="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/relationship-dark.png"
-  alt="Shows a relationship field in the Payload admin panel"
-  caption="Admin panel screenshot of a Relationship field"
+  alt="Shows a relationship field in the Payload Admin Panel"
+  caption="Admin Panel screenshot of a Relationship field"
 />
 
-**Example uses:**
+The Relationship field is used in a variety of ways, including:
 
 - To add `Product` documents to an `Order` document
 - To allow for an `Order` to feature a `placedBy` relationship to either an `Organization` or `User` collection
 - To assign `Category` documents to `Post` documents
 
-### Config
+To add a Relationship Field, set the `type` to `relationship` in your [Field Config](./overview):
 
-| Option              | Description                                                                                                                                                                 |
-| ------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`name`** \*       | To be used as the property name when stored and retrieved from the database. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-names)                                                      |
-| **`relationTo`** \* | Provide one or many collection `slug`s to be able to assign relationships to.                                                                                               |
-| **`filterOptions`** | A query to filter which options appear in the UI and validate against. [More](#filtering-relationship-options).                                                             |
-| **`hasMany`**       | Boolean when, if set to `true`, allows this field to have many relations instead of only one.                                                                               |
-| **`minRows`**       | A number for the fewest allowed items during validation when a value is present. Used with `hasMany`.                                                                       |
-| **`maxRows`**       | A number for the most allowed items during validation when a value is present. Used with `hasMany`.                                                                         |
-| **`maxDepth`**      | Sets a number limit on iterations of related documents to populate when queried. [Depth](/docs/getting-started/concepts#depth)                                              |
-| **`label`**         | Text used as a field label in the Admin panel or an object with keys for each language.                                                                                     |
-| **`unique`**        | Enforce that each entry in the Collection has a unique value for this field.                                                                                                |
-| **`validate`**      | Provide a custom validation function that will be executed on both the Admin panel and the backend. [More](/docs/fields/overview#validation)                                |
-| **`index`**         | Build an [index](/docs/database/overview) for this field to produce faster queries. Set this field to `true` if your users will perform queries on this field's data often. |
-| **`saveToJWT`**     | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/config), include its data in the user JWT.                               |
-| **`hooks`**         | Provide field-based hooks to control logic for this field. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-hooks)                                                                  |
-| **`access`**        | Provide field-based access control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-access-control)                     |
-| **`hidden`**        | Restrict this field's visibility from all APIs entirely. Will still be saved to the database, but will not appear in any API or the Admin panel.                            |
-| **`defaultValue`**  | Provide data to be used for this field's default value. [More](/docs/fields/overview#default-values)                                                                        |
-| **`localized`**     | Enable localization for this field. Requires [localization to be enabled](/docs/configuration/localization) in the Base config.                                             |
-| **`required`**      | Require this field to have a value.                                                                                                                                         |
-| **`admin`**         | Admin-specific configuration. See the [default field admin config](/docs/fields/overview#admin-config) for more details.                                                    |
-| **`custom`**        | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                                                   |
+```ts
+import type { Field } from 'payload/types'
+
+export const MyRelationshipField: Field = {
+  // ...
+  // highlight-start
+  type: 'relationship',
+  relationTo: 'products',
+  // highlight-end
+}
+```
+
+## Config Options
+
+| Option                 | Description                                                                                                                                                                     |
+| ---------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`name`** \*          | To be used as the property name when stored and retrieved from the database. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-names)                                                          |
+| **`relationTo`** \*    | Provide one or many collection `slug`s to be able to assign relationships to.                                                                                                   |
+| **`filterOptions`**    | A query to filter which options appear in the UI and validate against. [More](#filtering-relationship-options).                                                                 |
+| **`hasMany`**          | Boolean when, if set to `true`, allows this field to have many relations instead of only one.                                                                                   |
+| **`minRows`**          | A number for the fewest allowed items during validation when a value is present. Used with `hasMany`.                                                                           |
+| **`maxRows`**          | A number for the most allowed items during validation when a value is present. Used with `hasMany`.                                                                             |
+| **`maxDepth`**         | Sets a maximum population depth for this field, regardless of the remaining depth when this field is reached. [Max Depth](/docs/getting-started/concepts#field-level-max-depth) |
+| **`label`**            | Text used as a field label in the Admin Panel or an object with keys for each language.                                                                                         |
+| **`unique`**           | Enforce that each entry in the Collection has a unique value for this field.                                                                                                    |
+| **`validate`**         | Provide a custom validation function that will be executed on both the Admin Panel and the backend. [More](/docs/fields/overview#validation)                                    |
+| **`index`**            | Build an [index](/docs/database/overview) for this field to produce faster queries. Set this field to `true` if your users will perform queries on this field's data often.     |
+| **`saveToJWT`**        | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/overview), include its data in the user JWT.                                   |
+| **`hooks`**            | Provide Field Hooks to control logic for this field. [More details](../hooks/fields).                                                                                                                                                                         |
+| **`access`**           | Provide Field Access Control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More details](../access-control/fields).                                                                                                                                                  |
+| **`hidden`**           | Restrict this field's visibility from all APIs entirely. Will still be saved to the database, but will not appear in any API or the Admin Panel.                                |
+| **`defaultValue`**     | Provide data to be used for this field's default value. [More](/docs/fields/overview#default-values)                                                                            |
+| **`localized`**        | Enable localization for this field. Requires [localization to be enabled](/docs/configuration/localization) in the Base config.                                                 |
+| **`required`**         | Require this field to have a value.                                                                                                                                             |
+| **`admin`**            | Admin-specific configuration. [More details](#admin-options).                                                        |
+| **`custom`**           | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                                                       |
+| **`typescriptSchema`** | Override field type generation with providing a JSON schema                                                                                                                     |
 
 _\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 
 <Banner type="success">
   <strong>Tip:</strong>
-  <br />
-  The [Depth](/docs/getting-started/concepts#depth) parameter can be used to automatically populate
-  related documents that are returned by the API.
+  The [Depth](../queries/depth) parameter can be used to automatically populate related documents that are returned by the API.
 </Banner>
 
-### Admin config
+## Admin Options
 
-In addition to the default [field admin config](/docs/fields/overview#admin-config), the Relationship field type also
-allows for the following admin-specific properties:
+The customize the appearance and behavior of the Relationship Field in the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview), you can use the `admin` option:
 
-**`isSortable`**
+```ts
+import type { Field } from 'payload/types'
 
-Set to `true` if you'd like this field to be sortable within the Admin UI using drag and drop (only works when `hasMany`
-is set to `true`).
+export const MyRelationshipField: Field = {
+  // ...
+  admin: { // highlight-line
+    // ...
+  },
+}
+```
 
-**`allowCreate`**
+The Relationship Field inherits all of the default options from the base [Field Admin Config](../admin/fields#admin-options), plus the following additional options:
 
-Set to `false` if you'd like to disable the ability to create new documents from within the relationship field (hides
-the "Add new" button in the admin UI).
+| Property                       | Description                                                                                                                              |
+| ------------------------------ | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`isSortable`**               | Set to `true` if you'd like this field to be sortable within the Admin UI using drag and drop (only works when `hasMany` is set to `true`). |
+| **`allowCreate`**              | Set to `false` if you'd like to disable the ability to create new documents from within the relationship field.                             |
+| **`sortOptions`**              | Define a default sorting order for the options within a Relationship field's dropdown. [More](#sortOptions)                                |
 
-**`sortOptions`**
-
-The `sortOptions` property allows you to define a default sorting order for the options within a Relationship field's
-dropdown. This can be particularly useful for ensuring that the most relevant options are presented first to the user.
+### Sort Options
 
 You can specify `sortOptions` in two ways:
 
@@ -122,7 +137,7 @@ In this configuration:
 
 Note: If `sortOptions` is not defined, the default sorting behavior of the Relationship field dropdown will be used.
 
-### Filtering relationship options
+## Filtering relationship options
 
 Options can be dynamically limited by supplying a [query constraint](/docs/queries/overview), which will be used both
 for validating input and filtering available relationships in the UI.
@@ -139,10 +154,10 @@ called with an argument object with the following properties:
 | `id`          | The `id` of the current document being edited. `id` is `undefined` during the `create` operation      |
 | `user`        | An object containing the currently authenticated user                                                 |
 
-### Example
+## Example
 
 ```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
 
 export const ExampleCollection: CollectionConfig = {
   slug: 'example-collection',
@@ -178,16 +193,16 @@ You can learn more about writing queries [here](/docs/queries/overview).
   When a relationship field has both <strong>filterOptions</strong> and a custom{' '}
   <strong>validate</strong> function, the api will not validate <strong>filterOptions</strong>{' '}
   unless you call the default relationship field validation function imported from{' '}
-  <strong>payload/fields/validations</strong> in your validate function.
+  <strong>payload/shared</strong> in your validate function.
 </Banner>
 
-### How the data is saved
+## How the data is saved
 
 Given the variety of options possible within the `relationship` field type, the shape of the data needed for creating
 and updating these fields can vary. The following sections will describe the variety of data shapes that can arise from
 this field.
 
-#### Has One
+### Has One
 
 The most simple pattern of a relationship is to use `hasMany: false` with a `relationTo` that allows for only one type
 of collection.
@@ -221,7 +236,7 @@ When querying documents in this collection via REST API, you could query as foll
 
 `?where[owner][equals]=6031ac9e1289176380734024`.
 
-#### Has One - Polymorphic
+### Has One - Polymorphic
 
 Also known as **dynamic references**, in this configuration, the `relationTo` field is an array of Collection slugs that
 tells Payload which Collections are valid to reference.
@@ -263,7 +278,7 @@ You can also query for documents where a field has a relationship to a specific
 
 This query would return only documents that have an owner relationship to organizations.
 
-#### Has Many
+### Has Many
 
 The `hasMany` tells Payload that there may be more than one collection saved to the field.
 
@@ -295,7 +310,7 @@ When querying documents, the format does not change for arrays:
 
 `?where[owners][equals]=6031ac9e1289176380734024`.
 
-#### Has Many - Polymorphic
+### Has Many - Polymorphic
 
 ```ts
 {
@@ -336,7 +351,7 @@ Querying is done in the same way as the earlier Polymorphic example:
 
 `?where[owners.value][equals]=6031ac9e1289176380734024`.
 
-#### Querying and Filtering Polymorphic Relationships
+### Querying and Filtering Polymorphic Relationships
 
 Polymorphic and non-polymorphic relationships must be queried differently because of how the related data is stored and
 may be inconsistent across different collections. Because of this, filtering polymorphic relationship fields from the

docs/fields/rich-text.mdx

@@ -3,19 +3,16 @@ title: Rich Text Field
 label: Rich Text
 order: 140
 desc: The Rich Text field allows dynamic content to be written through the Admin Panel. Learn how to use Rich Text fields, see examples and options.
-keywords: rich text, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, express
+keywords: rich text, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
 ---
 
-<Banner>
-  The Rich Text field is a powerful way to allow editors to write dynamic content. The content is
-  saved as JSON in the database and can be converted into any format, including HTML, that you need.
-</Banner>
+The Rich Text Field is a powerful way to allow editors to write dynamic content. The content is saved as JSON in the database and can be converted into any format, including HTML, that you need.
 
 <LightDarkImage
   srcLight="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/richtext.png"
   srcDark="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/richtext-dark.png"
-  alt="Shows a Rich Text field in the Payload admin panel"
-  caption="Admin panel screenshot of a Rich Text field"
+  alt="Shows a Rich Text field in the Payload Admin Panel"
+  caption="Admin Panel screenshot of a Rich Text field"
 />
 
 Payload's rich text field is built on an "adapter pattern" which lets you specify which rich text editor you'd like to use.
@@ -28,49 +25,61 @@ Right now, Payload is officially supporting two rich text editors:
 <Banner type="success">
   <strong>
     Consistent with Payload's goal of making you learn as little of Payload as possible, customizing
-    and using the Rich Text Editor does not involve learning how to develop for a <em>Payload</em>{' '}
+    and using the Rich Text Editor does not involve learning how to develop for a
+    {' '}
+    <em>Payload</em>
+    {' '}
     rich text editor.
-  </strong>{' '}
+  </strong>
+
   Instead, you can invest your time and effort into learning the underlying open-source tools that
   will allow you to apply your learnings elsewhere as well.
 </Banner>
 
-### Config
+## Config Options
 
-| Option             | Description                                                                                                                                             |
-| ------------------ | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`name`** \*      | To be used as the property name when stored and retrieved from the database. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-names)                                  |
-| **`label`**        | Text used as a field label in the Admin panel or an object with keys for each language.                                                                 |
-| **`validate`**     | Provide a custom validation function that will be executed on both the Admin panel and the backend. [More](/docs/fields/overview#validation)            |
-| **`saveToJWT`**    | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/config), include its data in the user JWT.           |
-| **`hooks`**        | Provide field-based hooks to control logic for this field. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-hooks)                                              |
-| **`access`**       | Provide field-based access control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-access-control) |
-| **`hidden`**       | Restrict this field's visibility from all APIs entirely. Will still be saved to the database, but will not appear in any API or the Admin panel.        |
-| **`defaultValue`** | Provide data to be used for this field's default value. [More](/docs/fields/overview#default-values)                                                    |
-| **`localized`**    | Enable localization for this field. Requires [localization to be enabled](/docs/configuration/localization) in the Base config.                         |
-| **`required`**     | Require this field to have a value.                                                                                                                     |
-| **`admin`**        | Admin-specific configuration. See below for [more detail](#admin-config).                                                                               |
-| **`editor`**       | Override the rich text editor specified in your base configuration for this field.                                                                      |
-| **`custom`**       | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                               |
+| Option                 | Description                                                                                                                                             |
+| ---------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`name`** \*          | To be used as the property name when stored and retrieved from the database. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-names)                                  |
+| **`label`**            | Text used as a field label in the Admin Panel or an object with keys for each language.                                                                 |
+| **`validate`**         | Provide a custom validation function that will be executed on both the Admin Panel and the backend. [More](/docs/fields/overview#validation)            |
+| **`saveToJWT`**        | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/overview), include its data in the user JWT.           |
+| **`hooks`**            | Provide Field Hooks to control logic for this field. [More details](../hooks/fields).                                                                                                                                                                         |
+| **`access`**           | Provide Field Access Control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More details](../access-control/fields).                                                                                                                                                  |
+| **`hidden`**           | Restrict this field's visibility from all APIs entirely. Will still be saved to the database, but will not appear in any API or the Admin Panel.        |
+| **`defaultValue`**     | Provide data to be used for this field's default value. [More](/docs/fields/overview#default-values)                                                    |
+| **`localized`**        | Enable localization for this field. Requires [localization to be enabled](/docs/configuration/localization) in the Base config.                         |
+| **`required`**         | Require this field to have a value.                                                                                                                     |
+| **`admin`**            | Admin-specific configuration. [More details](#admin-options).                                                                               |
+| **`editor`**           | Override the rich text editor specified in your base configuration for this field.                                                                      |
+| **`custom`**           | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                               |
+| **`typescriptSchema`** | Override field type generation with providing a JSON schema                                                                                             |
 
 _\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 
-### Admin config
+## Admin Options
 
-In addition to the default [field admin config](/docs/fields/overview#admin-config), the Rich Text editor allows for the following admin properties:
+The customize the appearance and behavior of the Rich Text Field in the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview), you can use the `admin` option:
 
-**`placeholder`**
+```ts
+import type { Field } from 'payload/types'
 
-Set this property to define a placeholder string in the text input.
+export const MyRichTextField: Field = {
+  // ...
+  admin: { // highlight-line
+    // ...
+  },
+}
+```
 
-**`hideGutter`**
+The Rich Text Field inherits all of the default options from the base [Field Admin Config](../admin/fields#admin-options), plus the following additional options:
 
-Set this property to `true` to hide this field's gutter within the admin panel. The field gutter is rendered as a vertical line and padding, but often if this field is nested within a Group, Block, or Array, you may want to hide the gutter.
+| Property                       | Description                                                                                                                            |
+| ------------------------------ | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`placeholder`**              | Set this property to define a placeholder string for the field.                                                                         |
+| **`hideGutter`**               | Set this property to `true` to hide this field's gutter within the Admin Panel.                                                         |
+| **`rtl`**                      | Override the default text direction of the Admin Panel for this field. Set to `true` to force right-to-left text direction.            |
 
-**`rtl`**
-
-Override the default text direction of the Admin panel for this field. Set to `true` to force right-to-left text direction.
-
-### Editor-specific options
+## Editor-specific Options
 
 For a ton more editor-specific options, including how to build custom rich text elements directly into your editor, take a look at either the [Slate docs](/docs/rich-text/slate) or the [Lexical docs](/docs/rich-text/lexical) depending on which editor you're using.

docs/fields/row.mdx

@@ -3,37 +3,50 @@ title: Row Field
 label: Row
 order: 150
 desc: With the Row field you can arrange fields next to each other in the Admin Panel to help you customize your Dashboard.
-keywords: row, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, express
+keywords: row, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
 ---
 
-<Banner>
-  The Row field is presentational-only and only affects the Admin panel. By using it, you can
-  arrange fields next to each other horizontally.
-</Banner>
+The Row Field is presentational-only and only affects the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview). By using it, you can arrange [Fields](./overview) next to each other horizontally.
 
 <LightDarkImage
   srcLight="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/row.png"
   srcDark="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/row-dark.png"
-  alt="Shows a row field in the Payload admin panel"
-  caption="Admin panel screenshot of a Row field"
+  alt="Shows a row field in the Payload Admin Panel"
+  caption="Admin Panel screenshot of a Row field"
 />
 
-### Config
+To add a Row Field, set the `type` to `row` in your [Field Config](./overview):
+
+```ts
+import type { Field } from 'payload/types'
+
+export const MyRowField: Field = {
+  // ...
+  // highlight-start
+  type: 'row',
+  fields: [
+    // ...
+  ]
+  // highlight-end
+}
+```
+
+## Config Options
 
 | Option          | Description                                                                                                                                                                |
 | --------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
 | **`fields`** \* | Array of field types to nest within this Row.                                                                                                                              |
-| **`admin`**     | Admin-specific configuration excluding `description`, `readOnly`, and `hidden`. See the [default field admin config](/docs/fields/overview#admin-config) for more details. |
+| **`admin`**     | Admin-specific configuration excluding `description`, `readOnly`, and `hidden`. [More details](../admin/fields#admin-options). |
 | **`custom`**    | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                                                  |
 
 _\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 
-### Example
+## Example
 
 `collections/ExampleCollection.ts`
 
 ```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
 
 export const ExampleCollection: CollectionConfig = {
   slug: 'example-collection',

docs/fields/select.mdx

@@ -3,73 +3,96 @@ title: Select Field
 label: Select
 order: 160
 desc: The Select field provides a dropdown-style interface for choosing options from a predefined list. Learn how to use Select fields, see examples and options.
-keywords: select, multi-select, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, express
+keywords: select, multi-select, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
 ---
 
-<Banner>
-  The Select field provides a dropdown-style interface for choosing options from a predefined list
-  as an enumeration.
-</Banner>
+The Select Field provides a dropdown-style interface for choosing options from a predefined list as an enumeration.
 
 <LightDarkImage
   srcLight="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/select.png"
   srcDark="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/select-dark.png"
-  alt="Shows a Select field in the Payload admin panel"
-  caption="Admin panel screenshot of a Select field"
+  alt="Shows a Select field in the Payload Admin Panel"
+  caption="Admin Panel screenshot of a Select field"
 />
 
-### Config
+To add a Select Field, set the `type` to `select` in your [Field Config](./overview):
 
-| Option             | Description                                                                                                                                                                 |
-| ------------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`name`** \*      | To be used as the property name when stored and retrieved from the database. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-names)                                                      |
-| **`options`** \*   | Array of options to allow the field to store. Can either be an array of strings, or an array of objects containing a `label` string and a `value` string.                   |
-| **`hasMany`**      | Boolean when, if set to `true`, allows this field to have many selections instead of only one.                                                                              |
-| **`label`**        | Text used as a field label in the Admin panel or an object with keys for each language.                                                                                     |
-| **`unique`**       | Enforce that each entry in the Collection has a unique value for this field.                                                                                                |
-| **`validate`**     | Provide a custom validation function that will be executed on both the Admin panel and the backend. [More](/docs/fields/overview#validation)                                |
-| **`index`**        | Build an [index](/docs/database/overview) for this field to produce faster queries. Set this field to `true` if your users will perform queries on this field's data often. |
-| **`saveToJWT`**    | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/config), include its data in the user JWT.                               |
-| **`hooks`**        | Provide field-based hooks to control logic for this field. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-hooks)                                                                  |
-| **`access`**       | Provide field-based access control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-access-control)                     |
-| **`hidden`**       | Restrict this field's visibility from all APIs entirely. Will still be saved to the database, but will not appear in any API or the Admin panel.                            |
-| **`defaultValue`** | Provide data to be used for this field's default value. [More](/docs/fields/overview#default-values)                                                                        |
-| **`localized`**    | Enable localization for this field. Requires [localization to be enabled](/docs/configuration/localization) in the Base config.                                             |
-| **`required`**     | Require this field to have a value.                                                                                                                                         |
-| **`admin`**        | Admin-specific configuration. See the [default field admin config](/docs/fields/overview#admin-config) for more details.                                                    |
-| **`custom`**       | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                                                   |
-| **`enumName`**     | Custom enum name for this field when using SQL database adapter ([Postgres](/docs/database/postgres)). Auto-generated from name if not defined.                               |
-| **`dbName`**       | Custom table name (if `hasMany` set to `true`) for this field when using SQL database adapter ([Postgres](/docs/database/postgres)). Auto-generated from name if not defined. |
+```ts
+import type { Field } from 'payload/types'
+
+export const MySelectField: Field = {
+  // ...
+  // highlight-start
+  type: 'select',
+  options: [
+    // ...
+  ]
+  // highlight-end
+}
+```
+
+## Config Options
+
+| Option                 | Description                                                                                                                                                                   |
+| ---------------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`name`** \*          | To be used as the property name when stored and retrieved from the database. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-names)                                                        |
+| **`options`** \*       | Array of options to allow the field to store. Can either be an array of strings, or an array of objects containing a `label` string and a `value` string.                     |
+| **`hasMany`**          | Boolean when, if set to `true`, allows this field to have many selections instead of only one.                                                                                |
+| **`label`**            | Text used as a field label in the Admin Panel or an object with keys for each language.                                                                                       |
+| **`unique`**           | Enforce that each entry in the Collection has a unique value for this field.                                                                                                  |
+| **`validate`**         | Provide a custom validation function that will be executed on both the Admin Panel and the backend. [More](/docs/fields/overview#validation)                                  |
+| **`index`**            | Build an [index](/docs/database/overview) for this field to produce faster queries. Set this field to `true` if your users will perform queries on this field's data often.   |
+| **`saveToJWT`**        | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/overview), include its data in the user JWT.                                 |
+| **`hooks`**            | Provide Field Hooks to control logic for this field. [More details](../hooks/fields).                                                                                                                                                                         |
+| **`access`**           | Provide Field Access Control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More details](../access-control/fields).                                                                                                                                                  |
+| **`hidden`**           | Restrict this field's visibility from all APIs entirely. Will still be saved to the database, but will not appear in any API or the Admin Panel.                              |
+| **`defaultValue`**     | Provide data to be used for this field's default value. [More](/docs/fields/overview#default-values)                                                                          |
+| **`localized`**        | Enable localization for this field. Requires [localization to be enabled](/docs/configuration/localization) in the Base config.                                               |
+| **`required`**         | Require this field to have a value.                                                                                                                                           |
+| **`admin`**            | Admin-specific configuration. See the [default field admin config](/docs/fields/overview#admin-options) for more details.                                                      |
+| **`custom`**           | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                                                     |
+| **`enumName`**         | Custom enum name for this field when using SQL Database Adapter ([Postgres](/docs/database/postgres)). Auto-generated from name if not defined.                               |
+| **`dbName`**           | Custom table name (if `hasMany` set to `true`) for this field when using SQL Database Adapter ([Postgres](/docs/database/postgres)). Auto-generated from name if not defined. |
+| **`typescriptSchema`** | Override field type generation with providing a JSON schema                                                                                                                   |
 
 _\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 
 <Banner type="warning">
   <strong>Important:</strong>
-  <br />
   Option values should be strings that do not contain hyphens or special characters due to GraphQL
   enumeration naming constraints. Underscores are allowed. If you determine you need your option
   values to be non-strings or contain special characters, they will be formatted accordingly before
   being used as a GraphQL enum.
 </Banner>
 
-### Admin config
+## Admin Options
 
-In addition to the default [field admin config](/docs/fields/overview#admin-config), the Select field type also allows for the following admin-specific properties:
+The customize the appearance and behavior of the Select Field in the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview), you can use the `admin` option:
 
-**`isClearable`**
+```ts
+import type { Field } from 'payload/types'
 
-Set to `true` if you'd like this field to be clearable within the Admin UI.
+export const MySelectField: Field = {
+  // ...
+  admin: { // highlight-line
+    // ...
+  },
+}
+```
 
-**`isSortable`**
+The Select Field inherits all of the default options from the base [Field Admin Config](../admin/fields#admin-options), plus the following additional options:
 
-Set to `true` if you'd like this field to be sortable within the Admin UI using drag and drop. (Only works when `hasMany` is set to `true`)
+| Property                       | Description                                                                                                                              |
+| ------------------------------ | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`isClearable`**              | Set to `true` if you'd like this field to be clearable within the Admin UI.                                                              |
+| **`isSortable`**               | Set to `true` if you'd like this field to be sortable within the Admin UI using drag and drop. (Only works when `hasMany` is set to `true`) |
 
-### Example
+## Example
 
 `collections/ExampleCollection.ts`
 
 ```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
 
 export const ExampleCollection: CollectionConfig = {
   slug: 'example-collection',
@@ -101,7 +124,7 @@ export const ExampleCollection: CollectionConfig = {
 }
 ```
 
-### Customization
+## Customization
 
 The Select field UI component can be customized by providing a custom React component to the `components` object in the Base config.
 

docs/fields/tabs.mdx

@@ -3,31 +3,43 @@ title: Tabs Field
 label: Tabs
 order: 170
 desc: The Tabs field is a great way to organize complex editing experiences into specific tab-based areas.
-keywords: tabs, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, express
+keywords: tabs, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
 ---
 
-<Banner>
-  The Tabs field is presentational-only and only affects the Admin panel (unless a tab is named). By
-  using it, you can place fields within a nice layout component that separates certain sub-fields by
-  a tabbed interface.
-</Banner>
+The Tabs Field is presentational-only and only affects the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview) (unless a tab is named). By using it, you can place fields within a nice layout component that separates certain sub-fields by a tabbed interface.
 
 <LightDarkImage
   srcLight="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/tabs.png"
   srcDark="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/tabs-dark.png"
-  alt="Shows a tabs field used to separate Hero and Page layout in the Payload admin panel"
+  alt="Shows a tabs field used to separate Hero and Page layout in the Payload Admin Panel"
   caption="Tabs field type used to separate Hero fields from Page Layout"
 />
 
-### Config
+To add a Tabs Field, set the `type` to `tabs` in your [Field Config](./overview):
+
+```ts
+import type { Field } from 'payload/types'
+
+export const MyTabsField: Field = {
+  // ...
+  // highlight-start
+  type: 'tabs',
+  tabs: [
+    // ...
+  ]
+  // highlight-end
+}
+```
+
+## Config Options
 
 | Option        | Description                                                                                                              |
 | ------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ |
 | **`tabs`** \* | Array of tabs to render within this Tabs field.                                                                          |
-| **`admin`**   | Admin-specific configuration. See the [default field admin config](/docs/fields/overview#admin-config) for more details. |
+| **`admin`**   | Admin-specific configuration. [More details](../admin/fields#admin-options). |
 | **`custom`**  | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                |
 
-#### Tab-specific Config
+### Tab-specific Config
 
 Each tab must have either a `name` or `label` and the required `fields` array. You can also optionally pass a `description` to render within each individual tab.
 
@@ -41,12 +53,12 @@ Each tab must have either a `name` or `label` and the required `fields` array. Y
 
 _\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 
-### Example
+## Example
 
 `collections/ExampleCollection.ts`
 
 ```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
 
 export const ExampleCollection: CollectionConfig = {
   slug: 'example-collection',

docs/fields/text.mdx

@@ -2,70 +2,86 @@
 title: Text Field
 label: Text
 order: 180
-desc: Text field types simply save a string to the database and provide the Admin panel with a text input. Learn how to use Text fields, see examples and options.
-keywords: text, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, express
+desc: Text field types simply save a string to the database and provide the Admin Panel with a text input. Learn how to use Text fields, see examples and options.
+keywords: text, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
 ---
 
-<Banner>
-  The Text field type is one of the most commonly used fields. It saves a string to the database and
-  provides the Admin panel with a simple text input.
-</Banner>
+The Text Field is one of the most commonly used fields. It saves a string to the database and provides the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview) with a simple text input.
 
 <LightDarkImage
   srcLight="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/text.png"
   srcDark="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/text-dark.png"
-  alt="Shows a text field and read-only text field in the Payload admin panel"
-  caption="Admin panel screenshot of a Text field and read-only Text field"
+  alt="Shows a text field and read-only text field in the Payload Admin Panel"
+  caption="Admin Panel screenshot of a Text field and read-only Text field"
 />
 
-### Config
+To add a Text Field, set the `type` to `text` in your [Field Config](./overview):
 
-| Option             | Description                                                                                                                                                                 |
-| ------------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`name`** \*      | To be used as the property name when stored and retrieved from the database. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-names)                                                      |
-| **`label`**        | Text used as a field label in the Admin panel or an object with keys for each language.                                                                                     |
-| **`unique`**       | Enforce that each entry in the Collection has a unique value for this field.                                                                                                |
-| **`minLength`**    | Used by the default validation function to ensure values are of a minimum character length.                                                                                 |
-| **`maxLength`**    | Used by the default validation function to ensure values are of a maximum character length.                                                                                 |
-| **`validate`**     | Provide a custom validation function that will be executed on both the Admin panel and the backend. [More](/docs/fields/overview#validation)                                |
-| **`index`**        | Build an [index](/docs/database/overview) for this field to produce faster queries. Set this field to `true` if your users will perform queries on this field's data often. |
-| **`saveToJWT`**    | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/config), include its data in the user JWT.                               |
-| **`hooks`**        | Provide field-based hooks to control logic for this field. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-hooks)                                                                  |
-| **`access`**       | Provide field-based access control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-access-control)                     |
-| **`hidden`**       | Restrict this field's visibility from all APIs entirely. Will still be saved to the database, but will not appear in any API or the Admin panel.                            |
-| **`defaultValue`** | Provide data to be used for this field's default value. [More](/docs/fields/overview#default-values)                                                                        |
-| **`localized`**    | Enable localization for this field. Requires [localization to be enabled](/docs/configuration/localization) in the Base config.                                             |
-| **`required`**     | Require this field to have a value.                                                                                                                                         |
-| **`admin`**        | Admin-specific configuration. See below for [more detail](#admin-config).                                                                                                   |
-| **`custom`**       | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                                                   |
-| **`hasMany`**      | Makes this field an ordered array of text instead of just a single text.                                                                                                    |
-| **`minRows`**      | Minimum number of texts in the array, if `hasMany` is set to true.                                                                                                          |
-| **`maxRows`**      | Maximum number of texts in the array, if `hasMany` is set to true.                                                                                                          |
+```ts
+import type { Field } from 'payload/types'
+
+export const MyTextField: Field = {
+  // ...
+  type: 'text', // highlight-line
+}
+```
+
+## Config Options
+
+| Option                 | Description                                                                                                                                                                 |
+| ---------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`name`** \*          | To be used as the property name when stored and retrieved from the database. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-names)                                                      |
+| **`label`**            | Text used as a field label in the Admin Panel or an object with keys for each language.                                                                                     |
+| **`unique`**           | Enforce that each entry in the Collection has a unique value for this field.                                                                                                |
+| **`minLength`**        | Used by the default validation function to ensure values are of a minimum character length.                                                                                 |
+| **`maxLength`**        | Used by the default validation function to ensure values are of a maximum character length.                                                                                 |
+| **`validate`**         | Provide a custom validation function that will be executed on both the Admin Panel and the backend. [More](/docs/fields/overview#validation)                                |
+| **`index`**            | Build an [index](/docs/database/overview) for this field to produce faster queries. Set this field to `true` if your users will perform queries on this field's data often. |
+| **`saveToJWT`**        | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/overview), include its data in the user JWT.                               |
+| **`hooks`**            | Provide Field Hooks to control logic for this field. [More details](../hooks/fields).                                                                                                                                                                         |
+| **`access`**           | Provide Field Access Control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More details](../access-control/fields).                                                                                                                                                  |
+| **`hidden`**           | Restrict this field's visibility from all APIs entirely. Will still be saved to the database, but will not appear in any API or the Admin Panel.                            |
+| **`defaultValue`**     | Provide data to be used for this field's default value. [More](/docs/fields/overview#default-values)                                                                        |
+| **`localized`**        | Enable localization for this field. Requires [localization to be enabled](/docs/configuration/localization) in the Base config.                                             |
+| **`required`**         | Require this field to have a value.                                                                                                                                         |
+| **`admin`**            | Admin-specific configuration. [More details](#admin-options).                                                                                                   |
+| **`custom`**           | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                                                   |
+| **`hasMany`**          | Makes this field an ordered array of text instead of just a single text.                                                                                                    |
+| **`minRows`**          | Minimum number of texts in the array, if `hasMany` is set to true.                                                                                                          |
+| **`maxRows`**          | Maximum number of texts in the array, if `hasMany` is set to true.                                                                                                          |
+| **`typescriptSchema`** | Override field type generation with providing a JSON schema                                                                                                                 |
 
 _\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 
-### Admin config
+## Admin Options
 
-In addition to the default [field admin config](/docs/fields/overview#admin-config), the Text field type allows for the following `admin` properties:
+The customize the appearance and behavior of the Text Field in the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview), you can use the `admin` option:
 
-**`placeholder`**
+```ts
+import type { Field } from 'payload/types'
 
-Set this property to define a placeholder string in the text input.
+export const MyTextField: Field = {
+  // ...
+  admin: { // highlight-line
+    // ...
+  },
+}
+```
 
-**`autoComplete`**
+The Text Field inherits all of the default options from the base [Field Admin Config](../admin/fields#admin-options), plus the following additional options:
 
-Set this property to a string that will be used for browser autocomplete.
+| Option         | Description                                                                                                      |
+| -------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`placeholder`** | Set this property to define a placeholder string in the text input.                                              |
+| **`autoComplete`** | Set this property to a string that will be used for browser autocomplete.                                        |
+| **`rtl`**        | Override the default text direction of the Admin Panel for this field. Set to `true` to force right-to-left text direction. |
 
-**`rtl`**
-
-Override the default text direction of the Admin panel for this field. Set to `true` to force right-to-left text direction.
-
-### Example
+## Example
 
 `collections/ExampleCollection.ts`
 
 ```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
 
 export const ExampleCollection: CollectionConfig = {
   slug: 'example-collection',

docs/fields/textarea.mdx

@@ -3,66 +3,82 @@ title: Textarea Field
 label: Textarea
 order: 190
 desc: Textarea field types save a string to the database, similar to the Text field type but equipped for longer text. Learn how to use Textarea fields, see examples and options.
-keywords: textarea, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, express
+keywords: textarea, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
 ---
 
-<Banner>
-  The Textarea field is almost identical to the Text field but it features a slightly larger input
-  that is better suited to edit longer text.
-</Banner>
+The Textarea Field is nearly identical to the [Text Field](./text) but it features a slightly larger input that is better suited to edit longer text.
 
 <LightDarkImage
   srcLight="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/textarea.png"
   srcDark="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/textarea-dark.png"
-  alt="Shows a textarea field and read-only textarea field in the Payload admin panel"
-  caption="Admin panel screenshot of a Textarea field and read-only Textarea field"
+  alt="Shows a textarea field and read-only textarea field in the Payload Admin Panel"
+  caption="Admin Panel screenshot of a Textarea field and read-only Textarea field"
 />
 
-### Config
+To add a Textarea Field, set the `type` to `textarea` in your [Field Config](./overview):
 
-| Option             | Description                                                                                                                                                                 |
-| ------------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`name`** \*      | To be used as the property name when stored and retrieved from the database. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-names)                                                      |
-| **`label`**        | Text used as a field label in the Admin panel or an object with keys for each language.                                                                                     |
-| **`unique`**       | Enforce that each entry in the Collection has a unique value for this field.                                                                                                |
-| **`minLength`**    | Used by the default validation function to ensure values are of a minimum character length.                                                                                 |
-| **`maxLength`**    | Used by the default validation function to ensure values are of a maximum character length.                                                                                 |
-| **`validate`**     | Provide a custom validation function that will be executed on both the Admin panel and the backend. [More](/docs/fields/overview#validation)                                |
-| **`index`**        | Build an [index](/docs/database/overview) for this field to produce faster queries. Set this field to `true` if your users will perform queries on this field's data often. |
-| **`saveToJWT`**    | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/config), include its data in the user JWT.                               |
-| **`hooks`**        | Provide field-based hooks to control logic for this field. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-hooks)                                                                  |
-| **`access`**       | Provide field-based access control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-access-control)                     |
-| **`hidden`**       | Restrict this field's visibility from all APIs entirely. Will still be saved to the database, but will not appear in any API or the Admin panel.                            |
-| **`defaultValue`** | Provide data to be used for this field's default value. [More](/docs/fields/overview#default-values)                                                                        |
-| **`localized`**    | Enable localization for this field. Requires [localization to be enabled](/docs/configuration/localization) in the Base config.                                             |
-| **`required`**     | Require this field to have a value.                                                                                                                                         |
-| **`admin`**        | Admin-specific configuration. See below for [more detail](#admin-config).                                                                                                   |
-| **`custom`**       | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                                                   |
+```ts
+import type { Field } from 'payload/types'
+
+export const MyTextareaField: Field = {
+  // ...
+  type: 'textarea', // highlight-line
+}
+```
+
+## Config Options
+
+| Option                 | Description                                                                                                                                                                 |
+| ---------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`name`** \*          | To be used as the property name when stored and retrieved from the database. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-names)                                                      |
+| **`label`**            | Text used as a field label in the Admin Panel or an object with keys for each language.                                                                                     |
+| **`unique`**           | Enforce that each entry in the Collection has a unique value for this field.                                                                                                |
+| **`minLength`**        | Used by the default validation function to ensure values are of a minimum character length.                                                                                 |
+| **`maxLength`**        | Used by the default validation function to ensure values are of a maximum character length.                                                                                 |
+| **`validate`**         | Provide a custom validation function that will be executed on both the Admin Panel and the backend. [More](/docs/fields/overview#validation)                                |
+| **`index`**            | Build an [index](/docs/database/overview) for this field to produce faster queries. Set this field to `true` if your users will perform queries on this field's data often. |
+| **`saveToJWT`**        | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/overview), include its data in the user JWT.                               |
+| **`hooks`**            | Provide Field Hooks to control logic for this field. [More details](../hooks/fields).                                                                                                                                                                         |
+| **`access`**           | Provide Field Access Control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More details](../access-control/fields).                                                                                                                                                  |
+| **`hidden`**           | Restrict this field's visibility from all APIs entirely. Will still be saved to the database, but will not appear in any API or the Admin Panel.                            |
+| **`defaultValue`**     | Provide data to be used for this field's default value. [More](/docs/fields/overview#default-values)                                                                        |
+| **`localized`**        | Enable localization for this field. Requires [localization to be enabled](/docs/configuration/localization) in the Base config.                                             |
+| **`required`**         | Require this field to have a value.                                                                                                                                         |
+| **`admin`**            | Admin-specific configuration. [More details](#admin-options).                                                                                                   |
+| **`custom`**           | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                                                   |
+| **`typescriptSchema`** | Override field type generation with providing a JSON schema                                                                                                                 |
 
 _\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 
-### Admin config
+## Admin Options
 
-In addition to the default [field admin config](/docs/fields/overview#admin-config), the Textarea field type allows for the following `admin` properties:
+The customize the appearance and behavior of the Textarea Field in the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview), you can use the `admin` option:
 
-**`placeholder`**
+```ts
+import type { Field } from 'payload/types'
 
-Set this property to define a placeholder string in the textarea.
+export const MyTextareaField: Field = {
+  // ...
+  admin: { // highlight-line
+    // ...
+  },
+}
+```
 
-**`autoComplete`**
+The Textarea Field inherits all of the default options from the base [Field Admin Config](../admin/fields#admin-options), plus the following additional options:
 
-Set this property to a string that will be used for browser autocomplete.
+| Option         | Description                                                                                                      |
+| -------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`placeholder`** | Set this property to define a placeholder string in the textarea.                                               |
+| **`autoComplete`** | Set this property to a string that will be used for browser autocomplete.                                      |
+| **`rtl`** | Override the default text direction of the Admin Panel for this field. Set to `true` to force right-to-left text direction. |
 
-**`rtl`**
-
-Override the default text direction of the Admin panel for this field. Set to `true` to force right-to-left text direction.
-
-### Example
+## Example
 
 `collections/ExampleCollection.ts`
 
 ```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
 
 export const ExampleCollection: CollectionConfig = {
   slug: 'example-collection',

docs/fields/ui.mdx

@@ -2,45 +2,49 @@
 title: UI Field
 label: UI
 order: 200
-desc: UI fields are purely presentational and allow developers to customize the admin panel to a very fine degree, including adding actions and other functions.
-keywords: custom field, react component, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, express
+desc: UI fields are purely presentational and allow developers to customize the Admin Panel to a very fine degree, including adding actions and other functions.
+keywords: custom field, react component, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
 ---
 
-<Banner>
-  The UI (user interface) field gives you a ton of power to add your own React components directly
-  into the Admin panel, nested directly within your other fields. It has absolutely no effect on the
-  data of your documents. It is presentational-only.
-</Banner>
+The UI (user interface) Field gives you a ton of power to add your own React components directly into the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview), nested directly within your other fields. It has absolutely no effect on the data of your documents. It is presentational-only. Think of it as a way for you to "plug in" your own React components directly within your other fields, so you can provide your editors with new controls exactly where you want them to go.
 
-This field is helpful if you need to build in custom functionality via React components within the Admin panel. Think of it as a way for you to "plug in" your own React components directly within your other fields, so you can provide your editors with new controls exactly where you want them to go.
+With the UI Field, you can:
 
-With this field, you can also inject custom `Cell` components that appear as additional columns within collections' List views.
-
-**Example uses:**
-
-- Add a custom message or block of text within the body of an Edit view to describe the purpose of surrounding fields
-- Add a "Refund" button to an Order's Edit view sidebar, which might make a fetch call to a custom `refund` endpoint
-- Add a "view page" button into a Pages List view to give editors a shortcut to view a page on the frontend of the site
+- Add a custom message or block of text within the body of an Edit View to describe the purpose of surrounding fields
+- Add a "Refund" button to an Order's Edit View sidebar, which might make a fetch call to a custom `refund` endpoint
+- Add a "view page" button into a Pages List View to give editors a shortcut to view a page on the frontend of the site
 - Build a "clear cache" button or similar mechanism to manually clear caches of specific documents
 
-### Config
+To add a UI Field, set the `type` to `ui` in your [Field Config](./overview):
+
+```ts
+import type { Field } from 'payload/types'
+
+export const MyUIField: Field = {
+  // ...
+  type: 'ui', // highlight-line
+}
+```
+
+## Config Options
 
 | Option                          | Description                                                                                                            |
 | ------------------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
 | **`name`** \*                   | A unique identifier for this field.                                                                                    |
 | **`label`**                     | Human-readable label for this UI field.                                                                                |
-| **`admin.components.Field`** \* | React component to be rendered for this field within the Edit view. [More](/docs/admin/components/#field-component)    |
-| **`admin.components.Cell`**     | React component to be rendered as a Cell within collection List views. [More](/docs/admin/components/#field-component) |
+| **`admin.components.Field`** \* | React component to be rendered for this field within the Edit View. [More](../admin/components/#field-component)    |
+| **`admin.components.Cell`**     | React component to be rendered as a Cell within collection List views. [More](../admin/components/#field-component) |
+| **`admin.disableListColumn`**   | Set `disableListColumn` to `true` to prevent the UI field from appearing in the list view column selector.             |
 | **`custom`**                    | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                              |
 
 _\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 
-### Example
+## Example
 
 `collections/ExampleCollection.ts`
 
 ```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
 
 export const ExampleCollection: CollectionConfig = {
   slug: 'example-collection',

docs/fields/upload.mdx

@@ -3,65 +3,75 @@ title: Upload Field
 label: Upload
 order: 210
 desc: Upload fields will allow a file to be uploaded, only from a collection supporting Uploads. Learn how to use Upload fields, see examples and options.
-keywords: upload, images media, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, express
+keywords: upload, images media, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
 ---
 
-<Banner>
-  The Upload field allows for the selection of a Document from a collection supporting Uploads, and
-  formats the selection as a thumbnail in the Admin panel.
-</Banner>
+The Upload Field allows for the selection of a Document from a Collection supporting [Uploads](../upload/overview), and formats the selection as a thumbnail in the Admin Panel.
 
-<Banner type="warning">
-  <strong>Important:</strong>
-  <br />
-  To use this field, you need to have a Collection configured to allow Uploads. For more
-  information, [click here](/docs/upload/overview) to read about how to enable Uploads on a
-  collection by collection basis.
-</Banner>
-
-<LightDarkImage
-  srcLight="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/upload.png"
-  srcDark="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/upload-dark.png"
-  alt="Shows an upload field in the Payload admin panel"
-  caption="Admin panel screenshot of an Upload field"
-/>
-
-**Example uses:**
+Upload fields are useful for a variety of use cases, such as:
 
 - To provide a `Page` with a featured image
 - To allow for a `Product` to deliver a downloadable asset like PDF or MP3
 - To give a layout building block the ability to feature a background image
 
-### Config
+<LightDarkImage
+  srcLight="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/upload.png"
+  srcDark="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/upload-dark.png"
+  alt="Shows an upload field in the Payload Admin Panel"
+  caption="Admin Panel screenshot of an Upload field"
+/>
 
-| Option               | Description                                                                                                                                                                 |
-| -------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`name`** \*        | To be used as the property name when stored and retrieved from the database. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-names)                                                      |
-| **`*relationTo`** \* | Provide a single collection `slug` to allow this field to accept a relation to. <strong>Note: the related collection must be configured to support Uploads.</strong>        |
-| **`filterOptions`**  | A query to filter which options appear in the UI and validate against. [More](#filtering-upload-options).                                                                   |
-| **`maxDepth`**       | Sets a number limit on iterations of related documents to populate when queried. [Depth](/docs/getting-started/concepts#depth)                                              |
-| **`label`**          | Text used as a field label in the Admin panel or an object with keys for each language.                                                                                     |
-| **`unique`**         | Enforce that each entry in the Collection has a unique value for this field.                                                                                                |
-| **`validate`**       | Provide a custom validation function that will be executed on both the Admin panel and the backend. [More](/docs/fields/overview#validation)                                |
-| **`index`**          | Build an [index](/docs/database/overview) for this field to produce faster queries. Set this field to `true` if your users will perform queries on this field's data often. |
-| **`saveToJWT`**      | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/config), include its data in the user JWT.                               |
-| **`hooks`**          | Provide field-based hooks to control logic for this field. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-hooks)                                                                  |
-| **`access`**         | Provide field-based access control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-access-control)                     |
-| **`hidden`**         | Restrict this field's visibility from all APIs entirely. Will still be saved to the database, but will not appear in any API or the Admin panel.                            |
-| **`defaultValue`**   | Provide data to be used for this field's default value. [More](/docs/fields/overview#default-values)                                                                        |
-| **`localized`**      | Enable localization for this field. Requires [localization to be enabled](/docs/configuration/localization) in the Base config.                                             |
-| **`required`**       | Require this field to have a value.                                                                                                                                         |
-| **`admin`**          | Admin-specific configuration. See the [default field admin config](/docs/fields/overview#admin-config) for more details.                                                    |
-| **`custom`**         | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                                                   |
+To create an Upload Field, set the `type` to `upload` in your [Field Config](./overview):
+
+```ts
+import type { Field } from 'payload/types'
+
+export const MyUploadField: Field = {
+  // ...
+  // highlight-start
+  type: 'upload',
+  relationTo: 'media',
+  // highlight-end
+}
+```
+
+<Banner type="warning">
+  <strong>Important:</strong>
+  To use the Upload Field, you must have a [Collection](../configuration/collections) configured to allow [Uploads](../upload/overview).
+</Banner>
+
+## Config Options
+
+| Option                 | Description                                                                                                                                                                 |
+| ---------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`name`** \*          | To be used as the property name when stored and retrieved from the database. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-names)                                                      |
+| **`*relationTo`** \*   | Provide a single collection `slug` to allow this field to accept a relation to. <strong>Note: the related collection must be configured to support Uploads.</strong>        |
+| **`filterOptions`**    | A query to filter which options appear in the UI and validate against. [More](#filtering-upload-options).                                                                   |
+| **`maxDepth`**         | Sets a number limit on iterations of related documents to populate when queried. [Depth](../queries/depth)                                              |
+| **`label`**            | Text used as a field label in the Admin Panel or an object with keys for each language.                                                                                     |
+| **`unique`**           | Enforce that each entry in the Collection has a unique value for this field.                                                                                                |
+| **`validate`**         | Provide a custom validation function that will be executed on both the Admin Panel and the backend. [More](/docs/fields/overview#validation)                                |
+| **`index`**            | Build an [index](/docs/database/overview) for this field to produce faster queries. Set this field to `true` if your users will perform queries on this field's data often. |
+| **`saveToJWT`**        | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/overview), include its data in the user JWT.                               |
+| **`hooks`**            | Provide Field Hooks to control logic for this field. [More details](../hooks/fields).                                                                                                                                                                         |
+| **`access`**           | Provide Field Access Control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More details](../access-control/fields).                                                                                                                                                  |
+| **`hidden`**           | Restrict this field's visibility from all APIs entirely. Will still be saved to the database, but will not appear in any API or the Admin Panel.                            |
+| **`defaultValue`**     | Provide data to be used for this field's default value. [More](/docs/fields/overview#default-values)                                                                        |
+| **`displayPreview`**   | Enable displaying preview of the uploaded file. Overrides related Collection's `displayPreview` option. [More](/docs/upload/overview#collection-upload-options).            |
+| **`localized`**        | Enable localization for this field. Requires [localization to be enabled](/docs/configuration/localization) in the Base config.                                             |
+| **`required`**         | Require this field to have a value.                                                                                                                                         |
+| **`admin`**            | Admin-specific configuration. [Admin Options](../admin/fields#admin-options).                                                    |
+| **`custom`**           | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                                                   |
+| **`typescriptSchema`** | Override field type generation with providing a JSON schema                                                                                                                 |
 
 _\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 
-### Example
+## Example
 
 `collections/ExampleCollection.ts`
 
 ```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
 
 export const ExampleCollection: CollectionConfig = {
   slug: 'example-collection',
@@ -76,7 +86,7 @@ export const ExampleCollection: CollectionConfig = {
 }
 ```
 
-### Filtering upload options
+## Filtering upload options
 
 Options can be dynamically limited by supplying a [query constraint](/docs/queries/overview), which will be used both
 for validating input and filtering available uploads in the UI.
@@ -93,7 +103,7 @@ called with an argument object with the following properties:
 | `id`          | The `id` of the current document being edited. `id` is `undefined` during the `create` operation      |
 | `user`        | An object containing the currently authenticated user                                                 |
 
-### Example
+## Example
 
 ```ts
 const uploadField = {
@@ -114,5 +124,5 @@ You can learn more about writing queries [here](/docs/queries/overview).
   When an upload field has both <strong>filterOptions</strong> and a custom{' '}
   <strong>validate</strong> function, the api will not validate <strong>filterOptions</strong>{' '}
   unless you call the default upload field validation function imported from{' '}
-  <strong>payload/fields/validations</strong> in your validate function.
+  <strong>payload/shared</strong> in your validate function.
 </Banner>

docs/getting-started/concepts.mdx

@@ -3,162 +3,174 @@ title: Payload Concepts
 label: Concepts
 order: 20
 desc: Payload is based around a small and intuitive set of concepts. Key concepts include collections, globals, fields and more.
-keywords: documentation, getting started, guide, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, express
+keywords: documentation, getting started, guide, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
 ---
 
-Payload is based around a small and intuitive set of concepts. Before starting to work with Payload, it's a good idea to familiarize yourself with the following:
+Payload is based around a small and intuitive set of high-level concepts. Before starting to work with Payload, it's a good idea to familiarize yourself with these concepts in order to establish a common language and understanding when discussing Payload.
 
-### Config
+## Config
 
-<Banner type="info">The Payload config is where you configure everything that Payload does.</Banner>
+The Payload Config is central to everything that Payload does. It allows for the deep configuration of your application through a simple and intuitive API. The Payload Config is a fully-typed JavaScript object that can be infinitely extended upon. [More details](../configuration/overview).
 
-By default, the Payload config lives in the root folder of your code and is named `payload.config.js` (`payload.config.ts` if you're using TypeScript), but you can customize its name and where you store it. You can write full functions and even full React components right into your config.
+## Database
 
-### Collections
+Payload is database agnostic, meaning you can use any type of database behind Payload's familiar APIs through what is known as a Database Adapter. [More details](../database/overview).
 
-<Banner type="info">
-  A Collection represents a type of content that Payload will store and can contain many documents.
+## Collections
+
+A Collection is a group of records, called Documents, that all share a common schema. Each Collection is stored in the [Database](../database/overview) based on the [Fields](../fields/overview) that you define. [More details](../configuration/collections).
+
+## Globals
+
+Globals are in many ways similar to [Collections](../configuration/collections), except they correspond to only a single Document. Each Global is stored in the [Database](../database/overview) based on the [Fields](../fields/overview) that you define. [More details](../configuration/globals).
+
+## Fields
+
+Fields are the building blocks of Payload. They define the schema of the Documents that will be stored in the [Database](../database/overview), as well as automatically generate the corresponding UI within the Admin Panel. [More details](../fields/overview).
+
+## Hooks
+
+Hooks allow you to execute your own side effects during specific events of the Document lifecycle, such as before read, after create, etc. [More details](../hooks/overview).
+
+## Authentication
+
+Payload provides a secure, portable way to manage user accounts out of the box. Payload Authentication is designed to be used in both the Admin Panel, all well as your own external applications. [More details](../authentication/overview).
+
+## Access Control
+
+Access Control determines what a user can and cannot do with any given Document, such as read, update, etc., as well as what they can and cannot see within the Admin Panel. [More details](../access-control/overview).
+
+## Admin Panel
+
+Payload dynamically generates a beautiful, fully type-safe interface to manage your users and data. The Admin Panel is a React application built using the Next.js App Router. [More details](../admin/overview).
+
+## Retrieving Data
+
+Everything Payload does (create, read, update, delete, login, logout, etc.) is exposed to you via three APIs:
+
+- [Local API](#local-api) - Extremely fast, direct-to-database access
+- [REST API](#rest-api) - Standard HTTP endpoints for querying and mutating data
+- [GraphQL](#graphql) - A full GraphQL API with a GraphQL Playground
+
+<Banner type="success">
+  <strong>Note:</strong>
+  All of these APIs share the exact same query language. [More details](../queries/overview).
 </Banner>
 
-Collections define the shape of your data as well as all functionalities attached to that data. They will contain one or many "documents", all corresponding with the same fields and functionalities that you define.
+### Local API
 
-They can represent anything you can store in a database - for example - pages, posts, users, people, orders, categories, events, customers, transactions, and anything else your app needs.
+By far one of the most powerful aspects of Payload is the fact that it gives you direct-to-database access to your data through the [Local API](../local-api/overview). It's _extremely_ fast and does not incur any typical HTTP overhead—you query your database directly in Node.js.
 
-### Globals
+The Local API is written in TypeScript, and so it is strongly typed and extremely nice to use. It works anywhere on the server, including custom Next.js Routes, Payload Hooks, Payload Access Control, and React Server Components.
 
-<Banner type="info">
-  A Global is a "one-off" piece of content that is perfect for storing navigational structures,
-  themes, top-level meta data, and more.
-</Banner>
+Here's a quick example of a React Server Component fetching data using the Local API:
 
-Globals are in many ways similar to Collections, but there is only ever **one** instance of a Global, whereas Collections can contain many documents.
+```tsx
+import React from 'react'
+import config from '@payload-config'
+import { getPayloadHMR } from '@payloadcms/next'
 
-### Fields
+const MyServerComponent: React.FC = () => {
+  // If you're working in Next.js, and you want HMR,
+  // you should get Payload via the `getPayloadHMR` function.
+  const payload = await getPayloadHMR({ config })
 
-<Banner type="info">
-  Fields are the building blocks of Payload. Collections and Globals both use Fields to define the
-  shape of the data that they store.
-</Banner>
+  // If you are writing a standalone script and do not need HMR,
+  // you can get Payload via import { getPayload } from 'payload' instead.
 
-Payload comes with [many different field types](../fields/overview) that give you a ton of flexibility while designing your API. Each Field type has its own potential properties that allow you to customize how they work.
+  // The `findResult` here will be fully typed as `PaginatedDocs<Page>`,
+  // where you will have the `docs` that are returned as well as
+  // information about how many items are returned / are available in total / etc
+  const findResult = await payload.find({ collection: 'pages' })
 
-### Hooks
-
-<Banner type="info">
-  Hooks are where you can "tie in" to existing Payload actions to perform your own additional logic
-  or modify how Payload operates altogether.
-</Banner>
-
-Hooks are an extremely powerful concept and are central to extending and customizing your app. Payload provides a wide variety of hooks which you can utilize. For example, imagine if you'd like to send an email every time a document is created in your Orders collection. To do so, you can add an `afterChange` hook function to your Orders collection that receives the Order data and allows you to send an email accordingly.
-
-There are many more potential reasons to use Hooks. For more, visit the [Hooks documentation](/docs/hooks/overview).
-
-### Access Control
-
-<Banner type="info">
-  Access Control refers to Payload's system of defining who can do what to your API.
-</Banner>
-
-Access Control is extremely powerful but easy and intuitive to manage. You can easily define your own full-blown RBAC (role-based access control) or any other access control pattern that your scenario requires. No conventions or structure is forced on you whatsoever.
-
-For more, visit the [Access Control documentation](/docs/access-control/overview).
-
-### Depth
-
-<Banner type="info">
-  "Depth" gives you control over how many levels down related documents should be automatically
-  populated when retrieved.
-</Banner>
-
-You can specify population `depth` via query parameter in the REST API and by an option in the local API. _Depth has no effect in the GraphQL API, because there, depth is based on the shape of your queries._
-It is also possible to limit the depth for specific `relation` and `upload` fields using the `maxDepth` property in your configuration.
-**For example, let's look at the following Collections:** `departments`, `users`, `posts`
-
-```
-// type: 'relationship' fields are equal to 1 depth level
-
-{
-	slug: 'posts',
-	fields: [
-		{
-			name: 'title',
-			type: 'text',
-		},
-		{
-			name: 'author',
-			label: 'Post Author',
-			type: 'relationship',
-			relationTo: 'users',
-		}
-	]
-}
-
-{
-	slug: 'users',
-	fields: [
-		{
-			name: 'email',
-			type: 'email',
-		},
-		{
-			name: 'department'
-			type: 'relationship',
-			relationTo: 'departments'
-		}
-	]
-}
-
-{
-	slug: 'departments',
-	fields: [
-		{
-			name: 'name'
-			type: 'text',
-		}
-	]
+  return (
+    <ul>
+      {findResult.docs.map((page) => {
+        // Render whatever here!
+        // The `page` is fully typed as your Pages collection!
+      })}
+    </ul>
+  )
 }
 ```
 
-If you were to query the Posts endpoint at, say, `http://localhost:3000/api/posts?depth=1`, you will retrieve Posts with populations one level deep. This depth parameter can be thought of as N, where N is the number of levels you want to populate. To populate one level further, you would simply specify N+1 as the depth. A returned result may look like the following:
+<Banner type="info">
+  For more information about the Local API, [click here](../local-api/overview).
+</Banner>
 
-```
-// ?depth=1
+### REST API
 
-{
-  id: '5ae8f9bde69e394e717c8832',
-  title: 'This post sucks',
-  author: {
-    id: '5f7dd05cd50d4005f8bcab17',
-    email: 'spiderman@superheroes.gov',
-    department: '5e3ca05cd50d4005f8bdab15'
-  }
-}
+By default, the Payload [REST API](../rest-api/overview) is mounted automatically for you at the `/api` path of your app.
+
+For example, if you have a Collection called `pages`:
+
+```ts
+fetch('https://localhost:3000/api/pages') // highlight-line
+  .then((res) => res.json())
+  .then((data) => console.log(data))
 ```
 
-Notice how the `user.author` is fully populated, but `user.author.department` is left as a document ID? That's because the User collection counted as the first level of `depth` and got populated—but then prevented any further populations from taking place.
+<Banner type="info">
+  For more information about the REST API, [click here](../rest-api/overview).
+</Banner>
 
-To populate `user.author.department` in it's entirety you could specify `?depth=2` or _higher_.
+### GraphQL API
 
-```
-// ?depth=2
+Payload automatically exposes GraphQL queries and mutations through a dedicated [GraphQL API](../graphql/overview). By default, the GraphQL route handler is mounted at the `/api/graphql` path of your app. You'll also find a full GraphQL Playground which can be accessible at the `/api/graphql-playground` path of your app.
 
-{
-  id: '5ae8f9bde69e394e717c8832',
-  title: 'This post sucks',
-  author: {
-    id: '5f7dd05cd50d4005f8bcab17',
-    email: 'spiderman@superheroes.gov',
-    department: {
-      id: '5e3ca05cd50d4005f8bdab15',
-      name: 'Marvel'
-    }
-  }
-}
-```
+You can use any GraphQL client with Payload's GraphQL endpoint. Here are a few packages:
+
+- [`graphql-request`](https://www.npmjs.com/package/graphql-request) - a very lightweight GraphQL client
+- [`@apollo/client`](https://www.apollographql.com/docs/react/api/core/ApolloClient/) - an industry-standard GraphQL client with lots of nice features
+
+<Banner type="info">
+  For more information about the GraphQL API, [click here](../graphql/overview).
+</Banner>
+
+## Package Structure
+
+Payload is abstracted into a set of dedicated packages to keep the core `payload` package as lightweight as possible. This allows you to only install the parts of Payload based on your unique project requirements.
 
 <Banner type="warning">
-  <strong>Note:</strong>
-  <br />
-  When access control on collections prevents relationship fields from populating, the API response
-  will contain the relationship id instead of the full document.
+  <strong>Important:</strong>
+  Version numbers of all official Payload packages are always published in sync. You should make sure that you always use matching versions for all official Payload packages.
+</Banner>
+
+`payload`
+
+The `payload` package is where core business logic for Payload lives. You can think of Payload as an ORM with superpowers—it contains the logic for all Payload "operations" like `find`, `create`, `update`, and `delete` and exposes a [Local API](../local-api/overview). It executes [Access Control](../access-control/overview), [Hooks](../hooks/overview), [Validation](../fields/overview#validation), and more.
+
+Payload itself is extremely compact, and can be used in any Node environment. As long as you have `payload` installed and you have access to your Payload Config, you can query and mutate your database directly without going through an unnecessary HTTP layer.
+
+Payload also contains all TypeScript definitions, which can be imported from `payload` directly.
+
+Here's how to import some common Payload types:
+
+```ts
+import { Config, CollectionConfig, GlobalConfig, Field } from 'payload'
+```
+
+`@payloadcms/next`
+
+Whereas Payload itself is responsible for direct database access, and control over Payload business logic, the `@payloadcms/next` package is responsible for the Admin Panel and the entire HTTP layer that Payload exposes, including the [REST API](../rest-api/overview) and [GraphQL API](../graphql/overview).
+
+`@payloadcms/graphql`
+
+All of Payload's GraphQL functionality is abstracted into a separate package. Payload, its Admin UI, and REST API have absolutely no overlap with GraphQL, and you will incur no performance overhead from GraphQL if you are not using it. However, it's installed within in the `@payloadcms/next` package so you don't have to install it manually. You do, however, need to have GraphQL installed separately in your `package.json` if you are using GraphQL.
+
+`@payloadcms/ui`
+
+This is the UI library that Payload's Admin Panel uses. All components are exported from this package and can be re-used as you build extensions to the Payload admin UI, or want to use Payload components in your own React apps. Some exports are server components and some are client components.
+
+`@payloadcms/db-postgres`, `@payloadcms/db-mongodb`
+
+You can choose which Database Adapter you'd like to use for your project, and no matter which you choose, the entire data layer for Payload is contained within these packages. You can only use one at a time for any given project.
+
+`@payloadcms/richtext-lexical`, `@payloadcms/richtext-slate`
+
+Payload's Rich Text functionality is abstracted into separate packages and if you want to enable Rich Text in your project, you'll need to install one of these packages. We recommend Lexical for all new projects, and this is where Payload will focus its efforts on from this point, but Slate is still supported if you have already built with it.
+
+<Banner type="info">
+  <strong>Note:</strong>
+  Rich Text is entirely optional and you may not need it for your project.
 </Banner>

docs/getting-started/installation.mdx

@@ -3,18 +3,19 @@ title: Installation
 label: Installation
 order: 30
 desc: To quickly get started with Payload, simply run npx create-payload-app or install from scratch.
-keywords: documentation, getting started, guide, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, express
+keywords: documentation, getting started, guide, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
 ---
 
-#### Software Requirements
+## Software Requirements
 
 Payload requires the following software:
 
-- Any JavaScript package manager (Yarn, NPM, or pnpm)
-- Node.js version 18+
+- Any JavaScript package manager (Yarn, NPM, or pnpm - pnpm is preferred)
+- Node.js version 20.9.0+
 - Any [compatible database](/docs/database/overview) (MongoDB or Postgres)
 
 <Banner type="warning">
+  <strong>Important:</strong>
   Before proceeding any further, please ensure that you have the above requirements met.
 </Banner>
 
@@ -23,131 +24,159 @@ Payload requires the following software:
 To quickly scaffold a new Payload app in the fastest way possible, you can use [create-payload-app](https://npmjs.com/package/create-payload-app). To do so, run the following command:
 
 ```
-npx create-payload-app@latest
+npx create-payload-app@beta
 ```
 
-Then just follow the prompts! You'll get set up with a new folder and a functioning Payload app inside.
+Then just follow the prompts! You'll get set up with a new folder and a functioning Payload app inside. You can then start [configuring your application](../configuration/overview).
 
 ## Adding to an existing app
 
-Adding Payload to either a new or existing TypeScript + Express app is super straightforward. To add to an existing app, just run `npm install --save --legacy-peer-deps payload`.
+Adding Payload to an existing Next.js app is super straightforward. You can either run the `npx create-payload-app@beta` command inside your Next.js project's folder, or manually install Payload by following the steps below.
 
-From there, the first step is writing a baseline config. Create a new `payload.config.ts` in your project's `/src` directory (or whatever your root TS dir is). The simplest config contains the following:
+If you don't have a Next.js app already, but you still want to start a project from a blank Next.js app, you can create a new Next.js app using `npx create-next-app` - and then just follow the steps below to install Payload.
 
-```js
-import { buildConfig } from 'payload/config'
+#### 1. Install the relevant packages
 
-export default buildConfig({
-  // By default, Payload will boot up normally
-  // and you will be provided with a base `User` collection.
-  // But, here is where you define how you'd like Payload to work!
-})
+First, you'll want to add the required Payload packages to your project and can do so by running the command below:
+
+```bash
+pnpm i payload@beta @payloadcms/next@beta @payloadcms/richtext-lexical@beta sharp graphql
 ```
 
-Write the above code into your newly created config file. This baseline config will automatically provide you with a default `User` collection. For more information about users and authentication, including how to provide your own user config, jump to the [Authentication](/docs/authentication/config) section.
+<Banner type="warning">
+  <strong>Note:</strong>
+  Swap out `pnpm` for your package manager. If you are using NPM, you might need to install using legacy peer deps: `npm i --legacy-peer-deps`.
+</Banner>
+
+Next, install a [Database Adapter](/docs/database/overview). Payload requires a Database Adapter to establish a database connection. Payload works with all types of databases, but the most common are MongoDB and Postgres.
+
+To install a Database Adapter, you can run **one** of the following commands:
+
+- To install the [MongoDB Adapter](../database/mongodb), run:
+    ```bash
+    pnpm i @payloadcms/db-mongodb
+    ```
+
+- To install the [Postgres Adapter](../database/postgres), run:
+    ```bash
+    pnpm i @payloadcms/db-postgres
+    ```
+
+<Banner type="success">
+  <strong>Note:</strong>
+  New [Database Adapters](/docs/database/overview) are becoming available every day. Check the docs for the most up-to-date list of what's available.
+</Banner>
+
+#### 2. Copy Payload files into your Next.js app folder
+
+Payload installs directly in your Next.js `/app` folder, and you'll need to place some files into that folder for Payload to run. You can copy these files from the [Blank Template](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/beta/templates/blank-3.0/src/app/(payload)) on GitHub. Once you have the required Payload files in place in your `/app` folder, you should have something like this:
+
+```plaintext
+app/
+├─ (payload)/
+├── // Payload files
+├─ (my-app)/
+├── // Your app files
+```
+
+_For an exact reference of the `(payload)` directory, see [Project Structure](../admin/overview#project-structure)._
+
+<Banner type="warning">
+  You may need to copy all of your existing frontend files, including your existing root layout, into its own newly created [Route Group](https://nextjs.org/docs/app/building-your-application/routing/route-groups), i.e. `(my-app)`.
+</Banner>
+
+The files that Payload needs to have in your `/app` folder do not regenerate, and will never change. Once you slot them in, you never have to revisit them. They are not meant to be edited and simply import Payload dependencies from `@payloadcms/next` for the REST / GraphQL API and Admin Panel.
+
+You can name the `(my-app)` folder anything you want. The name does not matter and will just be used to clarify your directory structure for yourself. Common names might be `(frontend)`, `(app)`, or similar. [More details](../admin/overview).
+
+#### 3. Add the Payload Plugin to your Next.js config
+
+Payload has a Next.js plugin that it uses to ensure compatibility with some of the packages Payload relies on, like `mongodb` or `drizzle-kit`.
+
+To add the Payload Plugin, use `withPayload` in your `next.config.js`:
+
+```js
+import { withPayload } from '@payloadcms/next/withPayload'
+
+/** @type {import('next').NextConfig} */
+const nextConfig = {
+  // Your Next.js config here
+  experimental: {
+    reactCompiler: false
+  }
+}
+
+// Make sure you wrap your `nextConfig`
+// with the `withPayload` plugin
+export default withPayload(nextConfig) // highlight-line
+```
+
+<Banner type="warning">
+  <strong>Important:</strong>
+  Payload is a fully ESM project, and that means the `withPayload` function is an ECMAScript module.
+</Banner>
+
+To import the Payload Plugin, you need to make sure your `next.config` file is set up to use ESM.
+
+You can do this in one of two ways:
+
+1. Set your own project to use ESM, by adding `"type": "module"` to your `package.json` file
+2. Give your Next.js config the `.mjs` file extension
+
+In either case, all `require`s and `export`s in your `next.config` file will need to be converted to `import` / `export` if they are not set up that way already.
+
+#### 4. Create a Payload Config and add it to your TypeScript config
+
+Finally, you need to create a [Payload Config](../configuration/overview). Generally the Payload Config is located at the root of your repository, or next to your `/app` folder, and is named `payload.config.ts`.
+
+Here's what Payload needs at a bare minimum:
+
+```ts
+import sharp from 'sharp'
+import { lexicalEditor } from '@payloadcms/richtext-lexical'
+import { mongooseAdapter } from '@payloadcms/db-mongodb'
+import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
+
+export default buildConfig({
+  // If you'd like to use Rich Text, pass your editor here
+  editor: lexicalEditor(),
+
+  // Define and configure your collections in this array
+  collections: [],
+
+  // Your Payload secret - should be a complex and secure string, unguessable
+  secret: process.env.PAYLOAD_SECRET || '',
+  // Whichever Database Adapter you're using should go here
+  // Mongoose is shown as an example, but you can also use Postgres
+  db: mongooseAdapter({
+    url: process.env.DATABASE_URI || '',
+  }),
+  // If you want to resize images, crop, set focal point, etc.
+  // make sure to install it and pass it to the config.
+  // This is optional - if you don't need to do these things,
+  // you don't need it!
+  sharp,
+})
+```
 
 Although this is just the bare minimum config, there are _many_ more options that you can control here. To reference the full config and all of its options, [click here](/docs/configuration/overview).
 
-### Server
+Once you have a Payload Config, update your `tsconfig` to include a `path` that points to it:
 
-Now that you've got a baseline Payload config, it's time to initialize Payload. It requires an Express server that you provide, so if you're not familiar with how to set up a baseline Express server, please read up on exactly what Express is and why to use it. Express' own [Documentation](https://expressjs.com/en/starter/hello-world.html) is a good place to start. Otherwise, follow along below for how to build your own Express server to use with Payload.
-
-1. Run `npm install --save --legacy-peer-deps express` if you have not done so already
-1. Create a new `server.ts` file in the root directory of your app
-1. Add the following code to `server.ts`:
-
-```ts
-import express from 'express'
-
-const app = express()
-
-app.listen(3000, async () => {
-  console.log('Express is now listening for incoming connections on port 3000.')
-})
-```
-
-This server doesn't do anything just yet. But, after you have this in place, we can initialize Payload via its asynchronous `init()` method, which accepts a small set of arguments to tell it how to operate.
-
-To initialize Payload, update your `server.ts` file to reflect the following code:
-
-```ts
-import express from 'express'
-import payload from 'payload'
-
-require('dotenv').config()
-const app = express()
-
-const start = async () => {
-  await payload.init({
-    secret: process.env.PAYLOAD_SECRET,
-    express: app,
-  })
-
-  app.listen(3000, async () => {
-    console.log('Express is now listening for incoming connections on port 3000.')
-  })
+```json
+{
+  "compilerOptions": {
+    "paths": {
+      "@payload-config": [
+        "./payload.config.ts"
+      ]
+    }
+  },
 }
-
-start()
 ```
 
-A quick reminder: in this configuration, we're making use of environmental variables, `process.env.PAYLOAD_SECRET`. Often, it's smart to store these values in an `.env` file at the root of your directory and set different values for each of your environments (local, stage, prod, etc). The `dotenv` package is very handy and works well alongside of Payload. A typical `.env` file will look like this:
+#### 5. Fire it up!
 
-```
-DATABASE_URI=mongodb://127.0.0.1/your-payload-app
-PAYLOAD_SECRET=your-payload-secret
-```
-
-Here is a list of all properties available to pass through `payload.init`:
-
-##### secret
-
-**Required**. This is a secure string that will be used to authenticate with Payload. It can be random but should be at least 14 characters and be very difficult to guess.
-
-Payload uses this secret key to generate secure user tokens (JWT). Behind the scenes, we do not use your secret key to encrypt directly - instead, we first take the secret key and create an encrypted string using the SHA-256 hash function. Then, we reduce the encrypted string to its first 32 characters. This final value is what Payload uses for encryption.
-
-##### config
-
-Allows you to pass your config directly to the onInit function. The config passed here should match the payload.config file.
-
-##### disableOnInit
-
-A boolean that disables running your `onInit` function when Payload starts up.
-
-##### disableDBConnect
-
-A boolean that disables the database connection when Payload starts up.
-
-##### email
-
-An object used to configure SMTP. [Read more](/docs/email/overview).
-
-##### express
-
-This is your Express app as shown above. Payload will tie into your existing `app` and scope all of its functionalities to sub-routers. By default, Payload will add an `/admin` router and an `/api` router, but you can customize these paths.
-
-##### local
-
-A boolean that when set to `true` tells Payload to start in local-only mode which will bypass setting up API routes. When set to `true`, `express` is not required. This is useful when running scripts that need to use Payload's [local-api](/docs/local-api/overview).
-
-##### loggerDestination
-
-Specify destination stream for the built-in Pino logger that Payload uses for internal logging. See [Pino Docs](https://getpino.io/#/docs/api?id=pino-destination) for more info on what is available.
-
-##### loggerOptions
-
-Specify options for the built-in Pino logger that Payload uses for internal logging. See [Pino Docs](https://getpino.io/#/docs/api?id=options) for more info on what is available.
-
-##### onInit
-
-A function that is called immediately following startup that receives the Payload instance as it's only argument.
-
-### Test it out
-
-After you've gotten this far, it's time to boot up Payload. Start your project in your application's folder to get going.
+After you've gotten this far, it's time to boot up Payload. Start your project in your application's folder to get going. By default, the Next.js dev script is `pnpm dev` (or `npm run dev` if using NPM).
 
 After it starts, you can go to `http://localhost:3000/admin` to create your first Payload user!
-
-### Docker
-
-Looking to deploy Payload with Docker? New projects with `create-payload-app` come with a Dockerfile and docker-compose.yml file ready to go. Examples of these files can be seen in our [Deployment docs](/docs/production/deployment#docker).

docs/getting-started/what-is-payload.mdx

@@ -2,7 +2,7 @@
 title: What is Payload?
 label: What is Payload?
 order: 10
-desc: Payload is a next-gen headless Content Management System (CMS) and application framework.
+desc: Payload is a next-gen application framework that can be used as a Content Management System, enterprise tool framework, headless commerce platform, or digital asset management tool.
 keywords: documentation, getting started, guide, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, express
 ---
 
@@ -11,56 +11,123 @@ keywords: documentation, getting started, guide, Content Management System, cms,
   title="Payload Introduction - Closing the Gap Between Headless CMS and Application Frameworks"
 />
 
-Payload is a headless CMS and application framework. It's meant to provide a massive boost to your
-development process, but importantly, stay out of your way as your apps get more complex.
+**Payload is the Next.js fullstack framework.** Write a Payload Config and instantly get:
+
+- A full Admin Panel using React server / client components, matching the shape of your data and completely extensible with your own React components
+- Automatic database schema, including direct DB access and ownership, with migrations, transactions, proper indexing, and more
+- Instant REST, GraphQL, and straight-to-DB Node.js APIs
+- Authentication which can be used in your own apps
+- A deeply customizable access control pattern
+- File storage and image management tools like cropping / focal point selection
+- Live preview - see your frontend render content changes in realtime as you update
+- Lots more
+
+### Instant backend superpowers
+
+No matter what you're building, Payload will give you backend superpowers. It can be installed in one line into any existing Next.js app, and is designed to catapult your development process. Payload takes the most complex and time-consuming parts of any modern web app and makes them simple.
+
+### Open source - deploy anywhere, including Vercel
+
+It's fully open source with an MIT license and you can self-host anywhere that you can run a Node.js app. You can also deploy serverless to hosts like Vercel, right inside your existing Next.js application.
+
+### Code-first and version controlled
+
+In Payload, there are no "click ops" - as in clicking around in an Admin Panel to define your schema. In Payload, everything is done the right way—code-first and version controlled like a proper backend. But once developers define how Payload should work, non-technical users can independently make use of its Admin Panel to manage whatever they need to without having to know code whatsoever.
+
+### Fully extensible
+
+Even in spite of how much you get out of the box, you still have full control over every aspect of your app - be it database, admin UI, or anything else. Every part of Payload has been designed to be extensible and customizable with modern TypeScript / React. And you'll fully understand the code that you write.
+
+## Use Cases
+
+Payload started as a headless Content Management System (CMS), but since, we've seen our community leverage Payload in ways far outside of simply managing pages and blog posts. It's grown into a full-stack TypeScript app framework.
+
+Large enterprises use Payload to power significant internal tools, retailers power their entire storefronts without the need for headless Shopify, and massive amounts of digital assets are stored + managed within Payload. Of course, websites large and small still use Payload for content management as well.
+
+### Headless CMS
+
+The biggest barrier in large web projects cited by marketers is engineering. On the flip side, engineers say the opposite. This is a big problem that has yet to be solved even though we have countless CMS options.
+
+Payload has restored a little love back into the dev / marketer equation with features like Live Preview, redirects, form builders, visual editing, static A/B testing, and more. But even with all this focus on marketing efficiency, we aren't compromising on the developer experience. That way engineers and marketers alike can be proud of the products they build.
+
+If you're building a website and your frontend is on Next.js, then Payload is a no-brainer.
 
 <Banner type="success">
-  <strong>Payload 2.0 has been released!</strong>
-  <br />
-  Includes Postgres support, Live Preview, Lexical Editor, and more.{' '}
-  <a href="/blog/payload-2-0">Read the announcement</a>.
+  Instead of going out and signing up for a SaaS vendor that makes it so you have to manage two completely separate concerns, with little to no native connection back and forth, just install Payload in your existing Next.js repo and instantly get a full CMS.
 </Banner>
 
-Out of the box, Payload gives you a lot of the things that you often need when developing a new website, web app, or native app:
+Get started with Payload as a CMS using our official Website template:
 
-- A database to store your data (Postgres and MongoDB supported)
-- A way to store, retrieve, and manipulate data of any shape via full REST and GraphQL APIs
-- Authentication—complete with commonly required functionality like registration, email verification, login, & password reset
-- Deep access control to your data, based on document or field-level functions
-- File storage and access control
-- A beautiful admin UI that's generated specifically to suit your data
+```
+npx create-payload-app@latest -t website
+```
 
-## What does "headless" mean?
+### Enterprise Tool
 
-A headless CMS is a system that sticks to what it's good at—managing content. It concentrates solely on granting administrators an effective way to author and maintain content, but doesn't control how and where that content is used.
+When a large organization starts up a new software initiative, there's a lot of plumbing to take care of.
 
-In this way, the CMS can ensure that its content editing experience is highly polished and effective while avoiding placing creative constraints on designers or restricting development teams. In contrast, traditional content management systems bind the presentation of your content to the storage of your content and severely limit the creativity, development and usability of the content that they manage.
+- Scaffold the data layer with an ORM or an app framework like Ruby on Rails or Laravel
+- Implement their SSO provider for authentication
+- Design an access control pattern for authorization
+- Open up any REST endpoints required or implement GraphQL queries / mutations
+- Implement a migrations workflow for the database as it changes over time
+- Integrate with other third party solutions by crafting a system of webhooks or similar
 
-At this point this concept is [widely](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Headless_content_management_system) [discussed](https://css-tricks.com/what-is-a-headless-cms/) online, and for good reason. The web has become more complicated and with complexity comes the demand for developers to better structure their code. The rise of interface libraries like React and Vue are now the de-facto standard for building modern applications and traditional content management systems are often not designed to make use of them.
+And then there's the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview). Most enterprise tools require an admin UI, and building one from scratch can be the most time-consuming aspect of any new enterprise tool. There are off-the-shelf packages for app frameworks like Rails, but often the customization is so involved that using Material UI or similar from scratch might be better.
 
-### Why Payload?
+Then there are no-code admin builders that could be used. However, wiring up access control and the connection to the data layer, with proper version control, makes this a challenging task as well.
 
-The team behind Payload has been building websites and apps with existing content management systems and application frameworks for over a decade. We know what works and what doesn't about each of the existing solutions, and to this day have found no silver bullet solution.
+That's where Payload comes in. Payload instantly provides all of this out of the box, making complex internal tools extremely simple to both spin up and maintain over time. The only custom code that will need to be written is any custom business logic. That means Payload can expedite timelines, keep budgets low, and allow engineers to focus on their specific requirements rather than complex backend / admin UI plumbing.
 
-**We believe that a CMS should be:**
+Generally, the best place to start for a new enterprise tool is with a blank canvas, where you can define your own functionality:
 
-- Cost-effective and should save time and effort
-- Intuitive for developers and content authors alike
-- Self-hosted however and wherever the application specifies
-- Designed in code but used with no coding experience
-- Blazing fast
-- Secure
-- Fully flexible and extensible
+```
+npx create-payload-app@latest -t blank
+```
 
-Payload is our silver bullet solution. We've blended the best parts of our experience with other CMS and app frameworks into Payload, and we finally have everything we need when we build new apps and websites:
+### Headless Commerce
 
-- A beautiful, dynamic, customizable admin UI
-- Extensible and reusable authentication
-- Content localization
-- Local file storage
-- Extremely flexible access control
-- Field conditional logic
-- Block-based layout building
-- Array field type(s)
-- Security
-- and much more
+Companies who prioritize UX generally run into frontend constraints with traditional commerce vendors. These companies will then opt for frontend frameworks like Next.js which allow them to fine-tune their user experience as much as possible—promoting conversions, personalizing experiences, and optimizing for SEO.
+
+But the challenge with using something like Next.js for headless commerce is that in order for non-technical users to manage the storefront, you instantly need to pair a headless commerce product with a headless CMS. Then, your editors need to bounce back and forth between different admin UIs for different functionality. The code required to seamlessly glue them together on the frontend becomes overly complex.
+
+Payload can integrate with any payment processor like Stripe and its content authoring capabilities allow it to manage every aspect of a storefront—all in one place.
+
+If you can build your storefront with a single backend, and only offload things like payment processing, the code will be simpler and the editing experience will be significantly streamlined. Manage products, catalogs, page content, media, and more—all in one spot.
+
+Payload's official Ecommerce template gives you everything you need for a storefront out of the box, including a Next.js frontend, product variations, and a full Stripe implementation:
+
+```
+npx create-payload-app@latest -t ecommerce
+```
+
+### Digital Asset Management
+
+Payload's API-first tagging, sorting, and querying engine lends itself perfectly to all types of content that a CMS might ordinarily store, but these strong fundamentals also make it a formidable Digital Asset Management (DAM) tool as well.
+
+Similarly to the Ecommerce use case above, if an organization uses a CMS for its content but a separate DAM for its digital assets, administrators of both tools will need to juggle completely different services for tasks that are closely related. Two subscriptions will need to be managed, two sets of infrastructure will need to be provisioned, and two admin UIs need to be used / learned.
+
+Payload flattens CMS and DAM into a single tool that makes no compromises on either side. Powerful features like folder-based organization, file versioning, bulk upload, and media access control allow Payload to simultaneously function as a full Digital Asset Management platform as well as a Content Management System at the same time.
+
+[Click here](https://payloadcms.com/use-cases/digital-asset-management) for more information on how to get started with Payload as a DAM.
+
+## Choosing a Framework
+
+Payload is a great choice for applications of all sizes and types, but it might not be the right choice for every project. Here are some guidelines to help you decide if Payload is the right choice for your project.
+
+### When Payload might be for you
+
+- If data ownership and privacy are important to you, and you don't want to allow another proprietary SaaS vendor to host and own your data
+- If you're building a Next.js site that needs a CMS
+- If you need to re-use your data outside of a SaaS API
+- If what you're building has custom business logic requirements outside of a typical headless CMS
+- You want to deploy serverless on platforms like Vercel
+
+### When Payload might not be for you
+
+- If you can manage your project fully with code, and don't need an admin UI
+- If you are building a website that fits within the limits a tool like Webflow or Framer
+- If you already have a full database and just need to visualize the data somehow
+- If you are confident that you won't need code / data ownership at any point in the future
+
+Ready to get started? First, let's review some high-level concepts that are used in Payload.

docs/graphql/extending.mdx

@@ -2,13 +2,13 @@
 title: Adding your own Queries and Mutations
 label: Custom Queries and Mutations
 order: 20
-desc: Payload allows you to add your own GraphQL queries and mutations, simply set up GraphQL in your main Payload config by following these instructions.
-keywords: graphql, resolvers, mutations, custom, queries, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, express
+desc: Payload allows you to add your own GraphQL queries and mutations, simply set up GraphQL in your main Payload Config by following these instructions.
+keywords: graphql, resolvers, mutations, custom, queries, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
 ---
 
 You can add your own GraphQL queries and mutations to Payload, making use of all the types that Payload has defined for you.
 
-To do so, add your queries and mutations to the main Payload config as follows:
+To do so, add your queries and mutations to the main Payload Config as follows:
 
 | Config Path         | Description                                                                 |
 | ------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
@@ -25,16 +25,16 @@ This is Payload's GraphQL dependency. You should not install your own copy of Gr
 
 This is a copy of the currently running Payload instance, which provides you with existing GraphQL types for all of your Collections and Globals - among other things.
 
-##### Return value
+## Return value
 
 Both `graphQL.queries` and `graphQL.mutations` functions should return an object with properties equal to your newly written GraphQL queries and mutations.
 
-### Example
+## Example
 
 `payload.config.js`:
 
 ```ts
-import { buildConfig } from 'payload/config'
+import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
 import myCustomQueryResolver from './graphQL/resolvers/myCustomQueryResolver'
 
 export default buildConfig({
@@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ export default buildConfig({
 })
 ```
 
-### Resolver function
+## Resolver function
 
 In your resolver, make sure you set `depth: 0` if you're returning data directly from the local API so that GraphQL can correctly resolve queries to nested values such as relationship data.
 
@@ -96,13 +96,28 @@ An object containing the `req` and `res` objects that will provide you with the
 
 Contextual information about the currently running GraphQL operation. You can get schema information from this as well as contextual information about where this resolver function is being run.
 
-### Types
+## Types
 
 We've exposed a few types and utilities to help you extend the API further. Payload uses the GraphQL.js package for which you can view the full list of available types in the [official documentation](https://graphql.org/graphql-js/type/).
 
+**`GraphQLJSON`** & **`GraphQLJSONObject`**
+
+```ts
+import { GraphQLJSON, GraphQLJSONObject } from '@payloadcms/graphql/types'
+```
+
 **`GraphQL`**
 
-You can directly import the GraphQL package used by Payload, most useful for typing. For queries, mutations and handlers make sure you use the `GraphQL` and `payload` instances provided via arguments.
+You can directly import the GraphQL package used by Payload, most useful for typing.
+
+```ts
+import { GraphQL } from '@payloadcms/graphql/types'
+```
+
+<Banner type="warning">
+  For queries, mutations and handlers make sure you use the `GraphQL` and `payload` instances provided via arguments.
+</Banner>
+
 
 **`buildPaginatedListType`**
 
@@ -112,6 +127,8 @@ It takes in two arguments, the first for the name of this new schema type and th
 Example
 
 ```ts
+import { buildPaginatedListType } from '@payloadcms/graphql/types'
+
 export const getMyPosts = (GraphQL, payload) => {
   return {
     args: {},
@@ -138,7 +155,7 @@ graphQL?: {
 }
 ```
 
-### Best practices
+## Best practices
 
 There are a few ways to structure your code, we recommend using a dedicated `graphql` directory so you can keep all of your logic in one place. You have total freedom of how you want to structure this but a common pattern is to group functions by type and with their resolver.
 

docs/graphql/graphql-schema.mdx

@@ -3,20 +3,26 @@ title: GraphQL Schema
 label: GraphQL Schema
 order: 30
 desc: Output your own GraphQL schema based on your collections and globals to a file.
-keywords: headless cms, typescript, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, express
+keywords: headless cms, typescript, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
 ---
 
-When working with GraphQL it is useful to have the schema for development of other projects that need to call on your GraphQL endpoint. In Payload the schema is controlled by your collections and globals and is made available to the developer or third parties, it is not necessary for developers using Payload to write schema types manually.
+In Payload the schema is controlled by your collections and globals. All you need to do is run the generate command and the entire schema will be created for you.
 
-### Schema generation script
+## Schema generation script
 
-Run the following command in a Payload project to generate your project's GraphQL schema from Payload:
+Install `@payloadcms/graphql` as a dev dependency:
 
-```
-payload generate:graphQLSchema
+```bash
+pnpm add @payloadcms/graphql --save-dev
 ```
 
-### Custom Field Schemas
+Run the following command to generate the schema:
+
+```bash
+pnpm payload-graphql generate:schema
+```
+
+## Custom Field Schemas
 
 For `array`, `block`, `group` and named `tab` fields, you can generate top level reusable interfaces. The following group field config:
 
@@ -24,7 +30,7 @@ For `array`, `block`, `group` and named `tab` fields, you can generate top level
 {
   type: 'group',
   name: 'meta',
-  interfaceName: 'SharedMeta', <-- here!!
+  interfaceName: 'SharedMeta', // highlight-line
   fields: [
     {
       name: 'title',
@@ -41,13 +47,13 @@ For `array`, `block`, `group` and named `tab` fields, you can generate top level
 will generate:
 
 ```ts
-// a top level reusable type!!
+// A top level reusable type will be generated
 type SharedMeta {
   title: String
   description: String
 }
 
-// example usage inside collection schema
+// And will be referenced inside the generated schema
 type Collection1 {
   // ...other fields
   meta: SharedMeta
@@ -56,7 +62,7 @@ type Collection1 {
 
 The above example outputs all your definitions to a file relative from your payload config as `./graphql/schema.graphql`. By default, the file will be output to your current working directory as `schema.graphql`.
 
-#### Adding an NPM script
+### Adding an NPM script
 
 <Banner type="warning">
   <strong>Important</strong>
@@ -64,16 +70,18 @@ The above example outputs all your definitions to a file relative from your payl
   Payload needs to be able to find your config to generate your GraphQL schema.
 </Banner>
 
-Payload will automatically try and locate your config, but might not always be able to find it. For example, if you are working in a `/src` directory or similar, you need to tell Payload where to find your config manually by using an environment variable. If this applies to you, you can create an NPM script to make generating your types easier.
+Payload will automatically try and locate your config, but might not always be able to find it. For example, if you are working in a `/src` directory or similar, you need to tell Payload where to find your config manually by using an environment variable.
 
-To add an NPM script to generate your types and show Payload where to find your config, open your `package.json` and update the `scripts` property to the following:
+If this applies to you, create an NPM script to make generating types easier:
 
 ```json
+// package.json
+
 {
   "scripts": {
-    "generate:graphQLSchema": "cross-env PAYLOAD_CONFIG_PATH=src/payload.config.ts payload generate:graphQLSchema"
+    "generate:graphQLSchema": "cross-env PAYLOAD_CONFIG_PATH=src/payload.config.ts payload-graphql generate:schema"
   }
 }
 ```
 
-Now you can run `yarn generate:graphQLSchema` to easily generate your schema.
+Now you can run `pnpm generate:graphQLSchema` to easily generate your schema.

docs/graphql/overview.mdx

@@ -3,18 +3,18 @@ title: GraphQL Overview
 label: Overview
 order: 10
 desc: Payload ships with a fully featured and extensible GraphQL API, which can be used in addition to the REST and Local APIs to give you more flexibility.
-keywords: graphql, resolvers, mutations, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, express
+keywords: graphql, resolvers, mutations, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
 ---
 
 In addition to its REST and Local APIs, Payload ships with a fully featured and extensible GraphQL API.
 
-By default, the GraphQL API is exposed via `/api/graphql`, but you can customize this URL via specifying your `routes` within the main Payload config.
+By default, the GraphQL API is exposed via `/api/graphql`, but you can customize this URL via specifying your `routes` within the main Payload Config.
 
 The labels you provide for your Collections and Globals are used to name the GraphQL types that are created to correspond to your config. Special characters and spaces are removed.
 
 ## GraphQL Options
 
-At the top of your Payload config you can define all the options to manage GraphQL.
+At the top of your Payload Config you can define all the options to manage GraphQL.
 
 | Option                          | Description                                                                                                                     |
 | ------------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
@@ -29,7 +29,7 @@ At the top of your Payload config you can define all the options to manage Graph
 Everything that can be done to a Collection via the REST or Local API can be done with GraphQL (outside of uploading files, which is REST-only). If you have a collection as follows:
 
 ```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types';
+import type { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
 
 export const PublicUser: CollectionConfig = {
   slug: 'public-users',
@@ -42,33 +42,34 @@ export const PublicUser: CollectionConfig = {
 
 **Payload will automatically open up the following queries:**
 
-| Query Name         | Operation           |
-| ------------------ | ------------------- |
-| **`PublicUser`**   | `findByID`          |
-| **`PublicUsers`**  | `find`              |
-| **`mePublicUser`** | `me` auth operation |
+| Query Name              | Operation           |
+| ------------------      | ------------------- |
+| `PublicUser`        | `findByID`          |
+| `PublicUsers`       | `find`              |
+| `countPublicUsers`  | `count`             |
+| `mePublicUser`      | `me` auth operation |
 
 **And the following mutations:**
 
 | Query Name                     | Operation                       |
 | ------------------------------ | ------------------------------- |
-| **`createPublicUser`**         | `create`                        |
-| **`updatePublicUser`**         | `update`                        |
-| **`deletePublicUser`**         | `delete`                        |
-| **`forgotPasswordPublicUser`** | `forgotPassword` auth operation |
-| **`resetPasswordPublicUser`**  | `resetPassword` auth operation  |
-| **`unlockPublicUser`**         | `unlock` auth operation         |
-| **`verifyPublicUser`**         | `verify` auth operation         |
-| **`loginPublicUser`**          | `login` auth operation          |
-| **`logoutPublicUser`**         | `logout` auth operation         |
-| **`refreshTokenPublicUser`**   | `refresh` auth operation        |
+| `createPublicUser`         | `create`                        |
+| `updatePublicUser`         | `update`                        |
+| `deletePublicUser`         | `delete`                        |
+| `forgotPasswordPublicUser` | `forgotPassword` auth operation |
+| `resetPasswordPublicUser`  | `resetPassword` auth operation  |
+| `unlockPublicUser`         | `unlock` auth operation         |
+| `verifyPublicUser`         | `verify` auth operation         |
+| `loginPublicUser`          | `login` auth operation          |
+| `logoutPublicUser`         | `logout` auth operation         |
+| `refreshTokenPublicUser`   | `refresh` auth operation        |
 
 ## Globals
 
 Globals are also fully supported. For example:
 
 ```ts
-import { GlobalConfig } from 'payload/types';
+import type { GlobalConfig } from 'payload';
 
 const Header: GlobalConfig = {
   slug: 'header',
@@ -82,34 +83,34 @@ const Header: GlobalConfig = {
 
 | Query Name   | Operation |
 | ------------ | --------- |
-| **`Header`** | `findOne` |
+| `Header` | `findOne` |
 
 **And the following mutation:**
 
 | Query Name         | Operation |
 | ------------------ | --------- |
-| **`updateHeader`** | `update`  |
+| `updateHeader` | `update`  |
 
 ## Preferences
 
-User [preferences](/docs/admin/overview#preferences) for the admin panel are also available to GraphQL the same way as other collection schemas are generated. To query preferences you must supply an authorization token in the header and only the preferences of that user will be accessible.
+User [preferences](/docs/admin/overview#preferences) for the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview) are also available to GraphQL the same way as other collection schemas are generated. To query preferences you must supply an authorization token in the header and only the preferences of that user will be accessible.
 
 **Payload will open the following query:**
 
 | Query Name       | Operation |
 | ---------------- | --------- |
-| **`Preference`** | `findOne` |
+| `Preference` | `findOne` |
 
 **And the following mutations:**
 
 | Query Name             | Operation |
 | ---------------------- | --------- |
-| **`updatePreference`** | `update`  |
-| **`deletePreference`** | `delete`  |
+| `updatePreference` | `update`  |
+| `deletePreference` | `delete`  |
 
 ## GraphQL Playground
 
-GraphQL Playground is enabled by default for development purposes, but disabled in production. You can enable it in production by passing `graphQL.disablePlaygroundInProduction` a `false` setting in the main Payload config.
+GraphQL Playground is enabled by default for development purposes, but disabled in production. You can enable it in production by passing `graphQL.disablePlaygroundInProduction` a `false` setting in the main Payload Config.
 
 You can even log in using the `login[collection-singular-label-here]` mutation to use the Playground as an authenticated user.
 
@@ -118,7 +119,7 @@ You can even log in using the `login[collection-singular-label-here]` mutation t
   <br />
   To see more regarding how the above queries and mutations are used, visit your GraphQL playground
   (by default at
-  [http://localhost:3000/api/graphql-playground](http://localhost:3000/api/graphql-playground))
+  [`${SERVER_URL}/api/graphql-playground`](http://localhost:3000/api/graphql-playground))
   while your server is running. There, you can use the "Schema" and "Docs" buttons on the right to
   see a ton of detail about how GraphQL operates within Payload.
 </Banner>

docs/hooks/collections.mdx

@@ -3,44 +3,39 @@ title: Collection Hooks
 label: Collections
 order: 20
 desc: You can add hooks to any Collection, several hook types are available including beforeChange, afterRead, afterDelete and more.
-keywords: hooks, collections, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, express
+keywords: hooks, collections, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
 ---
 
-Collections feature the ability to define the following hooks:
+Collection Hooks are [Hooks](./overview) that run on Documents within a specific [Collection](../configuration/collections). They allow you to execute your own logic during specific events of the Document lifecycle.
 
-- [beforeOperation](#beforeoperation)
-- [beforeValidate](#beforevalidate)
-- [beforeChange](#beforechange)
-- [afterChange](#afterchange)
-- [beforeRead](#beforeread)
-- [afterRead](#afterread)
-- [beforeDelete](#beforedelete)
-- [afterDelete](#afterdelete)
-- [afterOperation](#afteroperation)
-
-Additionally, `auth`-enabled collections feature the following hooks:
-
-- [beforeLogin](#beforelogin)
-- [afterLogin](#afterlogin)
-- [afterLogout](#afterlogout)
-- [afterRefresh](#afterrefresh)
-- [afterMe](#afterme)
-- [afterForgotPassword](#afterforgotpassword)
-
-## Config
-
-All collection Hook properties accept arrays of synchronous or asynchronous functions. Each Hook type receives specific arguments and has the ability to modify specific outputs.
-
-`collections/exampleHooks.js`
+To add Hooks to a Collection, use the `hooks` property in your [Collection Config](../configuration/collections):
 
 ```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types';
+import type { CollectionConfig } from 'payload';
 
-export const ExampleHooks: CollectionConfig = {
-  slug: 'example-hooks',
-  fields: [
-    { name: 'name', type: 'text'},
-  ],
+export const CollectionWithHooks: CollectionConfig = {
+  // ...
+  hooks: { // highlight-line
+    // ...
+  },
+}
+```
+
+<Banner type="info">
+  <strong>Tip:</strong>
+  You can also set hooks on the field-level to isolate hook logic to specific fields. [More details](./fields).
+</Banner>
+
+## Config Options
+
+All Collection Hooks accept an array of [synchronous or asynchronous functions](./overview#async-vs-synchronous). Each Collection Hook receives specific arguments based on its own type, and has the ability to modify specific outputs.
+
+```ts
+import type { CollectionConfig } from 'payload';
+
+export const CollectionWithHooks: CollectionConfig = {
+  // ...
+  // highlight-start
   hooks: {
     beforeOperation: [(args) => {...}],
     beforeValidate: [(args) => {...}],
@@ -52,14 +47,17 @@ export const ExampleHooks: CollectionConfig = {
     afterDelete: [(args) => {...}],
     afterOperation: [(args) => {...}],
 
-    // Auth-enabled hooks
+    // Auth-enabled Hooks
     beforeLogin: [(args) => {...}],
     afterLogin: [(args) => {...}],
     afterLogout: [(args) => {...}],
     afterRefresh: [(args) => {...}],
     afterMe: [(args) => {...}],
     afterForgotPassword: [(args) => {...}],
+    refresh: [(args) => {...}],
+    me: [(args) => {...}],
   },
+  // highlight-end
 }
 ```
 
@@ -70,17 +68,26 @@ The `beforeOperation` hook can be used to modify the arguments that operations a
 Available Collection operations include `create`, `read`, `update`, `delete`, `login`, `refresh`, and `forgotPassword`.
 
 ```ts
-import { CollectionBeforeOperationHook } from 'payload/types'
+import type { CollectionBeforeOperationHook } from 'payload'
 
 const beforeOperationHook: CollectionBeforeOperationHook = async ({
-  args, // original arguments passed into the operation
-  operation, // name of the operation
-  req, // full express request
+  args,
+  operation,
+  req,
 }) => {
   return args // return modified operation arguments as necessary
 }
 ```
 
+The following arguments are provided to the `beforeOperation` hook:
+
+| Option                   | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                           |
+| ------------------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`collection`**         | The [Collection](../configuration/collections) in which this Hook is running against.                                                                                                                       |
+| **`context`**            | Custom context passed between Hooks. [More details](./context).                                                                                                                              |
+| **`operation`**          | The name of the operation that this hook is running within. |
+| **`req`**                | The [Web Request](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Request) object. This is mocked for [Local API](../local-api/overview) operations.                                                                                                                                                  |
+
 ### beforeValidate
 
 Runs before the `create` and `update` operations. This hook allows you to add or format data before the incoming data is validated server-side.
@@ -92,112 +99,170 @@ Please do note that this does not run before the client-side validation. If you
 3. `validate` runs on the server
 
 ```ts
-import { CollectionBeforeValidateHook } from 'payload/types'
+import type { CollectionBeforeValidateHook } from 'payload'
 
 const beforeValidateHook: CollectionBeforeValidateHook = async ({
-  data, // incoming data to update or create with
-  req, // full express request
-  operation, // name of the operation ie. 'create', 'update'
-  originalDoc, // original document
+  data,
 }) => {
-  return data // Return data to either create or update a document with
+  return data
 }
 ```
 
+The following arguments are provided to the `beforeValidate` hook:
+
+| Option                   | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                           |
+| ------------------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`collection`**         | The [Collection](../configuration/collections) in which this Hook is running against.                                                                                                                       |
+| **`context`**            | Custom context passed between Hooks. [More details](./context).                                                                                                                              |
+| **`data`**               | The incoming data passed through the operation.                                                                                 |
+| **`operation`**          | The name of the operation that this hook is running within. |
+| **`originalDoc`**        | The Document before changes are applied.                                                                                        |
+| **`req`**                | The [Web Request](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Request) object. This is mocked for [Local API](../local-api/overview) operations.                                                                                                                                                  |
+
 ### beforeChange
 
 Immediately following validation, `beforeChange` hooks will run within `create` and `update` operations. At this stage, you can be confident that the data that will be saved to the document is valid in accordance to your field validations. You can optionally modify the shape of data to be saved.
 
 ```ts
-import { CollectionBeforeChangeHook } from 'payload/types'
+import type { CollectionBeforeChangeHook } from 'payload'
 
 const beforeChangeHook: CollectionBeforeChangeHook = async ({
-  data, // incoming data to update or create with
-  req, // full express request
-  operation, // name of the operation ie. 'create', 'update'
-  originalDoc, // original document
+  data,
 }) => {
-  return data // Return data to either create or update a document with
+  return data
 }
 ```
 
+The following arguments are provided to the `beforeChange` hook:
+
+| Option                   | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                           |
+| ------------------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`collection`**         | The [Collection](../configuration/collections) in which this Hook is running against.                                                                                                                       |
+| **`context`**            | Custom context passed between hooks. [More details](./context).                                                                                                                              |
+| **`data`**               | The incoming data passed through the operation.                                                                                 |
+| **`operation`**          | The name of the operation that this hook is running within. |
+| **`originalDoc`**        | The Document before changes are applied.                                                                                        |
+| **`req`**                | The [Web Request](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Request) object. This is mocked for [Local API](../local-api/overview) operations.                                                                                                                                                  |
+
 ### afterChange
 
 After a document is created or updated, the `afterChange` hook runs. This hook is helpful to recalculate statistics such as total sales within a global, syncing user profile changes to a CRM, and more.
 
 ```ts
-import { CollectionAfterChangeHook } from 'payload/types'
+import type { CollectionAfterChangeHook } from 'payload'
 
 const afterChangeHook: CollectionAfterChangeHook = async ({
-  doc, // full document data
-  req, // full express request
-  previousDoc, // document data before updating the collection
-  operation, // name of the operation ie. 'create', 'update'
+  doc,
 }) => {
   return doc
 }
 ```
 
+The following arguments are provided to the `afterChange` hook:
+
+| Option                   | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                           |
+| ------------------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`collection`**         | The [Collection](../configuration/collections) in which this Hook is running against.                                                                                                                       |
+| **`context`**            | Custom context passed between hooks. [More details](./context).                                                                                                                              |
+| **`doc`**               | The resulting Document after changes are applied. |
+| **`operation`**          | The name of the operation that this hook is running within. |
+| **`previousDoc`**        | The Document before changes were applied. |
+| **`req`**                | The [Web Request](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Request) object. This is mocked for [Local API](../local-api/overview) operations.                                                                                                                                                  |
+
 ### beforeRead
 
 Runs before `find` and `findByID` operations are transformed for output by `afterRead`. This hook fires before hidden fields are removed and before localized fields are flattened into the requested locale. Using this Hook will provide you with all locales and all hidden fields via the `doc` argument.
 
 ```ts
-import { CollectionBeforeReadHook } from 'payload/types'
+import type { CollectionBeforeReadHook } from 'payload'
 
 const beforeReadHook: CollectionBeforeReadHook = async ({
-  doc, // full document data
-  req, // full express request
-  query, // JSON formatted query
+  doc,
 }) => {
   return doc
 }
 ```
 
+The following arguments are provided to the `beforeRead` hook:
+
+| Option                   | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                           |
+| ------------------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`collection`**         | The [Collection](../configuration/collections) in which this Hook is running against.                                                                                                                       |
+| **`context`**            | Custom context passed between hooks. [More details](./context).                                                                                                                              |
+| **`doc`**               | The resulting Document after changes are applied. |
+| **`query`**          | The [Query](../queries/overview) of the request.
+| **`req`**                | The [Web Request](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Request) object. This is mocked for [Local API](../local-api/overview) operations.                                                                                                                                                  |
+
 ### afterRead
 
 Runs as the last step before documents are returned. Flattens locales, hides protected fields, and removes fields that users do not have access to.
 
 ```ts
-import { CollectionAfterReadHook } from 'payload/types'
+import type { CollectionAfterReadHook } from 'payload'
 
 const afterReadHook: CollectionAfterReadHook = async ({
-  doc, // full document data
-  req, // full express request
-  query, // JSON formatted query
-  findMany, // boolean to denote if this hook is running against finding one, or finding many
+  doc,
 }) => {
   return doc
 }
 ```
 
+The following arguments are provided to the `afterRead` hook:
+
+| Option                   | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                           |
+| ------------------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`collection`**         | The [Collection](../configuration/collections) in which this Hook is running against.                                                                                                                       |
+| **`context`**            | Custom context passed between hooks. [More details](./context).                                                                                                                              |
+| **`doc`**               | The resulting Document after changes are applied. |
+| **`query`**          | The [Query](../queries/overview) of the request.
+| **`req`**                | The [Web Request](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Request) object. This is mocked for [Local API](../local-api/overview) operations.                                                                                                                                                  |
+
 ### beforeDelete
 
 Runs before the `delete` operation. Returned values are discarded.
 
 ```ts
-import { CollectionBeforeDeleteHook } from 'payload/types';
+import type { CollectionBeforeDeleteHook } from 'payload';
 
 const beforeDeleteHook: CollectionBeforeDeleteHook = async ({
-  req, // full express request
-  id, // id of document to delete
+  req,
+  id,
 }) => {...}
 ```
 
+The following arguments are provided to the `beforeDelete` hook:
+
+| Option                   | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                           |
+| ------------------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`collection`**         | The [Collection](../configuration/collections) in which this Hook is running against.                                                                                                                       |
+| **`context`**            | Custom context passed between hooks. [More details](./context).                                                                                                                              |
+| **`id`**               | The ID of the Document being deleted. |
+| **`req`**                | The [Web Request](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Request) object. This is mocked for [Local API](../local-api/overview) operations.                                                                                                                                                  |
+
 ### afterDelete
 
 Runs immediately after the `delete` operation removes records from the database. Returned values are discarded.
 
 ```ts
-import { CollectionAfterDeleteHook } from 'payload/types';
+import type { CollectionAfterDeleteHook } from 'payload';
 
 const afterDeleteHook: CollectionAfterDeleteHook = async ({
-  req, // full express request
-  id, // id of document to delete
-  doc, // deleted document
+  req,
+  id,
+  doc,
 }) => {...}
 ```
 
+The following arguments are provided to the `afterDelete` hook:
+
+| Option                   | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                           |
+| ------------------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`collection`**         | The [Collection](../configuration/collections) in which this Hook is running against.                                                                                                                       |
+| **`context`**            | Custom context passed between hooks. [More details](./context).                                                                                                                              |
+| **`doc`**               | The resulting Document after changes are applied. |
+| **`id`**          | The ID of the Document that was deleted. |
+| **`req`**                | The [Web Request](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Request) object. This is mocked for [Local API](../local-api/overview) operations.                                                                                                                                                  |
+
 ### afterOperation
 
 The `afterOperation` hook can be used to modify the result of operations or execute side-effects that run after an operation has completed.
@@ -205,100 +270,197 @@ The `afterOperation` hook can be used to modify the result of operations or exec
 Available Collection operations include `create`, `find`, `findByID`, `update`, `updateByID`, `delete`, `deleteByID`, `login`, `refresh`, and `forgotPassword`.
 
 ```ts
-import { CollectionAfterOperationHook } from 'payload/types'
+import type { CollectionAfterOperationHook } from 'payload'
 
 const afterOperationHook: CollectionAfterOperationHook = async ({
-  args, // arguments passed into the operation
-  operation, // name of the operation
-  req, // full express request
-  result, // the result of the operation, before modifications
+  result,
 }) => {
-  return result // return modified result as necessary
+  return result
 }
 ```
 
+The following arguments are provided to the `afterOperation` hook:
+
+| Option                   | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                           |
+| ------------------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`args`**               | The arguments passed into the operation.                                                                                 |
+| **`collection`**         | The [Collection](../configuration/collections) in which this Hook is running against.                                                                                                                       |
+| **`req`**                | The [Web Request](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Request) object. This is mocked for [Local API](../local-api/overview) operations.                                                                                                                                                  |
+| **`operation`**          | The name of the operation that this hook is running within. |
+| **`result`**          |  The result of the operation, before modifications. |
+
 ### beforeLogin
 
-For auth-enabled Collections, this hook runs during `login` operations where a user with the provided credentials exist, but before a token is generated and added to the response. You can optionally modify the user that is returned, or throw an error in order to deny the login operation.
+For [Auth-enabled Collections](../authentication/overview), this hook runs during `login` operations where a user with the provided credentials exist, but before a token is generated and added to the response. You can optionally modify the user that is returned, or throw an error in order to deny the login operation.
 
 ```ts
-import { CollectionBeforeLoginHook } from 'payload/types'
+import type { CollectionBeforeLoginHook } from 'payload'
 
 const beforeLoginHook: CollectionBeforeLoginHook = async ({
-  req, // full express request
-  user, // user being logged in
+  user,
 }) => {
   return user
 }
 ```
 
+The following arguments are provided to the `beforeLogin` hook:
+
+| Option                   | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                           |
+| ------------------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`collection`**         | The [Collection](../configuration/collections) in which this Hook is running against.                                                                                                                       |
+| **`context`**            | Custom context passed between hooks. [More details](./context).                                                                                                                              |
+| **`req`**                | The [Web Request](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Request) object. This is mocked for [Local API](../local-api/overview) operations.                                                                                                                                                  |
+| **`user`**               | The user being logged in. |
+
 ### afterLogin
 
-For auth-enabled Collections, this hook runs after successful `login` operations. You can optionally modify the user that is returned.
+For [Auth-enabled Collections](../authentication/overview), this hook runs after successful `login` operations. You can optionally modify the user that is returned.
 
 ```ts
-import { CollectionAfterLoginHook } from 'payload/types';
+import type { CollectionAfterLoginHook } from 'payload';
 
 const afterLoginHook: CollectionAfterLoginHook = async ({
-  req, // full express request
-  user, // user that was logged in
-  token, // user token
+  user,
+  token,
 }) => {...}
 ```
 
+The following arguments are provided to the `afterLogin` hook:
+
+| Option                   | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                           |
+| ------------------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`collection`**         | The [Collection](../configuration/collections) in which this Hook is running against.                                                                                                                       |
+| **`context`**            | Custom context passed between hooks. [More details](./context).                                                                                                                              |
+| **`req`**                | The [Web Request](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Request) object. This is mocked for [Local API](../local-api/overview) operations.                                                                                                                                                  |
+| **`token`**              | The token generated for the user. |
+| **`user`**               | The user being logged in. |
+
 ### afterLogout
 
-For auth-enabled Collections, this hook runs after `logout` operations.
+For [Auth-enabled Collections](../authentication/overview), this hook runs after `logout` operations.
 
 ```ts
-import { CollectionAfterLogoutHook } from 'payload/types';
+import type { CollectionAfterLogoutHook } from 'payload';
 
 const afterLogoutHook: CollectionAfterLogoutHook = async ({
-  req, // full express request
+  req,
 }) => {...}
 ```
 
-### afterRefresh
+The following arguments are provided to the `afterLogout` hook:
 
-For auth-enabled Collections, this hook runs after `refresh` operations.
-
-```ts
-import { CollectionAfterRefreshHook } from 'payload/types';
-
-const afterRefreshHook: CollectionAfterRefreshHook = async ({
-  req, // full express request
-  res, // full express response
-  token, // newly refreshed user token
-}) => {...}
-```
+| Option                   | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                           |
+| ------------------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`collection`**         | The [Collection](../configuration/collections) in which this Hook is running against.                                                                                                                       |
+| **`context`**            | Custom context passed between hooks. [More details](./context).                                                                                                                              |
+| **`req`**                | The [Web Request](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Request) object. This is mocked for [Local API](../local-api/overview) operations.                                                                                                                                                  |
 
 ### afterMe
 
-For auth-enabled Collections, this hook runs after `me` operations.
+For [Auth-enabled Collections](../authentication/overview), this hook runs after `me` operations.
 
 ```ts
-import { CollectionAfterMeHook } from 'payload/types';
+import type { CollectionAfterMeHook } from 'payload';
 
 const afterMeHook: CollectionAfterMeHook = async ({
-  req, // full express request
-  response, // response to return
+  req,
+  response,
 }) => {...}
 ```
 
+The following arguments are provided to the `afterMe` hook:
+
+| Option                   | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                           |
+| ------------------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`collection`**         | The [Collection](../configuration/collections) in which this Hook is running against.                                                                                                                       |
+| **`context`**            | Custom context passed between hooks. [More details](./context).                                                                                                                              |
+| **`req`**                | The [Web Request](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Request) object. This is mocked for [Local API](../local-api/overview) operations.                                                                                                                                                  |
+| **`response`**           | The response to return. |
+
+### afterRefresh
+
+For [Auth-enabled Collections](../authentication/overview), this hook runs after `refresh` operations.
+
+```ts
+import type { CollectionAfterRefreshHook } from 'payload';
+
+const afterRefreshHook: CollectionAfterRefreshHook = async ({
+  token,
+}) => {...}
+```
+
+The following arguments are provided to the `afterRefresh` hook:
+
+| Option                   | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                           |
+| ------------------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`collection`**         | The [Collection](../configuration/collections) in which this Hook is running against.                                                                                                                       |
+| **`context`**            | Custom context passed between hooks. [More details](./context).                                                                                                                              |
+| **`exp`**                | The expiration time of the token. |
+| **`req`**                | The [Web Request](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Request) object. This is mocked for [Local API](../local-api/overview) operations.                                                                                                                                                  |
+| **`token`**              | The newly refreshed user token. |
+
 ### afterForgotPassword
 
-For auth-enabled Collections, this hook runs after successful `forgotPassword` operations. Returned values are discarded.
+For [Auth-enabled Collections](../authentication/overview), this hook runs after successful `forgotPassword` operations. Returned values are discarded.
 
 ```ts
-import { CollectionAfterForgotPasswordHook } from 'payload/types'
+import type { CollectionAfterForgotPasswordHook } from 'payload'
 
 const afterForgotPasswordHook: CollectionAfterForgotPasswordHook = async ({
-  args, // arguments passed into the operation
+  args,
   context,
-  collection, // The collection which this hook is being run on
+  collection,
 }) => {...}
 ```
 
+The following arguments are provided to the `afterForgotPassword` hook:
+
+| Option                   | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                           |
+| ------------------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`args`**               | The arguments passed into the operation.                                                                                 |
+| **`collection`**         | The [Collection](../configuration/collections) in which this Hook is running against.                                                                                                                       |
+| **`context`**            | Custom context passed between hooks. [More details](./context).                                                                                                                              |
+
+### refresh
+
+For [Auth-enabled Collections](../authentication/overview), this hook allows you to optionally replace the default behavior of the `refresh` operation with your own. If you optionally return a value from your hook, the operation will not perform its own logic and continue.
+
+```ts
+import type { CollectionRefreshHook } from 'payload'
+
+const myRefreshHook: CollectionRefreshHook = async ({
+  args,
+  user,
+}) => {...}
+```
+
+The following arguments are provided to the `afterRefresh` hook:
+
+| Option                   | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                           |
+| ------------------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`args`**               | The arguments passed into the operation.                                                                                 |
+| **`user`**               | The user being logged in. |
+
+### me
+
+For [Auth-enabled Collections](../authentication/overview), this hook allows you to optionally replace the default behavior of the `me` operation with your own. If you optionally return a value from your hook, the operation will not perform its own logic and continue.
+
+```ts
+import type { CollectionMeHook } from 'payload'
+
+const meHook: CollectionMeHook = async ({
+  args,
+  user,
+}) => {...}
+```
+
+The following arguments are provided to the `me` hook:
+
+| Option                   | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                           |
+| ------------------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`args`**               | The arguments passed into the operation.                                                                                 |
+| **`user`**               | The user being logged in. |
+
 ## TypeScript
 
 Payload exports a type for each Collection hook which can be accessed as follows:
@@ -319,5 +481,7 @@ import type {
   CollectionAfterRefreshHook,
   CollectionAfterMeHook,
   CollectionAfterForgotPasswordHook,
-} from 'payload/types'
+  CollectionRefreshHook,
+  CollectionMeHook,
+} from 'payload'
 ```

docs/hooks/context.mdx

@@ -6,22 +6,22 @@ desc: Context allows you to pass in extra data that can be shared between hooks
 keywords: hooks, context, payload context, payloadcontext, data, extra data, shared data, shared, extra
 ---
 
-The `context` object in hooks is used to share data across different hooks. The persists throughout the entire lifecycle of a request and is available within every hook. This allows you to add logic to your hooks based on the request state by setting properties to `req.context` and using them elsewhere.
+The `context` object is used to share data across different Hooks. This persists throughout the entire lifecycle of a request and is available within every Hook. By setting properties to `req.context`, you can effectively logic across multiple Hooks.
 
-## When to use Context
+## When To Use Context
 
 Context gives you a way forward on otherwise difficult problems such as:
 
-1. **Passing data between hooks**: Needing data in multiple hooks from a 3rd party API, it could be retrieved and used in `beforeChange` and later used again in an `afterChange` hook without having to fetch it twice.
+1. **Passing data between Hooks**: Needing data in multiple Hooks from a 3rd party API, it could be retrieved and used in `beforeChange` and later used again in an `afterChange` hook without having to fetch it twice.
 2. **Preventing infinite loops**: Calling `payload.update()` on the same document that triggered an `afterChange` hook will create an infinite loop, control the flow by assigning a no-op condition to context
 3. **Passing data to local API**: Setting values on the `req.context` and pass it to `payload.create()` you can provide additional data to hooks without adding extraneous fields.
 4. **Passing data between hooks and middleware or custom endpoints**: Hooks could set context across multiple collections and then be used in a final `postMiddleware`.
 
-## How to Use Context
+## How To Use Context
 
 Let's see examples on how context can be used in the first two scenarios mentioned above:
 
-### Passing data between hooks
+### Passing Data Between Hooks
 
 To pass data between hooks, you can assign values to context in an earlier hook in the lifecycle of a request and expect it the context in a later hook.
 
@@ -43,6 +43,7 @@ const Customer: CollectionConfig = {
       },
     ],
     afterChange: [
+
       async ({ context, doc, req }) => {
         // use context.customerData without needing to fetch it again
         if (context.customerData.contacted === false) {
@@ -57,7 +58,7 @@ const Customer: CollectionConfig = {
 }
 ```
 
-### Preventing infinite loops
+### Preventing Infinite Loops
 
 Let's say you have an `afterChange` hook, and you want to do a calculation inside the hook (as the document ID needed for the calculation is available in the `afterChange` hook, but not in the `beforeChange` hook). Once that's done, you want to update the document with the result of the calculation.
 
@@ -120,11 +121,11 @@ const MyCollection: CollectionConfig = {
 }
 ```
 
-## Typing context
+## TypeScript
 
-The default typescript interface for `context` is `{ [key: string]: unknown }`. If you prefer a more strict typing in your project or when authoring plugins for others, you can override this using the `declare` syntax.
+The default TypeScript interface for `context` is `{ [key: string]: unknown }`. If you prefer a more strict typing in your project or when authoring plugins for others, you can override this using the `declare` syntax.
 
-This is known as "type augmentation" - a TypeScript feature which allows us to add types to existing objects. Simply put this in any .ts or .d.ts file:
+This is known as "type augmentation", a TypeScript feature which allows us to add types to existing objects. Simply put this in any `.ts` or `.d.ts` file:
 
 ```ts
 import { RequestContext as OriginalRequestContext } from 'payload'

docs/hooks/fields.mdx

@@ -1,38 +1,41 @@
 ---
 title: Field Hooks
 label: Fields
-order: 30
+order: 40
 desc: Hooks can be added to any fields, and optionally modify the return value of the field before the operation continues.
-keywords: hooks, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, express
+keywords: hooks, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
 ---
 
-Field-level hooks offer incredible potential for encapsulating your logic. They help to isolate concerns and package up
-functionalities to be easily reusable across your projects.
+Field Hooks are [Hooks](./overview) that run on Documents on a per-field basis. They allow you to execute your own logic during specific events of the Document lifecycle. Field Hooks offer incredible potential for isolating your logic from the rest of your [Collection Hooks](./collections) and [Global Hooks](./globals).
 
-**Example use cases include:**
-
-- Automatically add an `owner` relationship to a Document based on the `req.user.id`
-- Encrypt / decrypt a sensitive field using `beforeValidate` and `afterRead` hooks
-- Auto-generate field data using a `beforeValidate` hook
-- Format incoming data such as kebab-casing a document `slug` with `beforeValidate`
-- Restrict updating a document to only once every X hours using the `beforeChange` hook
-
-**All field types provide the following hooks:**
-
-- [beforeValidate](#beforevalidate)
-- [beforeChange](#beforechange)
-- beforeDuplicate(#beforeduplicate)
-- [afterChange](#afterchange)
-- [afterRead](#afterread)
-
-## Config
-
-Example field configuration:
+To add Hooks to a Field, use the `hooks` property in your [Field Config](../fields/overview):
 
 ```ts
-import { Field } from 'payload/types';
+import type { Field } from 'payload';
 
-const ExampleField: Field = {
+export const FieldWithHooks: Field = {
+  // ...
+  hooks: { // highlight-line
+    // ...
+  },
+}
+```
+
+## Config Options
+
+All Field Hooks accept an array of synchronous or asynchronous functions. These functions can optionally modify the return value of the field before the operation continues. All Field Hooks are formatted to accept the same arguments, although some arguments may be `undefined` based the specific hook type.
+
+<Banner type="warning">
+  <strong>Important:</strong>
+  Due to GraphQL's typed nature, changing the type of data that you return from a field will produce errors in the [GraphQL API](../graphql/overview). If you need to change the shape or type of data, consider [Collection Hooks](./collections) or [Global Hooks](./hooks) instead.
+</Banner>
+
+To add hooks to a Field, use the `hooks` property in your [Field Config](../fields/overview):
+
+```ts
+import type { Field } from 'payload';
+
+const FieldWithHooks: Field = {
   name: 'name',
   type: 'text',
   // highlight-start
@@ -47,67 +50,40 @@ const ExampleField: Field = {
 }
 ```
 
-## Arguments and return values
-
-All field-level hooks are formatted to accept the same arguments, although some arguments may be `undefined` based on
-which field hook you are utilizing.
-
-<Banner type="success">
-  <strong>Tip:</strong>
-  <br />
-  It's a good idea to conditionally scope your logic based on which operation is executing. For
-  example, if you are writing a <strong>beforeChange</strong> hook, you may want to perform
-  different logic based on if the current <strong>operation</strong> is <strong>create</strong> or{' '}
-  <strong>update</strong>.
-</Banner>
-
-#### Arguments
-
-Field Hooks receive one `args` argument that contains the following properties:
+The following arguments are provided to all Field Hooks:
 
 | Option                   | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                           |
 | ------------------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`data`**               | The data passed to update the document within `create` and `update` operations, and the full document itself in the `afterRead` hook.                                                                                 |
-| **`siblingData`**        | The sibling data passed to a field that the hook is running against.                                                                                                                                                  |
+| **`collection`**         | The [Collection](../configuration/collections) in which this Hook is running against. If the field belongs to a Global, this will be `null`.                                                                                                                       |
+| **`context`**            | Custom context passed between Hooks. [More details](./context).                                                                                                                              |
+| **`data`**               | In the `afterRead` hook this is the full Document. In the `create` and `update` operations, this is the incoming data passed through the operation.                                                                                 |
+| **`field`**              | The [Field](../fields/overview) which the Hook is running against.                                                                                                                                                                          |
 | **`findMany`**           | Boolean to denote if this hook is running against finding one, or finding many within the `afterRead` hook.                                                                                                           |
-| **`operation`**          | A string relating to which operation the field type is currently executing within. Useful within `beforeValidate`, `beforeChange`, and `afterChange` hooks to differentiate between `create` and `update` operations. |
-| **`originalDoc`**        | The full original document in `update` operations. In the `afterChange` hook, this is the resulting document of the operation.                                                                                        |
-| **`previousDoc`**        | The document before changes were applied, only in `afterChange` hooks.                                                                                                                                                |
-| **`previousSiblingDoc`** | The sibling data of the document before changes being applied, only in `beforeChange` and `afterChange` hook.                                                                                                         |
-| **`req`**                | The Express `request` object. It is mocked for Local API operations.                                                                                                                                                  |
-| **`value`**              | The value of the field.                                                                                                                                                                                               |
+| **`global`**             | The [Global](../configuration/globals) in which this Hook is running against. If the field belongs to a Collection, this will be `null`.                                                                                                                       |
+| **`operation`**          | The name of the operation that this hook is running within. Useful within `beforeValidate`, `beforeChange`, and `afterChange` hooks to differentiate between `create` and `update` operations. |
+| **`originalDoc`**        | In the `update` operation, this is the Document before changes were applied. In the `afterChange` hook, this is the resulting Document.                                                                                        |
+| **`overrideAccess`**        | A boolean to denote if the current operation is overriding [Access Control](../access-control/overview).                                                                                                                                                                          |
+| **`path`**             | The path to the [Field](../fields/overview) in the schema.                                                                                                                                                                          |
+| **`previousDoc`**        | In the `afterChange` Hook, this is the Document before changes were applied.                                                                                                                                                |
+| **`previousSiblingDoc`** | The sibling data of the Document before changes being applied, only in `beforeChange` and `afterChange` hook.                                                                                                         |
 | **`previousValue`**      | The previous value of the field, before changes, only in `beforeChange` and `afterChange` hooks.                                                                                                                      |
-| **`context`**            | Context passed to this hook. More info can be found under [Context](/docs/hooks/context)                                                                                                                              |
-| **`field`**              | The field which the hook is running against.                                                                                                                                                                          |
-| **`collection`**         | The collection which the field belongs to. If the field belongs to a global, this will be null.                                                                                                                       |
-| **`global`**             | The global which the field belongs to. If the field belongs to a collection, this will be null.                                                                                                                       |
+| **`req`**                | The [Web Request](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Request) object. This is mocked for [Local API](../local-api/overview) operations.                                                                                                                                                  |
+| **`schemaPath`**         | The path of the [Field](../fields/overview) in the schema.                                                                                                                                                                                  |
+| **`siblingData`**        | The data of sibling fields adjacent to the field that the Hook is running against.        |
+| **`siblingDocWithLocales`**      | The sibling data of the Document with all [Locales](../configuration/localization).        |
+| **`value`**              | The value of the [Field](../fields/overview).                                                                                                                                                                                               |
 
-#### Return value
-
-All field hooks can optionally modify the return value of the field before the operation continues. Field Hooks may
-optionally return the value that should be used within the field.
-
-<Banner type="warning">
-  <strong>Important</strong>
-  <br />
-  Due to GraphQL's typed nature, you should never change the type of data that you return from a
-  field, otherwise GraphQL will produce errors. If you need to change the shape or type of data,
-  reconsider Field Hooks and instead evaluate if Collection / Global hooks might suit you better.
+<Banner type="success">
+  <strong>Tip:</strong>
+  It's a good idea to conditionally scope your logic based on which operation is executing. For example, if you are writing a `beforeChange` hook, you may want to perform different logic based on if the current `operation` is `create` or `update`.
 </Banner>
 
-## Examples of Field Hooks
-
-To better illustrate how field-level hooks can be applied, here are some specific examples. These demonstrate the
-flexibility and potential of field hooks in different contexts. Remember, these examples are just a starting point - the
-true potential of field-level hooks lies in their adaptability to a wide array of use cases.
-
 ### beforeValidate
 
-Runs before the `update` operation. This hook allows you to pre-process or format field data before it undergoes
-validation.
+Runs before the `update` operation. This hook allows you to pre-process or format field data before it undergoes validation.
 
 ```ts
-import { Field } from 'payload/types'
+import type { Field } from 'payload'
 
 const usernameField: Field = {
   name: 'username',
@@ -134,7 +110,7 @@ you can be confident that the field data that will be saved to the document is v
 validations.
 
 ```ts
-import { Field } from 'payload/types'
+import type { Field } from 'payload'
 
 const emailField: Field = {
   name: 'email',
@@ -162,7 +138,7 @@ The `afterChange` hook is executed after a field's value has been changed and sa
 for post-processing or triggering side effects based on the new value of the field.
 
 ```ts
-import { Field } from 'payload/types'
+import type { Field } from 'payload'
 
 const membershipStatusField: Field = {
   name: 'membershipStatus',
@@ -199,7 +175,7 @@ The `afterRead` hook is invoked after a field value is read from the database. T
 transforming the field data for output.
 
 ```ts
-import { Field } from 'payload/types'
+import type { Field } from 'payload'
 
 const dateField: Field = {
   name: 'createdAt',
@@ -230,7 +206,7 @@ By Default, unique and required text fields Payload will append "- Copy" to the
 Here is an example of a number field with a hook that increments the number to avoid unique constraint errors when duplicating a document:
 
 ```ts
-import { Field } from 'payload/types'
+import type { Field } from 'payload'
 
 const numberField: Field = {
   name: 'number',
@@ -249,7 +225,7 @@ const numberField: Field = {
 Payload exports a type for field hooks which can be accessed and used as follows:
 
 ```ts
-import type { FieldHook } from 'payload/types'
+import type { FieldHook } from 'payload'
 
 // Field hook type is a generic that takes three arguments:
 // 1: The document type